JP6744691B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention is applicable to so-called bullet-type gaming machines (hereinafter, also referred to as “pachinko gaming machines” or “pachinko machines”), spinning drum type gaming machines (generally referred to as “pachi-slot machines”, “slot machines”), and the like. It relates to a gaming machine.

In a general conventional pachinko machine, a lottery for a big hit is carried out based on that a game medium shot in a game area passes or enters a starting opening provided in the game area. Then, in such a pachinko gaming machine, as one of the measures for entertaining the winning result of the big hit to the player, an effect based on the lottery result is executed on the liquid crystal display device or the like. For example, by preparing a plurality of types of effects including a high-reliability effect that is relatively easy to be executed in the case of a big hit and a low-reliability effect that is relatively easy to be executed in the case of a big hit, the high-reliability effect is high. It is possible to enhance the player's expectation when it appears (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2010-188078, A

However, in such a gaming machine, when a low-reliability effect is revealed, it is more likely to be out of place than a big hit, so that the player's interest is often reduced.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the interest of a player in order to solve the above-mentioned problems.

In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, the present invention provides a winning determination means for determining a hit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a performance determining means for determining a performance based on the determination made by the winning determination means. And a production display means for displaying the production, and a gaming machine in which one game is played by changing the design and then stopping the design, and the production includes a plurality of There is a special effect that can be displayed on the effect display means over the fluctuation, and a specific effect that increases the expectation for the hit, and when the special effect is displayed over a plurality of the fluctuations, When the specific effect is displayed, the degree of expectation for the hit is higher than when the specific effect is displayed when the special effect is not displayed, and the special effect includes a low special effect. There is a high special effect, and when the specific effect is displayed when the high special effect is displayed, compared to when the specific effect is displayed when the low special effect is displayed, The degree of expectation for a hit is increased, the specific effect is displayed, and after the symbol aspect that does not result in a hit is displayed, it is possible to change from the low special effect to the high special effect, The specific effect is displayed, and after the non-winning symbol aspect is displayed, it is possible to display a suggestive effect that suggests changing from the low special effect to the high special effect, and the low special effect and When none of the high special effects are displayed, and the specific effects are displayed, and after the non-winning symbol aspect is displayed, the low special effects or the high special effects It is possible to display, and it is possible to display a supplementary effect using characters that supplement the fact that the special effect is being displayed when the special effect is being displayed over a plurality of the fluctuations, and the special effect is A gaming machine that can be ended in the game for deriving the result of the hit.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player.

It is a perspective view showing a state where the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment, and the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which constitute the pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which constitute the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. FIG. 6 is a perspective view for explaining a structure for attaching and detaching the upper shaft support fitting of the main body frame and the upper support fitting of the outer frame. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the view of (A) seen from below. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for explaining the relation between a shaft support pin and a lock member. It is a rear view of an upper support metal fitting part for explaining an operation of a lock member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right back of a door frame. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base substrate cover and wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from the back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen after. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing of a left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission aspect of the left side decoration unit with a photograph. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the site|part of the ball rental unit of the dish unit in a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the upper right front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as disassembled and seen from the lower right front side. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state where the press operation part in the operation unit was pressed. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device as disassembled and seen from the rear. (A) It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the foul cover unit in the door frame and which was seen from the front, and (B) is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the foul cover unit and was seen from the back. It is a front view shown in the state where the front cover of a foul cover unit was removed. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. It is a rear view of a ball feeding unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case removed. (A) is a plan view of the tamperproof member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the tamperproof member, (C) is a perspective view of the tamperproof member as seen from the front, and (D). FIG. 7 is an explanatory view showing the action of the fraud prevention member. It is sectional drawing which cut|disconnects and shows a door frame in the up-down direction substantially center. It is a front view which shows arrangement|positioning of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a body frame. It is a rear perspective view of a main body frame. It is a left side view of a body frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen after. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes|disassembles and shows the relationship between the prize ball tank and tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and was seen from the back. It is a rear view showing the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the circulation path of the ball in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening-and-closing unit in a body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening and closing unit in the body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball outlet opening-and-closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the body frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board|substrate unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board|substrate unit and was seen after. It is a perspective view explaining an operation of a standing wall part of a power supply board box in a board unit. (A) is a sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as seen from the front. (A) is a front view of the emission power supply board box, and (B) is a sectional view taken along the line AA shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site|part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, which is disassembled and seen from the rear side. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as seen from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding lever for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame which are slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the locking device. It is a figure and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the locking device and was seen after. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation|movement of the sliding rod for glass doors and the sliding rod for main body frames in a locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation|movement of the fraud prevention member in a locking device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame in the state which removed the door frame of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board and was seen from the back. (A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit on a game board attached to a pachinko machine, and (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100 and the like as seen from the front. FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the game board seen from behind in FIG. 103. FIG. 104 is a cross-sectional view of the game panel in the game board of FIG. 103 taken in the vertical direction. FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using the front component member of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 103 and the like as seen from the front. FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the game board seen from behind in FIG. 106. It is a partial sectional view showing a crime prevention structure on the pivotal support side of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the back in the state where the game board was stored in the body frame. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from the back diagonally. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the table unit in the game board from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the attacker unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the attacker unit for every main member and was seen from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled|disassembled the 1st unit in an attacker unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the 1st unit in an attacker unit and was seen from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 2nd unit in an attacker unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the 2nd unit in an attacker unit and was seen from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 3rd unit in an attacker unit, and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled and looked at the 3rd unit in an attacker unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 4th unit in an attacker unit, and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 4th unit in an attacker unit, and was seen from back. It is a front view which cuts and shows a part of attacker unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the front side unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the front side unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from the front diagonally upper right. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from the diagonally lower left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the center accessory for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the center accessory for every main member and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the front right middle production unit of the center accessory from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front right middle production unit of the center accessory from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the front right middle production unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the front right middle production unit and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at 2nd embodiment of the fixed decorative body in the front right middle production unit, and was seen from front. FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the fixed decorative body of FIG. 141, which is disassembled and then seen. (A) is a perspective view of the front cover and effect sheet of the fixed decorative body of FIG. 141 as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) as seen from a position slightly left to the front, (C) is a perspective view seen from a position further left than in (b). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the effect sheet in the fixed ornament of FIG. 141, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state at the time of light-out, (c) shows the light emission decoration mode at the time of blue lighting. It is explanatory drawing and (d) is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission decoration mode at the time of red lighting. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main component and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main component and it looked at after. It is the perspective view which looked at the back side production unit in a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back side production unit in a back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back side production unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back side production unit for every main member and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at one rotation decoration body unit in a back side production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at one rotation decoration body unit in a back side production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotation decoration body unit of the back side production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the rotation decoration body unit of the back side production unit, and was seen after. It is the front view of the game board which shows the movement of the front right inside production unit in the front unit in the front unit. (A) is a perspective view of the front-right-middle movable decorative body of the front-right-middle rendering unit in a normal position as viewed from slightly above, and (b) is a front view when the front-right middle movable decorative body is in the appearance position. It is a perspective view seen from slightly above. It is a front view of the game board which shows the movement of the back horizontal production unit in the back unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the movement of the back side production unit and the back side production unit in the back unit. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in a main control board. (A) is the explanatory view which simplifies and shows the normal state which faces from the window part of the center accessory, (b) shows the back right production unit and the back left production unit while rotating the rotary ornament, and the liquid crystal It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect which divides the display screen of a display means into three, and (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which stopped the rotary ornamental body following (b). FIG. 162 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of production in which the display screen of the liquid crystal display means is divided into six with respect to the appearance of the back right production unit and the back left production unit, unlike FIG. 163. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect which makes the rotation position of a rotary decorative body differ, and appears before making a back right production unit and a back left production unit appear. (A) is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, and (b) is an interrupt process performed periodically by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure concerning the special design process processing which is executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used for lottery processing for jackpots, (B) is a reach determination table used for lottery processing for reach, (C) is a lottery processing for types of jackpots It is a symbol determination table used for. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the 1st special design fluctuation processing which is executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure concerning the normal design process processing which is executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the normal design normal processing which is executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about sub main processing performed by peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about 16ms steady-state processing performed by peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the example of processing of production control processing. It is a flow chart which shows the example of processing of a decorative design variation start processing. It is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the determination result and the effect time in the special symbol variation pattern. It is a diagram (distribution table 1A) for explaining distribution of effect patterns including a winning effect. It is the figure which put together the reliability when each winning/falling effect is revealed using distribution table 1A. It is a diagram (distribution table 1B) for explaining distribution of effect patterns including a winning effect. It is the figure which put together the reliability when each winning/winning production is shown using distribution table 1B. It is a diagram for explaining the transition of the effect image when the normal type winning/winning effect is executed. It is a diagram for explaining the transition of the effect image when the winning effect of the SP1 type is executed. It is a diagram for explaining the transition of the effect image when the winning effect of SP2 type is executed. It is a diagram (distribution table 2A) for explaining distribution of effect patterns including a winning effect. It is a diagram (distribution table 2B) for explaining distribution of effect patterns including a winning effect. It is a figure for explaining the transition of the effect image when the alternative effect by the first effect pattern is executed (No. 1). It is a figure for explaining the transition of the effect image when the alternative effect by the first effect pattern is executed (No. 2). It is another diagram (No. 1) for explaining the transition of the effect image when the alternative effect according to the first effect pattern is executed. It is another figure (the 2) for explaining the transition of the effect image when the alternative effect by the first effect pattern is executed. It is a time chart for explaining an alternative effect by the first effect pattern. It is a time chart for explaining the alternative effect by the second effect pattern. It is a time chart for explaining an alternative effect by a third effect pattern. It is a time chart for explaining an alternative effect by a fourth effect pattern. It is a specific effect image (No. 1) on the liquid crystal display device when the continuous destruction effect is executed. It is a specific effect image (No. 2) on the liquid crystal display device when the continuous destruction effect is executed.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame forming the pachinko machine as seen from the rear, and FIG. 7 is the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board forming the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as seen from the front.

1 to 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) in a game hall, and an outer frame 2 that is pivotally supported to be openable and closable and the front side is opened. A box frame-shaped main body frame 3, a game board 4 having a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side and into which game balls as a game medium are driven, a front surface of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 It is provided with a door frame 5 rotatably supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the side. On the door frame 5 of this pachinko machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 is visible from the player side, and a game ball arranged below the game window 101 to store game balls. It is provided with a plate-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 5.

As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example has an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, and a door frame 5 each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and the pachinko machine 1 has a horizontal direction. Of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the vertical width. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position lower than the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatably supported at a position on the left front side of the outer frame 2. The main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are supported by the outer frame 2 and the right ends of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 move to the front side to be in an open state.

In this pachinko machine 1, in a front view, a game area 1100 in which a game ball is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 is desired, and the pachinko machine 1 is projected to the front side below the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged one above the other. In addition, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player can operate the handle device 500 while the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotary operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting ball strength according to the rotation angle, and a game can be played.

Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and although the player can see the inside of the game area 1100, the player can see the inside of the game area 1100. It is not possible to insert a hand or the like into the game ball, obstacle nail G (see FIG. 110), various winning holes, accessories, etc. in the game area 1100. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a cover body 1250 that closes so as to cover the rear of the game board 4 is provided.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining the attachment/detachment structure of the upper shaft support fitting of the main body frame and the upper support fitting of the outer frame. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of the view of FIG. .. FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the shaft support pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the operation of the lock member.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the lateral direction, and left and right sides extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. The frame plates 12 and 13 and four connecting members 14 that connect the end portions of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13 are provided, and the connecting members 14 form the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13. They are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (rectangular shape) by connecting them. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of this example are formed of a solid material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and are substantially vertically centered at the left and right ends. An engaging cutout portion 15 is provided that penetrates through and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. In addition, a mounting step portion 10a that is recessed from other general surfaces is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support metal fitting 20 described later is mounted on the mounting step portion 10a. It is like this.

On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold material having a constant cross-sectional shape (for example, an aluminum alloy), the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface projects inward at the rear end portion. The protrusion 16 having a cavity that penetrates in the up-down direction (extrusion direction) is provided to enhance the strength and rigidity (see FIGS. 9 and 108). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall, a worker's The pachinko machine 1 can be easily hooked with a finger so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held, and the external appearance can be improved. Note that, for convenience, in some drawings, a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 in the left-right direction. The plate-shaped horizontal piece 17 extending to the side, the plate-shaped vertical piece 18 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the vertical piece 18 are opposite to each other. And a plate-shaped engaging piece 19 that can be inserted and engaged in the engaging cutout portion 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are left-right asymmetrical, respectively. In addition to being formed in the shape of, the vertical piece 18 is formed separately in the front and rear. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes, respectively. Has been done.

In this connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engaging piece 19 is an engaging notch of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. In a state of being inserted and engaged in the portion 15, a predetermined screw is passed through the horizontal piece 17 and the engaging piece 19 and is screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate It is adapted to be fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frame bodies 12 and 13 and has a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper inner side surfaces of the side frame bodies 12 and 13. By screwing into the vertical piece 18, the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the protrusion 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is like this. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frame bodies 12 and 13 and has a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the inner side surfaces of the lower ends of the side frame bodies 12 and 13. The lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected by being screwed into the vertical piece 18, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 can be connected by the four connecting members 14. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

The outer frame 2 of this example is fixed to an upper support fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame board 10 and a predetermined position inside the lower part of the left side frame board 12 so as to face the upper support fitting 20. And a reinforcing metal member 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower metal supporting member 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13, and fixed to the front surface of the reinforcing metal member 22. And a decorative cover 23. The upper support fitting 20 and the lower support fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 in an openable and closable manner.

First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-shaped fixing piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a supporting projecting piece 20b projecting from the front end of the fixing piece 20a to the front side of the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a supporting projecting piece. A supporting hook hole 20c formed by cutting out from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and a left side frame that hangs downward from the left end of the fixing piece 20 and the supporting projecting piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that abuts the outer side surface of the plate 12 and a hanging wall 20e that is continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d and hangs along the outer edge of the supporting protruding piece 20b (FIG. 14), and a stop hanging portion 20f (see FIG. 15) that is continuous with the hanging wall 20e and is inclined inward at the inlet end of the support hook hole 20c. A shaft hook pin 633 (see FIG. 63) of an upper shaft support member 630 in the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c of the upper support member 20. Further, the upper support metal fitting 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by the fixing piece 20a and the hanging fixing piece 20d.

In the upper support fitting 20, the strength of the supporting projection piece 20b is enhanced by the hanging wall 20e that hangs from the outer edge of the supporting projection piece 20b, and the details of the supporting projection piece 20b will be described later. The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the can be hidden so as not to be visually recognized from the player side, and the appearance can be improved. In addition, the support hook hole 20c formed in the support protruding piece 20b is bent in a dogleg shape so as to be inclined from the side (the right side) on the opposite side where the hanging wall 20e is not formed to the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft support pin 633.

On the other hand, the lower support fitting 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a mounted and fixed on the reinforcing fitting 22 and a vertical fixing piece fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12 rising upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a. 21b, a plate-like support protrusion 21c protruding from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a to the front side of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin shape protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the support protrusion piece 21c. And a support protrusion 21d. A main body frame shaft support formed on a main body frame shaft support metal member 644 (see FIG. 66 and the like) of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal member 21. After inserting the support protrusion 21d of the support metal fitting 21 into the support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the main body frame 3, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked in the support hook hole 20c. As a result, the body frame 3 can be easily pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable.

Further, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of this example has two closing plates 24 and 25 mounted and fixed inside the right side frame plate 13 so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 arranged on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-back direction (Fig. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are used as hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 93) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the body frame 3 when closing the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. Although the details will be described later, the engagement between the hook portions 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24, 25 is released by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and rotating it to one side. The main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

Furthermore, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal member 22. This guide plate 26 is for guiding the main body frame 3 smoothly when closing the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2, and is replaceably mounted and fixed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20, and the support projecting piece 20b is supported by the rivet 28. It is rotatably supported by the shaft. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin, and has a stopper portion 27a protruding forward from a position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 and shorter than the stopper portion 27a rightward from a position pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The protruding operating portion 27b, the elastic piece 27c protruding from the side opposite to the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operating portion 27b, and the tip of the stopper portion 27a are formed so as to bulge forward. And an arcuate tip surface 27d. As shown in the drawing, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operating portion 27b. Further, the elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a narrower width than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed so as to extend forward as it moves away from the stopper portion 27a to the left.

As shown in FIG. 14(B) and FIG. 15, in this lock member 27, in the state of being supported by the supporting projecting piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state), the tip abutting portion of the elastic piece 27c is the hanging wall. The stopper portion 27a is in contact with the inner side surface of the support hook hole 20c so as to close the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. Is not closed, and a space into which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed in the head space part of the support hook hole 20c. ..

In the support mechanism of the shaft support pin 633 using the upper support metal fitting 20 and the lock member 27 of this example, the shaft support pin 633 is inserted into the tip end space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, and the stopper portion 27a of the stopper portion 27a is formed. A state in which the side of the leading end faces the stop hanging portion 20f at the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the side of the leading end of the stopper portion 27a and the stop hanging portion 20f, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal axial support state, which is the same), the axial support pin 633 and the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a, which are located in the distal end space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c formed by bending, respectively. The centers are offset from each other in an oblique direction and face each other. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 that supports the heavy body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support hook hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is provided. Since almost no load is applied to the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a from the above, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not loaded. Since the stopper 27a is provided with an arcuate tip surface 27d at the tip thereof, the lock member 27 smoothly rotates when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27. Has become. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27).

Therefore, when the axial support pin 633 acts on the arcuate tip surface 27d by exerting the acting force F in the direction of slipping out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, the acting force F is Component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arcuate tip surface 27d (the normal direction of the arc of the tip surface 27d), and one side of the shaft support pin 633 and the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface, and the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27), the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is separated. A moment for rotating the tip end portion from the support protrusion piece 20b (clockwise direction in the drawing) does not act, and the shaft support pin 633 causes the tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c to move. The state of being sandwiched between the inner surface on one side is retained. Therefore, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always loaded, even in a normal shaft support state or in a state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, and the elastic piece integrally formed of synthetic resin is used. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation of the piece 27c due to creep, and to prevent the shaft support pin 633 from falling out of the support hook hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied to rotate the tip end of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 in a direction (clockwise in the drawing) away from the support protrusion piece 20b, one side of the tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a is rotated. Is abutted against the stop hanging portion 20f and does not rotate in the direction of further disengagement, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the supporting projection piece 20b.

Even if the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arcuate in shape, the tip end portion of the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support projection piece 20b or the position where no rotation moment is generated by the action of the component force F1 described above. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotation moment for rotating the lock member 27 is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 at all times, and the lock is performed. The present applicant has pointed out that the locking member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the supporting projection piece 20b because only one side of the tip of the stopper portion 27a contacts the stop hanging portion 20f even if the member 27 rotates. I'm confirming.

The operation of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, a lower support metal fitting is provided in a main body frame pivot support hole (not shown) formed in the main body frame pivot support fitting 644 (see FIG. 63) of the main body frame 3. It is necessary that the support protrusion 21d of 21 is inserted. On such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16(A), the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is brought into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and pushed in, thereby As shown in FIG. 16(B), since the lock member 27 rotates in the counterclockwise direction while deforming the elastic piece 27c, the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook hole 20c. Then, when the pivot pin 633 reaches the leading space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, the pivot pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not come into contact with each other, as shown in FIG. 16(C). Therefore, the lock member 27 is biased by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the inlet portion of the support hook hole 20c. The tip portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out from the support hook hole 20c.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16D, this state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during a normal opening/closing operation of the main body frame 3. Next, in order to remove the shaft support pin 633 from the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16(E), a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b and the operating portion 27b of the lock member 27 is rotated counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support hook hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. Then, the main body frame 3 is lifted to release the engagement between the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 and the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21. It can be removed from.

As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 that form the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the conventional case, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal ( For example, since it is an extruded material of aluminum alloy), when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility lined up in a game arcade, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing the pachinko machine 1 at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical plane of the island. However, since such work is performed by nailing nails to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, it is possible to easily nail the nails, and the present pachinko machine 1 can be easily applied to existing island equipment. It can be installed. Further, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a light-weight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extruded material, the wall thickness can be reduced while maintaining strength as compared with a conventional wooden outer frame. The lateral width when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 63 and the like) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be widened, and the game board 4 having a large lateral dimension. The game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed at the same time as the main body frame 3 can be mounted.

Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 that form the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are connected by a connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is connected to the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since the inner frame is fixedly attached to the outer surface and the connecting member 14 is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in an engaged state, the outer frame 2 can be assembled with high strength and is sturdy. It is designed so that it can have a rectangular frame shape. Further, when the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14 and then the upper support fitting 20 is attached to a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, Adjacent ball lending machine) can be attached closely.

[1-2. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right side. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as seen from the left front side, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as seen from the right rear side. Further, FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as seen from the back.

The door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has, as shown in the figure, a door frame having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed into a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape). The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the left side of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. It is provided with a left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery and an upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100.

Further, the door frame 5 is a plate unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, an operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and a door penetrating the dish unit 300. A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 arranged on the rear side of the dish unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. Attached to the foul cover unit 540, a ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and a game window 101 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be closed. And a glass unit 590 that is operated.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28. 24A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 24B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame base substrate cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. 28 is an enlarged view of the wiring for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. FIG.

As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 of the present example is a door having a game window 101 formed in a vertically long rectangular outer shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction and having a vertically elongated substantially elliptical inner periphery. The frame base main body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 arranged on the left and right outer sides of the lower end of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110, and a speaker bracket 132 for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base main body 110. And a handle bracket 140 for supporting the handle device 500, which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in a front view.

The door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like outside the right side speaker 130 in front view. A cover member 134 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 is further provided. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111, and can also hold the wiring so that the wiring does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or detached. It has become.

In addition, the door frame base unit 100 covers the lower part of the game window 101 with the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. The security cover 180 to be attached, the glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and the left side from the center in the left-right direction in rear view (open side) ) Disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the rotation position of the handle device 500 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 below the firing cover 191. The handle device relay substrate 192 that relays the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control substrate 4100, the handle device relay substrate cover 193 that covers the rear side of the handle device relay substrate 192, and the firing cover 191 sandwiching the center in the left-right direction. And a door frame base substrate 194 that is arranged on the opposite side of the handle device relay substrate 192 and the like (on the right side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear (on the side of the pivotal support)), and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base. A door frame base substrate cover 195 that covers the rear side of the substrate 194, and a wiring cord 196 that is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 and connects the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side (Fig. Wiring holding member 197 for holding a part of the wiring holding member 197).

In the door frame base unit 100 of this example, the rigidity of the whole is improved by fixing the reinforcing unit 150, which is a metal sheet metal assembled with rivets, to the rear side of the rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it is strong enough to support the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300 and the like.

The door frame base substrate 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 described later. It is connected to the 4140 and includes an amplifier circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs the amplified acoustic signal to each speaker 130. In the present example, the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the decorative units 430, 432 provided on the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, the dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b provided on the operation unit 400, The wiring cord 196 connecting the 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, and the like with the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control section 4140, and the like is the right side (the axis) of the door frame base board 194 in a rear view. After being bundled together in the position of the (support side), the details will be described later, but it is held by the wiring holding member 197 and extends rearward, and the main side relay terminal board 880 of the main body frame 3 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

The door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed of a synthetic resin in a vertically long frame shape as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, and penetrates in the front-rear direction so that the inner shape is vertically long. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, the game window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right inner edges are continuous, while the lower inner edge is formed in a straight line extending left and right. ing. In addition, in the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110, a rectangular cutout 101a into which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in front view). Are formed. The door frame base main body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101, and the widths of the left and right side sides are such that an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, a shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and an open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of a reinforcing unit 150 described later. The width is approximately the same as the width of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body 110 in a front view. Therefore, a wider area of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a wider game area 1100 can be easily formed as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. It is like this.

In addition to the game window 101, the door frame base main body 110 is arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the game window 101, and the speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130, and the ball feeding unit 580 are mounted and fixed. To the ball feeding unit 580, the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) for the game ball that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and is stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300. A ball mounting opening 113 for supplying and a handle mounting for mounting the handle bracket 140 which is obliquely inclined so that the right side (open side) end of the front surface which is arranged in the lower right corner portion in a front view and bulges forward is retracted. The portion 114, a wire passage opening 115 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion 114 and allows wiring from the handle device 500 to pass through, and has a tubular shape that extends shortly forward on the upper side of the handle mounting portion 114. A lock hole 116 that is formed and into which a cylinder lock 1010 described below can be inserted is provided.

As shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 on the lower side of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112, and a rear frame view of the door frame base body. From the board mounting portion 118 arranged on the lower right side (shaft support side) for mounting the door frame base substrate 194, and from the arrangement closer to the center than the speaker mounting portion 111 on the rear view left side (open side) of the lower end of the game window 101. The security cover mounting portion 119 for projecting backward and mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180, and the door frame base body 110 are recessed to the front side along the inner circumference of the game window 101 on the rear side, and the glass unit 590. Glass unit support step 110a with which the outer peripheral edge of the front face can abut, and two locking member attachments for projecting rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 to rotatably support the glass unit locking member 190. And a section 110b.

Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, there is provided a door frame projecting piece 110c which projects rearward by a predetermined amount from the lower side thereof, and the door frame projecting piece 110c is an engaging groove 603 of the body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an illegal tool such as a piano wire will be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Even in this case, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, there is provided a positioning protrusion 110d that projects rearward from a position slightly lower than the lock hole 116 in rear view and is fitted into the fitting groove 612 of the body frame 3. By fitting the positioning protrusion 110d with the fitting groove 612, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at correct positions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base main body 110 has a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300 and the like on the front surface thereof. In addition, many mounting holes for mounting the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the door frame base body 110 has mounting portions 110g for mounting the speaker brackets 132 for mounting the side speakers 130, and mounting holes 110h (see FIG. 18 and the like) for mounting the side speaker covers 338 at appropriate positions, respectively. Has been formed.

Further, in the door frame base main body 110, between the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and the substrate mounting portion 118, the lower dish ball supply port 310g and the foul cover unit 540 of the dish unit base 310 of the dish unit 300, which will be described later, are provided. A rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

Further, the door frame base body 110 has a shallow dish-shaped crime prevention recess 120 that is formed on the front side of the door frame base body 110 above the left and right speaker mounting portions 111 and is recessed rearward in a substantially triangular shape. A crime prevention member 121 formed in a shallow box shape is inserted into the crime prevention recess 120 from the front side. The security member 121 is formed in a shallow box shape with a front side open by bending a metal plate. As a result, in order to perform a fraudulent act against the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, it is possible to prevent a hole from being made from a joint portion between the side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300 with a thin drill or the like. The crime prevention member 121 can prevent the crime and prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 has a center axis intersecting at a predetermined distance from the center of the game area 1100 in front view (for example, 0.2 m to 1). It is fixed diagonally so as to be at a position of 0.5 m) so that the sound can be delivered to the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 most efficiently. Further, the side speaker 130 mainly outputs sounds in the mid-high range, and is arranged in a position separated from the pachinko machine 1 in the left-right direction as much as possible, and the left and right sides are arranged. By outputting different related sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output sounds with a high sense of stereo.

The outer periphery of each of the side speakers 130 is sandwiched by a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 arranged on the front side and a speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base body 110 arranged on the rear side, whereby a door frame is formed. It is adapted to be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base body 110 from the front side with a predetermined screw.

Further, the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with the front side opened, as shown in FIGS. A step portion 195a that is recessed forward is provided at a position slightly lower than the center of the. A wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

On the other hand, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape elongated in the lateral direction as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28 and has an I-shaped cross section. , Made of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the figure, the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a plurality of holding holes 197a (three in the present example, three in the vertical direction) at predetermined intervals at both upper and lower ends. In the wiring holding member 197, the end portion on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in the assembled state of the door frame 5 is vertically aligned with the step 195a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. Although not shown in detail, the wiring holding member 197 is rotatably supported about the extended axis, and the wiring holding member 197 is rotated by the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 toward the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. The door frame base substrate cover 195 can be accommodated in the step portion 195a.

The wiring holding member 197 has a wiring cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface thereof, and the wiring holding member 197 is bundled in predetermined holding holes 197a in a pair. By inserting the band 198 and tightening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198, the wiring cord 196 can be held (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in the direction in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3. It is pushed forward by the portion and rotated in a direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. As a result, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side becomes free. The bend becomes large (sharp) near the edge. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is in a state of being folded in two in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 is opened, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively distant from each other. Therefore, wiring is performed by the wiring cord 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled rearward, and the wiring holding member 197 smoothly rotates so that the free end side moves in the direction away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (direction of the main body frame 3). As a result, the wiring cord 196 folded at the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is developed so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being obstructed by the wiring cord 196.

As described above, according to this example, the end portion of the wiring holding member 197 on the same side as the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported moves the door frame base substrate cover 195 so that the free end side moves to the main body frame 3 side. Since the rear surface is pivotally supported, and a part of the wiring cord 196 electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction, the main body frame 3 On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, the wiring cord 196 can be laterally folded and unfolded at the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent problems such as disconnection of the wiring cord 196, disconnection of the connection connector, and the like due to being pinched or pinched.

Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is made of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even when force is applied via the wiring cord 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, The wiring cord 196 can be securely folded in the lateral direction to prevent the occurrence of a problem, because the vertical movement can be made less likely to occur.

Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 creates a bridge between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the wiring 196 Since a part of the wiring is bridged by the wiring holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from hanging down even when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of such a problem that the door frame 5 cannot be closed or the door frame 5, and the main control board 4100, the peripheral control section 4140, the payout control board 4110, and the like as the main body side electric device, and the door side. The wiring 196 connecting the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, the speakers 130, 222, 262, the ball rental unit 360, the handle device 500, etc. as electric devices is defective. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of reducing the occurrence of the noise as much as possible.

In addition, a part of the wiring 196 is held by a rotatable wiring holding member 197, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates even if the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened. Since the force can be released by the wiring, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled and causing a problem such as disconnection or disconnection of the connection connector. it can. A part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is only partially bent as the wiring holding member 197 rotates. The wiring 196 does not slide like the above), and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from rubbing and causing problems such as electric leakage and disconnection.

Furthermore, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the holding holes 197a penetrating through the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. The held binding band 198 can be prevented from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a, and the wiring 196 together with the binding band 198 can be reliably prevented from dropping from the wiring holding member 197. can do.

Further, even if the position where the wiring 196 extends from the main body frame 3 or the door frame 5 is arranged at a position apart from the side that pivotally supports the door frame 5, as described above, the wiring holding member 197 causes the wiring 196 to move the wiring 196. Since it is possible to favorably prevent the wiring 196 from hanging down when the door frame 5 is opened/closed by being guided, the main body frame 3 in which the strength/rigidity of the side of the door frame 5 on which the pivot is supported is increased. The door frame 5 can be used as the door frame 5, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high crime prevention property against illegal acts can be obtained.

Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with the projecting ridges projecting from both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction at least to the side along which the wiring 196 extends, the wiring holding member 197 is wired by the pair of projecting ridges and the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197. It is possible to surround the three sides of 196, and it is possible to easily hold the wiring 196 along the wiring holding member 197. In addition, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with the protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-shaped wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 can be prevented from bending when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Thus, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a good state.

Further, the length from the base end to the tip of the wire holding member 197 is set to be substantially the same as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the axis of the base end, and the body frame 3 in the wire 196 extends. The predetermined position is a position closer to the axial center of the door frame 5 than the tip of the wiring holding member 197 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member. A pantograph-shaped link is formed by the axial center of 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring 196 extends in the main body frame 3, so wiring for opening and closing the door frame 5 is performed. The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be smoothed, the opening and closing work can be facilitated, and an unreasonable force acts on the wiring 196, etc. to cause problems such as disconnection. Can be prevented. Further, a pantograph-shaped link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, the portion of the wiring 196 extending from the tip of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back along the wiring holding member 197 at the tip end side. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and compacted, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

Further, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 pivotally supporting the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the body frame 3, A step portion 195a capable of accommodating the wiring holding member 197 is provided, and when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base substrate cover 195. Since the wiring holding member 197 is housed in the portion 195a, the wiring holding member 197 can be almost prevented from protruding from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring holding member 197 and The wiring 196 can be compactly assembled, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being caught by another member and prevent a problem from occurring.

Further, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is in the closed state, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

In addition, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force that opens and closes the door frame 5, It is possible to surely achieve the effect described above. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and it is not necessary to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 relatively. Can be held to hold the game board 4 having a larger game area 1100, and the pachinko machine 1 having the large game board 4 which can attract the player's attention strongly can be provided. it can.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 has a cylindrical tubular portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tubular portion 141 from the rear end of the tubular portion 141. On the other hand, an annular flange portion 142 that extends outward in the right angle direction, and a plurality of (three in this example) ridges that project into the tubular portion 141 and are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141. 143, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 and are arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle mounting portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110. Although illustration is omitted, the shaft of the cylindrical portion 141 is substantially aligned with the wiring passage port 115 when mounted on the handle mounting portion 114.

The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion 143 on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed at a position corresponding to the three groove portions 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three protrusions 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 match each other. There is. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted into and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported so as not to rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attaching portion 114 that is inclined, so that the axis of the tubular portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) as it goes forward when viewed from the front. The shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in this state is also tilted in the same manner.

Subsequently, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes, as mainly shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body. The shaft supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152 attached along the rear surface of the shaft supporting side of 110, the open side reinforcing metal plate 153 mounted along the rear surface of the opening side peripheral part of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110 It is provided with a lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 that is attached along the back surface of the lower side of the game window 101, and they are fastened to each other with screws or rivets to form a rectangular shape.

As shown in FIG. 25, the reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper shaft supporting portion 156 having shaft pins 155 slidably provided on the upper surface in the upper and lower end portions of the shaft supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152, and a lower surface thereof. And a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). Then, the upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper and lower shaft support fittings 630 and 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the main body frame 3 on the shaft support side. It can be opened and closed freely.

Further, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the lateral width dimension of the door frame base body 110. A lower bent protrusion 159 that is bent forward (see FIG. 25), and an upper bent protrusion 160 that is bent forward toward the right side (open side) in front view of the upper long side edge. , A vertical bending protrusion 161 which is bent rearward and is vertically extended at the center of the upper long side edge. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is enhanced by the lower bent protrusion 159, the upper bent protrusion 160, and the like. Further, the vertical bending projection piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to engage and lock with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the rear surface side of the door frame 5, the vertical bending protrusion 161 is locked by the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 moves in the left-right direction. It is possible to regulate the movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is provided with a cutout 162 that substantially corresponds to the cutout 101a of the door frame base body 110.

Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 has open side outward bending protrusions 163 that are bent rearward on both sides of a long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 154. The opening-side inner bending protrusion 164 is formed so that the opening-side inner bending protrusion 164 extends rearward longer than the opening-side outer bending protrusion 163 as shown in the figure. ing. Further, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 described later is provided at the lower rear portion of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing metal plate 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft-supporting-side protruding piece 166 that extends rearward at the outer end of its long side and is open to the outside on the shaft-supporting side (FIG. 108). Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bending protrusions 167 that are bent rearward on both sides of the long side thereof.

Since the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is attached and supported only to the upper and lower two points of the upper shaft supporting portion 156 and the lower shaft supporting portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, If an illegal tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large, which is illegal. Although it may be easier to perform the action, the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the present example is provided with the shaft-supporting-side U-shaped protruding piece 166, so that the strength of the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further enhanced. The shaft-support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hard to bend. Further, the shaft-supporting side U-shaped projection piece 166 of the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is configured such that the front end piece 952b of the side surface security plate 950 of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the U-shape (FIG. (See 108), it is possible to prevent the insertion of a tool, and it is possible to prevent only the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 from bending, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. This crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function of covering the lower back surface of the above-mentioned glass unit 590 to prevent illegal tools from entering the game board 4. Is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 590 arranged between the reinforcing metal plates 152 and 153, and the upper side part thereof has an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4. The contact recess 181 is formed, and the crime prevention rear projection 182 projects rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181. Further, at the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180, crime prevention rear end projecting pieces 183 projecting rearward along the end shape thereof are respectively provided. Note that the rear-end crime prevention rear end projection 183 on the right side (the pivot side) in the rear view is extended rearward longer than the rear-end crime prevention end projection 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, the crime prevention front projection 184 protruding along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, and the left and right outside the crime prevention front projection 184 are provided. A U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 protruding forward is provided at the lower end of the.

In this security cover 180, the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) in front view is mounted on the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (axial support side) is mounted. By mounting it on the security cover mounting portion 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably mounted on the back side of the door frame 5. Although the detailed illustration is omitted in the state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, the crime prevention front projection 184 is adapted to fit with the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590. The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 contacts the vertical bending protrusion 161. When the door frame 5 is closed, the rear half of the crime prevention protrusion 182 protruding rearward is inserted into the lower side surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4, and the half open side thereof is forward. The component member 1110 is inserted into the rail crime prevention groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool tries to enter the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the crime prevention post-projection piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. ..

Note that the security cover 180 can cover the lower front portion of the guide passage for the hit ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 with the back surface thereof closed with the door frame 5 closed. It is possible to prevent the hitting of the ball hitting the glass plate 594 that flies or reverses through the guide passage portion.

Thus, in this example, the security cover 180 covers the lower outer periphery of the glass unit 590 (game window 101) in the door frame 5, so that the game window 101 and the glass unit 590 are connected from the front side of the door frame 5. Even if an attempt is made to carry out a fraudulent act on the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100) by inserting a highly flexible tool between them, the crime prevention cover 180 can prevent the invasion of the tool, and thus fraudulent acts. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more safe against such problems.

Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 of the door frame base unit 100 are provided with a fitting portion 190a that is rotatably fitted to a locking member attachment portion 110b that projects rearward from the door frame base body 110. And a locking piece 190b that extends in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locks the locking projection piece 451f of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 fixes a retaining screw to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is rotatably supported by the locking member mounting portion 110b.

Although not shown in detail, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a ridge protruding rearward on the rear side, and this ridge rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a fingerhold when operating.

The firing cover 191 of the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are respectively fixed to predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110. When the firing cover 191, the handle device relay board cover 193, and the ball feeding unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, their rear surfaces are substantially flush with each other. The front surface of the hitting ball launching device 650 attached to the body frame 3 can be covered.

[1-2B. Right side decoration unit]
Next, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. 29A is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 29B is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. In addition, FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as disassembled and seen from the front. Further, FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit after disassembling it.

As shown, the right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer circumference of the game window 101 except the lower part in front view, and the inside is the game window 101. Along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, the outer side is linearly formed while being formed in an arc shape. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side lens 210 forming an outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200 and having a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and a side inner lens 212 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 210. A right side upper decorative substrate 214, which is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from substantially the center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and on which a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) are mounted, and a side inner on the lower side Rear side of the right side lower decorative substrate 216 and lower right side decorative substrate 216 which are arranged below the substantially center of the lens 212 in the vertical direction and on which a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) are mounted. The right side upper decoration substrate cover 218 that is attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decoration substrate 214, and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 that covers the rear side of the right side lower decoration substrate 216. And a right side lower decorative substrate cover 220 attached to the lens 210 and the side decorative frame 202.

In addition, the right side decoration unit 200 is arranged at a front side of the side lens 210 and a side outer cover 202 attached to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 and at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is omitted. A plurality of side flash lenses 204 radially extending around the center, a side upper inner lens 206 arranged between an upper left portion of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and a side upper inner lens 206 are the side inner lenses. An inner lens bracket 208 for attaching to the 212 and an upper right speaker 222 attached to the side upper inner lens 206 are provided.

In this right side decoration unit 200, a side outer cover 202, a side flash lens 204, a side upper inner lens 205, an inner lens bracket 208, a side lens 210, and a side inner lens 212 are formed of a translucent member. The side outer cover 202, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flash lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

Although not shown in detail, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the surfaces of the side inner lens 212 and the side upper inner lens 206 so that light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a, 214b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the right side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, and the side upper inner lens 206, 216a, 216b and the like cannot be clearly seen from the player side. Further, the front surfaces of the right-side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right-side lower decorative substrate 216 are white, and the right-side decorative unit 200 is efficiently illuminated and decorated by the light from the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b. The decoration boards 214, 216 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b are not lit. The right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and each of the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b are made to emit light as appropriate, and the right side decoration unit 200 can be made to emit light.

As shown in the figure, the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example has a right end and an upper end formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base body 110 in a front view, and the left end thereof is the game window 101. Is formed in a curved shape along the outer periphery on the right side of. The side lens 210 includes a peripheral lens portion 210a formed of a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and a plurality of peripheral lens portions 210a divided into a plurality of portions in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and extending substantially concentrically with the game window 101. And a radiation lens section 210b having a prism surface. As shown in the drawing, the plurality of radiation lens portions 210b of the side lens 210 are formed so as to extend on the radiation centering on the lower center of the game window 101 in front view, and from the front surface of the peripheral lens portion 210a. Is also formed so as to be recessed rearward, and the side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

The side lens 210 also includes a side diffusion lens portion 210c that extends in the front-rear direction and is arranged in the vertical direction on the right side surface. The side diffusing lens portion 210c can diffuse light from the upper right side decorative substrate 214 and the lower right side decorative substrate 216 to the right and up and down of the pachinko machine 1 widely. Although not shown in detail, a plurality of through holes are formed in a portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker, so that the sound from the upper right speaker can be satisfactorily transmitted to the player side. It can be transmitted.

The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent, and is inserted and fitted into the side lens 210 from the rear side. As shown in the figure, a portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a wrinkle shape. In addition, a portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed in a flat surface shape. Although not shown in detail, the side inner lens 212 is formed with a plurality of small-diameter lenses in a mountain portion projecting forward in a wrinkle-shaped portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. This side inner lens 212 can irregularly refract and diffusely reflect light by a wrinkle-shaped portion and a plurality of small-diameter lenses, and in cooperation with the side lens 210 arranged on the front side, the outer appearance of the right side decoration unit 200 is glitter. At the same time, the perspective can be made to look strange and mysterious.

The right-side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right-side lower decoration substrate 216 of the right-side decoration unit 200 have a plurality of high-intensity color LEDs mounted on their surfaces, and are arranged at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The LEDs 214a and 216a having a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60° to 180°) are used, and the LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the emission lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 are relatively irradiated. A narrow angle (for example, 15° to 60°) is used. The LEDs 214c on the right side upper decorative substrate 214 are red and green LEDs in this example.

Like the side speaker 130, the upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs sounds in the mid-high range, and can be attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the side upper inner lens 206. ing. The side upper inner lens 206 supporting the upper right speaker 222 includes a cylindrical horn portion that extends obliquely forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front, and on the back side of the upper end of the horn portion. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side when viewed from the front.

The upper right speaker 222 of the present example is designed to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below by the horn part of the side upper inner lens 206, which is a noise for other pachinko machines. It's hard to come by. As with the side inner lens 212, the side upper inner lens 206 also has a wrinkle-shaped front surface, and a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed in the ridges protruding forward in the wrinkle-shaped portion. Therefore, the light can be irregularly refracted and irregularly reflected by the wrinkled portion and the plurality of small-diameter lenses.

The side flash lens 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 is adapted to be inserted and arranged in front of the radiation lens portion 210b recessed rearward of the side lens 210, and imitates a rugged rocky area by a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces. It is possible to add an accent to the side lens 210. Further, the side flash lens 204 can perform a radial light emission effect by the light emission of the LEDs 214b and 216a of the right side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 arranged on the rear side, and the peripheral lens portion 210a. Can be divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 to emphasize each.

[1-2C. Left side decoration unit]
Next, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 36. 32A is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 32B is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. In addition, FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit disassembled and seen from the front. Further, FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit after disassembling it. FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the left side decoration unit, and FIG. 36 is an explanatory view showing a photograph of a light emitting mode of the left side decoration unit.

As illustrated, the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer periphery of the game window 101 except the lower part in front view, and the right side is the game window 101. The left side and the upper side are linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and are asymmetrical to the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 has an elliptical shape arranged between a plurality of large window frames 242a extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 with a width substantially the same as the width of the right side decoration unit 200, and between the large window frames 242a. A frame-shaped side lower decorative frame 242 having a small window frame 242b, two large window frames 244a continuous to the upper side of the lower side decorative frame 242 and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and arranged in a row, and a large And a frame-shaped upper side decorative frame 244 having one elliptical small window frame 244b arranged between the window frames 244a.

Further, the left side decoration unit 240 includes the side flash lens 246, which is fitted from the rear side into the small window frames 242a, 244a of the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, and the side flash lens 246 on the rear side. In the side lens 250, a transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of peripheral lens portions 250a that are supported from A rear side of the inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a arranged on the rear side of the peripheral lens section 250a and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and provided with a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and the inner decoration member 251. And a side inner lens 252 having a diffusing portion 252a formed by a plurality of belt-shaped lenses extending radially centered on the lower left and right center of the game window 101.

The left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from substantially the center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) are mounted on the surface of the left side upper decoration. A substrate 254, and a left side lower decorative substrate 256 which is disposed on the lower side from substantially the vertical center of the side inner lens 252 and on which a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) are mounted. A left side upper decoration board cover 258 which covers the rear side of the left side upper decoration board 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decoration board 254, and a left side which covers the rear side of the left side lower decoration board 256. And a left side lower decorative substrate cover 260 attached to the side lens 250 so as to sandwich the lower decorative substrate 256.

Further, the left side decoration unit 240 includes a left upper speaker 262 arranged in front of the side inner lens 252 and in an upper right portion in front view, and a transparent member attached to the upper right portion of the front surface of the side inner lens 252 for supporting the upper left speaker 262. A diffusion portion formed by the upper speaker bracket 264 and a plurality of belt-shaped lenses attached to the front surface of the upper speaker bracket 264 and inserted from the rear side into the inner decorative member 251 at the upper right of the front view and extending radially around the lower left and right center. And an upper right inner lens 266 having 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich the protective plate 268 made of a metal plate capable of transmitting sound.

In this left side decoration unit 240, the side lower decoration frame 242, the side upper decoration frame 244, the left side upper decoration board cover 258, and the left side lower decoration board cover 260 are formed of a non-translucent member. The surface of the decorative member 251 is provided with a plating layer of a predetermined color (in this example, silver). In addition, the side flash lens 246 is translucent and is entirely made of milky white synthetic resin. The side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are made of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

In this example, both sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b in the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 (small windows in the radial axial direction centering on the lower left and right center of the game window 101) are used. Opening frames 242c, 244c are formed on both sides of the frames 242b, 244b with the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 penetrating in a notched state, and the small window frames 242b, 244b and The opening frames 242c and 244c on both sides are closed by the side flash lens 246 from the rear side. Therefore, from the player side, the rear side of the small window frames 242b and 244b and the opening frames 242c and 244c in the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 cannot be visually recognized by the milky white side flash lens 246. ..

On the other hand, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 is inserted from the rear side into the large window frames 242a, 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, and the transparent peripheral lens portion is closed. The inner decorative member 251 arranged on the rear side through 250a is visible from the player side. The diffusing portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is located on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251, and light is irregularly refracted by the diffusing portion 252a to pass through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 and to the rear of the side inner lens 252. The side is not clearly visible. That is, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the left-side upper decoration substrate 254 and the left-side lower decoration substrate 256 arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. Etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side.

The front surfaces of the left-side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left-side lower decorative substrate 256 are white, and the left-side decorative unit 240 is efficiently illuminated and decorated by the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b and the like. In addition, the decoration boards 254, 256 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are not lit. The left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are respectively connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and each LED 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. Is appropriately emitted to allow the left side decoration unit 240 to emit light.

The side lower decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example is configured to extend in the up-down direction along the left outer periphery of the game window 101, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section whose rear side is open. The side lower decorative frame 242 is a plurality of large window frames 242a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a small elliptical shape arranged between the large window frames 242a penetrating in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a window frame 242b and an opening frame 242c which is arranged on both sides of the small window frame 242b (on the side of the game window 101 and outside of the pachinko machine 1) and penetrates in the front-rear direction and is cut out to the side surface. Has been formed.

The side lower decorative frame 242 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c. Is to be fitted from the rear side. That is, the lower side decorative frame 242 can form the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246 which correspond to each other.

Further, the upper side decorative frame 244 in the left side decorative unit 240 is continuous with the upper end of the lower side decorative frame 242 and extends from the upper left side outer periphery to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101, and has a substantially triangular shape in a front view. It is formed in a U-shaped cross-section with an open side. The side decoration frame 244 is arranged between the large window frames 244a and two large window frames 244a extending along the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a small elliptical window frame penetrating in the front-rear direction. 244b and an opening frame 244c which is arranged on both sides of the small window frame 244b (on the side of the game window 101 and outside the pachinko machine 1) and which penetrates in the front-rear direction and is cut out to the side surface, and is formed of a synthetic resin. ing.

The side decoration frame 244 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 244a from the rear side, and the side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c. 246 is fitted from the rear side. That is, the upper side decorative frame 244 can form the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246 corresponding to each other. The upper side decoration frame 244 forms a continuous design with the lower side decoration frame 242 when assembled as the left side decoration unit 240.

In this example, the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244 are colored black, and the side lenses facing from the large window frames 242a and 244a, the small window frames 242b and 244b, and the opening frames 242c and 244c. 250 and the side flash lens 246 are highlighted.

In addition, the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a size in which the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 are combined, and has a size extending from the center to the left on the left side and the upper side of the game window 101. There is. The side lens 250 has a peripheral lens portion 250a fitted into the large window frames 242a, 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 from the rear side, and a concave shape rearward between the peripheral lens portions 250a. And a radiation lens section 250b on which the side flash lens 246 is arranged on the front side. In the side lens 250, the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by one curved surface that is smoothly curved, and the emission lens portion 250b is formed by a substantially flat surface. The side lens 250 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

Further, the inner decoration member 251 of the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of each peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250, and has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. ing. As shown in the figure, the inner decoration member 251 has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and also in the width direction thereof so as to be concentric with the center of the game window 101 as the center. There are multiple. Further, the inner decorative member 251 has a front surface formed with a plurality of slits 251a formed in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. The inner decorative member 251 of this example has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, and can be visually recognized from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. ..

The side inner lens 252 in the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251, has substantially the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250, and is formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin. There is. The side inner lens 252 has a diffusing portion 252a that bulges forward so that a portion corresponding to the inner decoration member 251 is inserted into each inner decoration member 251 from the rear side. The diffusion part 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed with a plurality of belt-shaped lenses radially extending around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 on the front surface, and the inner direction in which the belt-shaped lenses extend in the front side. The slits 251a of the decorative member 251 intersect (substantially orthogonal) with the extending direction of the slits 251a.

The side inner lens 252 is configured such that the diffusing portion 252a can be seen from the player side through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251, but light is diffused and refracted by the plurality of band-shaped lenses formed in the diffusing portion 252a. The rear side cannot be clearly seen through the portion 252a. Further, as shown in the figure, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusion parts 252a, and light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged on the rear side. Can be transmitted forward without diffusing or refracting.

The left-side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left-side lower decorative substrate 256 of the left-side decorative unit 240 are provided with a plurality of high-intensity color LEDs mounted on the surface thereof. LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (circumferential lens portion 250a of the side lens 250) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60° to 180°) and are used. LEDs 254b arranged at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242b, 244b and the opening frames 242c, 244c of the lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 (the emission lens section 250b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flash lens 246), 256b has a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15° to 60°).

Like the side speaker 130, the upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs sounds in the mid-high range, and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. There is. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion (not shown) that projects obliquely forward and downward at the center of the left and right sides of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. Then, the upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the upper rear side of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264 via the protective plate 268, and the upper left speaker 262 is not visible from the player side in a front view. It has become. Further, the protective plate 268 made of a metal plate can prevent the upper left speaker 262 from being mischievous and the cone of the upper left speaker 262 from being broken and an illegal tool being inserted into the pachinko machine 1. Has become. The upper left speaker 262 of this example is adapted to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below, so that it is difficult for the other pachinko machines to make noise.

Next, a characteristic light emitting effect in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example will be described. As described above, the left side decoration unit 240 includes the side lens 250 including the curved transparent peripheral lens portion 250a forming the outer surface of the left side decoration unit 240, and the surface disposed on the rear side of the peripheral lens portion 250a. An inner decorative member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a penetrating in the front-rear direction and having a plated layer of metallic luster, and arranged in the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 and extending in a direction intersecting the extending direction of the slits 251a. A left inner decoration substrate 254 and a left lower decoration substrate 256 on which a side inner lens 252 having a diffusion portion 252a formed of a plurality of belt-shaped lenses and a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a arranged behind the side inner lens 252 are mounted. And (see FIG. 35 and the like). As a result, in the left side decoration unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a are caused to emit light, the light emitted forward is diffused by the diffusion section 252a of the side inner lens 252 and then passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. The peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is irradiated to the player side so that the peripheral lens portion 250a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be illuminated and decorated.

By the way, the light emitted forward (on the side lens 250 side) through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 passes through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 and is emitted to the player side. At the same time, the remaining light is reflected by the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a and illuminates the front surface of the inner decorative member 251. Since the inner decoration member 251 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, the light reflected to the inner decoration member 251 side on the inner surface of the peripheral lens part 250a is the surface of the inner decoration member 251. The light is reflected to the peripheral lens part 250a side (on the front side), and a part of the light reflected on the surface of the inner decoration member 251 is transmitted through the peripheral lens part 250a and is emitted to the player side.

At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, since the peripheral lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decoration member 251, and the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are each smoothly curved, the inner surface side ( The light reflected on the rear surface side is converged and the light reflected on the outer surface side (front surface side) is diffused, so that the peripheral lens portion 250a has direct light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 and the peripheral light. The indirect light reflected on the front surfaces of the lens portion 250a and the inner decorative member 251 is irradiated to the respective shifted positions. Further, the light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 is diffused in a stripe shape in the extending direction of the slit 251a and intersects by the diffusing portion 252a formed by a plurality of band-shaped lenses in the side inner lens 252. It is diffused in the (substantially orthogonal) direction. Therefore, the circumferential lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is irradiated (projected) with a plurality of striped lights having different shades, extending in a direction longer than the width of the slit 251a and intersecting with the extending direction of the slit 251a. As a result, it is possible to make a fantastic luminous decoration with a perspective (see FIG. 36).

[1-2D. Upper decoration unit]
Subsequently, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit disassembled and seen from the rear.

As shown in FIG. 17 and the like, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is located at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5 and is located between the upper end edges of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 on the center side. It is installed between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decoration unit 280 has an annular center frame 281a that penetrates in the front-rear direction, a frame-shaped upper extension frame 281b that extends from the upper portion of the center frame 281a in a slender shape to the left and right, and tapers toward the tip. A front decoration member 281 provided with a frame-shaped lower extension frame 281c that extends from the lower portion of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becomes narrower toward the tip, and an upper extension frame 281b and a lower portion that are arranged on the rear side of the front decoration member 281. A transparent upper lens 282 having a through hole 282a having a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a and a tubular shape inserted into the through hole 282a of the upper lens 282. A central sleeve 283, an upper central lens 284 that is inserted into the central sleeve 283 and bulges forward, and a plate-shaped diffusing lens 285 that is disposed on the rear side of the upper central lens 284 and has a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface. An annular lens support member 286 that holds the outer periphery of the diffusion lens 285 and is supported on the rear side of the upper lens 282, and a tube disposed on the rear side of the lens support member 286 and having a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the lens support member 286. A light shielding member 287 having a portion 287a, a plurality of LEDs 288a arranged on the rear side of the light shielding member 287 at a position corresponding to the inner side of the cylindrical portion 287a of the light shielding member 287, and a position corresponding to the outer side of the cylindrical portion 287a. A plurality of LEDs 288b arranged on the front surface of the upper central decorative substrate 288.

In addition, the upper decoration unit 280 includes a unit base 289 that supports the front decoration member 281, the upper lens 282, the light blocking member 287, and the upper central decoration substrate 288 from the rear side, and a plurality of units that are arranged on the rear side of the unit base 289. Of the upper side decorative substrate 290, a substrate cover 291 that covers the rear surface of the upper side decorative substrate 290 and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 289, and is attached to the lower rear portion of the substrate cover 291 and extends rearward. The mounting bracket 292, an upper lower cover 293 that is attached to the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extends rearward from the lower rear end of the front decorative member 281, and the lower side of the upper lower cover 293 has a large amount of light-transmitting property. And an upper lower decorative cover 294 shaped in a shape.

Further, the upper decoration unit 280 is attached to the substrate cover 291 and extends backward from the upper rear end of the front decoration member 281 in a plate shape, and has a notch portion 295a having an open rear end side at the center in the left-right direction. A cover 295, a plate-like lid member 296 that closes the cutout portion 295a of the upper upper cover 295, and a decoration member 297 attached to the right side surface of the unit base 289 when viewed from the front and shaped into a predetermined shape are provided. ..

In the upper decoration unit 280 of this example, a plating layer having a silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decoration member 281, so that the front decoration member 281 is shimmered by light from the outside. The upper lens 282 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and has a central ring lens portion 282b facing the inside of the central frame 281a of the front decoration member 281 on the outer periphery of the through hole 282a and an upper extension of the front decoration member 281. The frame 281b and the extension frame lens portion 282c that faces the inside of the lower extension frame 281c. The upper lens 282 has a plurality of radially extending belt-shaped lenses arranged in a row in the circumferential direction on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b, and the center of the axial center of the through hole 282a on the front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c. A plurality of concentrically extending prisms are formed. As a result, light can be diffused and refracted by the plurality of prisms and the band-shaped lens of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the upper lens 282 cannot be clearly seen.

The upper center lens 284 of the upper decoration unit 280 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper central lens 284 is formed in a spindle shape with a smooth front surface, whereas a plurality of concentric lenses is formed on the rear surface, and light can be irregularly refracted. Is not visible to.

Further, the upper central decoration substrate 288 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface as full-color LEDs, respectively. The outer periphery of the upper central lens 284 can be separately illuminated and decorated. Further, the upper side decoration board 290 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface as full-color LEDs, and these LEDs 290a are the upper extension frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c of the front decoration member 281. Are arranged at positions corresponding to the respective frames. The upper side decorative substrate 290 is adapted to allow the upper extension frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c of the front decoration member 281 to emit light by appropriately causing the LEDs 290a to emit light.

[1-2E. Plate unit]
Subsequently, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. 41 is a front perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view cut at a portion of the bowl unit of the dish unit in the door frame.

The plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls dispensed from a prize ball device 740 described later, and the game stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to a hitting ball launching device 650, which will be described later, via a ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the plate unit 300 of this example includes a plate unit base 310, which is fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extends in the left-right direction, and a plate unit base 310. A plate-shaped upper plate body 312 that is fixed to approximately the center of the front face and is open on the upper and rear sides and bulges to the front on the left side (shaft support side) greatly. When viewed, the upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward, the upper plate front decorative member 316 attached to the upper front end edge of the upper plate upper panel 314, and the upper plate front portion. An upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 disposed between the decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 and a right side portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 are continuous with and cover the upper right side of the upper plate upper panel 314. The upper plate upper right decoration member 319 is provided.

Further, the dish unit 300 is attached to the lower side of the plate attachment base 320, which is a plate-like substrate attachment base 320 having a plurality of fine prisms formed on the lower surface of the upper dish upper panel 314 from the center in the left-right direction to the right side. And a top plate decorative substrate 322 having a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on its upper surface. By appropriately causing the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 to emit light, a part of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can be illuminated and decorated.

Further, the dish unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the dish unit base 310 on the lower side of the upper dish body 312, and the upper and rear sides are opened. A dish-shaped lower tray main body 324 formed so as to become lower as it goes, and a center in the left-right direction fixed to an upper portion of the lower tray main body 324 bulges forward in the same manner as the lower tray main body 324, and a front end thereof extends in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 that is curved so as to become higher toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 described later at a portion that covers the lower edge front end of the lower plate body 324 and extends to the right when viewed from the front. A lower dish cover 328 having a lock hole 328a facing it, and the right side of the lower plate cover 328 at the lower end of the lower plate cover 328 are decorated on the right side, and the right side is decorated. And a lower plate right side cover 330 having a lower opening portion 330b that is opened to the lower side and into which the handle device 500 is inserted from the front.

Further, in the plate unit 300, an obliquely extending lower plate upper left side cover 332 that covers a left side front end of the lower plate main body 324 and a left side front end of the lower plate top plate 326, and a lower end of the lower plate upper left side cover 332 are disposed at the front and rear. A lower plate left lower side cover 334 having an opening 334a penetrating in the direction, a protective cover 336 made of a metal plate which is configured to close the opening 334a of the lower plate left lower side cover 334 from the rear side, and which is made of a sound permeable material. A frame-shaped holding member 337 that holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate. The right front end of the lower plate top plate 326 is covered by the upper plate front decorative member 316.

Further, the plate unit 300 is attached to the upper left and right ends of the plate unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the upper ends of the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate upper left cover 332 are designed. A side speaker cover 338 having an opening 338a formed in a continuous shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an opening of the side speaker cover 338. And a cover body 339 having a disk-like shape that is gently curved so as to close the 338a from the rear side and bulge to the front side.

In this example, since the cover body 339 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, the cover body 339 is not easily deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 can be used. As long as it can be protected. Further, the side speaker cover 338 has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on its surface. The cover body 339 is colored black.

Further, the dish unit 300 includes an upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 attached to the dish unit base 310 and the upper dish body 312 for pulling the game balls stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302, and a lower dish body 324. The lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 for removing the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 and attached to the lower surface, and the plate unit base 310, which is attached to the upper left side in a front view, is installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. A ball lending unit 360 for operating a ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6, not shown).

The dish unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper dish 301 capable of storing game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the upper dish body 312, the upper dish upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the dish unit 300 constitutes a lower dish 302 capable of storing game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the lower dish body 324, the lower dish top plate 326, the lower dish cover 328, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 of this dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper edge extending in the left-right direction. It is equipped. A ball rental unit mounting portion 310b for mounting the ball rental unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The dish unit base 310 is arranged below the ball rental unit attachment portion 310b (near the upper left corner in a front view) and has an oblong rectangular shape which penetrates in the front-rear direction and an upper dish ball supply port 310c. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d which extends in the front-rear direction and extends in the up-down direction below the mouth 310c (generally in the height direction of the plate unit base 310) below the vicinity of the right end of the decorative portion 310a, and an upper plate. A pair of lower tray support portions 310e are provided immediately below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper tray ball supply port 310c, project forward, and have the same upper surface. The upper dish discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower plate support portion 310e arranged immediately below.

Further, the dish unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower dish support portions 310e and is fitted to the rear ends of the lower dish body 324 and the lower dish top plate 326 to form a horizontally elongated rectangular ring in a front view. It is provided with a groove 310f and a rectangular lower tray ball supply port 310g which is arranged in a lower portion on the right side of the center of a portion surrounded by the lower tray support groove 310f and penetrates in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward in a cylindrical shape so as to be continuous with the lower dish ball supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h. It has a notch portion 310i formed on the side surface and having a size through which the game ball can pass.

The upper dish ball supply port 310c of the dish unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the cutouts 101a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150. It is adapted to communicate with the first ball outlet 544a of the unit 540. At the front end of the upper bowl supply port 310c, there is provided a guide recess 310j that extends to the right in front view and is recessed rearward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side in front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is inclined lower in the front end direction in the front-rear direction. As a result, the height difference between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper dish main body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guide recess 310j, and the height difference between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper dish body 312 is increased. The height difference is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game balls stored in the upper plate 301, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 via the foul cover unit 540 are: Since it becomes impossible to linearly exit from the upper plate ball supply port 310c into the upper plate 301 in the front, the paid out game ball comes into contact with the game ball that closes the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c and rolls there. The direction is changed, and it is guided so as to roll to the right in the front view in the guide recess 310j, and is discharged from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. Become. As a result, since the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower two stages in the upper plate 301, the player does not pull the game balls by hand when the game balls block the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c. Even if it is possible to continue supplying (discharging) the paid game balls into the upper plate 301, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed when the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. , It is possible to prevent the player from devoting himself or herself to a game ball driving operation or a game with a game ball that has been driven in, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and to increase the amount of game balls stored in the upper plate 301. You can do it.

The upper bowl discharge port 310d of the dish unit base 310 has an opening 344a of the upper bowl removal base 344 of the upper bowl removal mechanism 340 and a ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It is adapted to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 via the intermediary. Further, in the lower dish ball supply port 310g, a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward from the rear side thereof penetrates the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and extends rearward. Above, it is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the cutout portion 310i of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h is provided in the upper dish ball removing mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball removing channel 344c of the upper plate ball removing base 344.

In addition, in this example, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower dish ball supply port 310g is provided with a widened portion 310k which is widened to the left in a front view, and the lower dish ball supply port is provided by the widened portion 310k. The front end of 310 g is widened in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent early ball clogging from occurring in the lower plate ball supply port 310g due to the game balls in the lower plate 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower plate ball supply port 310g, and more games can be played. The balls can be supplied into the lower plate 302.

The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed such that the left side (the pivot side) from the center in the front view bulges forward, and the bottom surface is generally lower on the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. There is. As for the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312, the rear end of the shaft support side is near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit base 310, and the rear end of the open side is the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310. The game balls are formed near the intermediate position in the up-down direction, respectively, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310c to the upper plate body 312 (upper plate 301) are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

The upper plate body 312 is provided with a metal upper plate rail 313 that can contact the game ball from the center in the left-right direction to the open side at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the upper plate rail 313 is electrically grounded (earthed) so that the static electricity charged in the game ball can be removed.

The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate body 312 so that the center of the door frame 5 in the left-right direction protrudes forward, and is outside the open side of the upper plate body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed through which the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340, which will be described later, is installed and through which the upper plate ball removing button 341 is installed. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a step shape at the front end, which is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate body 312, and is a decorative mounting portion 314b for mounting the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318. And an operation unit attachment portion 314c for attaching an operation unit 400 described later, which is formed in a step shape further lower than the decoration attachment portion 314b at a position in front of the upper plate body 312 at the center in the left-right direction. There is.

The upper plate front portion decoration member 316 is formed of a colorless transparent synthetic resin in a shape that extends in the left-right direction in a curved shape along the front end of the upper plate upper panel 314. This upper plate front part decoration member 316 is formed in a smooth shape on the left side from the position to the right of the center in the left-right direction, whereas the right side is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces that are curved like a spindle and It is formed in a rugged shape. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate front decorative member 316 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the rear surface on the right side formed by a plurality of curved surfaces, and is capable of irregularly refracting light. The rear side cannot be clearly seen from the player side. The upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 is arranged on the rear side of the left side smoothly formed part of the upper plate front decorative member 316, and has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. ing. As a result, the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 can be clearly seen from the player side through the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 in the assembled state, while the right side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 can be clearly seen. The part that can be seen through is unclear from the player's side, and the feeling of distance is not fixed.

The upper plate upper right decoration member 319 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper plate upper right decorative member 319 has a surface formed by a plurality of curved surfaces that are curved like a spindle like the right side portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316. The upper right end side is formed so as to be integrated with the right side portion, and is formed so as to decorate the outer circumference of an upper plate ball removing button 341, which will be described later. Further, the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the back surface (lower surface) thereof, which allows light to be irregularly refracted and prevents the player from clearly seeing the lower side. There is. In addition, the upper plate decorative board 322 is arranged on the rear side of the right side portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and on the lower side of the upper plate upper right decorative member 319, and the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative board 322 is arranged. By appropriately emitting light, the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can be appropriately emitted.

The bottom plate body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a formed in a fan shape that extends forward in a plan view, has a rear end formed in a straight line in the left-right direction, and has a lower surface with a substantially central portion of the upper surface, and a central portion of the bottom plate 324a. And a side plate 324c that rises upward from a front end and a side end of the bottom plate 324a excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate body 324 is formed in a curved shape such that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest at the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side. The upper end rising upward from the side end is formed in a linear shape, and the left and right ends of the lower plate top plate 326 are placed and connected to the linear portion of the upper end.

The lower plate main body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324a and the side plates 324c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310f formed in the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 is closed by the opening/closing shutter 352 of the lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 arranged on the back surface side of the bottom plate 324a.

The lower dish cover 328 is made of black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower dish side cover 330 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a silver-colored plating layer on the surface thereof, which has a metallic feeling (a matte state such as sandblasted rather than a mirror surface). The lower plate side cover 330 has a plate-shaped portion that extends rearward from the lower end and forms a part of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300. The lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328 and the upper opening 330a of the lower plate side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 attached to the main body frame 3, and On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 is exposed through the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

Further, the lower plate upper left cover 332 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on its surface. Further, the lower plate left lower cover 334 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plating layer having a red metallic luster on the surface, and extends rearward from the lower end to a part of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300. Is provided with a plate-shaped portion. The opening 334a of the lower left bottom cover 334 is formed at a position corresponding to the front surface of the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 described later, and allows the sound from the speaker 821 to be transmitted to the player side. It has become. The protective cover 336 that closes the opening 334a of the lower plate left lower cover 334 is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed in a metal plate, and prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted inside.

In the plate unit 300 of this example, the bottom plate side cover 330 and the lower plate left lower cover 334 close the bottom surface except the center in the left-right direction, and the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate left lower cover 334 The bottom surface between them is closed by a lower dish ball removing mechanism 340 described later.

The upper bowl ball removal mechanism 340 in the tray unit 300 is provided with an upper bowl ball removal button 341 that is attached to the attachment hole 314a of the upper tray upper panel 314 so as to be able to move forward and backward, and an operation of the upper bowl ball removal button 341. Of the upper dish ball removal button 341 is moved up and down by a greater amount than the up and down movement of the upper dish ball removal button 341 and is supported on the front surface side of the dish unit base 310. Of the mounting base 346 mounted on the front surface of the mounting base 346 and the operating piece 342 supported by the mounting base 346 that slides in the vertical direction and comes into contact with the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 described later. An upper plate ball removing slider 343 provided on the rear side of the plate unit base 310 and an upper plate ball attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 310 that slidably supports the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the vertical direction. And a removal base 344.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 includes an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper plate ball removing button 341 so that the upper plate ball removing button 341 is located at the upper moving end. It is biased upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 is in a state of being urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 and the upper bowl ball removing base 344.

The upper plate ball removing base 344 of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 closes the upper plate ball discharging port 310d of the plate unit base 310, and at the same time, communicates with the upper plate ball discharging port 310d and opens toward the front 344a (Fig. 43), and the ball guiding flow path 344b that guides the game sphere that communicates with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper bowl ball removing base 344 and has passed through the opening 344a, and then guides it backward (FIG. 42 and FIG. 42). 44) and extends downward from the lower side of the ball guiding channel 344b, and then extends toward the right side (shaft support side) end in rear view substantially along the lower side of the upper bowl ball removing base 344. It is provided with a ball removing channel 344c through which a game ball can be distributed.

In the upper dish ball removing base 344, the opening 344a communicates with the upper dish ball discharge port 310d, and the lower end of the sphere guiding flow path 344b communicating with the opening 344a has a sphere of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is designed to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 through the feeding opening 113, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 301 are transferred to the ball feeding unit 580. Can be supplied to.

In addition, the ball removal channel 344c of the upper bowl ball removal base 344 communicates with the ball removal port 581b of the ball delivery unit 580 through the ball delivery opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 at the upper end adjacent to the ball guide channel 344b. In addition, the lower end extending to the pivotal support side is in communication with the cutout portion 310i of the lower tray ball supply trough 310h in the dish unit base 310, and the game ball discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 is loaded. It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The lower part of the rear end of the ball removing channel 344c is closed by the upper plate ball removing channel cover 345.

In this upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340, when the upper bowl ball removing button 341 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the coil spring, the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward is also formed. Move down. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that contacts the upper surface of the contact piece 343a moves the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 in a predetermined direction as the contact piece 343a moves downward. By moving, the partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication with each other. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 enter the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d through the opening 344a of the upper plate ball removing base 344 and the ball guiding path 344b. Then, it is discharged from the ball discharge port 581b to the ball discharge channel 344c of the upper plate ball removal base 344, and from the lower plate ball supply port 310g to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply trough 310h of the plate unit base 310. It can be discharged.

Note that the ball pulling member 583 of the ball feed unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the abutting piece 343a of the upper plate ball pulling slider 343, whose operating rod 583c is urged upward by the coil spring, so that the ball pulling member 583. Even if the game balls are strongly supplied onto the partition part 581a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring urging the upper dish ball removing slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removing member 583 and the like are It is possible to prevent damage and also to prevent the game ball from bouncing back at the partition portion 583a.

The lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 of the dish unit 300 is disposed between the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish left lower cover 334 below the lower dish body 324, and forms the lower plate center of the dish unit 300. The opening base 351 and the plate-like opening/closing shutter 352 pivotally supported on the upper surface of the lower plate ball removing base 351 and capable of opening and closing the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 are rotated. And a lower plate ball removing slider 353 supported on the upper surface of the lower plate ball removing base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a lower plate ball removing button 354 attached to the front end of the lower plate ball removing slider 353. There is.

The lower dish ball removal base 351 includes a base ball removal hole 351a vertically penetrating at a position facing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324. Further, the opening/closing shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower dish ball removing hole 324b and a shutter ball removing hole which is disposed in front of the closing portion 352a and which can substantially coincide with the lower dish ball removing hole 324b and which vertically penetrates. 352b, and the closing portion 352a is urged by a coil spring 356 between the lower dish ball removing base 351 and the lower dish ball removing base 351 so that the closing portion 352a closes the lower dish ball removing hole 324b and the base ball removing hole 351a. ..

Although not shown in detail, the opening/closing shutter 352 includes an abutment pin capable of abutting the lower dish ball removing slider 353, and the abutment pin abuts the lower dish ball removing slider 353. The closing plate 352a and the shutter ball removing hole 352b are rotated by the lower plate ball removing slider 353 so as to move rearward, or the lower plate ball removing slider 353 is slid forward by the urging force of the coil spring 356. You can do it.

Further, in the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350, the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the opening/closing shutter 352 is substantially the same as the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower plate ball removing base 351. A holding mechanism 355 is further provided for holding the lower dish ball removing slider 353 in a predetermined position in order to hold the lower dish ball removing slider 353 in the moving position.

This lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower dish ball removing button 354 has moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower dish ball removing button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower dish cover 328 or the like. Therefore, the lower plate ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening/closing shutter 352. In this state, the game balls can be stored in the lower plate body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower plate ball removing button 354 in the closed state is pressed rearward, the lower plate ball removing button 354 and the lower plate ball removing slider 353 slide backward, and the lower plate ball removing slider 353 slides rearward to open and close. The shutter 352 rotates so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removing hole 352b move rearward against the biasing force of the coil spring 356.

Then, as the opening/closing shutter 352 is rotated rearward, the shutter ball removing hole 352b comes to overlap the lower plate ball removing hole 324b and the base ball removing hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball removing hole 352b and the lower plate ball removing hole. Matching with 324b, the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the plate unit 300 through the lower plate ball removing hole 324b. When the lower dish ball removing slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removing hole 352b and the lower dish ball removing hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower plate ball removing slider 353 holds the slide by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower dish ball removing slider 353 is locked (held), the lower dish ball removing button 354 remains rearwardly retracted and the shutter ball removing hole 352b is opened. The game balls stored in the lower tray 302 can be discharged downward even if they are held in the same state as the extraction hole 3324b and the lower tray ball removal button 354 is not continuously pressed.

On the other hand, in the case of closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b, when the lower dish ball removal button 354 in the retracted and opened state is further pushed rearward, the holding mechanism 355 releases the holding of the lower dish ball removal slide 353, and the lower plate is removed. The opening/closing shutter 352 is configured such that the ball-sliding slide 353 can slide, and the closing portion 352a is urged by the coil spring in the direction to close the lower plate ball-hole 324b. It rotates in the direction of moving to the direction (front) of the ball hole 324b. Then, as the open/close shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower dish ball removing slide 353 slides forward, the lower plate ball removing hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower plate ball removing button 354 moves down. It returns to the closed position that substantially coincides with the front surface of the plate cover 328 and the like, and the game balls can be stored in the lower plate 302.

It should be noted that the holding mechanism 355 of the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-mentioned function, and a detailed description of the mechanism will be omitted.

The ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 includes a ball rental button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a loan remaining display portion 363 between the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362. In this ball rental unit 360, when a ball or a prepaid card is inserted into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, and then a ball lending button 361 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the dish unit 300. It is possible to lend (pay out) to the upper plate 301 of the dish, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the cash inserted and the prepaid card will be returned after subtracting the remaining amount of the loan There is. In addition, the remaining balance display unit 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

The ball rental unit 360 is adapted to be attached from the rear side to the ball rental unit attachment portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. Further, the ball lending unit 360 includes a security cover mounting portion 364 which projects rearward from the rear surface and which mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 on the shaft support side (left side in front view).

More specifically, the ball rental unit 360 has a transparent front cover 365 that covers the front side of the loan remaining display portion 363, and a loan remaining display portion 363 that is arranged on the rear side of the front cover 365 and the ball rental button 361. And a ball rental unit substrate 366 (see FIG. 45) to which a switch operated by operating the return button 362 is attached, and a rear side of the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the dish unit base 310 that covers the rear side of the ball rental unit substrate 366. And a rear cover 367 attached to the. The security cover mounting portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 364.

The ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the dish unit base 310 to which the ball rental unit 360 is mounted has a circular button opening 310m facing the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362, and is formed between the button openings 310m. The transparent front cover 365 includes a rectangular display opening 310n closed by the cover 365 and projections 310o formed on the outer circumferences of the two button openings 310m and projecting forward. The transparent front cover 365 closes the display opening 310n. The lending remaining display portion 363 arranged on the rear side is visible from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the protrusion 310o of the dish unit base 310 has a rounded front end.

As shown in the figure, the ball rental unit 360 of this example has a ball rental unit attachment portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 arranged above the upper plate 301 and directly above the upper plate ball supply port 310c, and has a front surface. It is arranged to face. Further, in the ball rental unit 360, the return button 362 is arranged at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the ball rental button 361. In this example, the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 are colored in a different color from the dish unit base 310 (ball rental unit mounting portion 310b). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362.

In addition, the ball-renting unit 360 includes a protrusion 310o that protrudes forward (on the player's side) from the outer periphery of the ball-renting button 361 and the return button 362. Since the hand touches the protruding portion 310o before touching the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be made aware of the existence of the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362. It is possible to prevent the 361, the return button 362, and the like from being erroneously operated.

The plate unit 300 of this example includes the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, and can be the pachinko machine 1 having the same feeling as the conventional pachinko machine equipped with two storage plates. The machine can be used as a pachinko machine, and even a new pachinko machine 1 (new model of pachinko machine) can reduce the anxiety and the like given to the player and make the pachinko machine 1 easy to select as a pachinko machine to play. Has become.

[1-2F. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50. 46A is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 46B is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and seen from the upper right front side, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and seen from the lower right front side. Further, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the pressing operation portion of the operation unit is pressed.

The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is arranged on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at substantially the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player, and the pressure that can be pressed by the player. The operation unit 405 is provided, and the operation of the player can be accepted and the dial operation unit 401 can be moved according to the game state, and not only the operation of driving the game ball into the player, , It is also possible to participate in the production during the game.

The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the annular ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular driven unit connected to the lower end of the dial operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 that fixes the drive gear 412 to a rotation shaft, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and An operation portion holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support cylinder 416b that supports the pressing operation portion 405 slidably in the vertical direction, and a pressing operation portion 405 arranged in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416. A base member having a spring 418 biased upward, an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 and the button support cylinder 416b can pass, and the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed to the lower surface. 420, an upper cover 422 that has an opening 422a that covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and allows the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 to pass through, and a base member 420 that is attached below the upper cover 422 so as to sandwich the base member 420. Mainly includes a lower cover 424 that covers the lower surfaces of the member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

The operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and has an opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass, and extends outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a plating which is arranged on the upper side of the cover main body 426 and has a predetermined shape and has a silver metallic luster on the surface. An inner cover 427 provided with layers and a transparent surface cover 428 that covers the upper surface of the inner cover 427 are provided. The inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are formed with circular openings through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass.

Further, the operation unit 400 has an opening 430a attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 through which the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 and the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass, and the dial operation portion 401 on the upper surface. , A pair of rotation detection sensors 432a fixed to the dial decoration board 430 on which a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted and a lower portion of the operation portion holding member 416 and detecting rotation of the dial operation portion 401. 432b, a press detection sensor 432c that detects an operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a button decoration substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface immediately below the pressing operation unit 405. The button decoration board 432 is locked and held on the lower surface of the operation section holding member 416 by the board holding claws 416g of the operation section holding member 416.

The dial operation part 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a light-transmissive material, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder part 401a extending in the vertical direction and an outer side from the upper end of the inner cylinder part 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extending surface, an outer cylinder portion 401c extending cylindrically downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b, and an outer cylinder portion 401c shorter than the inner cylinder portion 401a, and an outer cylinder. A flange portion 401d that extends annularly outward from the lower end of the portion 401c is mainly provided. The outer diameter of the collar portion 401d of the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422a of the upper cover 422. In addition, the dial operating portion 401 includes a coupling locking portion (see FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner tubular portion 401a, and the coupling locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is locked, whereby the dial operating portion 401a is locked. The 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected to each other.

Further, the dial operation portion 401 further includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes toward the center from the inner wall of the inner cylindrical portion 401a at a position lower than the upper end by a predetermined distance. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner circumference of the inner tubular portion 401a. The protrusion 401f can come into contact with the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, the details of which will be described later. The step portion 407a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operation portion 401. By abutting against the portion 401f, it is possible to prevent the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) from further retracting into the inner cylindrical portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

As shown in the drawing, the contacting surfaces of the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 are lowered toward the center of the dial operation portion 401. The inclined surface is formed so as to have a large contact area when they abut each other. Thus, the load from the pressing operation portion 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operating portion 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operating portion 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation portion 405 side. It has become.

The pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an upper end closed, and has a bottomed tubular button body 406, a button cap 407 closing the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. A cap inner 408 disposed inside the 407 and sandwiched between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407 is provided. The button body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 has a truncated cone shape in which the lower surface of the bottom portion narrows downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the truncated cone shape. In addition, a through hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided at the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape, and the light from the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is applied to the button cap 407 and the button inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It is like this.

Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406b extending downward from the lower outer periphery and having a lower end protruding outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and the locking claws 406b of the operation portion holding member 416 are provided. By locking with the locking projection 416f (see FIG. 49 and FIG. 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward movement end is prevented so that the button body 406 does not come off from the button support 416b. It can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button holding cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 is provided with an abutting portion that prevents the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button body 406 (depressing operation portion 405) does not rotate inside the button support cylinder 416b. It should be noted that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the clearance causes the button body 406 to move at a predetermined angle. It can be rotated within a range.

Further, the button body 406 includes a pressure detection piece 406c extending downward from a position different from the lower portion of the outer periphery of the locking claw 406b and detectable by the pressure detection sensor 432c of the button decoration substrate 432. The pressing detection piece 406c is detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c when the button body 406 (the pressing operation portion 405) moves downward against the biasing force of the spring 418.

Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 has an outer diameter below the substantially center in the vertical direction smaller than that on the upper side, and a step portion 407a is provided between the upper side and the lower side. Are formed. In the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405), the lower side of the step portion 407a is smaller than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and the upper side of the step portion 407a is the dial operation portion. The diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the 401 and larger than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. Accordingly, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) is inserted into the inner tubular portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operating portion 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating portion 401. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) cannot be further retracted into the inner cylindrical portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation portion 405 are formed of a material having a light-transmitting ring. The character "Push" is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 has a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on the outer circumference of the annular shape. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416, and has a ring-shaped sliding contact with the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. The moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the sliding gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. You can do it.

Further, the driven gear 410 is provided with a pair of connecting locking claws 410b that extend upward from the facing positions of the upper ends and project inward. The driven gear 410 and the dial operation part 401 are integrally rotatably connected by being engaged with the connection engagement part 401e of the inner cylinder part 401a.

Further, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detecting pieces 410c that project downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detecting pieces 410c are adapted to be detected by a pair of rotation detecting sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432, and the details of the rotation detecting pieces 410c will be described later. With the slit 410d formed between them, the rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c. In this example, the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d have substantially the same length in the circumferential direction.

The drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410, as shown in the figure, and is fixed so as to rotate integrally with the rotary shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor that can arbitrarily control the rotation direction, rotation speed, and rotation angle. The dial drive motor 414 rotates the drive gear 412 via the rotation shaft. Thus, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. Further, by rotating the drive gear 412 (rotating shaft) in the forward and reverse directions in small steps by the dial drive motor 414, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated. In addition, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped for a short time at each predetermined rotation angle based on the detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, etc. It is possible to add a feeling.

Further, the operation portion holding member 416 of the operation unit 400 has an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 that protrudes upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a in a tubular shape. A button support cylinder 416b that slidably supports the vertical direction, and a locking projection 416f (locking projection 416f formed on the inner peripheral surface near the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and capable of locking the locking claw 406b of the button body 406). 49 and 50), and a through hole 416c for sending light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 through the center of the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b to the inside of the button support cylinder 416b (pressing operation portion 405). An opening 416d through which the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432 can pass through the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction, and the bottom portion inside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction. An opening 416e through which the pressure detection sensor 432c that is attached to the button decoration board 432 is seen from the upper side, and a pair of board holding claws 416g that extend downward from the lower surface and hold the button decoration board 432. I have it.

Although not shown in detail, the operation portion holding member 416 is disposed inside the button support cylinder 416b, forms a predetermined amount of clearance in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button body 406, and locks the same. It further includes a plurality of contact portions that can contact the claws 406b. The contact portion allows the button main body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) to rotate within a predetermined angle range, and prevents the button main body 406 from rotating in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the operation portion holding member 416 has a screw hole for fixing to the base member 420, a positioning boss for positioning the base member 420 and the button decoration substrate 432, and the like at appropriate positions. Is equipped with.

The operation portion holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation portion 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 on the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing it on the gear rail 416a. It can be rotatably supported. Further, by inserting the button body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation portion 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button body 406. .. A coil-shaped spring 418 is arranged between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button body 406. 405) is urged upward.

The base member 420 of the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, so that the operation unit 400 is unlikely to be damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit. The base member 420 vertically penetrates a lower recess 420b that is recessed upward so that the outer periphery of the operation holding member 416 can be fitted and a bottom portion (ceiling part) of the lower recess 420b, and vertically penetrates the operation portion holding member 416. An opening 420a having an inner shape that allows the gear rail 416a to pass therethrough, and an upper recess 420c that is disposed on the opposite side of the lower recess 420b with the opening 420a interposed therebetween and that is recessed downward at least to accommodate the driven gear 410 are provided. I have it. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b, and a motor mounting portion 420d for mounting the dial drive motor 414 and downward from the outside of the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in this example) leg portions 420e projecting by a predetermined amount, and a positioning hole 420f opening downward at the lower end of each leg portion 420e.

In addition, the base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 disposed above the upper concave portion 420c, and a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g located above different positions outside the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decoration board 430 protruding to the bottom. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses for mounting the respective members, mounting holes and the like at appropriate positions on the upper surface and the lower surface thereof.

The base member 420 has a predetermined screw after the operation portion holding member 416 is fitted and inserted into the lower recess portion 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass through the opening 420a in the center. The operation portion holding member 416 can be supported by screwing the operation portion holding member 416 from above into the operation portion holding member 416 through the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the base member 420 has the upper end of the gear rail 416a slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, slightly above the bottom surface of the upper recess 420c when the operation member holding member 416 is supported. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

Further, the leg portion 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof that fits with a positioning protrusion 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424, which will be described later. The 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions with respect to each other. The board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 projects to a position above the driven gear 410 housed in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It does not come into contact with the gear 410.

Further, the base member 420 is configured to come into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 in the surface by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor attachment portion 420d, and the heat from the dial drive motor 414 is attached to the base member 420 side. The heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be radiated by the base member 420. As a result, it is possible to suppress overheating of the dial drive motor 414, and it is possible to prevent a malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 and the like due to overheating.

The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and has an opening 422a having an inner diameter through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the collar portion 401d cannot pass, on the top plate thereof. ing. The top cover 422 has a long direction (left-right direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation portion 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. It is formed so as to extend, and has engaging claws 422b protruding downward at both ends in the longitudinal direction thereof. By engaging the engaging claws 422b with the engaging portions 424b of the lower cover 424, The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

The upper cover 422 extends downward from the outer periphery of one side (front side of the pachinko machine 1) in the minor axis direction (front-back direction of the pachinko machine 1) and has a lower end protruding outwardly, which is a claw-shaped locking piece 422c. Equipped with. The locking piece 422c can be locked with the upper plate front decoration member 316 of the plate unit 300. By locking the locking piece 422c with the upper plate front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming off from the operation unit mounting portion 314c upward.

In the upper cover 422, the dial operation portion 401 is attached to the opening 422a from below with the operation portion holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decorative substrate 430, the dial member 401 and the like attached to the base member 420. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so as to pass therethrough, it is possible to prevent the dial operation part 401 from coming off upward by the opening 422a.

On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open upper side, and has an outer peripheral shape that is substantially the same as the outer periphery of the upper cover 422. A positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted into the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420d is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b that are engageable with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at upper portions of both ends in the long axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claws 422b.

As shown in the drawing, the cover body 426 of the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a that vertically penetrates through the center and allows the upper cover 422 to pass through, and extends outward from the left and right sides of the opening 426a to mount the operation unit of the dish unit 300. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided.

The operation unit 400 of this example is adapted to be attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426, and although not shown in detail, it is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300. In this state, the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached so that the lower surface thereof is slightly above the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm). The cover main body 426 is elastically deformed when a pressing operation is performed or a tapping operation is performed, so that the impact can be mitigated.

In the operation unit 400, with the inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426 is attached to the operation unit attaching portion 314c of the dish unit 300 with a predetermined screw, and then, The structure is such that the inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are attached to the upper surface of the cover body 426.

In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation portion 401 has a circumferential length in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and a circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The lengths in the directions are the same. Further, the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432 have an interval in the circumferential direction corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 that is 2.5 times the length of the rotation detection piece 410 in the circumferential direction. It is said that. As a result, as will be described in detail later, when the player rotationally operates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in detection/non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection. The direction in which the dial operation unit 401 is rotating can be detected from the detection pattern of the rotation detecting piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b.

Further, the operation unit 400 of the present example can rotate the dial operation portion 401 in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414, which will be described later in detail. .. In addition, the operation unit 400 gradually rotates the dial operation unit 401 in a stepwise manner by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotationally operates the dial operation unit 401, It is possible to assist the rotation, prevent it from turning intentionally, and give a click feeling to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 in the forward and reverse directions.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of the present example, when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed downward, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 abuts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 as shown in FIG. Since the 407 (pressing operation portion 405) cannot be further retracted into the inner tubular portion 401e, the load applied to the pressing operation portion 405 is dialed via the step portion 407a and the protruding portion 401f. It can be dispersed to the operation unit 401 side, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is hard to break.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of the present example, the dial drive motor 414 is moved in small increments in a state where the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 are in contact with each other. By repeating turning and reversing, it is possible to vibrate the pressing operation unit 405 together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 can surprise the player and entertain the game or effect. It has become.

According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if the player or the like strongly hits the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. In addition to being operable, it is possible to improve the operability of the operation units 401 and 405, and it is possible to entertain the effect using the operation units 401 and 405 and prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing. it can.

In addition, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit, the dial operation unit 401 is inevitably hit and the operation unit The force of striking 401, 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and the concentration of hit impact can be suppressed to prevent the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 from being damaged. As a result, it is possible to make the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 capable of withstanding a smash, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to improve the operability of 405, entertain the effect using the operation units 401 and 405, and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, the base member 420 of the operation unit 400 is housed in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. As described above, the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the dish unit 300, and when the operation portions 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit with a shock or a load is applied, Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 abuts the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the impact and load can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the cover body 426, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 becomes the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After the contact, the impact and the load can be received by the bottom portion (dish unit 300) of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, so that the impacts and the like from the operation portions 401 and 405 are dispersed to avoid the concentration of the impact and the like. The operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 can improve impact resistance and load resistance.

Further, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of leg portions 420e protruding downward at a position away from the position supporting the operation portions 401 and 405, and the leg portions 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the dish unit 300. Even if the base member 420 is impacted by the operation portions 401 and 405 by coming into contact with the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c, the leg portions 420e are not arranged immediately below the impact, so the operation portions 401 and 405 of the base member 420 are not provided. The part supporting the member is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is bent (elastically deformed), so that the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300. It is possible to reduce the impact and prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

Further, since the operation portion holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from the lower side holds the dial operation portion 401 so that a part of the dial operation portion 401 overlaps with the base member 420 in plan view, the dial operation portion 401 is held. When the operating portion 401 is struck from the upper side, even if the operating portion holding member 416 holding the dial operating portion 401 comes off from the base member 420 and moves downward, the dial operating portion 401 contacts the upper surface of the base member 420. The base member 420 can restrict the downward movement of the dial operation unit 401, and can favorably prevent the dial operation unit 401 from falling.

Further, since the dial operation unit 401 having the pressing operation unit 405 arranged at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 in accordance with the game state, the dial operation unit 401 is arbitrarily rotated (rotationally driven including vibration). Thus, the player can be surprised to pay attention to the effect produced by the operation units 401 and 405, the player can be entertained, and the dial operation unit 401 is appropriately driven by the dial drive motor 414, whereby the dial operation unit is operated. It is possible to make the effect using 401 (pressing operation unit 405) more diverse and prevent it from getting tired, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, the dial operating unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, and the position of the rotary shaft of the dial driving motor 414 is, by definition, set to the dial operating unit 401 (driven gear). Since the position can be eccentric with respect to the position of the rotating shaft of (410), even if the dial operating unit 401 or the pressing operating unit 405 is strongly hit, the impact is transmitted via the rotating shaft of the dial operating unit 401. It is possible to avoid directly contacting the dial drive motor 414 and prevent the dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) from being damaged.

Further, since the diameter of the opening 420a of the base member 420 is smaller than that of the dial operating portion 401, and the dial rail 416a of the operating portion holding member 416 supports the dial operating portion 401 through the opening 420a, the dial operating portion 401 is supported. Even if the gear rail 416a (the operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to the impact or load from the 401, the dial operation unit 401 can abut against the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 will be It is possible to reliably prevent the depression from falling below 420. Further, since the dial operating portion 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operating portion 401 and the operating portion holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased, and the dial operating portion 401 can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operation portion holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing the impact and the load from.

Further, since the dial drive motor 414 that rotationally drives the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation motor 414 frequently rotationally drives the dial operation unit 401 or the dial drive motor 414. Although the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player in spite of the fact that the amount of heat generated by the excessive load on the dial drive motor 414 increases, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be satisfactorily dissipated and radiated through the base member 420, and it is possible to prevent the dial drive means 414 from being defective due to overheating, and at the same time, the dial drive means 414 can be prevented. It is possible to withstand a high load, and it is possible to fully embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using the dial driving means 414 as described above, and to entertain the player. Can be

Furthermore, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and a pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the pressing of the pressing operation unit 405 are provided, and the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are provided. Since it is possible to detect the rotation operation and the pressing operation of the player, it is possible to perform an effect according to the operation of the player based on the detection signal, and it is more convenient for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to provide a sense of realization, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game by entertaining the player. Further, since the dial decoration board 430 and the button decoration board 432 for illuminating the operation sections 401 and 405 are provided, the operation sections 401 and 405 can be illuminated and decorated, so that the operation sections 401 and 405 emit light. By doing so, the interest of the player can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

Further, when the pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step portion 407a of the pressing operation portion 405 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 are brought into contact with each other, so that the player operates the pressing operation portion 405. When is pressed, the dial drive motor 414 vibrates the dial operation part 401 by repeating forward/reverse rotation within a predetermined angle range, so that the dial operation part 401 is vibrated by virtue of the step 407a in contact with the protrusion 401f. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation for the pressing operation 405 without separately providing a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, and entertaining the effect using the operation unit 400. It is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. In addition, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405, which was thought not to move arbitrarily, can greatly surprise the player, which is good. It is possible to make people think that something is happening, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and prevent the interest from decreasing. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move freely, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400 is allowed to participate. In addition to facilitating the operation, the player can positively operate the operation unit 400, entertaining the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. Even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance and impact resistance of the pressing operation unit 405 can be improved. Can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged even if the pressing operation unit 405 is smashed, so that the game is prevented from being interrupted due to the damage to the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being deteriorated due to the interruption of the game.

Further, the pressing operation part 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range with respect to an axis extending in the vertical direction, and when the player presses the pressing operation part 405, a dial drive is performed. Even if the motor 414 drives the dial operation unit 401 to rotate, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from trying to rotate together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the player can operate the dial operation in the operation unit 400. The roles of the section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 can be surely recognized, and the player can be easily entertained with the operation unit 400, and the upper surface of the pressing operation section 405 can be guided. The characters "PUSH" displayed can be easily read by the player without turning or tilting greatly, and the player can be sure to recognize that the pressing operation unit 405 is operated by pressing. be able to.

Further, the dial operating portion 401 is provided with a protruding portion 401f protruding from the inner periphery of the inner tubular portion 401a toward the axial center side, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operating portion 405 has a smaller diameter below a predetermined vertical position. Since the stepped portion 407a formed by the above is provided, the inner peripheral surface of the inner tubular portion 401a of the dial operating portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operating portion 405 can be brought as close as possible at the upper end of the operation unit 400. In addition, the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance, and the inside of the operation unit 400 can be provided through the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dirt to enter, and to prevent the occurrence of a problem in which the foreign matter makes it difficult for the dial operation unit 401 to rotate and for the pressing operation unit 405 to become difficult to press. be able to.

Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation portion 405 and the dial operation portion 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed, a portion of the dial operation portion 401 in the circumferential direction is pressed. Since the contact can be made even at the position, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed with a feeling that it is tilted (a position deviated from the center of the pressing operation unit 405 to the outer periphery), the dial operation unit 401 is surely contacted. Therefore, the rotational drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. Further, since the dial operation portion 401 and the pressing operation portion 405 are in contact with each other in an annular shape, the load from the pressing operation portion 405 can be widely dispersed to the dial operation portion 401 side, and the load resistance with respect to the pressing operation portion 405 can be improved. Impact resistance can be further enhanced.

Further, since the contact portion between the pressing operation portion 405 and the dial operation portion 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to become lower toward the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation portion 401, there is a case where it is not inclined. By comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side via the dial operation unit 401. Further, the load from the pressing operation portion 405 can be radially distributed outward in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, preventing the load from concentrating and increasing the resistance of the operation unit 400. The loadability and shock resistance can be surely enhanced, the durability of the operation unit 400 can be enhanced, and the occurrence of malfunctions during the game can be reduced as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of forward/reverse rotation, not only the dial operation portion 401 is simply rotated, but also the dial operation portion 401 can be easily stopped at a predetermined position, forward/reverse rotation. The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) having the above-described operational effects can be surely embodied because it can be easily vibrated by repetition.

Further, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the plate unit 300 having the upper plate 301 for storing game balls, the plate unit 300 has a high strength and rigidity in order to store a large number of game balls. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently deal with a strong hit to the operation unit 400 (pressing operation portion 405), and it is possible to easily entertain the effect using the operation unit 400.

[1-2G. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51(A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 51(B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device as disassembled and seen from the rear. As shown in the drawing, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is mounted on the handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the handle insertion holes 334a of the plate side outer cover 334 of the plate unit 300. The handle base 502 is fixed and cylindrical and has a front end that bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis. The handle base 502 is disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502. A front end cover 506 that is disposed and fixed to the handle base 502 and cooperates with the handle base 502 to rotatably support the rear handle body 504.

Further, in the handle device 500, a rear end and a front end are rotatably supported by an inner base 508 attached to the front surface of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle main body 504, and a rear end and a front end are rotatably supported. A shaft member 510 that is integrally rotatable with 504 and that has a drive gear portion 510a on the outer periphery, a transmission gear 511 that meshes with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510, and a detection shaft portion 512a that is integrally rotatable with the transmission gear 511. The rotational position detection sensor 512 is sandwiched between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502.

Further, in the handle device 500, one end side is attached to the inner base 508 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 511, and the detection shaft portion 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is rotated clockwise in a front view through the transmission gear 511. The biasing auxiliary spring 514, the touch sensor 516 attached to the rear side of the inner base 508, the touch sensor 516 are attached to different positions on the rear surface of the inner base 508, and the firing stop switch 518 and the inner base 508. A one-shot button 520 that is rotatably supported and operates the firing stop switch 518, and one end side is attached to the handle base 502 and the other end side is attached to the handle body 504, and the handle body 504 is rotated to the initial rotation position (counterclockwise in front view). A handle return spring 522 for urging the handle return spring 522 so as to return it to the rotation end in the direction.

As shown in the figure, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of the present example is configured to have a rear end portion that is open at the front side and bulges rearward in a round shape, and has a rear end portion that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape. Three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the outer circumference of the cylinder. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 correspond to the three protrusions 143 in the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140, one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. It is arranged. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by inserting the handle base 502 into the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a fits with the protrusion 143.

In the handle device 500, an arcuate slit 504a arranged concentrically with the rotation axis of the handle body 504 is formed, and three mounting bosses 506a protruding rearward are formed on the front end cover 506. The mounting bosses 506a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 504a of the handle body 504. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 504a in the handle body 504 comes into contact with the mounting boss 506a of the front end cover 506, so that the rotation range of the handle body 504 is restricted.

Further, in the handle device 500, the handle main body 504 is formed with a locking projection 504b protruding rearward, and the other end side (front end side) of the coiled handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking projection 504b. By being locked, one end of the handle body 504 is biased by the handle return spring 522 attached to the handle base 502 so as to rotate counterclockwise in the front view.

The handle device 500 of this example is configured to be attached to the handle attaching portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 has a mounting surface that is inclined so as to face the outer side (open side) in a plan view seen from above, so that the handle mounting portion 114 is mounted via the handle bracket 140. The device 500 also inclines outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip portion inclines so as to face the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1). It is designed to be attached and fixed to 5. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle device 500, and can easily perform the turning operation without feeling uncomfortable in the turning operation.

Further, in the handle device 500, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor, and when the handle main body 504 (handle device 500) is rotated, the rotational position detection sensor 512 of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is transmitted via the shaft member 510 and the transmission gear 511. The detection shaft portion 512a will rotate. Then, the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball firing device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the turning position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle body 504 and the front end cover 508 are plated with a conductive material, and the touch sensor 516 detects the contact when the player contacts the handle body 504 or the like. Then, when the handle main body 504 rotates while the touch sensor 516 detects the contact of the player, the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength corresponding to the rotation, and the game ball is hit. You can do it. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 by some method without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball cannot be hit, It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the original game and reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, when the player presses the one-shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the one-shot button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 (see FIG. 161) controls the firing solenoid 654. The rotation drive can be stopped. Thereby, without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, it is possible to temporarily stop the shooting of the game ball, and by releasing the pressing operation of the one-shot button 520, before operating the one-shot button 520. It is possible to shoot a game ball with the driving strength.

In the handle device 500 of this example, after the rotation operation of the handle body 504 is electrically detected by the rotation position detection sensor 512, the firing control unit 4120 detects the rotation position from the rotation position detection sensor 512. Since the rotational drive strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 are provided as in the conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, a joint unit) mechanism so that the frame 5 is linked to each other when the frame 5 is closed, and the link is released when the door frame 5 is opened. Therefore, the structure of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. At the same time, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of a defect in the joint unit, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest due to a defect in hitting the game ball.

[1-2H. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. FIG. 52(A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 52(B) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 53 is a front view showing a state in which the front cover of the foul cover unit is removed.

The foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 below the game window 101, and is shot by a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 700 described later or a hitting ball launching device 650. Nevertheless, the game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the game area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example is provided with a cover base 542 having a flow path for a plurality of game balls inside, the front side of which is open, and a front cover 544 which closes the front end of the cover base 542.

As shown in FIG. 52(B), the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 includes a first ball entrance 542a that is disposed in the upper right corner in rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a cover base that communicates with the first ball entrance. A first ball passage 542b that spreads to the right in front view as it goes toward the front end of 542, and a second ball entrance 542c that is arranged outside the first ball entrance 542a (right side in rear view) and is larger than the first ball entrance 542a, Inside the cover base 542, which communicates with the second ball passage 542d, there is provided a second ball inlet 542c which extends downward and is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower right corner in a front view. The first ball entrance 542a and the second ball entrance 542c are the normal ball exit 774 and the full ball exit 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. The second ball passage 542d in the cover base 542 is such that the height of the portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end is approximately three times the height of the outer diameter of the game ball, as shown in the figure. A storage space 546 capable of storing a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

In addition, the cover base 542 is arranged at a substantially central upper portion in the left-right direction and communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e that is open upward, and can communicate the game ball to an upper part near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d. And a foul ball passage 542f. Further, the cover base 542 includes an opening/closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening/closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 on the rear surface below the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening/closing operation piece 542g contacts the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening/closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening/closing crank 793. The open/close shutter 792 can be opened.

The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, is arranged in the upper left corner of the front view, communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 540, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a and the second ball outlet 544b which is arranged in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a of the front cover 544 is adapted to be connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300 through the cutout portion 101a of the door frame base unit 100. The second ball outlet 544b is connected to the rear end of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h of the dish unit 300 through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base body 110.

In the foul cover unit 540 of this example, the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a passes through the first ball passage 542b to the first ball outlet. The upper plate 301 can be supplied from 544a through the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300. In addition, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full tank ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage 542d to the second ball outlet. 544b can supply the lower plate 302 to the lower plate 302 through the lower plate ball supply trough 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g.

Further, although the details of the foul cover unit 540 will be described later, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is located below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, when the game ball shot by the hitting ball launching device 650 does not reach the inside of the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges the game ball received at the foul ball inlet 542e to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 from the second ball outlet 544b through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d (supply). ) You can do it.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 of the present example forms the upstream (left side in front view) side surface of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and the cover base 542 is swingable by the game balls stored in the accommodation space 546. Of the swing member 548 that is pivotally supported, a full tank detection sensor 550 that detects the swing of the swing member 548, and a spring that biases the swing member 548 in a direction in which the full member detection sensor 550 does not detect the swing member 548. And 552. As shown in FIG. 53, the swinging member 548 has a lower end rotatably supported by the cover base 542 and an upper end that rotates leftward when viewed from the front. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. Further, the swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a position where it is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the rocking member 548 has a detection piece 548a protruding outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. ..

Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 arranged at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and a plate-shaped earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 in rear view. , Is provided, and static electricity generated by rolling resistance due to circulation of the game balls can be removed.

In this example, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540, Even when the upper plate 301 is full, when the game balls are further paid out from the prize ball unit 700, the game balls stay in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further, the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770. When the inside of the normal passage 773 on the upstream side is also filled, the game balls will flow to the full tank passage 775 side through the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 79), and the full tank branch unit 770 It is supplied from the full tank outlet 776 to the lower tray 302 of the dish unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b.

Then, when the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 is filled with the game balls, the game balls cannot be output from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and the second ball passage 542d stays in the accommodation space 546. Game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and a lot of the game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swinging member 548 and resists the biasing force of the spring 552. The upper end of the rocking member 548 moves to the left. When the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 161) stops the payout of the game balls from the prize ball unit 700, and the game is played. It is designed to give a notification to a person to discharge the game ball in the dish unit 300 to the outside.

In addition, when the game ball in the accommodation space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 returns to a substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, the detection piece 548a by the full tank detection sensor 550 is detected. It is not detected, and the payout of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 is restarted.

[1-2I. Ball feeding unit]
Subsequently, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 54 to 57. 54A is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and FIG. 54B is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. 55 is a rear view of the ball feeding unit. Further, FIG. 56A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 56B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case removed. Further, FIG. 57(A) is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feeding unit, FIG. 57(B) is a front view of the fraud prevention member, and FIG. 57(C) is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member seen from the front. , (D) are explanatory views showing the action of the fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 one by one, and also the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. It is possible to pull out to the lower tray 302 by operating the upper tray ball removing button 341 of the upper tray ball removing mechanism 340.

In this ball feeding unit 580, game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the front-back direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 having a penetrating entrance 581a and a ball outlet 581b opening to the lower side of the entrance 581a and having an open rear, and closing the rear end of the front cover 581 and opening the front. Box-shaped, a rear cover 582 having a batting ball supply port 582a for supplying a gaming ball that has penetrated in the front-rear direction and entered from an entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the batting ball launcher 650, a rear cover 582 and a front cover. A ball removing member 583 that is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and has a partition portion 583a that partitions the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581; , The game balls on the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 are sent to the hitting ball supply port 582a of the rear cover one by one, and are supported rotatably around an axis extending vertically between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. And a ball feeding solenoid 585 for rotating the ball feeding member 584. In this example, as shown in the drawing, the ball feeding member 584 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 581a in a front view, the ball removing member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right side. It is arranged.

The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball removing port 581b in a front view. An operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583, which will be described later, extends forward from 581c. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a, and when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guiding channel 344b in the upper dish ball punching base 344. Is formed to close.

Further, the ball removing member 583 divides the space between the entrance 581a and the ball removing opening 581b below the entrance 581a, and the upper surface of the partitioning portion 583a is lowered toward the ball feeding member 584. It extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 584, bends in a V shape from the vicinity of the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b, and the lower end thereof extends around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. A rotatable rod portion 583b rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 583c projecting forward from the upper end of the rotatable rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod 583c. And a weight portion 583d that protrudes to the opposite side from the partition portion 583a. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to project forward through an arcuate slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 54), and the ball feeding opening of the door frame base body 110. The upper plate of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300 is brought into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343 a via the 113.

Further, the ball feeding member 584 includes a blocking portion 584a which is fan-shaped in a plan view around a rotation axis extending in the up-down direction and facing the direction of the entrance 581a and the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583, and the blocking portion 584a. A ball holding portion 584b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end toward the axis of rotation is provided, and a rod-shaped rod portion 584c that extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are each formed within an angle range of about 90° about the axis of rotation. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feeding member 584 is rotated around the axis of rotation by moving the rod portion 584c arranged at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the left-right direction. ing.

In the ball feeding member 584, the blocking portion 584a faces the partition portion 583a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a. It is adapted to rotate with respect to the holding position. When the ball feeding member 584 is in the supply position, the game ball held in the ball holding portion 584b is supplied to the ball hitting launcher 650 from the ball hitting supply port 582a, and enters the partition part 583a from the entrance 581a. The blocking section 584a blocks the movement of the ball toward the ball holding section 584b (ball hitting supply port 582a) side and remains in the state of staying on the partition section 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 584 is rotated to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the side of the rod portion 584c closes the hit ball supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition part 583a is held in the ball holding part 584b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 580 is moved forward and backward by the movement of the ball feeding operation rod 586 whose tip swings vertically due to the driving (energization) of the ball feeding solenoid 585, and the movement of the tip swinging vertically in the ball feeding operation rod 586. A ball feed crank 587 that rotates about an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 about an axis extending in the up-down direction. The ball feed crank 587 includes an engaging portion 587a which is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 and extends in the left-right direction, and a side of the engaging portion 587a which engages with the ball feed operating rod 586. Is disposed on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582, and a ball feeding member 584 extending upward from the shaft portion 587b. And a transmission portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 584c (see FIG. 56) that protrudes downward from a position that is eccentric with respect to the center of rotation in FIG.

The ball feeding unit 580 of this example uses a ball feeding actuating rod 586 and a ball feeding crank 587 to transmit the movement of the ball feeding actuating rod 586 which is swung by the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 moving forward and backward. The 584 can be rotated. When the ball feeding solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feeding actuating rod 586 swinging away from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In the state, the ball feeding member 584 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feeding actuating rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the swinging tip is positioned upward, so that the ball feeding member 584 is rotated to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 584 receives one game ball, and when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 584 is received. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hitting ball launcher 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled by the firing control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 654.

Further, although the ball removing member 583 rotatably supported in the ball feeding unit 580 of the present example receives a moment to rotate in the counterclockwise direction in front view by the weight portion 583c, The operation rod 583c protruding forward comes into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300, so that the rotation thereof is restricted. In normal times, the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 partitions between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball outlet 581b side. Then, when the player presses down the upper plate ball removing button 341 of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 in the plate unit 300, the upper plate ball removing slider 343 slides downward together with the contact piece 343a and abuts. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

In this way, the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removing mechanism 340, whereby the ball removing member 583 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front and the entrance by the partition 583a. The partition between 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball removing channel 344c of the upper plate ball removing base 344 of the plate unit 300. , Is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

Since the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removing slider 343 with which the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 abuts is urged upward by the coil spring, the game balls are vigorously supplied onto the partition 581a. Also, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removing member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball is The partition portion 583a can be prevented from bouncing back.

Further, the ball feeding unit 580 of this example is provided with a rectangular mounting recess 582b (see FIG. 56B and the like) which is recessed forward rightward in a rear view of the hitting ball supply port 582a in the rear cover 582. At the same time, a fraud prevention member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b. The fraud prevention member 588 of the ball feeding unit 580 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 582a of the rear cover 582 from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 55 and the like, the fraud prevention member 588 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape with the entire outer diameter in a rear view. The upper piece part 588b and the lower piece part 588c, which are vertically divided with the dividing line 588a extending a predetermined length toward the base end side (right side) as a boundary, and the tips of the upper piece part 588b and the lower piece part 588c, V formed between the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c by bending the base end side of the upper piece portion 588b in a direction perpendicular (backward) to the general surface of the tamperproof member 588 so as to move away from each other. It has a character-shaped cutting portion 588d and an inclined portion 588e formed at the tips of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and inclined toward the cutting portion 588d.

As shown in the figure, the fraud prevention member 588 is bent at the base end side of the upper piece portion 588b so that the tip end (the left end side in rear view) of the upper piece portion 588b is moved backward, so that the cutting portion 588d is formed. It is formed in a V shape in a plan view, and the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is inserted inside the V shape. In the cut portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, the lower side of the upper piece portion 588b and the upper side of the lower piece portion 588c intersect at a predetermined angle in a plan view, and the gap becomes narrower toward the base end side. Is formed.

Further, the inclined portion 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 is formed at the tip of the cutting portion 588d, and the wire Iw attached to the illegal gaming ball I by the inclined portion 588e can be guided and guided into the cutting portion 588d. It is like this. In the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted from the rear side in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 as shown in the drawing, and the cutting portion 588d in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 is provided. The portion corresponding to the portion where the mark is formed penetrates in the front-rear direction, and at the same time, is formed to communicate with the hit ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in a shape in which the hit ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

According to this fraud prevention member 588, the illegal gaming ball I with the wire Iw attached is supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the ball striking device 650, and the fraudulent gaming ball I is played by the ball striking device 650 in the game area of the game board 4. When struck into the inside 1100, the illegal game ball I launched by the batted ball launching device 650 moves diagonally to the upper left along the launch rail 660 in a front view, and between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. Attempt to enter the game area 1100 through. At this time, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I will be pulled by the momentum of the hit game ball I, and the wire rod Iw is different from the illegal moving path of the game ball I, and the path of the game ball. It will move along the route connecting the shortest distance within. Therefore, the wire Iw extending from the dish unit 300 to the side of the ball launching device 650 through the ball supply port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 is such that the game ball I moves to the upper left direction in the front view (upper right direction in the rear view). In order to move on the shortest route, the ball is pulled toward the upper right corner of the ball hitting supply port 582a in the rear view and moves into the mounting recess 582b formed in the upper right corner of the ball hitting supply port 582a in the rear view. Then, the wire Iw that has moved to the portion (inside the mounting recess 582b) extending to the right in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 582a is cut by the pair of inclined portions 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 arranged at that position. After being guided to the inside of 588d, it is further pulled to the right in the rear view by the impulsive force of the game ball I.

Thereby, the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled by the momentum of the illegal game ball I at the cutting portion 588d of the illegality preventing member 588 in the direction in which the gap is narrowed (left direction in front view). Then, the cutting portion 588d acts on the wire Iw by friction or shearing force (see FIG. 57D). At this time, the illegal game ball I with the wire Iw is dampened by the momentum due to the friction or the like acting on the wire Iw, so that it does not enter the game area 1100 and is between the outer rail 1111 and the launch rail 660. Will be discharged through.

Therefore, since the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, an illegal act is performed with the illegal game ball I attached with the wire rod Iw in the game area 605. You can prevent it from being exposed. Even if an illegal game ball I enters the game area 1100, the wire rod Iw can be cut by the illegality preventing member 588 as described above, so that the illegal act cannot be performed. Further, even if the wire rod Iw could not be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire rod Iw bites into the V-shaped cutting portion 588d to damp the illegal momentum of the illegal game ball I and the game area 1100. Since it is possible to prevent the intrusion into the inside, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

As described above, according to this example, after the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301 and the game balls are supplied to the ball feeding unit 580, the player uses the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5. When operated, the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580 is driven to send the game ball to the hitting ball launching device 650, and the ball hitting device 650 drives the game ball into the game area 1100, whereby the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is reached. The game is played in the game area 1100 that is visible through the game, and the player can be entertained, and a feed mechanism (ball feed member 584 or ball feed solenoid 585) is provided on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. Etc.) and a discharging mechanism (ball-stripping member 583) are arranged, so that not only the ball-sending member 584 and the ball-stripping member 583 but also the ball-sending member 584 and the ball-striking device 650 are possible. When the game balls in the upper plate 301 are discharged by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341, the number of game balls remaining on the ball feeding member 584 side can be reduced as much as possible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and prevent the interest from being lowered.

Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 having the ball removing member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, it is possible to increase the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300, and to hit the game ball. It is possible to prevent the game balls in the upper plate 301 from disappearing early by the operation, and to prevent the inside of the upper plate 301 from being filled up with the game balls in an early stage. As a result, it is possible to reduce the player's annoyance and suppress a decrease in interest, and the size of the plate unit 300 can be reduced while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301, so that the game is relatively performed. The area 1100 can be made large (wide) to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention.

Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided with the ball feed member 583, compared with a case where the ball feed member 584 and the ball feed member 583 are provided separately, only the ball feed unit 580 is attached to the ball feed member 580. Since the 584 and the ball removing member 583 can be attached to each other, the labor for assembling can be simplified, the feeding unit 580 can be easily replaced, and the ball feeding member 584 and the ball removing member 583 have a problem. However, even if the ball feeding unit 580 is replaced, the problem can be easily solved.

Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, as compared with the case where the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side, the upper dish ball It is not necessary to configure a transmission mechanism (upper plate ball removing mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the removing button 341 to the ball removing member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 so as to straddle the openable/closable door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The configuration of the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, compared with the case where the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side, the transmission mechanism ( It is possible to avoid the risk that the transmission mechanism is quickly consumed and malfunctions or is damaged due to the interruption of the upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340), and the reliability of the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feeding unit 580 and the like. And durability can be improved.

Further, since the upper plate ball removing button 341 is pressed downward, only by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 341 downward, the game balls can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302, or the upper plate 301. It is possible to stop the discharge of the game balls from, and it is possible for the player to easily operate the ball removing operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball removing button 341.

Further, the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 is made movable by the movement of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 which slides in the vertical direction in response to the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341. At the same time, since the partition part 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, it is possible to reduce the horizontal movement range of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 and the partition part 583a as small as possible, and the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 and the ball feeding device are provided. The unit 580 can be downsized, and the pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-described operational effects can be provided.

Further, the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 is biased upward, and when the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 is in the raised position, the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 connects the admission port 581a and the hitting ball supply port 582a. Therefore, even if the game ball from the upper plate 301 vigorously abuts on the partition part 583a, the impact can be alleviated by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removing slider 343, and the partition part 583a (ball removing member The durability of 583) can be improved. Further, since the impact on the partition 583a can be alleviated by the urging force acting on the upper bowl ball removing slider 343, even if the game ball collides with the partition 583a, it can be made difficult to splash and the splash of the game ball can be prevented. Thus, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 and the like from being damaged and causing a problem.

Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, compared to the case where the partition portion 583a is slid, it relates to the movement of the partition portion 583a when the load of the game ball is applied to the partition portion 583a. Friction loss can be reduced, the operation of the upper bowl ball removal button 341 can be lightened to improve operability, and the moving range of the partition portion 583a in the planar projection can be reduced. The effect of can be achieved.

Further, since the partition part 583a is rotated by its own weight in the direction in which the entry port 581a and the ball removal port 581b communicate with each other, when a problem occurs in the partition part 583a or the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340, the partition part 583a Is rotated by its own weight so that the entrance and discharge ports are in communication with each other, and the game medium in the storage tray is sent to the feed mechanism (insertion device) side even though the discharge operation section is not operated. Since it is not discharged to the player side, it can be made known to the player that the pachinko machine 1 is in trouble, and it can be moved to the pachinko machine 1 with no trouble, which is interesting. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

Further, in the ball removing member 583, the partition portion 583a is rotated through the bent rotation rod portion 583b. Therefore, when the game ball collides with the partition portion 583a, the impact is bent. The impact is linearly transmitted to the rotary shaft by dispersing the light with the rotary shaft 583b or absorbing it by the bending of the rotary rod portion 583b, and the durability of the ball removing member 583 is improved. Can be increased.

Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged immediately below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, when discharging the game ball in the upper plate 301, the left and right sides of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580 are discharged. It is possible to minimize the movement in the direction, improve the passage of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580, and discharge the game ball satisfactorily. Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge route of the game balls in the ball feeding unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feeding unit 580 can serve as a discharging mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 from unnecessarily increasing in size.

Further, the fraud prevention member 588 is attached to the attachment recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the fraud prevention member 588 (cutting portion 588d) is arranged at a position as close as possible to the ball striking device 650. As a result, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I in the fastest (impulsive) state immediately after being launched by the hitting ball launching device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d. With respect to the wire Iw being pulled fast (strongly), the wire Iw can be surely cut, and the illegal momentum of the game ball I is attenuated to prevent it from entering the game area 1100. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent an illegal act from being performed by the illegal game ball I.

Further, since the fraud prevention member 588 having the cutting portion 588d is mounted in the mounting concave portion 582b which is recessed from the rear surface of the rear cover 582 toward the front side, it is necessary to form the V-shaped cutting portion 588d. The upper piece portion 588b bent rearward may not be projected rearward from the rear end surface of the rear cover 582, and the upper piece portion 588b of the fraud prevention member 588 may injure an operator during assembly or the like. It is possible to prevent it.

In addition, in the fraud prevention member 588 capable of cutting the wire Iw attached to the illegal gaming ball I, the upper piece 588b on the upper side is bent backward with the dividing line 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate material being sandwiched. Thus, the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed, so that the cutting portion 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced. The increase can be suppressed.

[1-2J. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. This glass unit 590 has an annular vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 that is formed of synthetic resin and has an opening that is approximately the same size as the game window 101, and two pieces that close the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592, respectively. And a transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 108). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 includes two stopper pieces 592a which are disposed on the upper portions of the left and right sides and extend outward in a plate shape, and a plate-like engagement portion which extends in the left-right direction along the lower end and extends downward. And a stop piece 592b.

In this glass unit 590, the locking piece 592b at the lower end is locked so as to engage with the vertical bending protrusion 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. Then, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit supporting step 110a of the door frame base body 110, and the stop piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190, so that the door frame It is detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIG. 21 and the like).

[1-2K. Modeling decoration on door frame]
Next, a modeling decoration on the door frame 5, that is, a geometrical decoration will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20, and 58. FIG. 58 is a cross-sectional view showing the door frame by cutting it at a substantially vertical center. As illustrated, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls lined up and down below the vertically elongated oval game window 101. For driving the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the transparent glass unit 590 closing the game window 101, on the right side of the lower plate 302 in front view. A handle device 500 is arranged. The door frame 5 has the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 2200, and the upper decoration unit 280 arranged so as to surround the left and right and the upper side of the game window 101, and surrounds the lower side of the game window 101. Thus, the dish unit 300 is arranged.

The door frame 5 has greatly different appearances on both sides of the game window 101, and the right side has a rugged natural rock-like appearance due to the side lens 210 forming the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200. On the other hand, the left side lower decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244, which are visible from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decorative unit 240, have a metallic sharp and artificial appearance. Has become.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the door frame 5 differs in the amount of forward projection between the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the right side decoration unit 200 is the left side decoration unit. It projects more than 240 forward. Further, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed in a shape that is pointed forward, whereas the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed in a gently curved plane shape.

Accordingly, in the door frame 5 of the present example, when viewed from the front right, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 appear to be volumes similar to each other (see FIG. 19), while the left front When viewed from the above, the right side decoration unit 200 looks larger than the left side decoration unit 240 and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 is almost invisible, so that different impressions can be given depending on the standing position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1. It is like this. In other words, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 changes depending on the position of the pachinko machine 1 relative to the pachinko machine 1 so that the pachinko machine 1 can be made to appear as if it were a different type of pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced in appealing to the player and can strongly attract the player's interest.

Further, since the front appearance of the door frame 5 is left-right asymmetrical, for example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are lined up in the left-right direction in an island facility of a game hall, etc., the overall appearance of the island facility feels smooth and solid. By arranging the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of different configurations alternately, it is possible to give a rhythmic impression and to give the player an exciting appearance (atmosphere). Therefore, the appealing power to the player can be enhanced and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

In addition, the door frame 5 causes the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, etc. provided in each unit 200, 220, 280, 300 to emit light, thereby causing the game window 101. It is designed to be able to emit light with any color so as to surround the. Further, among the LEDs mounted on the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 provided on the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220, the LEDs 214b, 216b arranged behind the side flash lenses 204, 246 are included. , 254b, 256 are turned on or off to change the mode of the light emission decoration surrounding the game window 101.

[1-2L. Luminous decoration on door frame]
Next, the light emitting decoration on the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 59 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs for light emission decoration on the door frame. Further, FIG. 60 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment is a ring-shaped outer periphery of the game window 101 that substantially corresponds to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the dish unit 300. It is formed so as to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, 300 is equipped with a decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 on which LEDs are mounted, and the gaming window 101 is made to emit light as appropriate. The outer circumference of the can be decorated with light emission.

As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer circumference except for the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of circumferences of the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens parts 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 extend along a radial axis centering around the lower part of the left and right center of the game window 101. Is disposed between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other.

In the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, whereas the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 is. The peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by a single smooth curved surface. Further, in the door frame 5, side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light are arranged behind the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. In the left side decoration unit 240, an inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a is arranged between the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252.

Further, the door frame 5 is behind the side inner lenses 212 and 252 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the right side upper decoration board 214, the right side lower decoration board 216, and the left side upper decoration board 254. , And a lower left side decorative board 256 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front surface of each decorative board 214, 216, 254, 256. ing.

The right side upper decoration substrate 214, the right side lower decoration substrate 216, the left side upper decoration substrate 254, and the left side lower decoration substrate 256, which are arranged on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, have circumferential lens portions 210a and 250a, respectively. It is provided with LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a arranged at corresponding positions and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the emission lens sections 210b, 250b (side flash lenses 204, 246). .. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the emission lens portions 210b, 250b have relatively high brightness. It is used as an LED. Further, the two LEDs 214c arranged at the upper right end of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 are a green LED and a red LED.

In this example, the surfaces of the right-side upper decorative substrate 214, the right-side lower decorative substrate 216, the left-side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left-side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist and white printing (for example, silk printing). ), white coating, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the light from the player side is reflected by the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b and the like are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210, 250 from becoming too dark and unattractive to look, and by reflecting the light emitted from the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. to the player side by the substrate, The lenses 210 and 250 can be illuminated and decorated brighter.

As described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the end portions of the upper portions of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that face the left-right center of the door frame 5. It is formed and decorates the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decoration unit 280 includes an upper central lens 284 arranged at the center in the left-right direction, an annular central ring lens portion 282b arranged on the outer periphery of the upper central lens 284, and an outer side outside the central ring lens portion 282b. And four extension frame lens portions 282c extending to the. The front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side in front view is covered with an upper lower decorative cover 294.

The upper decoration unit 280 includes an upper central lens 284 and an upper central decorative substrate 288 disposed behind the central ring lens portion 282b of the upper lens 282, and an upper lens 282 extending laterally from the upper central decorative substrate 288. And an upper side decoration substrate 290 disposed on the rear side of the extension frame lens portion 282c and the upper central decoration substrate 288. A plurality of LEDs 288a corresponding to the upper central lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288b corresponding to the central ring lens portion 282b are mounted on the front surface of the upper central decoration substrate 288, and the upper central lens 284 and the central ring lens portion 282b are mounted. It is possible to individually decorate the and. In addition, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portions 282c are mounted on the front surface of the upper side decoration substrate 290, and each extension frame lens portion 282c can be illuminated and decorated. .. The LEDs 288a, 288b, 290a of the upper central decoration substrate 288 and the upper side decoration substrate 290 are full-color LEDs.

Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, the outer surface is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and has an appearance continuous with the appearance of the right side decoration unit 200. In this plate unit 300, an upper plate decoration board 322 is arranged on the rear side of the upper plate front decoration member 316, and a plurality of LEDs 322 a mounted on the upper plate decoration board 322 allows the upper plate front decoration member 316 to operate. The upper plate upper right decoration member 319 for decorating the right side portion and the outer periphery on the front side of the upper plate ball removing button 341 can be decorated with light emission. In this example, the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is a full-color LED.

Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 includes a light-transmitting annular dial operation portion 401 and a light-transmissive columnar pressing operation portion arranged inside the dial operation portion 401. 405, and a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 are arranged below the dial operation section 401 and the push operation section 405, respectively. The dial decoration board 430 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 430b (four in this example) arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. Further, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a high-intensity white LED, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full-color LED. In addition, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same effect as the above can be obtained.

By the way, in the door frame 5 of the present example, the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that cover the outer periphery of the upper side of the lower side of the game window 101 correspond to each other. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a have a first annular group 102 close to the game window 101 (within the hatched area in FIGS. 59 and 60) and a second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102. (In the range of the cross hatch in FIGS. 59 and 60), and by making the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 emit light as appropriate, substantially concentric circles surrounding the game window 101 A plurality of (two in this example) light-emitting decorations can be provided. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are made to emit light, the range of the hatch close to the game window 101 is illuminated in an annular manner, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are made to emit light. When all the lights are emitted, the area of the cross hatch away from the game window 101 is illuminated in a ring shape.

Further, in the door frame 5, LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204, 246 (radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250) in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are provided. , A radial group 104 (in FIGS. 59 and 60) that extends radially around the lower center of the game window 101 (game area 1100) in the left-right direction so as to divide the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 in the circumferential direction. Within the shaded area). By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the game window 101 can be radially illuminated and decorated, and the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 form an annular shape. The luminous decoration can be divided so as to be divided in the circumferential direction.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 214c of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right side decorative unit 200 is set as the notification group 105, and by making this LED 214c emit light appropriately, the game is played. A variety of information can be notified to a person or an employee of a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, in the door frame 5, LEDs 288a and 288b corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and the center ring lens portion 282b in the upper decoration unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the game window 101 are the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103. Is defined as an upper center group 106 for illuminating and decorating the upper center of the. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 288a and 288b of the upper central group 106, the upper center of the game window 101 can be illuminated and decorated, and the criteria for annular luminous decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It is possible to make luminous decorations that become dots. The LED 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper center side group 107 that lights and decorates both left and right sides of the upper center group 106. By appropriately emitting the LED 290a of the upper central side group 107, the boundary between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be illuminated and decorated.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 322a corresponding to the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 arranged below the game window 101, the LED 322a corresponding to the upper plate 301 is illuminated and decorated. It is a dish group 108. Further, in the door frame 5, LEDs 430b and 432d corresponding to the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged in the upper center of the dish unit 300 in the lower center of the game window 101 are the operation units 400. The operation unit group 109 is used for light emission decoration. By appropriately causing the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109 to emit light, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be decorated with light emission, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be determined. The player can be notified.

The light emitting decoration of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in further detail. 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d are further subdivided corresponding to the control system within the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109 to which they respectively belong. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the twenty LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are 102a-102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems, and the peripheral lenses 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j. Has been.

The 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems 104a to 104h for each of the side flash lenses 204, 246 (radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250). ing. Further, the two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Further, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems, that is, the central portion 106a, the right portion 106b, and the left portion 106c. The seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

Further, the 11 LEDs 322a belonging to the upper plate group 108 are divided into four systems of 108a to 108d in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction. In addition, the five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109 include a pair of LEDs 430b in which four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 are diagonally arranged with the pressing operation unit 405 interposed therebetween, and the left and right 109a and the front and rear 109b. No. 2 system, and one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 is divided into three systems. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d are divided into 42 systems. ing.

By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 432d are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 290a, 322a, and 432d belong are further provided with three independent RGB systems for full-color light emission. In the light emission control, the number is 84 times, which is triple. The LEDs 288a and 430b are white LEDs with high brightness, and the four systems 107a, 109a, and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high brightness. Two systems are connected, and in actual light emission control, it is doubled to eight systems.

The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b are white LEDs having normal brightness and belong to the eight systems 104a to 108h. The LED 214c is a green LED and a red LED and belongs to the two systems 105a and 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b formed by the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled in each system, so that the same number of systems is used for the actual light emission control, that is, ten systems.

Therefore, the actual number of systems for light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and each of the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting, blinking, etc. are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). .. As a result, it is possible to produce a luminescent effect with a rich expression.

As the light emission effect in the door frame 5, for example, the first annular group 102 is sequentially emitted to the second annular group 103 (sequentially emitted in the same color or similar colors) to spread outward with the game window 101 as the center. Luminous effect, or conversely, luminous effect that converges from the outside toward the game window 101 by sequentially emitting light from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102 (sequentially emitting the same color or similar colors), Alternatively, by causing the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to emit light at the same time, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light widely.

Further, by cooperating with an LED (detailed illustration is omitted) provided in the game board 4, the LED of the game board 4, the LED of the first annular group 102 near the game window 101, and the first annular group 102. With the LEDs of the second annular group 103 arranged on the outer side, it is possible to perform a more expressive light emitting effect, which can attract the player's interest strongly and entertain the player. Can be suppressed.

Further, in the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108, by appropriately emitting light to each system 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, the upper portion of the upper decoration unit 280 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. It is possible to perform a light emission effect such that light moves toward the central lens 284, or light moves from the upper central lens 284 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions), but the present invention is not limited to this. , If it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to favorably perform a light emission effect in which light circulates around the outer periphery of the game window 101.

Further, by making only the radial group 104 emit light, a light emission effect is produced in which the game window 101 is emitted as a center, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted simultaneously with the radial group 104. By doing so, a light-emitting effect in which the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 is made to emit light substantially uniformly, or by making the radial group 104 emit light (lighting/blinking) while the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are emitting light It is possible to give a luminous effect that gives an accent to the luminous decoration. In addition, by individually emitting light from each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104, it is possible to provide a light emission effect in which the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiation lens portions 210b and 250b) are rotated.

Further, by making the upper central group 106 and the upper central side group 105 emit light, an opportunity is given to the player or a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state, a probability variation game state, a time shortening game state, a probability variation short time gaming state). , Etc.) can be performed.

Further, by appropriately emitting light from each system 108a to 108d of the lower group 108, the upper plate 301 is made to emit light, and by making the light emitted in association with the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation are performed. It is possible to perform a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the unit 405. In addition, by making the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109 emit light as appropriate, a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or guides the rotating operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 is produced. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

Since the system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper center group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 is a full-color LED, each group 102, 103, 106, 108,. For each 109 or each system 102a-102j, 103a-103j, 106a-106c, 108a-108d, 109c, it is possible to perform a light-emission effect with different gradations of light-emission color, brightness, etc. A rich luminous effect can be performed.

[1-3. Overall structure of main frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 67. 61 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 62 is a rear view of the main body frame. 63 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 64 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front, FIG. 65 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 67 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. It is a figure. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is axially supported on the left side in front view with respect to the outer frame 2, and is supported like a door so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

The main body frame 3 of this example forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and has a rectangular game board holding opening 601 for penetrating in the front-rear direction and holding the game board 4, and a main body frame base 600. An upper shaft support bracket 630 and a lower shaft support bracket 640, which are attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left end portion of the front view of 600, are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launching device 650 mounted on the lower front surface of the game board 4 for driving the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, and a game ball delivered to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600. The award ball unit 700 for and a flow of game balls from the award ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the body frame 3 attached to the front surface of the body frame base 600. A ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 for

Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards for controlling the door frame 5 except the game board 4 and electric parts provided in the main body frame 3, a power supply board 851, and the like. The board unit 800 that is a unit of the above, a back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and a side crime prevention plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 which is attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and which locks and unlocks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. FIG. 68 is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. 69 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of synthetic resin, and has an outer shape in a front view that is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5, and is substantially forward and backward. It is formed so as to have a constant depth D (see FIG. 65). Accordingly, when the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the locking device 1000, and the like are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, when the main body frame base 600 is laid down. In addition, the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is substantially flat at the height of the depth D in the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily placed on the main body frame base 600. Is able to improve.

As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 is a game board holding port capable of fitting and holding the outer circumference of the game board 4 by penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction within a range of about 3/4 from the upper part to the lower part. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms a front end outer periphery of the main body frame base 600 excluding the left side in front view, a recessed rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5. Of the door frame protrusion 110c protruding rearward from the lower end of the door, the upper bending protrusion 167 protruding rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side outside projecting rearward of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. An engaging groove 603 into which the bent protruding piece 163 is inserted and engaged is provided.

Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600, and is recessed rearward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame portion 602, and a lower rear wall portion that spreads laterally in a plate shape. 604, and a peripheral wall portion 605 that projects rearward inside the front end frame portion 601 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. By this peripheral wall portion 605, the free ends (upper and lower left end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is like this.

Further, the main body frame base 600 forms the lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604, and the game board placing portion 606 on which the game board 4 is placed and the game board placing portion 606. Positioning projections 607 protruding upward from the substantially center in the left-right direction and engaging with out-ball discharge grooves 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, and predetermined positions on the inner wall on the right side in the front view of the peripheral wall portion 605 are formed on the game board of the game board 4. A game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 61) to which the stopper 1120 is fixed, and a plate shape that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can contact the upper end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction. And a plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609 arranged. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 fits into the out-ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4 so that the lower end of the game board 4 can be restricted from moving leftward and rightward. ing. Further, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict the front side right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction when the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4 is locked. There is. The front left side of the game board 4 will be described later in detail, but its movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side crime prevention plate 950.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is a metal fitting attachment for attaching the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 to the rear surface of the free end portion (upper and lower left end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. The unit 610 is provided (see FIG. 69). As shown in FIG. 68 and the like, the metal fitting mounting portion 610 has its front side reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending vertically and horizontally so that the upper shaft supporting metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft supporting metal fitting 640 can be mounted with sufficient strength. You can do it. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and the door frame 5 formed in the lower left of the cylinder lock through hole 611 in front view. A U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits with a positioning protrusion 110d that projects rearward from the door frame base body 110 in the above, and a firing solenoid 654 of a hitting ball launching device 650 that is formed at the lower left of the fitting groove 612 in a front view. And a solenoid accommodating recess 613.

As described above, in the main body frame base 600 of this example, the lower rear wall portion 604 is formed at a position recessed further rearward than the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and the right side of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view. The hitting ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface from the front side so that the launching solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 is housed in the solenoid housing recess 613. In a state where the hitting ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIG. 63, FIG. A foul space 626 spreading downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 descends. The game ball is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed with an opening 614 penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left of the left-right center of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and a plurality of openings on the upper side of the opening 614 and both left and right sides in front view. And a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is adapted to be closed from the front side by a relay terminal board cover 692 (see FIG. 66 and the like), and through the opening 692a of the relay terminal board cover 692, the lower rear wall portion 604. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface face the front side. Further, the plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on both the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having an impact wall on the front side.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is a fixture support portion that rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 near the upper end of the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 above the opening 614. 616, and a stopper 617 that protrudes forward from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 in a front view and restricts the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

Here, as shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the game board fixing tool 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that spreads in a fan shape around a shaft center supported by a fixing tool support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixing piece 690a. The operation piece 690b extends outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated clockwise in a front view). This game board fixture 690 is pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixture 690 in the clockwise direction in a front view. Then, the fixing piece 690a projects upward from the game board placing portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 placed on the game board placing portion 606. Can be prevented from moving to the front side. Further, in the game board fixture 690, the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, so that by making contact with the stopper 617, the turning end in the counterclockwise direction in front view is regulated. Has become.

Further, in the body frame base 600, a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3 is attached to the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, in the main body frame base 600, a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is attached to the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( As shown in FIG. 69), when the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

Further, the main body frame base 600 has three U-shaped front end frame portions 602 that extend vertically inward in the front-rear direction on the inner side (shaft support side) of the engagement groove 603 on the right (open side) side in front view. It is provided with a door hook hole 620 and a lock engaging hole 621 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is lined up in the left-right direction under the lower end of the door hook hole 620. These three door hook holes 620 are formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and in the substantially vertical center, respectively. Locking protrusions 1004 provided at both upper and lower ends of the locking device 1000 are engaged and locked in the upper and middle door hook holes 620 and the lock locking hole 621, respectively. The locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side in the front view. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 project forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000 is performed. 1010 is projected forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 63).

Further, the main body frame base 600 is gently and obliquely descended from the upper right end toward the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall part 604, and then, at the substantially center in the left-right direction, the lower rear wall part 604. It is provided with a main body frame base ball removal passage 622 that hangs down from an intermediate position in the vertical direction to a position slightly higher in the vertical direction. This main body frame base ball removal passage 622 is configured such that the rear side is closed by the board unit base 810 in the board unit 800, and the details will be described later, but the game balls that have flowed through the ball removal passage 741d in the prize ball device 740 are It is now in circulation.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided at the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 605 at the rear end on the rear side in the rear view, and a plurality of rear cover shaft support portions 623 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction and pivotally support the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. And a mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 diagonally upper left in front view of the opening 614 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and the locking device 1000 on the right side (open side) front view of the peripheral wall portion 605. And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, etc. are appropriately positioned on the main body frame base 600. Is formed in.

[1-3B. Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 of the body frame 3 are attached to the body mount base 600 on the metal fixture mounting portions 610 on the upper and lower left ends of the front view of the body frame base 600 using predetermined screws, respectively. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner with respect to the outer frame 2.

First, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is attached to the upper metal fitting mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-shaped mounting portion that extends forward from the upper end of the mounting portion 631. The front extension portion 632, the shaft support pin 633 protruding so as to extend upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 632, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 arranged on the left side in front view of the shaft support pin 633. And a door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 63) penetrating in the up and down direction, and a downward swing from the left end of the front extension portion 632 in front view as viewed from the front to rotate the door frame 5 toward the open side. And a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 65 and 109) that regulates the end. In the upper shaft support fitting 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extending portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

On the other hand, the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is arranged below the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 for pivotally supporting the door frame 5, and the body frame 3 is axially supported with respect to the outer frame 2. And a main body frame support metal fitting 644 for The door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is attached to the metal fitting mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 642a that spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a to the front. A plate-shaped front extension portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that vertically penetrates near the front end of the front extension portion 642b, and the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the front extension portion 642b. A stopper 642d is provided upright from the left end of the front side of 642a as viewed from the front, and restricts the pivot end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. In this door frame shaft support metal fitting 642, the mounting portion 642a, the front extending portion 642b, and the stopper 642d are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

Further, the main body frame support metal fittings 644 of the lower support metal fittings 640 are attached to the lower metal fitting mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600, and have a plate-shaped mounting portion 644a extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and from the lower end of the mounting portion 644a. A front extending portion 644b extending forward and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 644b are provided. Also in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644, the mounting portion 644a and the front extending portion 644b are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

The lower shaft support metal fitting 640 of this example is such that the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction, and the door frame is mounted. The front extension portion 642b of the shaft support metal fitting 642 and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame support metal fitting 644 are attached to the lower metal fitting attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. It is like this.

The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal support 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600 to form a shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal support 630 and a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support metal support 640. Are located on the same axis, and the main body frame shaft support holes of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 are fitted and inserted into the support protrusions 21d of the lower support bracket 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extending portion 644b of the main body frame support metal fitting 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support metal fitting 21, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is attached to the outer frame 2. By inserting into the support hook hole 20c of the upper support fitting 20, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

Further, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached. The metal fitting 642c and the metal fitting 642c are positioned coaxially with each other, and the door pin 5 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame fitting hole 642c of the door frame fitting 642 in the lower fitting fitting 640. The lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is placed on the front extending portion 642b of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642, and then the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630. By inserting the door frame 5, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630, the shaft pin 155 is not supported. Once it is slid downward, the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 are vertically overlapped, and then the shaft pin 155 is slid upward. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3C. Hit ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launching device 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. 70 is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. The hitting ball launching device 650 can hit the game ball supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with the strength according to the rotating operation of the handle device 500. is there.

In the hitting ball launching device 650 of the present embodiment, a launching base 652 made of a metal plate attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and a rotation drive shaft 654a projecting forward from the lower back face of the launching base 652. Of the launch solenoid 654, the hammer 656 fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the launch solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, the hammer tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hammer 656, and the movement trajectory of the hammer tip 658. A hammer 656 at the tip of a ball hammer 656 is provided between a launch rail 660 that extends obliquely to the upper left in a front view and is attached to the front surface of the launch base 652, and a launch rail 660 above the base end of the launch rail 660. At the same time that 658 is allowed to pass, a ball stopper piece 662 that holds a game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660 and forms a gap that the game ball cannot pass through, and is held at the base end of the launch rail 660 by the ball stop piece 662. And a stopper 664 for restricting the rotation of the hitting mallet 656 (hammer tip 658) to the launch rail 660 side from the hitting position at which the played game ball can be hit.

Although not shown in detail, the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball firing device 650 is configured such that the drive shaft 654a reciprocally rotates at a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotational operation angle of the handle device 500. Further, the batting mallet 656 of the batting launcher 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 and a tip extending in a gentle arc from the fixed portion 656a with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. A rod portion 656b, which is oriented in the normal direction and has a tip 658 fixed to the tip, and a stopper portion 656c, which extends to the opposite side of the rod portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween and is in contact with the stopper 664, are provided. ing. Since the stopper portion 656c of the hitting mallet 656 contacts the stopper 664, the hammer tip 658 at the tip is rotated to the launch rail 660 side from the hitting position (the turning end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). It is becoming regulated.

Further, the launch rail 660 of the hitting ball launching device 650 has a loose arc shape in which the lower side is recessed so as to extend substantially along the lower extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 98), and in the front-back direction. On the other hand, the center is formed in a V-shape, and the game ball hit by the hitting mallet 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. The launch rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

Further, the hitting ball launching device 650 includes a stopper cover 666 which covers the front surface of a stopper 664 capable of restricting a turning end of the hitting mallet 656 toward the hitting position side, and a turning position of the hitting mallet 656 apart from the hitting position. And a stopper 668 that regulates an end (a rotating end in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front). In the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example, the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 are covered with rubber, so that the impact when the hitting mallet 656 abuts can be absorbed and the generation of noise due to the abutting can be suppressed. You can do it.

As shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, etc., the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, the lower part of the game board mounting portion 606 (the lower side of the game board holding opening 601), is located outside the game board 4 held by the game board holding opening 601. A foul space 626 is formed between the lower end of the rail 1111 and the fal space 626 that extends downward in the left-right direction by a predetermined width. Then, the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example shoots the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by launching the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side in front view of the launch rail 660. You can do it. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 is provided. The game ball, which has become a foul ball without being driven in, falls in the foul space 626, is received in the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

Further, in the hitting ball launching device 650, the launching solenoid 654 is driven by the launching control unit 4120 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotating operation of the handle device 500, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. It can be driven so as to be synchronized with the driving of. Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 that supplies the game ball to the hitting ball launching device 650, the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), and the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven from that state. When is released (OFF), the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is adapted to be sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. Therefore, the launching solenoid 654 is driven substantially at the same time as the ball sending solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. By (ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably fired by the rotation of the hitting mallet 656. ing.

[1-3D. Prize Ball Unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 79. FIG. 72 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main frame, and FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main frame. Further, FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view showing the rear view of the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit in the prize ball unit, which is disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 78 is a rear view showing the relationship among the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. Further, FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view showing a ball circulation passage in the prize ball unit.

The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores a game ball supplied from the island equipment side to the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then gives a predetermined payout instruction. Based on the above, the pachinko machine 1 is dispensed to the upper plate 301. The prize ball unit 700 is a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper part of the rear surface of the prize ball base 710 for receiving and storing game balls supplied from the island facility side. And a tank rail unit 730 that is arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and that aligns the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and sends it to the downstream side, and a predetermined payout of the game balls that are aligned by the tank rail unit 730. A payout device 740 for paying out based on an instruction, and a game ball paid out by the payout device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the game ball paid out when the upper plate 301 is filled with game balls. Is mainly provided with a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding to the lower plate 302 side.

In addition, the prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 that closes the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a grounding metal for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal board 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal board cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal board 784. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is for fixing and fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface thereof and to the left side of the back cover engaging groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 to the rear view. Back cover fastening holes 780b are formed (see FIGS. 73 and 75, etc.).

In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are formed on the upper side. In addition to being arranged, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branching unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

Next, as shown in the figure, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in an inverted L shape in a front view so as to substantially correspond to the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and the left side of the game board holding port 601 in a front view. And is integrally molded with transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 extends rearward substantially along the outer periphery of the inverted L-shape, and extends inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall 710a by a predetermined width and is arranged in substantially the same plane. And a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a is formed so as to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball base 710 is located at a position where the rear wall portion 710b is deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space capable of accommodating the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

In addition, the prize ball base 710 is provided with a tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side of the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate arranged beside the tank mounting portion 711 (right side in rear view). An external terminal board mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the upper edge of the rear wall portion 710b, and a rear side of a vertical side of the rear wall portion 710b. The prize ball device mounting portion 714 for mounting the prize ball device 740 to the award ball, the prize ball passage 715 adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 for guiding the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 downward, and the rear wall. An attachment locking portion 716 for attaching the full tank branching unit 770 is provided at the lower end of the portion 710b.

Further, the prize ball base 710 penetrates in the front-rear direction at the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and escape holes 717 for allowing the payout motor 744 and the like protruding forward from the prize ball device 740 to escape. And a back cover engagement groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Although detailed description is omitted, the prize ball base 710 is provided with a mounting hole, a mounting boss, or the like for mounting the prize ball tank 720, the prize ball device 740, or the like, or the body frame base 600. Is formed in.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76, the prize ball tank 720 of the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open upper side, and has a substantially rectangular bottom wall portion in plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall portion 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and that protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 710 in a rectangular shape only in the right rear portion (open side rear portion) in a plan view; A discharge port 723 that is formed by a portion of the right rear part that projects rearward of the bottom wall portion 721 of the right side 722 and that opens downward, and a plate shape from the left side (shaft support side) of the discharge port 723 in plan view to the left end of the prize ball tank 720. Formed in the vicinity of the base end of the shaft portion 725 and the front end of the outer peripheral wall 722. An attachment portion 726 for attaching the 720 to the prize ball tank attachment portion 711 of the prize ball base 710.

In this prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. In addition, the prize ball tank 720, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is inclined to be lowered toward the discharge port 723, so that the game balls on the bottom wall portion 721 roll toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

Further, the prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the drawing, the ball leveling member 727 has one end side pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight therein, and the other end side hangs down by its own weight. .. The ball leveling member 727 is adapted to hang down in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, and is capable of leveling and aligning game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730. Further, the eaves portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, so that the game balls can be prevented from overflowing from the tank rail unit 730, and the tank It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

Although not shown in detail, the top surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined such that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) in plan view is lowered toward the right side, In plan view, the right side (the side close to the discharge port 723) is formed to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723. As a result, the flow of the game balls can be made smooth, and the occurrence of ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720 can be suppressed and the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game ball can be discharged smoothly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76, the tank rail unit 730 of the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and extending in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 is a gutter having a predetermined depth with an open upper side, and has a width (depth) in which game balls can be arranged in two rows in the front-rear direction, and a left end (axial support side) end in front view. The bottom is slanted so that This tank rail 731 has a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 79) that opens downward at the left (shaft support) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at approximately the center in the front-rear direction, and a lower surface of the front end. A plurality of locking protrusions 731c (see FIG. 74) that protrude further downward and are locked from the upper side to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710 are provided.

This tank rail 731 is arranged such that the right end (open side) end in front view is located immediately below the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720, and the game balls discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 are stored. After receiving, it can be rolled to the left and passed from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. Further, by locking the locking projection 731c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be mounted on the prize ball base 710. ing.

Further, the tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port 731a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 when viewed from the front. A ball retainer plate 734 that closes the upper portion of the tank rail 731, and a ball stopper that can be moved back and forth in the tank rail 731 and can stop the game balls in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. 735, and a ground plate 736 arranged in the tank rail 731 and capable of contacting the game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the figure, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game ball that are partitioned into two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. The ball retainer plate 734 is provided with a mounting portion 734a on which the ball stopper 735 is mounted, and two slits 734b which vertically pass through the protrusion 735a of the ball stopper 735.

In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 axially supported by the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above on the upstream side (open side) of the ball pressing plate 734. The game balls discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 can be leveled and arranged in two rows along the partition wall 731b. You can do it. In addition, the ball pressing plate 734 is for forcibly setting the game ball that has not been stepped up by the ball leveling member 727 to be stepped up, and the gap between the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. Is attached to the tank rail 731.

As shown in the drawing, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery thereof, and the pair of alignment gears 732 is axially supported so that the pitch of the teeth is shifted by half a pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game ball flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the discharge port 732 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls arranged in two rows are alternately prized one by one. Device 740.

It should be noted that the bottom of the tank rail 731 is formed with a narrow groove that penetrates vertically so that foreign matter such as dust that rolls with the game ball inside the tank rail 731 falls downward from the narrow groove. Has become. Although not shown in detail, the ground plate 736 arranged on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 can be grounded to the outside via the grounding connector of the power supply board 851 via the grounding metal fitting 782. By contacting the game ball with the ground plate 736 inside the tank rail 731, it is possible to remove the static electricity charged.

Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the ball stopper 735 rotatably mounted on the mounting portion 734 a of the ball retainer plate 734 is rotated, and the projecting piece 735 a of the ball stopper 735 is passed through the slit 734 a to the inside of the tank rail 730. By inserting into the projection rail 735a, the two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed, and the supply of game balls to the prize ball device 740 side can be stopped. There is.

Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the state of the game balls and the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 is for paying out the game ball discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. It is a thing. As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the prize ball device 740 includes a vertically extending unit base 741 that is attached to the prize ball device attachment portion 714 of the prize ball base 710. As shown in the drawing, the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740 is a supply passage that opens to the upper end on the rear surface side and extends to a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball. 741a, a distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and having a space of a predetermined width, and a distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end (open side) lower end in rear view A prize ball passage 741c opening to the left side surface, and a ball removal passage 741d communicating with the lower end (right side in the rear view) of the sorting space 741b in the rear view and extending downward and opening to the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed to be open rearward.

The prize ball device 740 of this example includes a back lid 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and having a shorter vertical length than the unit base 741, and a plate-shaped motor support disposed below the back lid 742. The plate 743, the payout motor 744 disposed on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotary shaft 744a projects rearward of the motor support plate 743, and the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 are integrated. A first gear 745 that is rotatably fixed and arranged on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, a second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 and is axially supported by the unit base 741, and a second gear 746 that meshes with the second gear 746. The third gear 747 pivotally supported by the unit base 741 and the payout rotating body 748 that rotates integrally with the third gear 747 and is disposed in the distribution space 741c of the unit base 741 are the third gear. A rotation detection board 749 is provided on the opposite side with the 747 interposed therebetween so as to be integrally rotatable, and has a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

In addition, the prize ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 and detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a, and the number of game balls that are attached to the unit base 741 and circulate in the prize ball passage 741c. Is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742 that holds the rotation angle sensor 752 and the rotation angle sensor 752 that detects the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748. A sensor board 753, a payout motor 744, a ball break switch 750, a counting sensor 751, and a prize ball relay board 754 that relays the connection between the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110 and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. I have it.

Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a substrate cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay substrate 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (a rotation detection plate 749). ), and a gear cover 756 that covers the sensor substrate 753 from the rear side with the back cover 742 sandwiched therebetween and is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741, and a supply passage ground that can contact a game ball circulating in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741. The metal fitting 757, the payout motor 744 is fixed to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 sandwiched therebetween, and the screw 758 for grounding the payout motor 744 and the back cover 742 are detachably supported to the unit base 741. A detachable button 759 is provided.

In the prize ball device 740 of this example, the back cover 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the open rear end of the ball removal passage 741d. Are to be closed. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a is once bulged rearward, and the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be alleviated. You can do it. In addition, the unit base 741 has a side surface on one side (left side in rear view) lower than a position in the supply passage 741a that bulges rearward, and is cut out at the outside of the cut portion of the supply passage 741a. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the out-of-ball switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and so as to penetrate in the front-back direction below the prize ball passage 741a. And a motor insertion hole 741g which is formed and through which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

By attaching the ball break switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operating piece of the ball break switch 741e forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a and is present in the supply passage 741a. The presence or absence of the game ball in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the ball break switch 741e by pressing the operating piece by the game ball. In a state where the game ball in the supply passage 741e is not detected by the ball-out switch 741e (ball out state), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and the player or the hall indicating that the ball is out. It will be notified to the side.

Further, the unit base 741 is provided between a bearing portion 741h for pivotally supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (dispensing rotor 748), a switch mounting portion 741e in the supply passage 741a, and a distribution space 741b. And a button support hole 741j for supporting a detachable button 759 for detachably supporting the back cover 742, which is disposed at an upper portion of the unit base 741. I have it. In this unit base 741, by attaching the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 to the grounding metal fitting attaching portion 741i, the rear surface of the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball in the supply passage 741a. The front surface of the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 comes into contact with the lower end rear surface of the U-shaped grounding metal fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game ball flowing through the supply passage 741a through the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 is removed. You can do it.

The back lid 742 of the prize ball device 740 is in the form of a vertically long plate, and the upper end thereof bulges backward. A button insertion hole 742a through which the attachment/detachment button 759 is inserted, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the rear surface of the center in the up-down direction, and a relay board mounting portion. A sensor board mounting portion 742c for mounting the sensor board 753, which is disposed below the portion 742b, and a through hole 742d through which the payout rotating body 748 can pass are provided. The relay board mounting portion 742b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located on the rear side of the ground metal fitting mounting portion 741i of the unit base 741.

In addition, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and is configured to come into contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, so that the heat generated by the payout motor 744 is prevented. It is designed to facilitate heat dissipation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is provided with three concave portions 748a having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are accommodated in the recess 748a one by one and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d side. Further, the three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the space between the concave portions 748a of the payout rotating body 748, and the detection slits 749a are detected by the rotation angle sensor 752. By detecting, the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

In the prize ball device 740 of the present example, the payout motor is generated by inputting a payout command from the main control board 4100, a lending command from the CR unit 6 or the like to the payout control board 4110, or operating the ball removal switch 860b. 744 rotates so that a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotation shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is rotationally driven, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotation shaft 744a is rotated, and at the same time, the second gear 746 meshed with the first gear 745 is rotated, and the second gear 746 is further rotated. The third gear 747 that meshes with is designed to rotate. A payout rotating body 748 is fixed to the front side of the third gear 747, and a rotation detecting board 749 is fixed to the rear side of the third gear 747 so as to be integrally rotatable. It is designed to rotate.

In this prize ball device 740, as shown in FIG. 78, a payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported in the approximate center of the distribution space 741b. When the payout rotating body 748 is rotated counterclockwise in the rear view by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side. The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then transferred to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout motor 744 rotates the payout rotating body 748 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out to the ball removing passage 741d side, and the payout rotating body 748 is arranged. The game balls paid out to the side of the ball removing passage 741d are, from the lower end of the ball removing passage 741d, a ball removing passage 778 of a full tank sorting unit 770, a main body frame base ball removing passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, and a substrate unit. It is possible to discharge the pachinko machine 1 to the outside of the rear side through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 in 800 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply board box holder 840.

The unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 of this example is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when it is assembled to the main body frame 3, the prize from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d, and the like of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and a defect such as a ball clogging can be easily found. ..

Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74, 75 and 79. The full tank distribution unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball unit 740 to the dish unit 300. In addition, the game balls can be distributed to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 when the game balls are full in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300.

The full-tank branching unit 770 is fixed to the upper part of the center in the front-rear direction by a locking part 770a that is locked to the mounting locking part 716 of the prize ball base 710, and is fixed to the rear end upper part on the back surface of the lower end of the prize ball base 710. And a fixed portion 770b. The full-tank branching unit 770 is in a state of being suspended from the attachment locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the attachment locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side, and thus the prize ball base 710. By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branching unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

Further, as shown in the drawing, the full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape such that the whole is lowered toward the front end from the rear end, and is opened upward in the substantial center of the rear end upper part in the left-right direction. A prize ball socket 771 for receiving a game ball that has flowed down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and a branch space 772 arranged below the prize ball socket 771 and expanding in the left-right direction (see FIG. 79). And, a normal passage 773 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball toward the front side from directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 (see FIG. 79), and discharges the game ball flowing through the normal passage 773 to the front to front the front end. A normal ball outlet 774 that opens to the right end of the view and a full tank passage 775 that guides the game ball toward the front side from a position farther to the right in rear view than directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 (see FIG. 79). ) And a game ball that has flowed through the full tank passage 775 to the front, and a full tank ball outlet 776 that opens to the left of the normal ball outlet 774 in front view is provided.

Further, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball removal receiving opening 777 that opens upward at the left end of the rear end upper part in front view and receives a game ball that has flowed down the ball removal passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, and a ball. The ball removal passage 778 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball received in the withdrawal opening 777 to the front side, and the game ball that has flowed through the ball removal passage 778 is discharged forward and the normal ball outlet 774 at the left end in front view and A ball outlet 779 opened at a position rearward of the full-ball outlet 776.

In the full tank branching unit 770 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 are respectively the first of the foul cover units 540 in the door frame 5. The ball entrance 542a and the second ball entrance 542c are arranged so as to communicate with each other, and the game ball discharged from the normal ball exit 774 passes through the first ball entrance 542a of the foul cover unit 540 to reach the plate unit 300. The game balls supplied to the upper plate 301 and discharged from the full tank outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. Further, the ball outlet 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right end of the body frame base ball passage 622 in the body frame base 600 when viewed from the rear, and the game balls discharged from the ball outlet 779 are main body frame base 600. It is designed to be delivered to the main body frame base removal passage 622.

In this full tank branching unit 770, the game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 are received at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In a normal state, the game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down in the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771. Then, the game ball that has flowed down into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 through the normal outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and exits above the dish unit 300 from the first ball outlet 544a. It will be supplied to the dish 301.

By the way, when the game balls are further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (the prize ball device 740) while the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is filled with the game balls, the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540. The game ball that cannot be ejected from the upper plate 301 side from the 544a stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually the normal passage 773 in the upstream is also filled through the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770. become. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, and starts moving laterally in the branch space 772 and then moves laterally. The game ball enters the full tank passage 775, and from the full tank outlet 776 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b, under the dish unit 300. It is designed to be supplied to the dish 302.

The full-tank branching unit 770 of this example is entirely made of transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. This makes it possible to easily find foreign matter such as dust and dirt that has entered the full tank branching unit 770 and the occurrence of ball clogging without disassembling the full tank branching unit 7700. ..

In this way, the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example, when the game balls in the upper plate 301 are full, the game balls dispensed from the prize ball device 740 are automatically Since it can be supplied to the lower plate 302, the upper plate is full and the game ball is not supplied to the hitting ball launching device by operating the ball removal button of the upper plate like a conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to avoid interruption of the driving of the game ball, and it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience during the game and prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, as described above, the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example branches the passage of the game ball paid out immediately below the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear of the pachinko machine 1, when the upper plate 301 becomes full. Since the game balls accumulated in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branching unit 770 are paid out to the upper plate 301, the game balls in the upper plate 301 and the game balls in the normal passage 773 are hit ball launching devices. The game balls can be directly driven by 650, and the storage amount of the game balls in the upper plate 301 is substantially the amount of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as the conventional one is stored in the upper plate 301. You can Therefore, by reducing the size of the upper plate 301, the game window 101 in the door frame 5 can be relatively enlarged (widened), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider game area 1100 can be provided and the game is played. The pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power to the player can be provided, and the wide game area 1100 can entertain the player.

Further, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full tank outlets 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray and the inlet (first Even when only one ball entrance 542a and second ball entrance 542c are provided, the game ball can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made compatible with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays without changing the flow path (full tank branching unit 770) of the game balls in the main body frame 3. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost required for the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 including the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage trays.

Further, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it can be dealt with without changing the main body frame 3, so that the entire pachinko machine 1 according to the change of the door frame 5 The cost can be reduced, and various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

Further, the game balls sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 are preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 having only one storage tray. Even if the game balls are exchanged for, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage dish via the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so that the time lag from the payout to the storage can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing due to lack of game balls for driving, and it is possible to sufficiently cope with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays. ..

Also, unless the upper plate 301 is full, the game balls dispensed from the prize ball device 740 are sent to the upper plate 301, so that the frequency of transferring the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 to the upper plate 301 is reduced. It becomes possible to dedicate the player to the driving operation of the game ball and the like, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side, and even if the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray, the first ball Since the position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the inlet 542a and the like can be set to the same height as the first ball inlet 542a and the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 having two storing plates, It is possible to prevent the depth from becoming shallow, it is possible to deepen the storage dish to secure a sufficient storage amount of the game balls, and the player can frequently play without worrying about the storage amount. And the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays can be accommodated without changing the body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 increases. Can be suppressed.

Further, the position where the full tank passage 775 of the full tank branching unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is filled with game balls. Even if the game ball cannot be output from the normal ball outlet 774, the amount of game balls stored in the normal passage 773 between the normal ball outlet 774 and the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is increased as much as possible. Therefore, the substantial amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be increased as much as possible. In the case where only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage tray becomes full with game balls and the game balls cannot be output from the normal ball outlet 773 or the full ball outlet 776, Since the position where the full tank passage 775 branches from the normal passage 773 is arranged at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls not only in the normal passage 773 but also in the full tank passage 775. Can be stored, and the storage amount of the substantial game balls stored in the storage dish can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the amount of game balls stored in each door frame 5 is maximized without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). The number can be increased as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.

In addition, the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branching unit 770 are set to have a size such that the game balls can be distributed in a plurality of rows, and the amount of retention (storage amount) of the game balls in the full tank branching unit 770 is set. Since the number can be increased, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is different, it is possible to prevent the substantial storage amount of the game balls in the full tank branching unit 770 from decreasing. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be adapted to the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage trays without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3.

Further, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the inside of the full tank passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with a transparent resin, a game ball is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and a problem occurs. In doing so, it is possible to easily find the location of the ball clogging from the outside of the full tank branching unit 770, and it is possible to eliminate the problem early and increase the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1.

[1-3E. Ball exit opening/closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 in the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. FIG. 80 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the main body frame. 81 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 82 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed in the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 near the upper left end in front view, and is attached to the main body frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 are closed to move the prize ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to block the flow of the game balls.

The ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed in the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 near the upper left end in front view so as not to project from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-shaped opening/closing shutter 792 held by the shutter base 791 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, an opening/closing crank 793 for sliding the opening/closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction, and the opening/closing shutter 792 is raised via the opening/closing crank 793. And an opening/closing spring 794 that biases the

The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791a for holding the opening/closing shutter 792 slidably in the vertical direction so as to project above the upper end of the shutter base 791. A rectangular opening 791b penetrating in the front-rear direction between the pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank arranged on the front surface of the left end portion in front view to support the opening/closing crank 793 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d that locks one end (upper end) of the opening/closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is arranged on the left side of the opening 791b when viewed from the front, and the spring locking portion 791d is arranged near the upper part on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

Further, the opening/closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 includes a flat plate-shaped shutter main body 792a and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that protrude from the front surface of the shutter main body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. ) And a drive hole 792b having a horizontally long rectangular shape that is disposed between the pair of sliding protrusions and faces the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

Further, the opening/closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a rotatably supported by a crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a right outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in front view. Drive rod 793b extending outward from the right side to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the opening 791b, and protruding rearward from the tip of the drive rod 793b and slidably inserted into the drive hole 792b of the opening/closing shutter 792. Drive pin 793c, a contact portion 793d that extends downward from the lower outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a front view and has a spherical tip, and the other end (lower end of the open/close spring 794 formed on the intermediate upper surface of the drive rod 793b). ) And a spring locking portion 793e for locking

In the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening/closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when the opening/closing shutter 792 is raised, it is arranged on the rear side through the opening/closing shutter 792. The normal ball outlet 774, the full ball outlet 776, etc. in the full tank branching unit 770 can be visually recognized.

In the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 of this example, when the opening/closing crank 793 rotates about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, the drive pin 793c of the opening/closing crank 793 rotates in an arc shape in the vertical direction, and at the same time, the drive pin 793c. The opening/closing shutter 792 is adapted to slide in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b into which is inserted. In the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact portion 793d of the opening/closing crank 793 contacts the opening/closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5, The contact portion 793d is configured to be rotated clockwise in the front view against the biasing force of the opening/closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the opening/closing shutter 792 descends so that the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 can be opened.

When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact portion 793c of the open/close crank 793 and the open/close operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 are released, and the open/close crank 793 is opened. Is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by the urging force of the opening/closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening/closing shutter 792 is raised to close the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. You can do it.

In this way, in response to opening/closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 automatically causes the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game balls remaining in the full tank branching unit 770, it is possible to prevent the game balls from spilling from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full tank outlet 776. You can do it.

[1-3F. Board unit]
Next, the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 83 to 89. 83 is a front perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 84 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as disassembled and seen from the front. Further, FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit after disassembling it. Further, FIG. 87 is a perspective view for explaining the action of the standing wall portion of the power supply board box in the board unit. 88A is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 88B is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as seen from the front. 89(A) is a front view of the emission power supply board box, and FIG. 89(B) is a sectional view taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 89(A).

The board unit 800 in the body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 in front view, and a board unit base. The emission power board box 830 attached to the rear surface of the right end of the front view of 810, the power board box holder 840 attached to the rear surface of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the emission power board box 830 from the rear side, and the power board box holder 840. A power supply board box 850 that is attached to the rear surface and has a rear end that is substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 that is attached to the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820. And a terminal board box 840 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the payout control board box 860 when viewed from the front, a main side relay terminal board 880 attached to the front surface of the board unit base 810, and a peripheral side relay. And a terminal plate 882.

The board unit base 810 in the board unit 800 of the present example has a shape extending in the left-right direction as shown in the drawing, and a substantially central portion in the left-right direction is lowered one step downward and is gradually inclined upward toward both left and right ends. A wall-shaped shield wall portion 811 that projects forward from the front surface, an opening 812 that is disposed above the position at which the center of the shield wall portion 811 in the left-right direction is lowered and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the shield wall portion 811. And a board mounting portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end in front view for mounting the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and a rectangular shape horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting section 813 in front view. Cylindrical duct part 814 penetrating through, a plurality of vertically elongated slit-shaped through holes 815 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the speakers 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface, and left side in rear view (right side in front view) A box housing portion 816, which is opened rearward and upward and is capable of housing the front side of the firing power supply board box 830, is provided on the rear surface of the upper portion.

In this board unit base 810, the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball-removing passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. It is possible to prevent the game ball from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622 and to increase the strength of the substrate unit base 810. In addition, the board base unit 810 sends the game ball, which has flowed down the main body frame base ball removal passage 622, to the power supply board box holder 840 arranged on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-back direction. You can do it.

In the board unit base 810, the board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main-side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal board 882 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. When the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 are forward from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. To face. Further, the board unit base 810 can favorably transmit the sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side through the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

Further, the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box housing portion 843 of the power board box holder 840 in which the box housing portion 816 is arranged on the rear side, and the box housing portion 816 and the front box housing portion 843 are formed. Thus, it is possible to form an accommodating recess for accommodating the firing power supply board box 830.

The speaker box 820 of the board unit 800 literally includes a speaker 821 mounted facing the front side. This speaker box 820 covers the rear side of the speaker 821 in a sealed manner, and at the same time, has a horizontally elongated rectangular opening 822 formed on the left side of the speaker 821 in a front view. Although not shown in detail, the opening 822 communicates with a space on the rear side of the speaker 821 via a predetermined labyrinth-like passage to invert the phase of the sound on the rear side of the speaker 821 to move forward. The bass reflex type speaker box is capable of emitting deep bass to the diameter of the speaker 821. The duct portion 814 of the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that the sound emitted from the opening 822 can be favorably transmitted to the front. ing.

The firing power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape having an open rear, and includes a firing power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. This launching power supply board box 830 is designed to accommodate various electronic components mounted on the launching power supply board 831, and heat generated from the electronic components and the like via the slits 830a formed in the upper and lower surfaces. Can be released to the outside.

The firing power supply board box 830 is detachable from above into a housing recess formed by a box housing 816 of the board unit base 810 and a front box housing 844 of a power board box holder 840, which will be described later, and which is opened upward. It is supposed to be accommodated. Accordingly, in the assembled state of the main body frame 3, if a problem occurs in the firing power supply board box 830, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily removed from the front side of the body frame 3 for replacement or repair. Yes (see Figure 63).

Further, the emission power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 89, the emission power supply board 831 includes a DC/DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging the power from the DC/DC converter 831a. And a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC/DC converter 831a and the current from the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 to drive it. This emission power supply board box 830 has slits 830a as heat dissipation holes formed on its upper and lower surfaces in order to radiate heat generated by the DC/DC converter 831a and electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the emission power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC/DC converter 831a, the side surface of the firing power supply substrate box 830 in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed serves as a heat dissipation hole. The slit 830a is formed. In addition, the launch power supply board box 830 has a partition wall 830b that divides its internal space into two spaces, a space for housing the DC/DC converter 831a and a space for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0. Is integrally formed from the bottom surface to the edge of the end opening so as to connect the inner wall with the lower surface. Accordingly, when the launch power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830 to close the inner space of the launch power supply board box 830, the inner space of the launch power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Since two spaces, that is, a housing space 830c for housing the DC/DC converter 831a and a housing space 830d for housing the DC/DC converter 831a, are formed, the partition wall 830b serves as a housing space 830c for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0. , A storage space 830d for storing the DC/DC converter 831a and a heat insulating wall that blocks heat from entering and exiting.

The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is a slit as a heat dissipation hole formed in each of the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface that communicates the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. It is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the housing space 830d in which the DC/DC converter 831a is housed by being released to the outside via the 830a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 from being transmitted to the DC/DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC/DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC/DC converter 831a is a heat dissipation hole formed in each of the upper surface and the lower surface that communicates the accommodation space 830d with the outside air. It is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated by being radiated to the outside through the slit 830a. Therefore, the heat generated by the DC/DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

In the present embodiment, the DC/DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the combined current flowing in the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are launched separately from the power supply board 851. By providing the power supply board 831, the size of the emission power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, the emission power supply board 831 can be easily handled due to its small size, and the replacement operation of the emission power supply board 831 can be facilitated, which can contribute to the reduction of the time spent for the exchange operation. In this replacement work, it is also possible to replace the launch power supply board box 830 with the launch power supply board 831 still attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830.

Moreover, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches its end of life and the drive firing by the firing solenoid 654 suddenly cannot be fired and the game has to be interrupted, the firing power supply substrate 831 can be replaced. Since it can be easily performed, the interruption of the game can be resolved at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to very easily eliminate the inability to fire due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, and it is possible to resolve the interruption of the game due to the inability to fire at an early stage and restart the game, which reduces the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

It should be noted that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 deteriorates and reaches the end of its life by being repeatedly charged and discharged, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute every time the firing is performed by the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the power supply board 851 creates a direct current power supply from an alternating current power supply of an island facility such as a game hall, but charging/discharging is not repeated at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831. The life of the emission power supply board 831 is extremely longer than that of the emission power supply board 831. In other words, the emission power supply substrate 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration due to charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, while the power supply substrate 851 reaches the end of its life due to aging. The DC/DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the firing power supply board 831 that is separate from the power supply board 851, so that the life is shortened. It is possible to concentrate the electronic components on the power supply board 851 due to the long-term change of As a result, it is possible to prevent the electronic component, which has a long service life and is aged, from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 which has a short service life.

Further, since the launch power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball launching device 650 can be attached and detached from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, the capacity for changing the hitting characteristic Even if an illegal attempt is made to change the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to a different one, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to detach the launch power board 831, and it is difficult to replace the launch power board 831. By doing so, it is possible to make it harder to carry out fraud, and it is possible to prevent fraudulently changing the launching power board 831 that has been optimized and intentionally changing the optimized driving strength, and at the same time making it difficult to carry out fraud. The pachinko machine 1 can prevent a player who feels irritated or the like from developing into fraud such as fraud.

Further, since the emission power board 831 is detachable and can be replaced, even if the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the emission power board 831 is tampered with, the emission power board 831 is immediately replaced to tamper with it. It can be resolved, the period of interruption of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of irritation and disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the launch control unit 4120 that controls the hitting ball launching device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 holding the game board 4. When the game board 4 is replaced by changing the model, the launch power supply board 831 (launching power supply board box 830) of the launch control unit 4120 can be easily replaced, which matches the concept of the new model to be replaced. By changing to the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC/DC converter 831a capable of realizing the launch characteristics, the launch characteristics of the hit ball launching device 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 are changed to a new game. It can be matched with board 4. Therefore, it is possible to easily match the driving characteristics of the game ball with the concept of the game board 4, so that the game with the new model game board 4 can be fully enjoyed and the interest of the player is prevented from decreasing. can do.

Further, since the launch power supply board 831 of the launch control unit 4120 can be attached and detached from the front side, when exchanging the launch power supply board 831, it is not necessary to open the main body frame 3 to the island facility such as a game hall, The time and effort required for the exchange can be simplified, the exchange can be performed in a short time, and the burden on the game hall side can be prevented from increasing. Further, since the firing power supply board 831 (the firing power supply board box 830) is detachable and can be replaced, the driving characteristic is changed as compared with the case where the entire firing control section 4120 (the payout control board 4110) is replaced. It is possible to reduce the cost required for, and to reduce the burden on the hall side.

Furthermore, when changing the model, etc., only the game board 4 is exchanged so that the door frame 5, the main body frame 3, etc. can be used as they are, so that the firing control unit 4120 can be used for a long time. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply board 831 deteriorates, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side as described above. The problem can be solved by doing so, and the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and at the same time, it is possible to eliminate the feeling of irritation and disappointment due to the interruption of the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

In addition, the firing power supply board 831 (launching power supply board box 830) is supported through the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3, and the firing power supply board 831 is held by the game board holding opening 601 in order to be detachable. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for performing a fraudulent act is entered through the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the fraudulent tool reaches the firing power supply board 831 by the game board 4. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 having high defense power against fraudulent activity can be prevented while preventing fraudulent activity from being performed on the firing power supply board 831.

Further, the launch power supply board box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601, and the position supporting the launch power supply board box 830 is rearward of the front surface of the main body frame 3, so that the launch power supply is possible. A space for supporting the board box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the firing power supply board box 830 and has the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

Further, since the emission power supply board 831 is provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the emission power supply board 831 can be easily attached/detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 supplies power to the emission solenoid 654. Even if the load applied to the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 easily deteriorates, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (launching power supply board 831) can be easily replaced, and the problem can be resolved early to interrupt the game. The time can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can surely exhibit the above-described effects.

Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 receives the game balls discharged downward from the out-ball discharging portion 1161 of the game board 4 on the left front side from the center in the left and right when viewed from the front. A discharge ball receiving portion 841, a discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841, and a side surface (right side in front view) of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841. A front box accommodating portion 843 that is opened forward and upward and can accommodate the rear side of the firing power supply board box 830, and the entire rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840 is recessed to the front side. And a rear box accommodating portion 844 capable of accommodating.

The power supply board box holder 840 is configured such that the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 is located at a position desired for the discharge passage 842. The rear side of the board unit base 810 is formed by flowing through the body frame base ball removal passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600 and passing through the opening 812 of the board base unit 810. The game ball flowing down to and the game ball discharged from the out-ball discharging section 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving section 841 will be described later in detail through the discharge passage 842. It can be discharged to.

Further, the power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box housing portion 816 of the board unit base 810, and the box housing portion 816 and the front box housing portion 843 house the firing power supply board box 830. The recess can be formed.

Further, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape having an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening thereof. The power supply board box 850 is designed to accommodate various electronic components mounted on the power supply board 851, and the heat from the electronic components and the like can be externally transmitted through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released to. As shown in FIG. 86, the power switch 852 attached to the power board 851 faces the rear surface of the power board box 850.

In addition, the power supply board box 850 is a standing wall that projects rearward along the lower side of the opening where the power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 84 and 86) attached to the lower side of the power switch 852 on the power supply board 851 faces the rear side. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protrusions 850c protruding rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 arranged on the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b. And a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a large gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking piece that locks with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855. By locking and, the connector terminal 855 does not come off from the power supply terminal 853.

As shown in FIG. 87, in the power supply board box 850, the standing wall portion 850b is slightly rearward of the rear end of the connector terminal 855 with the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 connected to the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854. Is formed so as to project to. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 with the wiring cord 854 wrapping around from the lower front side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear end so as to be caught by the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b. The terminal 855 is adapted to be connected.

By the way, when connecting the connector terminal with the wiring cord extended to the connection terminal attached to the board and then pulling the wiring cord toward the board, the connector terminal is connected by the tension applied from the wiring cord. Since it is pressed against the terminal side, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the tip side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even when pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed so as to wrap around (fold back) behind the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the connector terminal 855. A force such that the terminal 855 is pressed against the power supply terminal 853 side can be prevented from acting, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

Further, since the power supply board box 850 includes the protruding portions 850c protruding rearward on both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, The protrusions 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and can prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall portion 850b.

Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b can be brought closer to the standing wall portion 850b side, so that the wiring cord 854 from the standing wall portion 850b. The wire cord 854 can be easily turned off by the wiring guide portion 850d after the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, and a series of operations can be continuously performed. It can be performed and the work process relating to the assembly can be simplified.

The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board holder 840 are formed such that the size in the front-rear direction when assembled to each other is substantially the same as the size in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. When attached, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

Further, in this example, the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 facing the opening of the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851, and then the connector is formed by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension applied to the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is applied to the power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. It is possible to act in a direction such that the connection with the 853 is released, it is possible to prevent the connector terminal 855 from becoming unable to be removed by the wiring cord 854, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851. This makes it easier to remove the board, and maintenance such as replacement of the substrate can be easily performed.

Further, since the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, the bending degree of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where the standing wall portion 850b is not provided. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from breaking due to the unreasonable force and causing a problem.

Further, the standing wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply board box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853, and the standing wall portion 850b is probably located adjacent to the power supply terminal 853. The wiring cord 854 extending from the connected connector terminal 855 can be extended to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken and it is impossible. It is possible to prevent the application of various forces, and it is possible to prevent problems such as disconnection from occurring.

Further, since the power supply board box 850 covering the power supply board 851 is provided with the standing wall portion 850b, it is not necessary to provide the power supply board 851 with the standing wall portion 850b, and the assembling work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. .. Further, since the power supply board 850 is covered with the power supply board 850, it is possible to prevent dust, dust, or the like, which causes a defect, from adhering to the power supply board 851, and the power supply board 851 is mounted on the power supply board 851. Electronic components (eg, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) can be made difficult to touch or replace, and defense power against fraud can be enhanced. Has become.

Further, the direction in which the connector terminals 855 are connected to the power supply terminals 853 on the power supply board 851 is a direction substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-back direction), and the connector terminals are connected to the power supply terminals 853 mounted on the power supply board 851. Since the force applied when connecting or disconnecting 855 can be made to easily act on the surface of the power supply substrate 851, it is possible to prevent the shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853, and the lead portion can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the breakage of the power supply and the power supply terminal 851 from coming off from the power supply board 851 due to the breakage of the power supply, and the pachinko machine 1 in which the trouble does not easily occur can be provided.

Furthermore, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means including the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, so that the wiring cord 854 can be fixed. Even if a force acts on the connector terminal 855 in a direction to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853, it is possible to prevent the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 from being released. It is possible to reliably maintain the connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 and prevent problems such as poor contact and poor current flow.

Further, since the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850 is provided with the protrusions 850c protruding rearward at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back in the standing wall portion 850b. Even if the wiring cord 854 is slid along the side, the protrusions 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off the standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that prevents the above and surely achieves the above-described effects.

Further, since the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply board box 850 causes the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b to be moved to the standing wall portion 850b side, the wiring cord 854 is hard to come off from the standing wall portion 850b. The wiring cord 854 can be folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, and the wiring cord 854 can be immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d. It is possible to carry out a series of work continuously, and it is possible to simplify the work process relating to assembly and suppress an increase in cost.

The payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 is a horizontally long, thin box-shaped box base 861 whose rear is opened, and a thin box-shaped cover which is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and whose front is opened. 862, and a payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 161) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered with the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 is provided with a plurality of separating/cutting portions 863 formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862 so as to project outward from the left end in rear view, and at one place of the plurality of separating/cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are caulked and fixed. As a result, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862 from each other, the separation cutting section 863 cannot be separated without cutting, and when the payout control board box 860 is opened, a trace thereof remains. .. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been illegally opened/closed. In this example, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

In the payout control board box 860, the error release switch 860a, the ball removal switch 860b, the inspection output terminal 860c, etc. attached to the payout control board 4110 face rearward through the cover 862 (see FIG. 62). ). Further, in the payout control board box 860, various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like are exposed rearward through the cover 862.

Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is mounted on the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and has a board mounting portion 871a formed on the rear surface on the upper left side in rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface on the right end in rear view. A board base 871 having the board base 871, a peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 mounted on the board mounting portion 871a of the board base 871 from the rear side and a peripheral panel relay terminal 872a mounted on the rear surface, and a board cover mounting portion 871b of the board base 871. A connection terminal plate cover 873 that is attached from the rear side and has an opening 873b that extends vertically in the rear wall portion 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a that faces rearward from the opening 873a of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are attached to the rear surface. Also, a CR unit connection terminal plate 874 supported in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and a board box cover 875 that covers the rear side of the board base 871 together with the connection joint terminal plate cover 873 are provided.

The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 of the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a frequency display for displaying the operating state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal board 874 is for connecting the ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 to the pachinko machine 1. The board base 871, the connection terminal board cover 873, and the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 are each made of transparent synthetic resin, and are connected to the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and CR unit connection terminal from the outside to the inside. The plate 874 and the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency display unit or the CR unit 6 or the like installed on the island facility side when a problem such as a ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. A displayed status display sticker 876 is attached.

As shown in FIG. 88, the board base 871 of the terminal board box 870 has a board mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with an open rear end. The board base 871 includes a fixing piece (not shown) that is formed on the upper inside of the board mounting portion 871a and fixes the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, and a peripheral panel relay formed on the lower inside of the board mounting portion 871a. A locking claw 871c for locking the lower end of the terminal plate 872 is provided, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871c. ing.

In addition, the board base 871 has a board cover mounting portion 871b formed in a thin box shape that is open to the rear side, and the inner circumference of the board base 871 has a size that allows the outer circumference of the connection terminal board cover 873 to be inserted. In addition, the inner peripheral wall is an outer piece portion 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The board base 871 extends rearward from the bottom wall of the board cover mounting portion 871b and abuts on the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874, and a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the outer piece portion 871c on the right side in rear view in the left-right direction. It is provided with two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction and a locking hole 871f which is arranged on the left outer side of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b in rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The ridge 871e of the board base 871 has a state in which the amount of rearward projection is slightly less than that of the outer piece portion 871c, and as shown in the drawing, it is provided on both side ends of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 as much as possible. It is arranged so that it will be close to.

Further, the board base 871 is disposed on the rear right side of the board cover mounting portion 871b rearward in the vertical direction so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction, and a pair of bearings 871g for pivotally supporting the board box cover 875 and a left end rear view. And a locking portion 871h in the shape of a rectangular tube which is arranged on the rear surface near the portion and extends in the front-rear direction.

The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 872 and is insertable into the board cover attachment portion 871b surrounded by the outer piece portion 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall portion 873a closing the rear end of the outer wall portion 873c, a rectangular opening portion 873b penetrating the rear wall portion 873a and extending in the vertical direction, and a rear wall portion substantially along the inner circumference of the opening portion 873b. The inner wall portion 873d extending from 873a forward (to the side of the board base 871) and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are held so that the front end of the inner wall portion 873d contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the upper and lower outer wall portions. And a pair of claw-shaped substrate holding portions 873e formed in 873c.

Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 has a plurality of openings 873f arranged at positions corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and penetrating through the rear wall portion 873a, and a vertical direction. A box-shaped protection portion 873g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed in the center and is open on the left side in rear view, and a substrate base 871 that extends outward (rightward) from the right end in rear view of the outer wall portion 873c. Pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing holes 871d, and elastic claw-shaped engagements that can be engaged with the engagement holes 871f of the substrate base 871 that are formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c when viewed from the rear. And a pawl piece 873i. Although not shown, inner wall portions 873d extending forward are also formed above and below the inner circumference of the central opening portion 873f provided with the protection portion 873g.

The connection terminal plate cover 873 is in the shape of a thin box whose front side is opened by the outer wall portion 873c and the rear wall portion 873a. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 can prevent the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from moving rearward by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. In addition, the pair of substrate holding portions 873e can restrict the forward movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and thus the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be detachably held. Has become. Further, in the connection terminal plate cover 873, the fixing piece 873h is inserted into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871, and then the locking claw piece 873i is locked in the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. The base 871 can be detachably attached to the substrate cover attaching portion 871b.

The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front surface side (rear surface side) thereof. Besides, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting with the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360, and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as illustrated, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a rectangular two-piece connector. There is.

In addition, the board box cover 875 of the terminal board box 870 is formed in a thin box shape that substantially covers the entire rear surface of the board base 871 and is opened to the front side. A pair of shaft portions 875a rotatably supported by the bearing portion 871g, a through hole 875b penetrating in the front-rear direction corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873, and front and rear from both left and right ends of the through hole 875b. And a locking piece 875d that is locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

The substrate box cover 875 pivotally supports the pair of shaft portions 875a on the bearing portion 871g of the substrate base 871 so that the rear surface of the substrate base 871 together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 can be opened and closed. There is. Further, the board box cover 875 has a length such that an impact wall 875c on the side closer to the shaft portion 875a (a side pivotally supported) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and an impact wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a. The length 875c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective collision walls 875c are substantially in contact with the rear surfaces of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It is like this.

In the terminal board box 870 of this example, the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is used as the D-sub connector, and therefore, as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is also exposed to the outside on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Further, the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 is a rectangular two-piece connector, and is attached so that it can be fitted and connected from the rear, as shown in the drawing.

As shown in FIG. 88, the terminal board box 870 of this example, in the assembled state, has the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Of the projection 871e and the outer piece portion 871c, and in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873, and the shaft portion 875a of the substrate box cover 875. Since the side wall 875c and the side wall 875c are respectively present, a multi-layered barrier is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 is a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to intrude an illicit tool with excellent flexibility between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871, the tool will not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal will not be bent. It is possible to surely prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from a direction along the surface of the plate 874 and reliably prevent an illegal act with respect to the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided in the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has become.

Further, in this terminal board box 870, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 abuts on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the CR unit attached as the CR unit connection terminal 874a is attached. Even if a D-sub connector having a gap formed with the connection terminal plate 874 is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and fraudulent acts can be prevented. It is like this.

Further, the terminal board box 870 includes a pair of shaft portions 875a on a board box cover 875 rotatably supported on the rear surface of the board base 871 on the side of the shaft portion 875a of the through hole 875b facing the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Since an impact wall 875c having a length that spans between them is provided and the impact wall 875c can increase the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875, a driver or the like can be inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the substrate box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the gap from being formed, making it difficult to perform fraudulent activity and reducing the deterrent force. It can be expensive.

Further, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, in a state in which the connection terminal on the wiring cord side is fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b formed as a two-piece connector, it is illegal to insert a needle-shaped electrode through the gap between the connector body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord. Even in this case, the protection portion 873g and the board box cover 875 can prevent the insertion of the electrode, and can also prevent fraudulent acts on the internal connection terminal 874b.

As described above, according to this example, since the terminal board box 870 accommodating the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are separated from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if an illegal tool is inserted through the space between the pachinko machine 1 and the tip of the illegal tool enters the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the accommodated CR unit connection terminal board 874. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts on the CR unit connection terminal board 874.

Further, when the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is housed in the terminal board box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board are arranged in the direction along the front surface (the back surface of the board) of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. The ridge 871e and the outer piece portion of the base 871 and the 871c are arranged in the direction of the rear surface (the surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate Since each of the impact walls 875c of the box cover 875 is present, a multi-layered defense wall is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 is a meandering crank shape. By analogy, even if an unauthorized tool having excellent flexibility is allowed to enter between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871, the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal board is not bent. It is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from a direction along the surface of the 874, and reliably prevent an illegal act on the CR unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The pachinko machine 1 can be used.

Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed as a CR unit connection terminal 874a with the substrate. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer periphery of the exposed lead portion can be covered by the inner wall portion 873d, and it is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is rotatably supported by the rear surface of the board base 871 to rotatably cover the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and an opening 873b of the connection terminal plate cover 873. The board box cover 875 having a plate-shaped impact wall 875c extending forward from the side end of the through hole 875b on the pivotally supported side to the rear surface of the board base 871 is further provided. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the portions of the box cover 875 that are axially supported with respect to the substrate base 871 to form a gap and an unauthorized tool is allowed to enter, the unauthorized wall 875c prevents the unauthorized tool from connecting terminals. It is possible to prevent the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) from reaching the side and prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the board box cover 875 and then the connection terminal board cover 873, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874. It is possible to increase deterrence against fraud. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the collision wall 875c, even if an attempt is made to insert a driver or the like between the board box cover 875 and the board base 871 to form a gap, the board box cover 875 Can be prevented from being distorted and a gap can be prevented from being formed, and fraudulent acts can be made difficult and deterrence can be enhanced.

Furthermore, even if an attempt is made to insert a needle-shaped electrode through the gap between the connector body and the wiring cord at the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the C internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, an illegal act is attempted. Since the protective portion 873g and the board box cover 875 cover the rear side of the corresponding opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body, outside the terminal board box 870. The needle-shaped electrode cannot be inserted from the (rear side) into the gap of the connector body, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the terminals of the connected wiring cords, and high crime prevention capability. Can be something.

Further, since the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with the substrate holding portion 873e that holds the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c is extended to the front side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap to perform fraud, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves to the rear side together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). It is possible to keep the protection of the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874a and the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874 and the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874a and the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874a. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts aimed at such as.

Furthermore, since the terminal board box 870 is formed of transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the terminal board box 870 can be viewed from the outside without disassembling the terminal board box 870. Is an unauthorized tool inserted into the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 housed inside, or has the CR unit connection terminal board 874 itself been replaced with an unauthorized tool? Alternatively, it is possible to easily check whether or not the electronic parts (for example, ROM, IC, resistors, capacitors, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or the like are replaced with unauthorized ones. Since it is possible to easily detect fraudulent acts and to detect fraudulent acts, it is possible to hesitate to perform fraudulent acts against those who perform fraudulent acts, and enhance deterrence against fraudulent acts. it can.

Further, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the rear surface side of the main body frame 5 such that the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like faces the rear side, the terminal board box 870 is attached to the outer frame 2 at the time of maintenance or the like. When the main body frame 5 is rotated to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 5 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like housed in the terminal board box 870 faces the operator (player side), and the CR The unit connection terminal board 874 and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

The main-side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal board 882 in the board unit 800 are the peripheral control section 4140 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the door frame. 5 is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500 provided in 5, the respective decorative boards, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 include a plurality of connection terminals for connecting to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and a board formed on the front surface of the board unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, the connection terminals are directed from the front surface of the main body frame base 600 to the front side.

The main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 are covered with the relay terminal board cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, as shown in FIGS. 61 and 63. In addition, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side are exposed to the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the wiring cord 196 is connected to these connection terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

In addition, the main relay terminal plate 880 includes a ball rental button 361, a return button 362 of the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side, a loan remaining display portion 363, and a rotation position detection sensor of the handle device 500. This is for relaying the connection between the 512, the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, the full tank detection sensor 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. In addition, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is provided in each of the decoration units 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each of the decoration boards 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. It is for relaying the connection between the dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b, 432c provided and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[1-3G. Back cover]
Next, the back cover 900 of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. FIG. 90(A) is a front perspective view of the back cover of the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 91 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover taken apart and seen from the rear side. The back cover 900 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be viewed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

The back cover 900 of the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. .. This back cover 900 has a plate-shaped main body 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body 902 in front view, and a front end of the side 904. A plurality of axial support pins 906 that are arranged in the vertical direction and project downward and are axially supported by the back cover axial support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball formed on the upper and lower left sides of the main body portion 902 in front view, respectively. An engaging piece 908 that engages with the rear cover engaging groove 718 of the base 710 and a rear cover engaging groove 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, and the rear cover 900 near the lower engaging piece 908. 3 and a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening in a non-openable manner.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction to the left side in the rear view of the lower locking piece 908 in the main body 902 of the back cover 900. 921, a vertically elongated rectangular locking port 922 that is disposed at a predetermined distance on the left side in a rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and locking that is elastically locked to the locking port 922 from the rear side. A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a piece 923a on one end side and a horizontally long slot 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 on the other end side, and a slot 923b of the guide member 923, which is inserted from the rear side of the main body 902. A fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921, and a guide member 923 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 so as to sandwich the guide member 923. And a holding member 925. The guide member 923 of the fastening mechanism 920 is made of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

Further, in the fastening mechanism 920, the locking piece 923 a of the guide member 923 is locked to the locking opening 922 of the main body 902 in a loosely fitted state, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. You can play with. Further, the fastening mechanism 920 is in a state in which the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disc-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw part 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the long hole 923b. It can slide in the left-right direction and does not fall off from the long hole 923b. In this fastening mechanism 920, when the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, the fastening member 924 protruding to the front side through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924a is inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body 902.

In the back cover 900 of this example, by pivotally supporting the pivot pin 906 on the back cover pivot portion 623 of the main body frame base 600, the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be opened and closed. By engaging the engagement piece 908 with the main frame base 600 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, the closed state can be achieved. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 of the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage cover 780 are substantially aligned with each other.

When the back cover 900 is closed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 that is inserted from the rear side to the front side of the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even if the cover 900 is closed, the tip of the male screw part 924a is stopped at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 projects rearward from the main body 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 that is locked in the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off the back cover 900, The state of being located on the rear side of the main body 9002 is maintained.

Then, from this state, by inserting the tip of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b and rotating the fastening member 924, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screw). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. When the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example does not remove the fastening member 924 even if the guide member 923 supporting the fastening member 924 is oblique with respect to the main body 902. Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male thread portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be favorably placed in the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

Further, in this example, since the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by the fastening mechanism 920 at one place, the fastening and fastening can be easily performed only by operating the fastening member 924 at one place. The back cover 900 can be released, and the labor involved in opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified and maintainability can be improved.

In addition, the back cover 900 has a connection cutout 910 that is cut out in a rectangular shape upward at the lower end of the main body 902 on the right side in a front view, and a confirmation opening that penetrates a rectangular shape on the upper side of the connection cutout 910 in a front view. 912, and a confirmation cutout 914 that is cut out in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body 902 when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 5, this back cover 900 is in a state of being closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the test terminal 4100f of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 through the connection notch 910. Is facing the rear side. Further, the back cover 900 has a board management seal 1178 (see FIG. 101) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1170 through the check opening 912 and faces the rear side. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 is exposed through the cutout portion 914. Accordingly, it is possible to perform operation confirmation, appearance confirmation, management state confirmation, etc. of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100 without opening the back cover 900 with respect to the main body frame 3.

In addition, the back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 penetrating the main body 902 and the side portion 904, and heat generated in the game board 4 and the like through the slits 916 of the main body frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged to the outside of the rear side. As shown in the drawing, a plurality of through holes 918 are provided at a position slightly leftward from the center when viewed from the front, and are wide and extend long in the vertical direction and are arranged in rows in the left-right direction at predetermined intervals. These through holes 918 are the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board 4 in a state where the back cover 900 is closed to the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 is housed and held in the main body frame 3. It is located on the rear side of a cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided in the device, so that heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be satisfactorily exhausted. Has become. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball so that the game ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

As a result, in this example, the fastening member 924 for fastening the back cover 900 that closes the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 with respect to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. Therefore, when the game board 4 is held in the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 to perform maintenance or the like on the rear side of the game board 4, Even if the fastening of the fastening member 924 fastening and fixing the back cover 900 to the body frame 3 is released to separate the fastening member 924 from the back cover fastening hole 780b of the body frame 3, the fastening member 924 is guided by the guide member 923. It is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left in the pachinko machine 1 by being held by the back cover 900 via the back cover 900, and the fastening member 924 is removed from the back cover 900. The pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from falling off.

Further, as described above, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from falling off the opened back cover 900, so that it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 that has been fastened at a predetermined position at the time of maintenance or the like. Since it can be held near the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, maintenance can be facilitated.

Further, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 is configured to extend at least to the side opposite to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is inclined with respect to the surface of the back cover 900, The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be directly positioned in the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a can be securely attached to the back cover fastening hole 780b in a correct state. Can be fastened to. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be properly fastened to the body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

Further, since the holding member 925 which cooperates with the head of the fastening member 924 to hold the fastening member 924 with respect to the guide member 923 is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 is provided. The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head portion of the holding member 925 and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming off from the long hole 923b of the guide member 923, and at the same time, the holding member 925. The fastening member 924 can be held movably with respect to the guide member 923 by a gap between the guide member 923 and the long hole 923b.

Further, a housing recess for housing the holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is passed through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover of the main body frame 3 is inserted. When the fastening member 924 is fastened to the fastening hole 780b, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be housed in the housing recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 can be brought into close contact with each other. The protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility that another member abuts the protruding portion of the guide member 923 or the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of a defect. In addition to being able to do so, it can improve the appearance.

Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female screw portion so as to be screwed with the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, it is possible to fasten by simply pulling as compared with the engagement by the locking claw. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove because the back cover 900 cannot be removed, the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

Furthermore, since the guide member 923 is flexible and the guide member 923 can be bent, it is possible to further increase the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 with respect to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921). It is easy to position the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 at a position straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, or move the male screw portion 924 straightly with respect to the back cover fastening hole 770b. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

In addition, the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 abuts along the inner wall extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 of the locking opening 922 of the back cover 900 with the locking opening. Since it is elastically locked to the 922, the tip end side (the long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923, which is movably attached, extends in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921. The locking piece 923a can be moved so as to rotate around the center, and the locking piece 923a can be pivotally supported with respect to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the long hole 923b on the front end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening work by the fastening member 924 can be facilitated.

Further, a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the main body frame 3, and the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a, respectively. Is further provided with a plurality of engaging pieces 908 for engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the rear cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3 so that the fastening member 924 is fastened. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the fastening work can be reduced as much as possible by using the fastening member 924 at only one place, and the work such as assembling and maintenance. You can improve your sex. Further, as described above, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement of the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, the closing range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 (rear side of the game board 4) can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening points by the fastening members 924.

Further, by pivotally supporting the pivot pin 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover pivot portion 623 of the body frame 3 (body frame base 600), the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported with respect to the body frame 3. Therefore, only by rotating the back cover 900 in the closing direction to close the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3, the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover fastening of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The holes 780b can be easily aligned with each other, and the fastening members 924 held by the back cover 900 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening holes 780b through the insertion holes 921. Further, since the back cover 900 is rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 3, even when the fastening by the fastening members 924 is released and the back cover 900 is opened during maintenance or the like, the back cover 900 is opened. The cover 900 can be left in a state of being pivotally supported by the main body frame 3, and it is not necessary to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the labor required for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[1-3H. Side crime prevention plate]
Next, the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 in a front view as shown in the drawing, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side crime prevention plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 extruded in a U-shape that is shallow in a plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 that is fixed to the top and bottom near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. , A positioning member 956 fixed to the inside of the main body 952 and engaging with the positioning recessed portion 1119 of the game board 4.

The main body 952 of the side crime prevention plate 950 has a side plate piece 952a extending substantially in the vertical direction and having a length substantially the same as the height of the main body frame base 600, and a front-rear direction having a substantially constant depth. The front end piece 952b extending in the direction, the middle piece 952c arranged so as to form a predetermined amount of gap behind the front end piece 952b and having a smaller protrusion amount than the front end piece 952b, and the front side from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d extending in the right direction as viewed from the front end piece 952b (see FIG. 108). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U-shape by the side plate piece 952a, the front end piece 952b, and the rear end piece 952d, and is formed between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d and the front constituent member 1110 in the game board 4. The left side when viewed from the front with the game panel 1150 is designed to be inserted (see FIG. 108).

In the side crime prevention plate 950 of this example, the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. In the side crime prevention plate 950, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952b of the main body 952 causes the shaft supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5 to support the shaft supporting side plate. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the letter-like protrusion 166, and prevents a tool for performing an illegal act from being inserted between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side in front view. (See FIG. 108). Further, the main body 952 of the side crime prevention plate 950 is made of a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extruded material, and the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the middle piece 952c arranged in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength/rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 is enhanced, and the strength of the main body frame 3 as a whole can be enhanced to favorably support the game board 4, the door frame 5, and the like. It has become.

As described above, according to this example, when the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed by the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is formed between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the crime prevention side plate 950. The rear side piece of the substantially U-shaped shaft-supporting side U-shaped protrusion 166 of the reinforcing unit 150 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952b is inserted in the U-shaped side. Since it is in a state of being sandwiched by the projecting pieces 166, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the pivotal-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 is attached to the front end piece 952b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the pivotal support side of the door frame 5 from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 3 by contact, and prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented, which can prevent fraudulent acts such as opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

Further, since the crime prevention side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted to each other, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is reduced. Since the strength and rigidity of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be prevented from being easily distorted by an unauthorized tool, the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Further, since the main body frame base 600 that supports the game board 4 is formed of synthetic resin, the crime prevention side plate 950 on the side that pivotally supports the door frame 5 (axial support side) is made of metal. The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced as compared with the case where the entire body frame 3 is made of metal.

Further, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 that locks the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one place between the upper and lower ends. Since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by the three door frame hook portions 1041, the open side is illegal such as a bar. It is possible to favorably prevent the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 from being spread even if it is gouged by another tool, and it is possible to prevent the door frame 5 from being forcibly opened.

Further, the rear end of the side piece 952a in the crime prevention side plate 950 is made to extend rearward from the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, and the front-rear direction dimension of the side piece 952a becomes longer. Since the bending rigidity against the load applied in the front-rear direction is increased, the strength and rigidity of the crime prevention side plate 950 as a whole can be further increased, and the crime prevention side plate 950 can be prevented from being forcibly bent and fraudulent. ..

Further, since the crime prevention side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed by the metal extruded mold material, the crime prevention side plate 950 (main body 952) having the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily formed. It can be formed, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost even if the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 is improved, and it is possible to reduce defects such as a decrease in strength occurring during processing as compared with the case where the metal plate is bent. The crime prevention side plate 950 can be made as small as possible and has high durability and strength.

[1-3I. Lock device]
Subsequently, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97. FIG. 93(A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main frame as seen from the front. Also, FIG. 94(A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 94(B) is a sliding rod for a glass door and a main body frame which are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the locking device. FIG. 4C is a rear perspective view showing the above, and FIG. Further, FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device after disassembling it, and FIG. 96 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the sliding lever for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame in the locking device. FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the fraud prevention member in the lock device.

The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 from approximately the upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 68. In addition, a door hook hole 620 formed in an upper part of a front end right side (open side) of the front end frame part 602 in the main body frame base 600, a lock locking hole 621 formed in a lower part, and a peripheral wall of the main body frame base 600. A plurality of lock mounting portions 625 are formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, a lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base body 1001 as a lock base body having a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base body 1001. The sliding rod 1040, the body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are U-shaped so that the sliding cannot be performed illegally. Tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base body 1001 are provided.

The U-shaped base 1001 in the locking device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section. And are slidably arranged. The U-shaped base body 1001 has a lateral width dimension that is extremely thin as compared with a conventional locking device in which a base body formed to have an L-shaped cross section is integrated. As a result, the horizontal dimension of the locking device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the horizontal dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased, which further increases the game area. 1100 wide game boards 4 can be provided.

The U-shaped base body 1001 is mounted such that the open side having a U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600. When the locking device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame 3, The open side of the base body 1001 is closed by the main body frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001 become the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is in a completely covered state and has a fraud prevention structure in which it is difficult to perform fraudulent acts against the lock device 1000 from the outside.

In addition, the U-shaped base 1001 in the locking device 1000 has a rectangular shape in which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate above and below the closed side (front side) opposite to the open side (rear side) thereof. A hook through opening 1002, a screw stopper 1003 projecting outward from the top and middle of the side surface 1001b (see FIG. 95) in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, and a screw stopper. An upper end portion and an intermediate portion on the open side (front side) of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 95) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the projecting portion 1003 is provided, and the front end project from the lower ends of the open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The locking projection 1004 is provided.

The screw fixing portion 1003 and the locking projection 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking projection 1004 is a hook hole 620 for the door of the main body frame base 600. When the screw locking portion 603 of the main body frame base 600 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other when the screw locking portion 603 is moved upward after being inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side. The locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) by screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attaching portion 625 via the interlocking screw.

The lock device 1000 is attached by screws not only in the upper and middle screw stop portions 1003, but also in the vicinity of the screw lock portion 1003 formed on the lock attachment piece 1008 described below and the cylinder lock through hole 611. The lock attachment portion 625 is also fixed to the main body frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower portion of the lock device 1000 is also attached.

Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at three positions on the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base body 1001 at the upper, lower and middle sides are provided with the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole. Since the structure is such that the locking device 1000 is inserted into the main body frame 621 for positioning and locking, and the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is fixed to the lock attaching portion 625 with a screw, the lock device 1000 can be constructed with an extremely simple structure. It can be firmly fixed to the (main body frame 3).

In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated into the U-shaped base body 1001 having an extremely thin width, the lock device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front and rear sides of the lock device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projection 1004 forming the front locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) is provided on the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the rear fixing structure is provided so as to project from the side surface 1001b close to the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 toward the peripheral wall portion 605 side, the front side locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605. The locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to cause rattling, as compared with the case where the locking device 1000 is formed on the side surface 1001b which is close to.

Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating in the left-right direction in the upper, middle, and lower portions of the both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b, and the U-shaped base body 1001 is provided with a sliding rod 1040 for a door frame. By inserting the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 and crimping it while the body frame sliding rod 1050 is stored, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. Can be mounted slidably in the vertical direction.

That is, as shown in FIG. 94(C), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the upper ends of the rivet elongated holes 1042 formed at the upper, middle, and lower locations of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG. As shown in (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates the lower ends of the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050, respectively. Thus, the door frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved upward and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved downward.

Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 is provided with a tamper-proof cutout portion 1007 formed on the closed side surface of the lower portion thereof and a side surface 1001b which is in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the open side and protrudes laterally from the front end. A lock attachment piece 1008 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010, an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief lateral hole 1022 are formed in the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. Although the details of the fraud prevention notch 1007 of the U-shaped base 1001 will be described later, the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 moves forward and backward. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is provided on the side surface 1001b so as to be located below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame base 600. The lock insertion hole 1009, which is provided so as to project from the front end portion toward the side and through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and the mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010, are mounted at two upper and lower positions in order to mount the screw 1012. A mounting hole 1014 bored in and a screw fastening portion 1003 bored to attach the lower part of the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 into which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking a spring 1035 that biases the second fraud prevention member 1032 upward, and a side escape hole 1022 that forms an escape hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034. Equipped with.

The cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting board 1011 for mounting to a lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting board 1011. At the same time, the engaging cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and has one end side serving as a first engagement protrusion 1017 that engages with the descending engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The end side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating.

In this cylinder lock 1010, a cylindrical cylinder lock body portion is inserted from a rear side into a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in a lock attachment piece 1008, and then attachment holes 1013 formed in two upper and lower portions of a lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base body 1001 by screwing a screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008 through.

The tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 illicitly rotate the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key, for example, with a piano wire or a wire, thereby tampering with the body frame sliding rod 1050. This is to prevent lowering. As shown in FIG. 95, the fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is swingably supported by the U-shaped base body 1001 around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. Specifically, the first fraud prevention member 1023, together with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050, which are arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001, passes through the swing shaft hole 1025. It is adapted to be attached by a lower insertion hole 1005 and a rivet 1006.

Further, the first tampering prevention member 1023 is vertically elongated at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base body 1001 on the plate-shaped surface thereof, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted therein. The projecting piece insertion hole 1026 is provided. The second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 penetrates through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. The ascending engagement hole 1045 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 are engaged with each other. In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inclined obliquely to the outer periphery of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 in the front upper diagonal direction so as to be able to contact the rear surface side of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated. The inclined portion 1024 is provided with the inclined portion 1024, and the inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 centers the swing shaft hole 1025. As shown in FIG. 97B (clockwise rotation in FIG. 97B).

Furthermore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 protruding toward the U-shaped base body 1001 side from an outer periphery of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 obliquely rearward and downward, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. It is provided with a restriction protrusion 1031 that protrudes downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 that penetrate through the restriction protrusion 1031 in the left-right direction and that are arranged vertically. The stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inserted into and engaged with the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when the body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. Thus, it is possible to prevent the body frame sliding rod 1050 from unintentionally sliding. In addition, the restriction protrusion 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 comes into contact with the second fraud prevention member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035, so that the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). It is possible to regulate movement.

In addition, the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is configured such that the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed in the pin hole 1029 is Guide the first tampering prevention member 1023 along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 by engaging with the horizontally elongated opening formed in the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base body 1001. You can do it. Further, the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is for pivotally connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 by the connection pin 1034.

On the other hand, the second tampering prevention member 1032 connected to the first tampering prevention member 1023 is formed of a plate material having an inverted "te" shape, and has a connecting hole 1033 at one upper end and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other upper end. And a contact portion 1037 at the lower end. The second tampering prevention member 1032 may be rotatably connected to the first tampering prevention member 1023 by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first tampering prevention member 1023. You can do it. The second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (the other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked by the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. As a result, the spring 1035 urges the spring upward. Further, in the second fraud prevention member 1032, the contact portion 1037 contacts the closing plate 25 fixed to the lower inside of the outer frame 2 when the body frame 3 is closed.

Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the locking device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base body 1001 and is formed by a vertically long metal plate member. The door sliding rod 1040 includes door frame hook portions 1041 that project toward the front at three locations in the upper, lower, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side thereof. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door sliding rod 1040 projects forward from the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 in a state where the door sliding rod 1040 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001. When the locking device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame 5 protrudes forward from the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600 (see FIGS. 63 and 68, etc.). The hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the can be locked. It should be noted that the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the drawing, whereby by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040, the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover. The locked state with 165 can be released.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a vertically long rivet elongated hole 1042 formed in the center of the upper, middle and lower side surfaces and through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, and below the uppermost rivet elongated hole 1042 and for the door frame. At the lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040, a guide protrusion 1043 protruding in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided. The rivet elongated hole 1042 of the door sliding rod 1040 is adapted to be inserted with the rivet 1006 which is inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the rivet 1006 is attached to the door frame sliding rod. It is formed vertically so as not to interfere with the raising operation of 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 that has penetrated the upper end of the rivet elongated hole 1042 is in contact with the rivet elongated hole 1042. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is configured such that the guide protrusion 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. Thus, it is possible to guide the mutual sliding operation of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 has a spring hook portion 1046 formed at the upper end portion for locking one end of the spring 1048. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the spring 1048 causes the sliding of the door frame. The rod 1040 is urged downward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is urged upward, respectively. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle of the vertical direction, and is pressed out from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is configured to contact the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 1001 and can prevent the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is like this.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with an elongated play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 has a tip end of the first engagement projection 1017 so as not to interfere with the rotation operation of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement projection 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. The section constitutes a movable space. Further, when the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the ascending engagement hole 1045 is configured such that the pivot movement of the engagement cam 1016 causes the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame to ascend. For engaging with. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a relief cutout portion 1049 that is cut out in the vertical direction larger than the tampering prevention cutout portion 1007 at the rear of the lower portion of the vertical side. The escape notch portion 1049 interferes with the door frame sliding rod 1040 so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 surely engages with the fraud prevention notch portion 1007 and the engagement notch portion 1066. The relevant part is cut out so as not to become.

On the other hand, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, Equipped with. That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not composed of one vertically long metal plate as in the conventional case, and is made of a metal including an upper hook member 1051 and a lower hook member 1052 having hook portions 1054 and 1065. A plate material is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently housed in the narrow space of the U-shaped base body 1001.

The upper hook member 1051 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at an upper end portion, and a rivet elongated hole 1055 penetrating in a lateral direction on a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054. , A protruding piece moving hole 1056 penetrating in the left-right direction below the rivet elongated hole 1055, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at a lower end of a vertical side in front of the protruding piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057. And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the upper inside of the outer frame 2 on the open side. The locking claw portion is formed upward.

Further, the rivet oblong hole 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rivet oblong hole 1042 formed on the upper portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end portion of the rivet elongated hole 1055, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. A guide protrusion 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protrusion moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1040 are inserted. The mutual movement with 1050 can be guided.

Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured so that the other end of the spring 1048 is locked. Further, the connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is bent and inserted. Furthermore, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured to contact the inner side wall of the U-shaped base body 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base body 1001. It has no play and can slide smoothly.

On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 has a hook portion 1065 protruding rearward from the lower end portion and a rivet for penetrating in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052. The long hole 1061, the downward engaging hole 1062 arranged below the long hole for rivet 1061, the play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the downward engaging hole 1062, and the play hole 1063 below the play hole 1063. A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed near the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 formed on the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement hole formed at the lower portion of the vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. The joint notch portion 1066 and the contact portions 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed on the lower portion on the inner side of the open side of the outer frame 2. The locking claw portion is formed upward. Further, the rivet elongated hole 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet elongated hole 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet elongated hole 1061 is riveted. In a normal state in which 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet elongated hole 1061. This allows the lower hook member 1052 to move downward.

Further, when the first engaging projection piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the descending engaging hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 descends the body frame sliding rod 1050 by the rotating operation. Is for engaging. Further, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 is inserted into the second engaging projection 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 so as not to interfere with the rotating operation of the second engaging projection 1018 when the second engaging projection 1018 is rotated. The distal end of the can form a movable space. Further, the guide piece 1043 below the sliding lever 1040 for the door frame is inserted into the protruding piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding blade for the main body frame are inserted. It is possible to guide mutual movement with the moving rod 1050.

Further, the bent lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the contact portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 is configured to contact the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be slid smoothly without backlash.

Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described. In order to assemble the locking device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053, and in this state, the guide protrusion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The piece 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet oblong holes 1042 and the rivet oblong holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped with each other. In the combined state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are penetrated through the hook penetrating opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001 and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the slide for the main body frame. After inserting the moving rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped substrate 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005.

When inserting the rivet 1006, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the long holes for rivet 1055, 1061, 1042. When inserting the rivet 1006 at the lowermost end, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first tampering prevention member 1023 and attach the first tampering prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001 at the same time. Further, before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is fixed to the pin hole. It is necessary to fix the guide pin 1028 to the 1029 with a screw (not shown) and then insert the guide pin 1028 into the opening at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

Further, in a state where the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base body 1001 by the rivets 1006, the spring 1048 is hung between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057 to form the door. The frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are urged in mutually opposite directions, and further, the spring 1035 is hung over the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second improper prevention. The member 1032 is in a state of being in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. After that, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement projection piece 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the insertion vertical opening 1020 outside the inclined portion 1024, and the second engagement projection portion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is also inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first tampering prevention member 1023.

As described above, in order to attach the assembled locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting, the locking projection 1004 protruding in a hook shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in that state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is inserted. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by aligning with the lock attaching portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the corresponding hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 forming the locking structure of the front part is formed so as to project from the side surface 1001a which does not contact the peripheral wall part 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 while the rear part is fixed. Since the screw fastening portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b contacting the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, the locking structure at the front portion contacts the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where the lock device 1000 is formed on the side surface 1001b, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as to prevent rattling.

Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. As shown in FIG. 96, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 96(A). In addition, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 are engaged with the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the door frame 5 are The hook cover 165 is in a locked state. In that state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engaging protrusion 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is rotated in a direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 96(B). The tip of the first engaging projection 1017 is engaged with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to push the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048, and to connect with this. The connected connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down to descend. As a result, the locking state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 is released, and the body frame 3 is pulled out by pulling the body frame 3 to the front side. It can be opened to the frame 2.

Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are in a state of being raised by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as the state shown in FIG. 96A), but the hook portion 1054. , 1065 are inclined downward toward the outer side, and therefore, by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2, the inclined portions of the upper sides of the hook portions 1054, 1065 are closed by the closing plates 24, 25. Since it abuts on the lower end, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 descends downward, and the hooks 1054, 1065 upward claws and the closing plates 24, 25 are again locked, and the main body frame slide is performed. The rod 1050 is raised to return to the locked state.

On the other hand, when a not-shown key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 96(C), The tip of the second engaging projection piece 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 1040 upward against the biasing force of the spring 1048. Therefore, the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released from the locked state, so that the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. It can be opened to the body frame 3.

Note that when the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is in a state of being lowered by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as the state shown in FIG. 96A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for the door is inclined upward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3, the inclined portion of the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame becomes the hook cover 165. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is lifted upward by abutting the upper end of the door frame, and the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 are re-engaged with each other. The moving rod 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 in the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the entire length of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the U-shaped base body 1001 has a substantially vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. A door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three positions of the upper end portion, the central portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to reliably lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire between them. You are unable to perform any act.

As described above, the locking device 1000 of the door frame 3 of the present embodiment unlocks the main body frame 3 from the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and in the other direction. By rotating, the locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released. Further, the locking device 1000 of the present example does not engage in a fraudulent act such as hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and lowering the hook without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010. You can't. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a locking mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032. The second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed in the closed space.

First, the operation of the lock mechanism which is the first fraud prevention structure will be described with reference to FIG. First, when the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 97(A), the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact each other. It is in the state of having done. In this state, the urging force of the spring 1035 causes the first tampering prevention member 1023 to rotate counterclockwise, the stopper piece 1027 enters the tampering prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 tampering prevention notch. It is in a state of engaging with an engaging cutout portion 1066 formed in the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007. As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked on the body frame sliding rod 1050 to pull it down, the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged with each other. It is impossible to illegally pull down (unlock) downward, and it is impossible to perform an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3.

On the other hand, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 to unlock the main body frame 3 properly, as shown in FIG. 97(B), the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engaging protrusion 1017 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 of the first tampering prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engaging protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. Starting to rotate in the clockwise direction shown in the figure around 1025, the stopper piece 1027 also moves so as to retract from the fraud prevention notch 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement cutout 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state to also rotate the first engagement protrusion 1017, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the descending engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 are released, and the body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2. You can do it.

When the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second tampering prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. Therefore, the first tampering prevention member 1023 and the second tampering prevention member 1023. The positional relationship with 1032 is almost the same as the positional relationship shown in FIG. 97(A). When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 97(A) is obtained. As a result, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not interfere with the closing of the main body frame 3. In addition, in the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050 from being fraudulently performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is illegally opened, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and it is practically difficult to perform fraudulent acts of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like. For this reason, it is devised so that the body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be tampered with.

Even with the lock mechanism that is the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is not possible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming a case where the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized act, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided in the above are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054 and 1065, respectively, and are completely covered. Since it is in the state, even if an attempt is made to pull down the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 are pulled down. Since this prevents illicit tools from entering the enclosed space, the structure is such that illicit acts cannot be performed easily.

As described above, the locking device 1000 according to the present embodiment has a door frame sliding rod 1040 inside the U-shaped base body 1001 whose lateral width is extremely thin as compared with the conventional locking device integrated in the L-shaped base body. The body frame sliding rod 1050 is slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 to the U-shaped base 1001 is set to a position lower than the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the left-right direction and the up-down direction is extremely increased and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 is placed on the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be firmly attached.

Further, since the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 having a U-shaped cross section is attached so as to face the back surface of the body frame 3, when the locking device 1000 is attached to the body frame 3 (body frame base 600), the inside The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, which are arranged in the above, are completely covered by the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, 1065. It is impossible to easily carry out an illegal act such as inserting a piano wire or the like and pulling down the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided therein.

Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at three positions on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base body 1001 are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. Since it is structured such that the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at three positions on the upper, lower and middle sides of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base body 1001 are fixed to the lock attaching portion 625 with screws by using a screw, the structure is extremely simple. With such a structure, the locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600).

In the lock device 1000 of this example, a screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock attaching piece 1008 and a cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 are provided near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 as a structure for fixing the lower portion of the U-shaped base body 1001 with a screw. Although the structure in which the formed lock attachment portion 625 is screwed is shown, instead of this, a screw 1012 that attaches the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is attached to the lock. A structure may be adopted in which lock mounting holes that are screwed through the piece 1008 are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 611. Further, even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame) only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 at the rear portion of the locking device 1000 and the lock attaching portion 625. It can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the base 600).

Further, in the lock device 1000 of this example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered by the U-shaped base body 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. An L-shaped base body (lock base body), and a door frame slide rod 1040 and a main body frame slide rod are placed in a closed space formed by a side surface 1001a of the L-shaped base body (lock base body) and a first side wall 540. The structure may be such that 1050 is housed, and the same effects as those of the locking device 1000 described above can be obtained.

As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of this example, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (backward and rearward) on the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and the upper side of the prize ball base 710. The award ball tank 720 that stores the game balls supplied from the island facility side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is aligned with the game balls discharged from the award ball tank 720, and the rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base. A transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side, and game balls released from the tank rail unit 730 are paid out to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction, and a rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball device 740, which is partially attached to the rear side, and the side portion 904, which extends to the rear end of the main body frame base 600, have a rear surface that is substantially the same as the rear surface of the tank rail unit 730 or the prize ball device 740. Since the transparent back cover 900 arranged in a plane is provided, the rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 held in the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900 and the like. The pachinko machine 1 is capable of visually recognizing the side surface and easily inspecting (visually inspecting) the rear side of the game board 4 without opening the back cover 900 covering the rear side of the game board 4. be able to.

Further, not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc., so that the game board holding port of the main body frame base 600 can be seen. Even when tools such as a driver and pliers, cleaning waste, dust and dirt are left between the game board 4 and the back cover 900 when the game board 4 is detached from the front side of the 601 and the game machine 4 is removed from the outside. It can be easily found from the above, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of some trouble due to the residue.

Further, as described above, since the rear surface and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the outside, an unauthorized device or tool for performing an illegal act is attached to the rear side or the side surface of the game board 4. Even if it is, it is possible to easily find out, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts are performed, and it is possible to easily find out an illegal device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside, The pachinko machine 1 can be hesitant to attach an unauthorized device or the like, and has a high deterrent against illegal acts.

Further, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed come into contact with the game board 4 or the game board 4 is used. It is possible to prevent foreign matters such as dust and dirt from adhering to the rear side, and it is possible to keep the game board 4 in a good state and prevent a problem from occurring.

Further, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is located at a position approximately twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is about half the depth of the main body frame 3, so that the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. be able to. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is set to about half the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is laid down can be made as low as possible to have a flat shape. The attachment work for attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740 and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 can be facilitated.

Further, the rear surface (main body portion 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. attached to the prize ball base 710. As a result, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be a substantially flat surface, and by eliminating the rearward projection, it is possible to catch or abut other members in the installed island equipment. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of trouble. Further, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, a buffer material having a simple shape can be used when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, and the stacking efficiency (storage efficiency) can be increased. The cost related to the machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly viewed through the slits 916 and the like, so the game board It is possible to make the rear side of No. 4 and the like easier to see, and it is possible to reliably obtain the above-described operational effects. Further, even if the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 of the back cover 900. The heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from accumulating, and control can be prevented from becoming instable due to heat, the control of the game becoming unstable, and the deformation of members such as synthetic resin. be able to. Further, the slits 916 and the through holes 918 of the back cover 900 are set to a size that the game balls cannot pass through. Therefore, for example, even if the game balls spill on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, the game balls pass through the slits 916 and the like. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring due to the game ball entering.

[1-4. Basic configuration of game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 107. FIG. 98 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. FIG. 99 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and seen from the rear. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 102(A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit in the game board in a state where it is attached to a pachinko machine, and (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit.

Further, FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100 and the like as seen from the front, and FIG. 104 is a game as seen from the back of FIG. 103. It is an exploded perspective view of a board. In addition, FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view of the game panel in the game board of FIG. 103 cut in the vertical direction. Further, FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using a front component member of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 103 and the like as seen from the front, and FIG. 107 is a game board as seen from the back of FIG. FIG.

As shown in the drawing, the game board 4 of the present embodiment defines the outer periphery of a game area 1100 in which a player operates a handle device 500 to hit a game ball, and the outer shape is a substantially rectangular front shape. A member 1110, a plate-shaped game panel 1150 arranged on the rear side of the front component member 1110 and defining the rear end of the game area 1100, a substrate holder 1160 arranged on the lower rear side of the game panel 1150, and a substrate holder 1160. A main control board box 1170 that houses a main control board 4100 that is attached to the rear surface of the game machine 1100 and controls a game content performed by driving a game ball into the game area 1100, and a predetermined control signal from the main control board 4100. A function display unit 1180, which is capable of displaying the game status and is visibly attached to the player side at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110, is provided. Although not shown in FIGS. 98 to 105 and described later in detail, the game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, it is further provided (see FIGS. 110 to 116, etc.).

The game board 4 of the present embodiment has a basic configuration formed by the front component member 1110, the game panel 1150, the board holder 1160, the main control board box 1170, and the function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. The front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170 form a detailed configuration that characterizes the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4). Here, the basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and the detailed configuration will be described later.

[1-4A. Previous component]
Next, the front component 1110 of the game board 4 will be described. The outer shape of the front component member 1110 of the game board 4 of this example is a substantially rectangular shape that can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction. The outer circumference of the game area 1100 is defined by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1110 includes an outer rail 1111 that extends in an arc shape from a lower end on the left side in the front view toward the left in a clockwise direction along a circumferential direction in a clockwise direction in a front view, and passes through an upper end in the center in the left-right direction in a front view and extends to an obliquely upper right portion. An inner rail 1112 that is disposed inside the outer rail 1111 substantially along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to an obliquely upper left portion in a front view so that the inner rail 1112 smoothly continues from a lower end of the inner rail 1112. An inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position lower than the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise in front view, the end (upper end) of the inner peripheral rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111. Of the game area 1100 at the boundary portion between the inner rail 1112 and the inner rail 1112, and the stop portion 1114 to which the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111 can be brought into contact with the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1111. From the upper end of the inner rail 1112, which is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 and which is arranged at the lowermost end and is lowered toward the rear, and the upper end of the inner rail 1112. Only the closed position extending upward and the open position in which the outer rail 1111 is opened by rotating in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front can be rotated and can be returned to the closed position side. And a backflow prevention member 1116 urged by a spring (not shown).

When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the front component 1110 has a lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, as shown in FIG. It is adapted to be located on an extension of the firing rail 660 in the device 650. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the launch rail 660, a space that is widened in the left-right direction and downward is formed, and a game ball launched along the launch rail 660 of the ball launching device 650. By jumping over the space, it can be driven into the space between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball hit between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is installed. , By turning to the open position side against the urging force, it is possible to enter the game area 1100.

Further, when the game ball is hit strongly with the ball launch device 650, the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the stop portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. It is possible to forcibly change the rolling direction of the game ball by bringing the game ball into contact with this stop portion 1114, and the game ball continuously rolls from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It is designed to prevent movement. In addition, even if the game ball that has entered (struck) into the game area 1100 tries to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the biasing force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

In addition, when the game ball hit into the game area 1100 is not received in the starting openings 2101 and 2102 and the winning openings 2103, 2104 and 2201 of the table unit 2000 which will be described later, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100. Then, by the out-port guide surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, it is guided to the out-port 1151 of the game panel 1150 and discharged from the out-port 1151 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. ing.

On the other hand, when the game ball shot from the hitting ball launching device 650 cannot cross the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112 and enter the game area 1100, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Rolling downward in the opposite direction, and from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, a foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is formed. When it falls, it is received in the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located in the lower part of the foul space 626, and is discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

The outer rail 1111 of the front component member 1110 has a metal plate attached to its surface to improve wear resistance due to rolling of the game ball and to allow the game ball to roll smoothly. ing. Further, the stopper portion 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin disposed on the surface thereof, and even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is mitigated. The game ball can be repelled inward.

In addition, the front component 1110 includes a wall-shaped crime prevention protrusion 1117 protruding forward from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 and a substantially vertical center along the inner rail 1113 from the lower side of the outlet guide surface 1115. A rail-shaped crime prevention groove 1118 that extends to the front end and is recessed from the front end by a predetermined amount. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the crime prevention protrusion 1117 in the front component member 1110 overlaps with the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 183 of the crime prevention cover 180 in the door frame 5 in the vertical direction. As a result, even if an injustice tool such as a piano wire is intruded from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot side (left side in front view), the injustice tool can reach the inside of the game area 1100. You can't.

Further, in the front component member 1110 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the post-crime projection 182 of the crime prevention cover 180 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail crime prevention groove 1118. In addition, the post-crime prevention protrusion 182 is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the outer surface (the side opposite to the game area 1100) of the inner rail 1112. Even in the inner rail 1112, the rail crime prevention groove 1118, and the crime prevention rear projection piece 182, a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire that has entered from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the inside of the game area 1100. Can be prevented.

Further, the front component 1110 is arranged at the left end in the front view in the vertical direction and is spaced apart in the vertical direction, and a pair of positioning recesses 1119 that are recessed from the front to the rear and open at the left end, and are separated in the vertical direction at the right end in the front view. A pair of game board stoppers 1120 that are arranged in a row, a fixed recess 1121 that is arranged on the left side of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 when viewed from the front, is opened downward, and is formed in an arcuate shape on the upper side and is recessed from the front side. Near the left end of the lower end, there is provided a spherical passage notch 1122, which is a rectangular notch extending upward from the lower end in the left-right direction. The positioning recessed portion 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted to the positioning member 956 attached inside the side surface crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 so that the left end of the game board 4 inserted in the game board holding port 601 in front view. However, it is possible to regulate the movement in the front-back direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, so that the game board stopper 1120 can be attached to the game board. By locking to the locking portion 608, the front end of the game board 4 inserted in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 in front view can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. ..

In addition, the fixed recess 1121 of the front component member 1110 is a state in which the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the game board fixing tool 690 pivotally supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 is seen in a front view. When it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the fixing piece 690a of the game board fixing tool 690 is inserted, and the lower end of the game board 4 is restricted from moving forward by the game board fixing tool 690. It is like this. Further, the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component member 1110 has a similar ball passage notch 1152 formed at the same position of the game panel 1150, so that the game board 4 holds the game board holding port 601 of the main frame 3. The front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the ball passage cutouts 1122 and 1152 in the state of being inserted into.

Further, the front component 1110 has a laterally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end in front view at the lower end, and a thickness in the front-rear direction from the center of the lower side of the through hole 1123 in the left-right direction to the left in front view. A fastening portion 1124 formed thinly and a certificate paper sticking portion 1125 arranged on the left side of the through hole 1123 in front view to stick a certificate stamp for certifying confirmation are provided. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the fastening portion 1124 in the front component member 1110 has a predetermined fastening band in a fastening hole formed in the conventional body frame when the game board is attached to the conventional body frame. By winding and fastening each other, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the game board 4, and prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 4.

Further, in the front component 1110, a display portion 1181 of a function display unit 1180, which will be described later, is arranged outside the rail crime prevention groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and at the lower right in front view. Further, the front component 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 protruding rearward from the left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed into the mounting boss 1126 from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 through the fixed boss 1162. By wearing the game panel 1150, the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160 can be held between them. In addition, the positioning protrusion 1127 can be fixed to the predetermined position of the game panel 1150 by fitting the inner rail 1112 into the inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150.

[1-4B. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 on the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wood plate material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and its outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1110. This gaming panel 1150 has an out port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guide surface 1115 in the front component member 1110 at a lower portion in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a horizontally elongated front end on the left side in the front view at the lower end. And a downward opening of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front-rear direction through the ball passage cutout 1152 of the same shape as the ball passage cutout 1122 of the front component member 1110 and the lower right corner in front view. An insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted is provided.

Further, in the game panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110 near the lower left and right ends, and the positioning protrusion 1127 of the front component member 1110 are inserted and fixed. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 to be formed, and a groove-shaped out-ball discharge groove 1156 (see FIG. 101) in which a rear surface side of the out port 1151 is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front and the lower end side is opened downward. And a notch portion 1157 which is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component member 1110 and which is notched so as to penetrate from the right end in front view in the front-rear direction. In addition, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

The game panel 1150 in the game board 4 of this example can define the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is defined by the front component member 1110, and within the range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface, A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are arranged in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a front unit 2000 is attached. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, the game panel 1150 is formed so that the outlet 1151 is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100, and when assembled on the game board 4, it is formed at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 in the front component member 1110. The game ball guided to the rear by the out-out guide surface 1115 thus entered enters the out-hole 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[1-4C. Substrate holder]
Next, the board holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box-like shape whose upper and front sides are open. The substrate holder 1160 has an out-ball discharging portion 1161 formed so as to penetrate in the up-down direction at the front end of the bottom wall portion at approximately the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the top surface of the bottom wall portion has the out-ball discharging portion 1161. The game balls are formed so as to be lowered toward the discharge portion 1161, and are discharged (discharged) from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit and the back unit, and are supplied (discharged) to the bottom surface of the substrate holder 1160. It is adapted to be discharged downward from the out-ball discharging portion 1161. It should be noted that the out-ball discharging section 1161 is located directly above the discharging-ball receiving section 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. All of the game balls discharged from are passed through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800 and discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

The substrate holder 1160 also includes a plurality of fixing bosses 1162 that project forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are designed so that the tip ends are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 11520, and are fitted with the rear ends of the attachment bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110. With the boss 1126 fitted, a predetermined screw is threaded from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 through the fixed boss 1162 to the mounting boss 1126 to attach the substrate holder 1160 to the front component member 1110. The game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160 while being assembled.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 101, the board holder 1160 includes a fixing portion 1163 to which the fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the lateral side, and a fixing portion 1163 at the rear end of the rear surface of the rear wall portion. The elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170 is arranged so as to face the 1163, and has a locking portion 1164 that can be locked from the rear side. The fixing portion 1163 and the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160 allow the main control substrate box 1170 to be detachably supported on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160.

[1-4D. Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control board box 1170 has a thin horizontally long box-shaped substrate base 1171 whose rear side is opened, and a thin horizontally long box-shaped substrate base 1171 which covers the rear surface of the substrate base 1171 and is fitted into the inside of the substrate base 1171 from the rear side. A board cover 1172 to be fitted is provided, and a main control board 4100 having electronic components, terminals and the like mounted on the rear surface side is provided at the front end of the board cover 1171. In addition, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left end of the board base 1171 when viewed from the rear, and is fixed to the fixing piece 1174 that fits into the fixing portion 1163 of the board holder 1160, and the right end of the board cover 1172 when viewed from the rear. An elastic fixing piece that protrudes rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160 is provided.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 101 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is arranged at the right and left ends in a rear view by sandwiching the elastic fixing pieces 1175, and seals the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing part 1176, a hermetic seal (not shown) attached across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower ends of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal covering the surface of the hermetic seal. A protective cover 1177 and a board management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the board cover 1172 are provided. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same structure as the separating/cutting portion 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and is caulked and fixed at any one of the four sealing portions 1176. Has been done. In this main control board box 1170, in order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, it is necessary to cut the caulked and fixed sealing portion 1176 so that a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1170 remains. Has become. As a result, whether the main control board box 1170 has been opened improperly can be clearly discriminated visually from the outside.

Since the main control board box 1170 is provided with four sealing parts 1176 in this example, the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. Further, in the main control board box 1170 of this example, a hermetic seal is attached over the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and the hermetic seal is cut when the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 are separated. It must be peeled off or peeled off, and even with this hermetic seal, a trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened/closed, the internal main control board 4100 is illegally modified, or the main control board 4100 is replaced with an unauthorized main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). Even so, it is possible to visually confirm it from the outside, and it is possible to prevent the fraudulent acts from being performed.

Further, the main control board box 1170 has an opening penetrating in the front-back direction of the board cover 1172 at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the test terminal 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening, Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like are exposed to the rear side. By connecting a predetermined measuring device to the test terminal 4100f exposed from the rear surface of the main control board box 1170, the main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-mentioned sealing portion 1176 and hermetically sealed seal are cleverly worked, the pachinko machine 1 having a high crime prevention performance can be confirmed by visually observing whether the main control board 4100 has been tampered with or not. You can do it.

[1-4E. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 on the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is mounted and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110, and the display unit 1181 disposed on the front surface of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible from the player side and the front component member 1110. And a rear protruding portion 1182 protruding rearward from the rear surface.

As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 102A, the display section 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example displays a game state that changes depending on the game ball that is driven into the game area 1100 at the left end in front view. A game state indicator 1183 for one LED and two LEDs lined up and down on the right side of the game state indicator 1183 for displaying the number of holdings of the game balls to the first starting opening 2101. For the first special symbol memory display 1184, the first special symbol is the first special lottery result which is arranged on the right side of the first special symbol memory display 1184 and is selected by receiving the game balls into the first starting opening 2101. The first special symbol display device 1185 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying as, and the lottery by receiving the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 arranged diagonally above and right of the first special symbol display device 1185. From the second special symbol display 1186 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying the second special lottery result as the second special symbol, and two LEDs lined up and down on the right side of the second special symbol display 1186 It is provided with a second special symbol memory display device 1187 for displaying the number of holdings regarding the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port 2102.

Further, in the display section 1181 of the function display unit 1180, the number of reservations relating to the passage of the gate section 2301 by the game ball is arranged side by side in an arc shape substantially above the inner peripheral rail 1113 from immediately above the second special symbol display device 1186. A normal symbol storage display 1188 consisting of four LEDs for displaying, and a normal lottery result selected by a game ball passing through the gate portion 2301 arranged below the normal symbol storage display is displayed as a normal symbol. Normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED for, and the diagonal right upper side of the normal symbol memory display 1188 are arranged side by side and the special winning opening when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" And a round display 1190 made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of times the open/close pattern 2103 is repeated (the number of rounds).

The game state indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a color LED whose red, green, and orange colors can be changed, and the color of the emitted light and the lighting and blinking. Depending on the combination, it is possible to display various game states (for example, probability variation state, time reduction state, probability variation short time state, big hit game state, small hit game state, etc.).

Further, the first special symbol storage display 1184 in the function display unit 1180, when the first special symbol can not be variably displayed in the first special symbol display 1185, the game ball is received in the first starting opening 2101. In this case, the start of variable display is displayed as a hold number (memory number) of the first special symbol that has been held (stored). This first special symbol memory display 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a consisting of a predetermined LED, and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b, lighting of the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a, 1184b.・The number of holdings can be displayed by a blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of holding is one, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned off, and when the number of holding is two, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a, 1184b. Lights together, when the number of reservations is three, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a blinks and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b lights up, and when the number of reservations is four, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are both It is supposed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

Further, the second special symbol storage display 1187 in the function display unit 1180, when the second special symbol can not be variably displayed in the second special symbol display 1186, the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2102. In this case, the start of variable display is held (stored) and the number of held (memorized) second special symbols is displayed. This second special symbol memory display 1187 has a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b consisting of a predetermined LED, lighting of the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a, 1187b.・The number of holdings can be displayed by a blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of holding is one, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned off, and when the number of holding is two, the second special symbol storage display lamp 1187a, Both 1187b light up, when the number of reservations is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b lights up, and when the number of reservations is four, the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a, 1187b are Both are designed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

Furthermore, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are the first special lottery that is selected by receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102. The result and the second special lottery result are displayed. The 7-segment LED stops after changing for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and is stopped by the light-emitting pattern (special pattern) of the stopped 7-segment LED. The special lottery result and the second special lottery result can be recognized by the player.

Further, the normal symbol display device 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a red, green, or orange color LED that can change its luminescent color, and is a combination of luminescent color to be emitted and lighting/flashing. As a result, it is possible to display the normal lottery result which is drawn by the game balls passing through the gate portion 2301. In addition, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 1189, like the special symbol, is changed and displayed for a predetermined time, and then is stopped and displayed in the light emission pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result.

Further, the normal symbol storage display 1188 in the function display unit 1180, when the normal symbol can not be variably displayed in the normal symbol display 1189, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301, the start of variable display is suspended. The number of stored (memorized) ordinary symbols is stored (the number of stored). This normal symbol memory display 1188 includes four normal symbol memory lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the normal symbol memory lamp 1188a from the bottom depending on the number of holdings. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, it is possible to display the number of reserved normal symbols. In this example, up to four variable display of the normal symbols are reserved (stored).

Furthermore, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 is provided with a two-round display lamp 1190a and a fifteen-round display lamp 1190b, each of which is composed of a predetermined LED. By turning on each lamp, the round in the "big hit" game is played. The number can be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 102(A), the function display unit 1180 of this example can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1. It has become. Moreover, the game state display 1183 of the function display unit 1180, the first special symbol storage display 1184, the first special symbol display 1185, the second special symbol display 1186, the second special symbol storage display 1187, the normal symbol storage The display device 1188, the normal pattern display device 1189, and the round display device 1190 are attached to the front surface of the function display board 1191 (see FIG. 162). A connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component member 1110 of the game board 4, compared with the case where it is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 300 attached to the game panel 1150, the function The display unit 1180 can be used as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified and the cost can be prevented from increasing, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 that can be embodied by the back unit 3000 and characterize the model of the pachinko machine 1) is different, the position of the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change, so that the player or game The position of the display unit 1181 can be recognized by a clerk in the hall without any confusion.

Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may be configured as shown in FIG. In this example, the first special symbol display device 1185 and the second special symbol display device 1186 configured by 7-segment LEDs are each configured by eight LED groups. In addition, the first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory display 1187 are respectively configured by four LED groups, and the normal symbol memory display 1188 is configured by two LEDs.

In addition to being able to achieve the same effects as the above with this function display unit 1180, the first special symbol display device 1185 and the second special symbol display device 1186 are configured by eight LED groups, so 7 Compared with the case of using the segment LED, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player. Therefore, since the contents displayed on the function display unit 1180 are difficult to understand, it is possible to prevent the display of the function display unit 1180 from becoming uncomfortable during the game and making it difficult to concentrate on the game. The game can be made more entertaining by devoting it to the movable effect and effect image.

[1-4F. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a game panel 1200 having a different form from the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 105. The front component member 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170 in FIGS. 103 to 105 have the same configurations as those described above, and detailed description thereof is omitted here. The game panel 1200 according to the present embodiment is thinner than the above-mentioned game panel 1150, and has a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110. Also includes a panel plate 1210 having a small outer shape, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that detachably holds the panel plate 1210 from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110.

The game panel 1200 panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the game area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or glass or metal. It is formed of an inorganic plate. The thickness of the panel plate 1210 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can sufficiently hold the obstacle nail G even if it is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1210 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of fitting holes 1211 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and formed in the front-rear direction, and elongated holes 1212 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction. Equipped with. The fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100, and perform positioning with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 1213 each having an indented front side at both ends of an upper side and a lower side thereof. The engagement step portion 1213 is notched to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is arranged outside the game area 1100, like the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. It is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

The panel plate 1210 has a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 into the inner rail fixing hole 1214. Further, as will be described in detail later, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of openings 1215 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000 such as the attacker unit 2100 and the center accessory 2500. The attacker unit 2100 and the like are inserted and fixed from the front side (see FIG. 115 and the like).

On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the game panel 1200 has a size that includes the panel plate 1210 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and has a thickness substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 1150 made of a wooden board described above (in this example, approximately 20 mm) and made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1220 holds the panel plate 1210 in a detachable manner, and has a holding step portion 1221 that is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and inside the holding step portion 1221 is approximately the same size as the game area 1100. A through hole 1222 that penetrates in the direction is mainly provided.

The holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. It is supposed to be on the same plane as. The front step inner peripheral surface of the holding step portion 1221 is sized so that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 relatively expands and contracts due to temperature changes and changes with time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be filled in the clearance.

In addition, the panel holder 1220 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the elongated hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, and extends from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 toward the front. A plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted into and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned relative to each other.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engaging claw 1224 and an engaging piece 1225 which engage with the engaging step 1213 at a position corresponding to the engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engaging claw 1224 is arranged on the upper holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and extends from the front surface of the holding step 1221 to the front side. It projects toward and is elastically engaged with the engagement step portion 1213. The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engagement piece 1225 is disposed on the lower holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed between the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 and the panel. The plate 1210 is configured to extend a predetermined amount along the front surface of the panel holder 1220 toward the upper side (center side) in a state in which a predetermined gap having a size capable of inserting the engagement step 1213 is formed. By engaging the engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engaging claws 1224 and the engaging pieces 1225, the panel plate 1210 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1220.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 penetrating in the front-rear direction so that the mounting boss 1126 provided in the front component member 1110 can be inserted. The boss insertion hole 1226 has a mounting boss for the front component member 1110. By inserting 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component member 1110 are positioned with respect to each other.

As shown in FIG. 104, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side, which is recessed by a predetermined amount in the front side so as to leave an outer peripheral edge below and slightly below the center in the vertical direction. ing. Due to this mounting support portion 1227, the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 has a recessed shape above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height in a state where the rear surface-side outer peripheral portion projects rearward, and the recessed amount ( Depth) is a depth (in this example, about 2.5 mm) that can accommodate the flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c (see FIG. 155, etc.) of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 that is attached and fixed to the attachment support portion 1227. It is desirable that the distance is between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the attachment support portion 1227, the fixing portion 3010c can be prevented from projecting rearward of the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 can be prevented from protruding. (Pachinko machine 1) can be securely installed and mounted in the game board holding port 601.

Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 has a plurality of mounting holes 1228, which are arranged in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and above the housing recess 630h and into which predetermined screws can be screwed, in a predetermined arrangement. ing. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. The positioning hole 1229 is a positioning projection formed on a member that is mounted and fixed by using the mounting hole 1228 (for example, a positioning projection that protrudes forward from a fixing portion 3010c formed on the front surface of the back box 3010 and formed in a flange shape (shown in the figure). Is omitted)) is inserted. In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) as viewed from the rear.

It should be noted that, with respect to the mounting hole 1228, a large diameter inner hole and a small diameter inner hole are mixed so that the mounting hole has an appropriate diameter according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be fixedly mounted. 1228 may be used.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the lightening portions 1230. It has become. As shown in FIG. 103, these lightening portions 1230 are not formed in the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, within a predetermined range from the lower end on the front surface side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 is designed to be a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the front component member 1110 arranged on the front surface is a substantially flat surface, and the game ball launched from the ball-striking launcher 650. However, the guide is smooth. In addition, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a lightening portion 1230, so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, support them, and maintain the strength of the panel holder 1220. For this reason, a box-shaped rib is formed.

In addition, in this panel holder 1220, a positioning portion 1231 corresponding to a positioning means such as an obstacle nail implanting device (not shown) and an assembly jig is formed, and the obstacle nail implanting device holds the game panel 1150. It is possible to set it in the state of being. In addition, in the lower portion of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guiding surface 1115 of the front component member 1110, and a lower end penetrating leftward in the front-rear direction in the front-rear direction and downward Is opened to the front passage 1112 of the front component 1110, and the ball passage notch 1123 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122, and the rear projection 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating the lower right corner of the front view in the front-rear direction. And an insertion hole 1234.

In addition, the panel holder 1220 has a groove-shaped out-ball discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 104) in which a rear surface side of the out port 1232 is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface toward the front and a lower end side is opened downward (see FIG. 104 ). The member 1110 is provided with a notch portion 1236 which is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 and which is notched so as to penetrate from the right end in front view in the front-rear direction. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of attachment holes for attaching and fixing the panel holder 1220 to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

When the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, the out-ball discharge groove 1235 of the panel holder 1220 is provided on the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board placing portion 606 of the main body frame base 600). It is adapted to fit with the positioning protrusion 607 provided, and the outboard discharge groove 1235 fits with the positioning protrusion 607, so that the game board 4 relatively moves in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame 3. It is becoming regulated.

In the gaming panel 1200 of this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engaging claw 1224 and the engaging piece 1225 and the engaging step portion 1213 are engaged. By combining them, the panel plate 1210 can be held by the panel holder 1220, and the front sides of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. It is possible to set the panel plate 1210 on the panel holder 1220 in the conventional obstacle nail arranging device without modifying the arranging device, thereby increasing the cost for arranging the obstacle nail G. It can be suppressed.

Although not shown in the figure, the game panel 1200 of this example is configured such that a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface of the panel plate 1210. In addition, the front unit 2000 can be attached. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thus, in the thin panel plate 1210, only the front unit is supported, so that it is possible to prevent the panel plate 1210 from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

Further, since the game panel 1200 has a divided structure of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the entire game panel 1200 even if the panel plate 1210 is a transparent plate, and it is a transparent panel. The pachinko machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 is visible to the player through the plate 1210 can be embodied, and the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted by the player.

Further, since the game panel 1200 is divided into a panel plate 1210 and a panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210 in which the positions of obstacle nails, winning holes and the like change depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 including the game board 4 compatible with various models can be obtained by only replacing the panel plate 1210.

Further, since the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, the mounting positions of various predetermined members such as the back unit 3000 which is mounted and fixed to the rear surface side of the panel holder 1220 according to the model. Even if the positions are different, it is possible to make the panel holder 1220 a common part of the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model by designing the fixing portions of various members so as to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228. It has become.

[1-4G. Second embodiment of previous component]
Next, a front component member 1110A having a different form from the front component member 1110 in the game board 4 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. It should be noted that the gaming panel 1200, the board holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 in FIGS. 106 and 108 have the outer shape of the panel plate 1210 and the inner shape of the through hole 1222 of the panel holder 1220, which are different from those in the embodiments of FIGS. The configuration is the same as that of the example of FIGS. 103 to 105 except for the above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The front component 1110A shown in FIGS. 106 and 107 is different from the above-mentioned front component 1110 in that a part of the inner peripheral shape penetrating in the front-rear direction is different, and it is not provided with a function display unit 1180. The points are very different. The other configurations are the same as those of the previous component member 1110, and the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted. Further, in the game board 4 using this front component member 1110A, the function display unit 1180 is provided in either the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 (in this example, the front unit). Prepared for 2000).

As shown in the figure, the front component member 1110A has a frame-shaped inner peripheral shape extending inward in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front with the out-port guide surface 1115 as a base point up to the stop portions 1114 of the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111. The shape is formed in the same shape as the above-mentioned front component member 1110, and the shape from the stop portion 1114 to the out-port guide surface 1115 in the clockwise direction is different from the above-mentioned front component member 1110. ing. Specifically, a gentle arcuate shape is formed between the stopper portion 1114 and the right-hand certificate stamp attaching portion 1125 arranged directly below the stopper portion 1114, and the lower end of the arcuate portion is provided with an outlet port. The portion up to the guide surface 1115 is formed in a linear shape inclined so as to decrease toward the out-port guide surface 1115.

The front component member 1110A of this example has a wider game area 1100 than the above-described front component member 1110, and the wide game region 1100 can make the player more entertaining. You can do it.

In the example of FIGS. 106 and 107, the game panel 1200 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110A, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game panel 1200 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110A. You may make it attach the game panel 1150 which consists of one board as shown in 101.

[1-5. Security mechanism for pachinko machines]
Subsequently, the crime prevention structure in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. FIG. 108 is a partial cross-sectional view showing the crime prevention structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. FIG. 109 is a perspective view seen from the rear side with the game board accommodated.

First, as shown in FIG. 108, the crime prevention structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a side surface on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 formed of synthetic resin in the main body frame 3. And a metal reinforcement unit 150 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 formed of synthetic resin in the door frame 5.

As described above, the crime prevention side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of an extruded mold material made of metal (for example, aluminum alloy), and the vertical dimension thereof is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction in which the front component member 1110 and the game panel 1150 of the game board 4 are combined. The side-face crime prevention plate 950 includes a plate-shaped side piece 952a that extends in the up-down direction and extends in the front-rear direction to form a side surface of the main body frame 3, and a front end that extends from the front end of the side-side piece 952a to a substantially perpendicular direction inner side (open side). A piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending from the side surface piece 952a along the front end piece 952b so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance on the rear side of the front end piece 952b, and a substantially inward direction inward from the rear end of the side surface piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d. As a result, the front end of the crime prevention side plate 950 has a substantially U-shaped cross section that opens inward (open side) by the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c.

Further, the side crime prevention plate 950 (main body 952) has strength and rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 due to the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d arranged in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. The height of the main body frame 3 is increased, and the game board 4, the door frame 5, and the like can be favorably supported.

On the other hand, the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed in a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the game window 101 in the door frame 5 by using spot welding, rivets or the like, as described above, using a plurality of elongated metal plates. On the outer side of the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the shaft-supporting side, a shaft-supporting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross-section opening to the outside (shaft-supporting side) is provided. In the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 has a higher strength due to the shaft-supporting side U-shaped protruding piece 166, and the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hard to bend. ..

By the way, in this example, since the door frame 5 is attached and supported only at the upper and lower two points of the upper shaft supporting portion 156 and the lower shaft supporting portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, the door frame 5 on the shaft supporting side is provided. If an illegal tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the main body frame 3 and the main body frame 3, the shaft-supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large, and the gap is generated. There is a risk of cheating. On the other hand, in the security structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the security side plate 950 are provided. The rear side piece of the U-shaped protruding piece 166 formed in the substantially U shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is adapted to be inserted (entered), and the front end piece 952a is pivotally supported. It is configured to be sandwiched by the side U-shaped protrusions 166. As a result, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft-supporting side U-shaped projection piece 166 of the door frame 5 comes into contact with the rear surface side of the front end piece 952b of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 Since it is possible to prevent the U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the shaft supporting side from moving in the direction away from the main body frame 3, it is possible to prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened and the main body frame. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as opening the door frame 5 to the door 3.

Since the crime prevention side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted to each other, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is reduced. Since the strength and the rigidity of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are less likely to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, the crime prevention performance can be improved.

Furthermore, since the rear end of the side piece 952a of the crime prevention side plate 950 extends rearward of the game panel 1150 of the game board 4, the body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952a is temporarily assumed. Even if is destroyed, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire cannot be entered from the rear end of the side piece 952a into the game area 1100 on the front surface of the game board 4 (game panel 1150), and an illegal act is performed. Can be surely prevented. As shown in FIG. 108, since the side frame plates 12 of the outer frame 2 are in contact with each other so as to cover the outside of the crime prevention side plate 950, the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side face, and from the side face side. It is able to fully counter the vandalism of. In addition, generally, in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed in the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1, so that the player side From the (front side), it becomes almost impossible to allow an unauthorized tool to enter the rear side of the side piece 952c from the rear end, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further enhanced.

Subsequently, as a crime prevention structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 109, the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, and the prize ball device 740 in the main body frame 3 that houses the game board 4 are provided. Since the unit base 741, the full-tank branching unit 770, and the back cover 900 are made of transparent synthetic resin, the rear and side surfaces of the game board 4 housed in the main body frame 3 can be replaced by the game board 4. It can be seen from the rear side of the body frame 3 without removing it from the body frame 3 or opening the back cover 900. As a result, even if an unauthorized device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4 or the like, it can be easily found and an unauthorized act can be prevented. Further, since an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 can be easily found from the outside, it is possible to hesitate to attach the unauthorized device, and the deterrence against the illegal action can be enhanced. ing.

Further, from the rear side of the main body frame 3 to the rear side and the side surface side of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like, and therefore the main body frame can be used for maintenance and model change. Even when tools such as screwdrivers and pliers, cleaning waste, dust and dirt are left between the main frame 3 and the game board 4 when the game board 4 is removed from and attached to the outside It is possible to easily find out from the above, and it is possible to prevent some trouble from occurring due to them, and it is possible to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[2. Detailed composition of game board]
Subsequently, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 115. FIG. 110 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine, FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the game board as seen obliquely from the front right, and FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the game board as seen from the oblique left front. Further, FIG. 113 is a perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 114 is a perspective view of the main components constituting the game board disassembled and seen obliquely from the front, and FIG. 115 is a perspective view of the main components constituting the game board disassembled and obliquely seen from the rear. It is a figure.

The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and when a player operates the handle device 500, a game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball”) as a game medium is generated. A frame-shaped front component member 1110A that defines and forms the inner circumference of the game region 1100 to be driven, and a predetermined shape that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110A so as to close the game region 1100 and has a predetermined shape corresponding to the game region 1100. It is provided with a plate-shaped game panel 1150 having a plurality of openings 1158 (see FIG. 114 etc.) penetrating in the front-rear direction and partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100.

The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wooden plywood such as a plywood board.

In addition, the game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 attached to the opening 1158 of the game panel 1150 from the front side, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and a back side of the back unit 3000 from the player side. A liquid crystal display device 1900 which is visibly attached and can display a predetermined effect image, a substrate holder 1160 which is attached to the lower rear surface of the game panel 1150 so as to cover the lower portion of the back unit 3000 from the rear side, and a rear surface of the substrate holder 1160. And a main control board box 1170 attached to the.

The table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of this example is an attacker unit 2100 which is arranged in the lower part of the game area 1100 so as to extend in a right direction when viewed from the front just above the outlet 1151, and a pachinko machine on the right end front surface of the attacker unit 2100. The function display unit 1180, which is mounted at a position visible to the player side from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 when mounted on the display frame 1, and the inner periphery of the game area 1100 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100. It has a front side unit 2200 arranged along with, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 arranged substantially in the center of the game area 1100.

In addition, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1150, the front side is opened, and the rear wall 3010a is formed with an opening 3010b which penetrates the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the front-rear direction. A back box 3010, a back horizontal production unit 3100 arranged on the upper side and left and right sides of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and a back production unit 3300 arranged on the upper side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, The inside of the back box 3010 is provided with the underside effect unit 3500 arranged below the opening 3010b.

Further, on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board 4, a peripheral control board for accommodating a peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 161) having a peripheral control section 4140 and a liquid crystal control section 4150, which will be described later in detail. A box 1910 and an inverter board box 1920 housing an inverter board 1922 having an inverter for driving a cold cathode tube as a backlight are provided.

In the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game area 1100 is divided into left and right by the center role object 2500 attached to the game panel 1150, and the outer periphery on the right side of the center role object 2500 and the game. Between the inner circumference of the area 1100 (the inner circumference of the front component member 1110A), the width is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the outer circumference on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and the inside of the game area 1100. Between the circumference (the inner circumference of the front component member 1110A) is a large area in which the game balls can circulate sufficiently, and in the area on the left side and the lower side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100, the game panel 1150. A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the.

In the game board 4 of the present example, when a game ball is hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500 (with a predetermined strength or more), the fourth unit 2140 in the attacker unit 2100 passes through the outer periphery on the right side of the center accessory 2500. To the guide passage member 2142 of the guide passage member 2142, is guided by the guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2142 to be discharged from directly above the gate portion 2105, and with a very high probability, the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105. There is. That is, it is possible to easily enter the game ball into the gate portion 2105 by performing so-called right hitting.

Further, as will be described later in detail, in this example, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105 and is detected by the gate sensor 2126, the ordinary lottery result is drawn and executed in an extremely short time. Therefore, if the normal lottery result is "win", the movable piece 2106 moves backward to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 2102, and the game ball entering the gate portion 2105 enters the second starting port 2102. It is supposed to win a prize. When the normal lottery is “miss”, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2105 is discharged to the upper side of the special winning opening 2103. Therefore, by performing a right-handed hit, it is possible to play a game in which the second starting opening 2102 and the special winning opening 2103 are directly aimed.

On the other hand, when the game ball is driven to the left side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called left-handed driving), the game ball is guided toward the front side unit 2200 and the attacker unit 2100 by a plurality of implanted nails, It is possible to win a game ball to the general winning opening 2201 of the front side unit 2200, the first starting opening 2101, the general winning opening 2104, etc. of the attacker unit 2100. Further, when the game ball enters the warp entrance 2504 guided to the warp entrance 2504 connected to the stage 2510 of the center character 2500, the game ball is supplied to the stage 2510 of the center character 2500. The game ball supplied to 2510 rolls on the stage 2510 in the left-right direction and can entertain a movement different from the movement by the obstacle nail, and the game ball enters the game area 1100 from the chance exit 2514 of the stage 2510. When released, it is possible to win the first start opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 with a high probability.

As described above, in the game board 4 of the present embodiment, different impressions can be played on the right side and the left side of the center accessory 2500, and it is possible to provide a variety of games and prevent the user from getting bored. You can do it.

[2-1. Overall structure of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the table unit 2000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the table unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the table unit of the game board seen from the back.

The table unit 2000 on the game board 4 is located in the lower center of the left-right direction in the game area 1100 so as to extend from right above the outlet 1151 to the right and is supported by the front face of the game panel 1150, and the attacker unit 2100. In the front view, the function display unit 1180 attached to the front end on the right end, the front side unit 2200 arranged on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 and extending in an arc shape substantially along the inner circumference of the game area 1100, and the substantially central portion of the game area 1100. And a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 which is arranged to the right of the game area and is supported by the game panel 1150.

The attacker unit 2100 in the table unit 2000 will be described later in detail, but a predetermined number of game balls are paid out by accepting the game balls, and a predetermined special lottery result is selected by the acceptance. A starting opening 2102, a game ball that can be accepted according to a special lottery result, and a special winning opening 2103 that pays out a predetermined number of game balls by accepting the game balls, and a predetermined number of game balls by accepting the game balls It is provided with a general winning opening 2104 to be paid out, and a gate portion 2105 in which a predetermined ordinary lottery result is drawn by a chance when a game ball is passed.

The first starting opening 2101 and the general winning opening 2104 of this example are always capable of accepting game balls. Further, the second starting opening 2102 and the special winning opening 2103 are variable winning openings that can be changed into a state in which a game ball can be accepted and a state in which it cannot be accepted. The second starting opening 2102 can be accepted in accordance with the result of the normal lottery that is drawn by the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2105, and the special winning opening 2103 is the first starting opening 2101 or the second starting opening 2102. The game balls can be accepted according to the result of the special lottery, which is performed when the game balls are received.

The first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 of the present example is arranged immediately below the stage 2510 in the center accessory 2500 and on the axis line passing through the center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 (immediately above the out port 1151). Further, the second starting port 2102 is arranged on the lower right side in front view with respect to the first starting port 2101. Furthermore, the special winning opening 2103 is arranged below the second starting opening 2102 and on the right side in front view of the first starting opening 2101 so that its left end is substantially directly below the second starting opening 2102. Further, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is arranged on the upper right side in front view with respect to the first starting opening 2101. In addition, the gate portion 2105 is arranged right above the second starting opening 2102 on the upper right side in front view with respect to the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100.

The front side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, which will be described in detail later, has three general winning openings 2201 arranged on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 when viewed from the front, and a game arranged on the upper left side of the general winning opening 2201 when viewed from the front. The center part 2500 in the area 1100 is provided with a shelf part 2202 capable of guiding the game ball flowing down on the left side in front view to the right.

Further, as will be described later in detail, the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is attached to a large opening 1158 formed substantially in the center of the game panel 1150, and a display screen of a liquid crystal display device 1900 arranged on the rear side or the like. Is formed in a frame shape having a window portion 2501 that can be visually recognized from the player side. The center accessory 2500 has a substantially frame-shaped flange portion 2502a that abuts the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a peripheral wall portion 2503 that blocks a game ball flowing down in the game area 1100 from entering the frame. The warp entrance 2504 opening at a predetermined position of the peripheral wall portion 2503, the warp exit 2505 discharging the game ball entering the warp entrance 2504 into the frame, and the game ball discharged from the warp exit 2505 were rolled in the left-right direction. A stage 2510 for discharging and returning to the game area 1100 later is provided.

The stage 2510 of this center accessory 2500 is arranged immediately above the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100, and the game ball recirculated and released from the chance outlet 2514 of the stage 2510 into the game area 1100 has a high probability. The attacker unit 2100 can be received in the first starting port 2101.

[2-2. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 130. FIG. 118 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 119 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 120 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the first unit of the attacker unit that is disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the first unit of the attacker unit that is disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the second unit of the attacker unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the second unit of the attacker unit as seen from the rear. Also, FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the third unit of the attacker unit that is disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective view of the third unit of the attacker unit that is disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 128 is an exploded perspective view of the fourth unit of the attacker unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view of the fourth unit of the attacker unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 130 is a front view showing a part of the attacker unit by cutting.

The attacker unit 2100 of the game board 4 in the table unit 2000 of this example is inserted from the front side into the opening 1158 formed in the lower left-right center of the game panel 1150, and then on the front surface of the game panel 1150. It is fixed. The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of inlets (winning holes) in which the game balls hit in the game area 1100 can be received. Specifically, a first starting port 2101 arranged immediately above the out port 1151 in the game panel 1150 and capable of always receiving a game ball, and a position on the right side and slightly lower side in front view with respect to the first starting port 2101. The second starting opening 2102 (see FIG. 130) arranged in the second starting opening 2102, the special winning opening 2103 arranged below the second starting opening 2102 and on the right side of the first starting opening 2101 in front view, and the first starting opening 2101. And a general winning opening 2104 arranged slightly above the first starting opening 2101 between the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102.

In addition, the attacker unit 2100 is provided with a gate unit 2105 in which the result of the normal lottery is drawn by the passage of the game ball. The gate portion 2105 is arranged on the right side and slightly upper side of the general winning opening 2104 in a front view and just above the second starting opening 2102 (see FIG. 130).

As shown in the figure, the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is open upward with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and is in a state where it can always receive the game ball. Further, the second starting opening 2102 is opened upward with a width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball, and a plate-shaped movable piece 2106 that can move forward and backward with respect to the opened opening. I have it. The second starting port 2102 is configured to be unable to receive the game ball when the movable piece 2106 moves forward, and to be able to receive the game ball when the movable piece 2106 retracts, and is a so-called variable winning port. There is.

In addition, the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is a horizontally long rectangular shape which is 4 to 6 times as long as the diameter of the game ball in the front-to-left direction and slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball in the vertical direction, and faces forward. And a plate-shaped opening/closing member 2107 that can open and close the opened opening. The opening/closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2103 is rotatable about the lower side as a rotation axis. When the opening/closing member 2107 is in a substantially vertical state, it is impossible to receive a game ball, and the opening/closing member 2107 is substantially horizontal. In this state, the game balls can be accepted, which is a so-called variable winning port.

Further, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, similarly to the first starting opening 2101, so that the game ball can always be received. ing. Further, the gate portion 2105 of the attacker unit 2100 is formed with a width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball so that the game ball can flow in the vertical direction.

The attacker unit 2100 of the present embodiment will be described in more detail. The attacker unit 2100 has a first unit 2110 having a first starting opening 2101 and a special winning opening 2103, a second starting opening 2102 and a gate section 2105. Two units 2120, a third unit 2130 having a general winning opening 2104, a fourth unit 2140 to which the function display unit 1180 is attached, a first unit 2110, a second unit 2120, a third unit 2130, and a fourth unit. The unit base 2150 that supports the 2140 from the rear side, and the connection between the attacker solenoid 2113, the starting opening solenoid 2124, the count sensor 2114, the second starting opening sensor 2125, and the panel relay board 3025 that are attached to the rear side of the unit base 2150 are connected. And an attacker unit relay board 2160 for relaying.

The first unit 2110 of the attacker unit 2100 has a first starting port 2101 and an opening 2111a facing the special winning opening 2103, and is a plate-shaped first base 2111 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a first base 2111. The first box-shaped member having a special winning opening 2103 attached to the rear side of the first base 2111 so that the special winning opening 2103 is exposed from the opening and rotatably supporting an opening/closing member 2107 for opening and closing the special winning opening 2103. A case 2112, an attacker solenoid 2113 supported in the first case 2112 for opening and closing the opening/closing member 2107, and a count sensor 2114 for detecting the game ball supported in the first case 2112 and received in the special winning opening 2103. And a special winning opening decoration substrate 2115 arranged on the rear side of the first case 2112 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

In addition, the first unit 2110 is arranged on the front surface of the first base 2111 on the front side of the first base 2111 and on the front surface of the first base 2111, and on the front side of the middle object detection sensor 2116 attached to the lower side of the first starting port 2101. The middle guiding decoration member 2117 attached and having a predetermined decoration, and the rear side of the first base 2111 are mounted at positions corresponding to the middle object detection sensor 2116 and the middle guiding decoration member 2117, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. The attacker middle decoration board 2118 is provided. The first unit 2110 is attached to the unit base 2150 via the first base 2111.

The first base 2111 of the first unit 2110 is integrally formed with a first starting opening 2101 which projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 1150 (within the game area 1100) and which is open at the upper and rear sides, and its rear end is When attached to the game panel 1150, it extends to a position substantially matching the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Thereby, the game ball received in the first starting port 2101 can be guided to the rear side of the game panel 1150.

The first case 2112 of the first unit 2110 has a box shape with an open front side, and is vertically divided into an upper case 2112a and a lower case 2122b. In addition, the first case 2112 is internally provided with a discharge port member 2112c that discharges the game ball, which is received by the special winning opening 2103 and detected by the count sensor 2114, from a predetermined position downward. The first case 2112 is made of a light-transmissive material, and guides light from the special winning opening decoration substrate 2115 arranged on the rear side to the opening/closing member 2107 side to open or close the special winning opening 2103. The member 2107 can be decorated with light emission.

Although not shown, the attacker solenoid 2113 of the first unit 2110 is supported by the first case 2112 so that the plunger moves back and forth in the left-right direction. The attacker solenoid 2113 can rotate the opening/closing member 2107 by a link member 2113a connected to the tip of a plunger that moves forward and backward when energized. Although not shown, the attacker solenoid 2113 is provided with a spring for urging the plunger in a forward (protruding) direction, and the opening/closing member 2107 closes the special winning opening 2103 while the plunger is forward. It is supposed to be in position. That is, in this example, when the attacker solenoid 2113 is energized, the plunger retracts (is retracted), the opening/closing member 2107 rotates from the closed position to the open position, and the game ball can be received in the special winning opening 2103. It has become.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the middle object detection sensor 2116 of the first unit 2110 includes a light projecting section and a light receiving section, and is capable of detecting an object positioned within a predetermined front range. ing. In this example, the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the middle object detection sensor 2116 are arranged in a row in the left-right direction, and the front surface of the middle object detection sensor 2116 moves in a vertical direction rather than an object that moves in the left-right direction. It is easier for a moving object to detect.

The middle guiding decoration member 2117 of the first unit 2110 has a decoration in which a downward arrow is arranged in a circle on the front surface, and the wall along the outer periphery of the decoration extends rearward on the rear side of the front decoration. It is provided with a cylindrical frame-shaped light-shielding member 2117a that projects. Thus, the inside middle decoration board 2118 of the attacker arranged on the rear side of the middle guiding decoration member 2117 allows the inside and outside of the arrow to be illuminated and decorated differently.

The second unit 2120 of the attacker unit 2100 is a plate-shaped second base 2121 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150, and is forward of the front surface of the game panel 1150 attached to the front surface of the second base 2121 (within the game area 1100). A passage forming member 2122 that projects to the second starting opening 2102 and the gate portion 2105 and a movable piece 2106 that is attached to the rear side of the second base 2121 and opens and closes the second starting opening 2102 are slidably supported in the front-rear direction. A second case 2123 and a starting port solenoid 2124 supported in the second case 2123 for opening and closing the movable piece 2106 are provided.

Further, the second unit 2120 of the attacker unit 2100 is supported by the second base 2121 and the second case 2123, and the second starting port sensor 2125 for detecting the game ball received in the second starting port 2102, and the second base. A gate sensor 2126 which is supported by 2121 and a second case 2123 and detects a game ball passing through the gate portion 2105, and a second start in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface which is arranged on the rear side of the second base 2121. A mouth decoration substrate 2127 and a light blocking member 2128 which is arranged between the second starting mouth decoration substrate 2127 and the second base 2121 and has a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided.

The second unit 2120 of the attacker unit 2100 constitutes a part of a function display board 1191 having a normal pattern display 1189 composed of two LEDs mounted on the front surface at a predetermined position on the front surface of the second base 2121. Usually, a symbol display board 1191a is attached.

The second base 2121 of the second unit 2120 has substantially the entire front surface formed in a flat surface shape along the surface of the game panel 1150, and in cooperation with the passage forming member 2122, the game balls can flow to the front surface side. It is possible to form various passages. In addition, the second base 2121 is provided with a passage hole 2121a penetrating in the front-rear direction through which a game ball can pass in the lower left corner of the front view, and a concave portion 2121b that is curved backward in the vicinity of the upper right corner of the front view. .. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the second base 2121 has an opening through which the plate-shaped movable piece 2106 can pass, a sensor support portion 2121b for supporting the second starting opening sensor 2125 and the gate sensor 2126, and generally. A board supporting portion 2121d that supports the symbol display board 1191a, a wall portion 2121e that extends forward from the right end of the board supporting portion 2121d in front view and covers the right side of the normal symbol display device 1189, and the like are provided. The second base 2121 is made of a light-transmitting material. Further, the second base 2121 is attached to the unit base 2150.

As shown in the drawing, the passage forming member 2122 of the second unit 2120 is formed in an anti-L shape having a portion extending vertically and a portion extending leftward from its lower end in a front view. Has been done. This passage forming member 2122 is provided with a first passage 2122a which allows the game balls to flow in the vertical direction and has an upper end and a lower end opened at a position of a portion extending in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. In addition, the passage forming member 2122 allows the game sphere to flow in the left and right direction at the position of the portion extending in the left and right direction when viewed from the front, and opens upward at a position where the right end side substantially opposes the lower end opening of the first passage 2122a. The second passage 2122b is closed on the left end side. The first passage 2122a and the second passage 2122b of the passage forming member 2122 are arranged apart from each other in the vertical direction by a distance slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball.

Further, the passage forming member 2122 includes a plate-shaped wall portion 2122c that connects the lower end of the right side wall of the first passage 2122a in front view and the right end of the right end side opening of the second passage 2122b, and the first upper end side of the wall portion 2122c. A right outlet 2122d that is open to the right side surface of the passage 2122a when viewed from the front and allows game balls to pass through, and a right shelf 2122e that extends short from the lower end of the right outlet 2122d toward the right when viewed from the front, The wall portion 2122c is opposite to the first passage 2122a and is formed by the lower left side of the first passage 2122a when viewed from the front and the upper end of the second passage 2122b, and a left discharging portion 2122f through which a game ball can pass, and a left discharging portion. A left shelf 2122g that is continuous with the lower end of 2122f and is formed on the upper side of the second passage 2122b and is inclined downward toward the left when viewed from the front, and a height where a right outlet 2122d in the first passage 2122a is formed. And a guide wall 2122h that protrudes rearward from the front wall at a predetermined position.

In the passage forming member 2122, the upper end opening of the first passage 2122a is the gate portion 2105, and the right end side opening of the second passage 2122b is the second starting port 2102. Further, the passage forming member 2122 can support the gate sensor 2126 at a position substantially above the center of the first passage 2122a in the vertical direction and above the right discharge port 2122d, and the passage forming member 2122 can flow through the first passage 2122a. The playing game ball can be detected by the gate sensor 2126.

Further, in the passage forming member 2122, the right end side opening of the second passage 2122b is formed at a position corresponding to the movable piece 2106 that moves forward and backward from the front surface of the second base 2121 when assembled as the second unit 2120. The right end side opening is the second starting port 2102. Further, the passage forming member 2122 can support the second starting opening sensor 2125 at a position substantially in the center of the second passage 2122b in the left-right direction, and circulates in the second passage 2122b (that is, The game ball that has passed through the second starting opening 2102 can be detected by the second starting opening sensor 2125.

In addition, the passage forming member 2122 can cover the front side of the normal symbol display substrate 1191a attached to the front surface of the second base 2121 at a site below the right shelf 2122e.

In the second passage 2122b of the passage forming member 2122, the bottom wall located directly below the right end side opening in front view is formed in an arc shape, and the game ball that has passed through the right end side opening (second starting opening 2102) is smoothed. It can be distributed to the left. The guide wall 2122h formed in the first passage 2122a in the passage forming member 2122 is arranged at a position corresponding to the recess 2121b in the second base 2121 and is inclined in an arc shape so as to be lowered rearward. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the upper end opening (gate portion 2105) of the first passage 2122a can be smoothly guided into the recess 2121b of the second base 2121.

The second case 2123 of the second unit 2120 has a box shape with an open front side and can be vertically divided into an upper case 2123a and a lower case 2123b. The movable piece 2106 can be supported so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. In addition to the movable piece 2106 and the starting opening solenoid 2124, the second case 2123 has a link member 2129 for transmitting the movement of the plunger moving forward and backward of the starting opening solenoid 2124 to move the moving piece 2106 forward and backward. , Internally supported.

The starting port solenoid 2124 of the second unit 2120 is supported by the second case 2123 so that the plunger moves forward and backward, and in a normal state (when not energized), the plunger protrudes downward. In this normal state, the movable piece 2106 projects forward from the front surface of the second base 2121 via the link member 2129 connected to the tip of the plunger of the starting opening solenoid 2124, and the movable piece 2106 enters the second starting opening 2102. The acceptance of the game balls is blocked. On the other hand, when the starting opening solenoid 2124 is energized, the tip of the plunger rises so as to be retracted, and the movable piece 2106 moves rearward from the front surface of the second base 2121 via the link member 2129 connected to the tip of the plunger. As it moves backward, the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2102.

The second unit 2120 is provided with a plurality of rectangular openings 2128a that are arranged in the light blocking member 2128 in the left-right direction, and the openings 2128a of the light blocking member 2128 are provided on the front surface of the second starting opening decoration substrate 2127. LEDs are mounted so as to correspond to each of the openings 2128a so that they can be illuminated and decorated.

This second unit 2120, when the game ball enters into the first passage 2122a from the upper end opening (gate portion 2105), passes through the gate sensor 2126, and then is recessed in the second base 2121 by the guiding wall 2122h inclined rearward. After being once fed into 2121b, it returns from the inside of the recess 2121b into the inside of the first passage 2122a, and flows down onto the second starting port 2102. In the first passage 2122a, the guide wall 2122h and the recessed portion 2121b meander the game ball. The flow velocity of the game ball is attenuated, and the movable piece 2106 and the second passage arranged on the downstream side are attenuated. It is possible to reduce the impact applied when it comes into contact with the 2122a.

In this example, the passage of the gate unit 2105 is detected by the gate sensor 2126. When the passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2126, the ordinary lottery is performed and a predetermined ordinary lottery result is drawn. .. If the result of this ordinary lottery is a win, the movable piece 2106 is retracted from the front surface of the second base 2121 by the drive of the starting opening solenoid 2124, the second starting opening 2102 is opened, and the game ball can be received. The game ball flowing down from the first passage 2122a will enter the second passage 2122b through the second starting port 2102. Then, the game ball that has entered the second passage 2122b flows leftward when viewed from the front due to the arc-shaped bottom wall, and is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2125, and then rearward from the left end of the second passage 2122b. It is designed to be discharged (discharged) to the rear side of the second unit 2120 (the rear side of the game panel 1150) through the passage hole 2121a of the second base 2121 on the side. In this example, the time from when the gate sensor 2126 detects the passage of the game ball to when the movable piece 2106 is slid by driving the start opening solenoid 2124 to allow the game ball to be received in the second start opening 2102. , It is a short time (for example, 0.1 second to 1 second), and if the ordinary lottery result is a win, the game ball that triggered the lottery is accepted into the second starting opening 2102 with an extremely high probability. It is like this. Further, the starting opening solenoid 2124 is driven only for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds to 2 seconds) per hit, and after the predetermined time elapses, the starting opening solenoid 2124 is driven. After the driving is completed, the movable piece 2106 slides forward, and the second starting port 2102 is closed.

On the other hand, when the result of the lottery normal lottery is lost, the starting opening solenoid 2124 is not driven and the movable piece 2106 remains forward and the game ball flowing down from the first passage 2122a is moved to the movable piece 2106. As a result, entry into the second starting port 2102 is blocked. Then, the game ball whose reception to the second starting port 2102 is blocked by the movable piece 2106 flows from the left discharge port 2122f between the first passage 2122a and the second passage 2122b to the left shelf portion 2122g, and is left. It is adapted to be discharged from the left end of the shelf 2122g (into the game area 1100 on the front surface of the game panel 1150). The movable piece 2106 is inclined such that the upper surface is lower on the front left side, and even if the game ball tries to stay on the movable piece 2106, the inclination naturally rolls to the left in the front view and the left side. It is designed to be discharged from the discharge port 2122f to the left shelf 2122g.

In the second unit 2120, depending on the state of the game ball flowing through the first passage 2122a, the game ball may be emitted from the right outlet 2122d in the first passage 2122a and is emitted from the right outlet 2122d. The game ball is adapted to be discharged into the game area 1100 from the right end of the right shelf 2122e through the right shelf 2122e.

The third unit 2130 of the attacker unit 2100 is capable of contacting the front surface of the game panel 1150 and has a general winning opening 2104, and also has a through hole 2131a penetrating in the front-rear direction on the right side of the general winning opening 2104 in a front view. The third base 2131, the lens member 2132 that is inserted into the through hole of the third base 2131 from the rear side and is attached to the third base 2131 and has a light-transmitting property, and is disposed on the rear side of the lens member 2132. And a gate decoration substrate 2133 having LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The third base 2131 of the third unit 2130 has a general winning opening 2104 integrally projecting from the front surface of the game panel 1150 to the front (inside the game area 1100) and open at the top and back, and the rear end thereof is the game. The state where it is attached to the panel 1150 extends to a position substantially matching the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, the third base 2131 is adapted to be attached to the unit base 2150.

The gate decoration substrate 2133 of the third unit 2130 is configured such that the LED mounted on the front surface emits light in an appropriate color so that the inside of the through hole of the third base 2131 can be illuminated and decorated by the lens member 2132. .. The gate decoration board 2133 is attached to the unit base 2150.

The fourth unit 2140 of the attacker unit 2100 is a plate-shaped fourth base 2141 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a function display substrate 1191 is attached to the lower rear surface, and a game panel attached to the upper front surface of the fourth base 2141. A guide passage member 2142 having a guide passage 2142a that projects forward from the front surface of the 1150 (within the game area 1100) and guides the game ball in the left-right direction, and is arranged below the guide passage 2142a in the guide passage member 2142. A right object detection sensor 2143 attached to the front surface of the fourth base 2141 and a right guide decoration member 2144 attached to the guide passage member 2142 so that the front surface is exposed to the front on the right side of the right object detection sensor 2143 and having a predetermined decoration. And are equipped with.

The fourth base 2141 of the fourth unit 2140 has a U-shaped triangular shape in a front view, and the hypotenuse at the left end is an arc shape substantially along the inner peripheral shape of the game area 1100. In addition, the fourth base 2141 has a plurality of through holes 2141a formed in the lower part thereof, through which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the function display substrate 1191 respectively face. The fourth base 2141 of the fourth unit 2140 is adapted to be attached to the unit base 2150.

The guide passage member 2142 of the fourth unit 2140 extends along the upper side extending in the left-right direction of the fourth base 2141 and has a right end in a front view that opens upward and a left end that opens downward so that game balls can flow. Equipped with. The guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2142 has a front side closed and a rear side opened, and the opened rear side is closed by the front surface of the fourth base 2141. Further, the guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2142 is inclined so that the left side in the front view becomes lower.

Further, the guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2412 is arranged in a state where the right end in front view is close to the inner circumference of the game area 1100 in the assembled state, and flows down along the right inner circumference of the game area 1100. The game ball has come to enter the inside from the opening on the right end side. Further, as shown in FIG. 130, the guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2412 is bent downward on the left end side in front view, and the left end opening that is opened downward in the assembled state as the attacker unit 2100 is the gate portion 2106. It is formed so as to be located immediately above (the upper end opening of the first passage 2122a in the second unit 2120). In the guide passage 2142a and on the front surface of the fourth base 2141 corresponding to the guide passage 2142a, vertically extending protrusions are alternately arranged in the left-right direction, and the game balls are moved forward and backward in the guide passage 2142a. It can be meandered to reduce the flow rate. The left end side opening of the guide passage 2142a and the upper end opening of the first passage 2122a are separated by a distance slightly longer than the outer diameter of the game ball.

The right object detection sensor 2143 of the fourth unit 2140 includes a light projecting section and a light receiving section, and is capable of detecting an object positioned within a predetermined front range. In this example, the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the right object detection sensor 2143 are arranged in the vertical direction, and on the front surface of the right object detection sensor 2143, the right object detection sensor 2143 moves in the left and right direction more than the vertically moving object. It is easier for a moving object to detect. Further, the fourth unit 2140 includes a sensor cover 2145 that covers the front side of the right object detection sensor 2143 and is attached to the front surface of the fourth base 2141.

The right guide decoration member 2144 of the fourth unit 2140 is decorated on the front surface with a rightward arrow arranged in a circle. On the rear side of the right guide decoration member 2144, a light shielding member 2146 having a tubular frame shape in which a wall along the decorative shape of the right guide decoration member 2144 extends rearward is provided. As a result, the back lower right decoration substrate 3021 of the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side of the right guiding decoration member 2144 can light and decorate the inside and outside of the arrow in different modes.

The unit base 2150 of the attacker unit 2100 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front side opened. Further, the unit base 2150 is provided with a discharge port 2150a for receiving the game ball that has passed through the passage hole 2121b of the second base 2121 in the second unit 2120 and discharging the game ball rearward from the rear surface of the unit base 2150.

In the state where the attacker unit 2100 of the present example is arranged in the game area 1100, the first starting opening 2101 is located right above the out opening 1151 with the middle guiding decorative member 2117 sandwiched in the substantially center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction. The special winning opening 2103 is located approximately in the center in the left-right direction between the first starting opening 2101 and the right inner circumference of the game area 1100.

In the attacker unit 2100, the first starting port 2101 is located immediately above the out port 1151 and immediately below the chance outlet 2514 of the stage 2500 in the center accessory 2500, which will be described in detail later. As a result, the game ball released from the chance exit 2514 can be accepted at the first starting opening 2101 with high probability. The game ball received in the first starting port 2101 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1150 and then sent to the middle guiding passage 3071 of the back left guiding member 3070 in the back unit 3000 described later. There is.

In addition, the attacker unit 2100 supports the function display unit 1180 so as to be positioned on the right side of the special winning opening 2103 when viewed from the front, and the right end (the right end of the function display unit 1180) is inside the right side of the game area 1100. It is located slightly inside (on the left side) from the circumference. As a result, the game ball flowing down from above along the inner circumference of the right side of the game area 1100 falls onto the guide passage member 2142 of the fourth unit 2140 in the attacker unit 2100, and the guide passage 2142a opened upward on the right end side. It is designed to enter inside. The game ball that has entered the guide passage 2142a is guided leftward in a front view by the guide passage 2142a, and is discharged downward just above the upper end opening of the first passage 2122a in the second unit 2120, that is, the gate portion 2105. ing. The game ball released downward from the left end side opening of the guide passage 2142a enters the gate portion 2105 with an extremely high probability.

The game sphere that has entered the gate portion 2105 of the attacker unit 2100 is guided backward by the guide wall 2122h of the passage forming member 2122 after the passage is detected by the gate sensor 2126 arranged in the first passage 2122a. It enters into the concave portion 2121b of the base 2121. The game ball that has entered the recess 2121b is guided forward at the lower end of the recess 2121b and comes into contact with the rear surface of the front wall of the passage forming member 2122 and flows downward. That is, in the first passage 2122a of the attacker unit 2100, the game balls meander in the front-rear direction and flow down.

In this example, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105 and is detected by the gate sensor 2126, the ordinary lottery is immediately performed, and the ordinary lottery result obtained by the lottery is instantly displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 1189. In the case where the result of the lottery is a normal lottery, the starting opening solenoid 2124 is driven to move the movable piece 2106 backward so that the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2102. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2105 is to be accepted into the second starting opening 2102 with an extremely high probability when the winning is selected as a result of the normal drawing.

Then, the game ball received in the second starting opening 2102 enters the second passage 2122b from the second starting opening 2102, is sent to the left in the front view, and is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2125. , The path is changed to the rear from the left end of the second passage 2122b, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the passage hole 2121a of the second base 2121 and the discharge port 2150a of the unit base 2150. ..

If the result of the normal lottery is lost, the game ball discharged downward from the first passage 2122a contacts the movable piece 2106 that closes the second starting opening 2102, and the first passage 2122a and the second passage 2122b. Is discharged from the left outlet 2122f to the upper left shelf 2122g of the second passage 2122b, and after rolling the left shelf 2122g to the left in the front view, from the left end of the left shelf 2122g within the game area 1100. It is designed to be released to an area above the special winning opening 2103 in.

In addition, the attacker unit 2100 receives a game ball in the first starting opening 2101 or the second starting opening 2102, and then draws a special lottery result (for example, “big hit”, “middle hit”, “small hit”). Etc.), the attacker solenoid 2113 in the first unit 2110 is driven in a predetermined pattern, and the opening/closing member 2107 is rotated from the upright closed position to the substantially horizontal open position by the drive of the attacker solenoid 2113. The game balls can be received in the special winning opening 2103. The game ball received in the special winning opening 2103 is discharged below the attacker unit 2100 after being detected by the count sensor 2114 on the rear side of the game panel 1150.

Furthermore, the attacker unit 2100 guides the game ball received in the general winning opening 2104 arranged between the first starting opening 2101 and the gate portion 2105 to the rear side of the game panel 1150, and then the back unit described later. It is adapted to feed the inside of the right guiding passage from the upper opening 3061 of the back right guiding member 3060 in 3000.

[2-3. Front side unit]
Next, the table side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 131. 131A is a perspective view of the front side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 131B is a perspective view of the front side unit as seen from the rear. The front side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 is located inside the game area 1100 of the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1150 on the left side of the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction and at the lower position from the center in the up-down direction. It is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150 so as to be in contact with (the right side surface of the inner rail 1112 when viewed from the front).

As shown in the figure, the front side unit 2200 of the present example is formed in an arc shape along the inner circumference of the game area 1100 in a front view, and is arranged substantially along the arc from the right end in the front view to the left. It is mainly provided with three general winning openings 2201 and a shelf 2202 which is arranged on the upper left of the three general winning openings 2201 and is inclined so that the right end side becomes lower. The three general winning openings 2201 of the front side unit 2200 are such that the front end side extends forward from the front surface of the game panel 1150, the rear end side extends rearward from the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and the upper and rear sides are opened, A game ball is formed in the game area 1100 so that the game ball can always be received.

The shelf portion 2202 of the front side unit 2200 is arranged at a position where the left end thereof is substantially in contact with the left inner circumference of the game area 1100, and has flowed down the area on the left side of the center role object 2500 in the game area 1100 in front view. The game ball can be guided to the right.

The front side unit 2200 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and has a plate-shaped unit base 2210 having three general winning openings 2201. The front side unit 2200 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 2210 and protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1150. In addition, a guide member 2211 having a shelf 2202 formed at the upper end, and a left object detection sensor 2212 arranged below the right end of the shelf 2202 on the right side of the guide member 2211 in a front view and attached to the front surface of the unit base 2210. , A left guide decoration member 2213 attached to the guide member 2211 so that the front surface is exposed to the front on the left side of the left object detection sensor 2212, and a rear side of the unit base 2210 attached to the front side of the unit. A shallow box-shaped and transparent unit cover 2214 is provided.

The unit base 2210 of the front side unit 2200 has a plate-shaped portion that comes into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a frame-shaped portion that extends rearward from the plate-shaped portion and is inserted into the corresponding opening 1158 in the game panel 1150. It is equipped with a part and is adapted to be attached to the game panel 1150 at a plate-shaped part. The unit base 2210 is provided with a shallow relief-like decoration on the front surface and is formed so as to partially have a light-transmitting property.

The guide member 2211 of the front side unit 2200 has a substantially inverted triangular shape when viewed from the front, and is a shelf 2202 that is linearly inclined so that the right side is lower on the upper side. The guide member 2211 is provided with a circular through hole into which the left guide decoration member 2213 is inserted, approximately at the center.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the left object detection sensor 2212 of the front side unit 2200 includes a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion, and is capable of detecting an object positioned within a predetermined front range. ing. In this example, the light emitter and the light receiver of the left object detection sensor 2212 are arranged in a row in the vertical direction, and on the front surface of the left object detection sensor 2212, the object is moved in the left and right direction rather than the object that is moved in the up and down direction. It is easier for a moving object to detect.

The left guide decoration member 2213 of the front side unit 2200 has a decoration in which a left-pointing arrow is arranged in a circle on the front surface, and a wall along the outer periphery of the decoration extends rearward on the rear side of the front decoration. It is provided with a cylindrical frame-shaped light shielding member 2213a that projects. The light-shielding member 2213a has a rear end extending to a position slightly forward of the rear surface of the game panel 1150 in a mounted state. Thus, the LED on the lower back left decorative substrate 3020 of the rear unit 3000 arranged on the rear side of the left guide decorative member 2213 can perform light emission decoration on the inside and outside of the arrow in different modes.

The outer shape of the unit cover 2214 of the front side unit 2200 is substantially the same as that of the frame-shaped portion of the unit base 2210, and the rear end of the unit cover 2214 is formed in a depth that is slightly forward of the rear surface of the game panel 1150 when attached. ing. The unit cover 2214 has a through hole through which the light blocking member 2213a of the left guide decoration member 2213 can be inserted, and the rear end of the light blocking member 2213a faces rearward.

The front side unit 2200 of the present embodiment can guide the game ball flowing down the left side of the center role object 2500 in the game area 1100 to the right by the shelf 2202, and is further downstream than the shelf 2202. The game balls can be accepted by the three general winning openings 2201 arranged in. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2201 of the front side unit 2200 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1150, and passes through the left opening 3072 of the back left guiding member 3060 in the back unit 3000 described later to the left guiding passage. It is supposed to be delivered.

[2-4. Center goods]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 to 144. FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the center accessory seen diagonally from the upper right front, FIG. 133 is a perspective view of the center accessory seen diagonally from the lower left front, and FIG. 134 is a perspective view of the center accessory seen from the rear. is there. FIG. 135 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory member disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 136 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory member disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. In addition, FIG. 137 is a perspective view of the front right middle rendering unit of the center character as viewed from the front, and FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the center right front rendering unit of the center character as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the front right middle rendering unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 140 is an exploded perspective view of the front right middle rendering unit disassembled and seen from the rear.

The center accessory 2500 of this example is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150 after being inserted from the front side into an opening 1158 that is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1150. As shown in FIG. 110, etc., it has a large window portion 2501 through which the liquid crystal display device 1900, which is arranged in the rear side in a frame shape occupying the majority of the game area 1100, penetrates in the front-rear direction and is visible. ing.

The center accessory 2500 has a frame-shaped unit base 2502 having a flange portion 2502a capable of contacting the front surface of the game panel 1150 on the outer periphery of the window portion 2501, and bulges forward from the unit base 2502 to form a substantially central portion in the left-right direction. A peripheral wall portion 2503 that guides the game ball flowing down in the game area 1100 as a boundary to the left and right and prevents the game ball from entering the frame (inside the window portion 2501) is provided. Part of the peripheral wall portion 2503 is formed by the unit base 2502.

Further, the center accessory 2500 enters the warp entrance 2504, which is a warp entrance 2504 (see FIG. 112) into which a game ball that opens to the left outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2503 and flows down the game area 1100 can enter. The warp outlet 2505 that discharges the game ball into the frame, and the game ball that is discharged from the warp outlet 2505 is rolled in the left-right direction and then discharged into the game area 1100 above the first start opening 2101 in the attacker unit 2100. And a stage 2510 which is caused to flow back and is arranged at the lower inner edge of the window portion 2501.

Further, the center accessory 2500 includes a transparent plate-shaped partition member 2520 which is arranged on the rear side of the peripheral wall portion 2503 and closes the window portion 2501, and a rear side of the peripheral wall portion 2503 on the left side and the lower side in front view of the window portion 2501. A lower-center decoration board 2521 arranged and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, an upper-center decoration board 2522 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface on the rear side of the peripheral wall section 2503 above the window section 2501; An upper flange member 2523 that is attached to the upper left portion of the front surface of the base 2502 in front view and forms a part of the flange portion 2502a, and a left rear decoration member 2524 that is attached to the left side of the front surface of the rear surface of the unit base 2502 and decorates the inside of the frame. , Are provided.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 is arranged on the right side of the stage 2510 when viewed from the front, and holds the number of special lottery results selected by receiving game balls into the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102, and the gate portion 2105. A holding number display 2530 capable of displaying the number of holdings of a normal lottery result that is drawn by a game ball passing through, and a holding number display 2530 are arranged and are attached to the front side of the unit base 2502. A center decoration member 2540 for decorating the front surface and a predetermined logo decoration arranged on the peripheral wall portion 2503 on the upper side of the window portion 2501 in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 are provided and light emission decoration is enabled by the above-center decoration substrate 2522. A front production unit 2550, a front right middle production unit 2600 having a front right movable decorative body 2610 which is arranged on the right side of the window section 2501 when viewed from the front and is movable according to a game state (special lottery result), and a front right middle The front right outside production unit 2700, which is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the front right movable decorative body 2610 in the production unit 2600 and has a predetermined decoration, is provided.

The stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied with the game ball discharged from the warp outlet 2505 and is rollable in the left-right direction, and the first stage 2511 capable of discharging the supplied game ball forward from a predetermined position. , Which is arranged on the front side of the first stage 2511, is supplied with game balls from the first stage 2511 and can be rolled in the left-right direction, and can discharge the supplied game balls from a predetermined position into the front game area 1100. The second stage 2512, the chance entrance 2513 into which the game ball can enter from a predetermined position on the second stage 2512, and the game ball entering the chance entrance 2513 from the position below the second stage 2512 to the game area 1100. And a chance exit 2514 that can be discharged inside.

The first stage 2511 in the stage 2510 is formed in a curved shape so that the left and right ends are the highest, and is formed so that the center of the game area 1100 in the left and right direction is high, and the whole is flat and flat. It is formed in a wavy shape. The first stage 2511 is formed at a heightened portion in the center of the left-right direction, becomes lower toward the front and widens in the left-right direction, and the lowest at the left and right sides of the center discharge portion 2511a. And a side discharge portion 2511b that is formed in the portion and that decreases toward the front and has a width in the left-right direction that is wider than that of the central discharge portion 2511a.

In addition, in the first stage 2511, the front ends other than the central discharge portion 2511a and the side discharge portion 2511b project upward, and it is difficult for the game ball to be discharged forward from other than the central discharge portion 2511a and the side discharge portion 2511b. .. The right end of the first stage 2511 in the front view extends rightward so as to bite into the number-of-holdings display 2530.

The second stage 2512 of the stage 2510 is formed in a curved shape so as to extend in the left-right direction so as to straddle the two side emission parts 2511b of the first stage 2511 and to lower the center in the left-right direction. The center of the second stage 2512 in the left-right direction is slightly higher. The second stage 2512 is formed at a central position in the left-right direction and is formed at the lowest position on both the left and right sides of the central guide part 2512a, which becomes lower toward the rear and widens in the left-right direction. And a side discharge portion 2512b that becomes lower toward the front and has a width in the left-right direction wider than that of the central guide portion 2512a. In addition, in the second stage 2512, the front end other than the side discharge portion 2512b projects upward, and it is difficult for the game ball to be discharged forward from other than the side discharge portion 2512b.

The chance entrance 2513 in the stage 2510 is opened forward in a vertically extending wall-shaped portion formed between the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512, and a central guide portion 2512 a in the second stage 2512 is provided. It is located on the rear side. As a result, when the game ball rolling on the second stage 2512 is guided rearward by the central guide portion 2512a, it enters the chance entrance 2513.

The chance outlet 2514 in the stage 2510 is formed at a position below the center in the left-right direction of the second stage 2512 in the flange portion 2502a so as to open toward the front. The chance outlet 2514 is provided with a pair of protrusions extending in the front-rear direction and separated from each other in the left-right direction in a passage communicating with the chance inlet 2513. As a result, the game ball discharged from the chance outlet 2514 is discharged into the game area 1100 in a state where the swinging in the left-right direction is suppressed by being guided forward by the pair of protrusions. There is.

On the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500, the chance outlet 2514 is located immediately above the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 in the assembled state, and the game ball is in the game area 1100 from the chance outlet 2514. When it is discharged to the first starting port 2101 with a high probability.

Further, the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 is formed of a substantially transparent member, and can be light-emitted and decorated by the lower center decoration substrate 2521. The first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 are integrally formed by a stage member 2515 and are attached to the rear side of the unit base 2502.

Further, the reserve number display 2530 of the center accessory 2500 includes a reserve number display board 2531 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and LEDs on the reserve number display board 2531 arranged on the front surface of the reserve number display board 2531. The partitioning grid-like light shielding member 2532, the light guide member 2533 which is respectively arranged in each lattice of the light shielding member 2532 and which guides the light from the LEDs of the retained number display substrate 2531 forward, and the light guide members 2533 forward. A front cover 2534 having a plurality of openings facing each other and arranged on the front side of the light blocking member 2532, a front cover 2534, a light blocking member 2532, and a top cover 2535 that covers the upper side of the number-of-holding display substrate 2531 are provided.

As shown in the figure, the upper surface cover 2535 of the number-of-holds display 2530 is inclined so that the left end side in front view becomes lower, and the center in the left-right direction is formed in an arc shape bulging upward. The upper surface cover 2535 is arranged between the stage 2510 and the front right middle rendering unit 2600 (front right middle movable decoration body 2610), and the game ball deviates from the stage 2510 to the front right middle rendering unit 2600 side. Also, it can be returned to the stage 2510 side. The top cover 2535 is formed integrally with the unit base 2502.

Although the details of the decoration of the front effect unit 2550 of the center accessory 2500 are omitted, a front decorative member 2551 having a translucent shape in which a logo according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is formed in a shallow relief shape, A plate-shaped diffusion light guide member 2552 that is disposed on the rear side of the front decoration member 2551 and is capable of diffusing light, and a logo decoration substrate 2553 that is arranged above the diffusion light guide member 2552 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on its lower surface. , Are provided. The diffusion light guide member 2552 and the front decoration member 2551 are attached to the front surface of the unit base 2502. The front production unit 2550 can perform light emission decoration by appropriately causing the LEDs of the logo decoration substrate 2553 to emit light.

The table right center effect unit 2600 of the center accessory 2500 is a table having a fixed decorative body 2620 formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and an annular rotating decorative body 2630 that surrounds the fixed decorative body 2620 and is rotatable. The right middle movable decoration body 2610, the front right middle decoration board 2640 which is arranged on the rear side of the front right middle decoration body 2610 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the rear right middle decoration board 2640 are arranged on the rear side. After the unit base 2502, which supports the rotation driving mechanism 2650 that rotationally drives the rotating decoration body 2630 of the table right middle movable decoration body 2610, the rotation driving mechanism 2650, the table right middle movable decoration body 2610, and the table right middle decoration board 2640. A base member 2660 is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position on the side, and a rotation drive mechanism 2670 that rotates the base member 2660 within a predetermined angle range. The base member 2660 is rotatably supported by a support pin 2601 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2502.

The fixed decorative body 2620 of the table right middle movable decoration body 2610 of the table right middle presentation unit 2600 is a transparent front decoration body 2621 in which the outer circumference is circular and the front surface is bulged forward and the front surface is irregularly pierced in the front-rear direction. And a disk-shaped rear decorative body 2622 having a translucent property, which is disposed inside the front decorative body 2621 and whose front surface bulges forward more loosely than the front surface of the front decorative body 2621 and has predetermined characters embossed on the front surface. , Are provided. Note that the front right middle decorative substrate 2640 has a plurality of LEDs mounted at a position on the rear side of the rear decorative body 2622, so that the rear decorative body 2622 and the front decorative body 2621 can be illuminated and decorated. There is.

Further, the fixed decorative body 2620 further includes a light shielding member 2623 which is arranged on the outer periphery of the front decorative body 2621 and has a plurality of radially extending protruding pieces 2623a in the circumferential direction. Further, the front decorative body 2621 of the fixed decorative body 2620 is provided with a plurality of lens portions 2621a that radially protrude from the outer periphery and that are respectively arranged between the partitions 2623a of the light shielding member 2623. The front end of the lens portion 2621a of the front decoration body 2621 is formed in a star shape. The partition 26223a and the lens portion 2621a of the fixed decorative body 2620 are located inside the rotary decorative body 2630. The front right middle decoration board 2640 has LEDs mounted on the rear side of the lens portion 2621a, and the star-shaped tip of the lens portion 2621a can be decorated with light emission. ..

The front decorative body 2621 of the fixed decorative body 2620 is attached to the base member 2660 via the annular spacer member 2624 while sandwiching the rear decorative body 2622, the light shielding member 2623, and the front right middle decorative substrate 2640. Has become.

The rotary decoration 2630 of the movable decoration 2610 in the front right of the table is formed in an annular shape, and the predetermined decoration is three-dimensionally formed on the surface, and the decorations penetrate each other in the front-back direction. ing. In addition, the rotating decoration body 2630 is formed in a state where the rear side and the inner peripheral side are opened, and the lens portion 2621a of the front decoration body 2621 in the fixed decoration body 2620, the light blocking member 2623, and the front right middle decoration substrate 2640 are formed. It is designed to be inserted inside. The rotary decoration 2630 has a rear end extending rearward from the front right middle decorative board 2640 and is rotatable with respect to the base member 2660 by being attached to an annular operating gear 2654 of the rotary drive mechanism 2650 described later. It is supposed to be supported by.

This rotating decoration body 2630 can be light-embellished by appropriately causing the LED located on the rear side of the lens portion 2621a of the front decoration body 2621 on the front right middle decoration substrate 2640 to emit light.

The rotary drive mechanism 2650 of the front right middle rendering unit 2600 includes a table first drive motor 2651 that is attached to the base member 2660 via the motor base 2665 at a position above the rotary ornament 2630, and a table first drive motor 2651. A drive gear 2652 fixed to the rotating shaft, a transmission gear 2653 meshed with the drive gear 2652 and rotatably supported by the base member 2660, and a transmission gear 2653 meshed with the transmission gear 2653 and rotatably supported by the base member 2660 and the front surface thereof. And an annular actuating gear 2654 to which the rotary ornament 2630 is attached.

The front drive motor 2651 of the rotary drive mechanism 2650 is attached to the front side of the motor base 2665 so that the rotary shaft extends through the motor base 2665 to the rear side. The drive gear 2652 and the transmission gear 2653 are arranged between the motor base 2665 and the base member 2660.

The operation gear 2654 of the rotary drive mechanism 2650 has a circular guide hole 2654a that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the center. The operating gear 2654 is disposed between the base member 2660 and the spacer member 2624, and is rotatably supported in the guide hole 2654a via a bush 2656 axially supported by the base member 2660 and the spacer member 2624. ..

Further, the rotation drive mechanism 2650 includes a rotation position detection sensor 2655 capable of detecting the rotation position of the rotary ornament 2630. The rotary drive mechanism 2650 is provided with a plate-shaped detection piece 2652a extending outward in the drive gear 2652. By detecting the detection piece 2652a with the rotation position detection sensor 2655, the rotation position of the rotary ornament 2630 is detected. Can be detected.

The base member 2660 of the front right middle rendering unit 2600 is formed so as to cover the rear side of the front right movable decorative body 2610 and the rear side of the rotary drive mechanism 2650. The base member 2660 includes an arm portion 2661 that extends upward from a portion that supports the front right middle movable decoration body 2610, and a bearing that is formed at the tip of the arm portion 2661 and is rotatably supported with respect to the unit base 2502. A slit 2663 formed in the arm portion 2661 between the portion 2662 and the bearing portion 2662 and the portion supporting the front right middle movable decoration body 2610 and extending long along the radiation passing through the center of the bearing portion 2661 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. And are equipped with. The base member 2660 is configured such that a support pin 2601 attached to the rear side of the unit base 2502 so as to extend rearward is inserted into the bearing portion 2662, and is rotatably supported by the support pin 2601. It is like this.

Further, the motor base 2665 attached to the front side of the base member 2660 includes a guide piece 2664 that extends in an arc shape centered on the bearing portion 2662 at the lower end corresponding to the lower side of the front right middle movable decoration body 2610. .. The guide piece 2664 has a plate-shaped portion extending in the front-rear direction at the outer peripheral end centered on the bearing portion 2662, and inside the arc-shaped groove formed by the unit base 2502 and the partition member 2520. It is designed to be inserted into. As a result, the guide piece 2664 suppresses swinging in the front-rear direction when the base member 2660 is rotated.

The guide piece 2664 of the front right middle rendering unit 2600 is arranged on an extension line of the first stage 2511 in the stage 2510 on the right side in front view. Thus, when the front right middle movable decoration body 2610 is rotated from the normal position to the appearance position in the left direction when viewed from the front by the rotation drive mechanism 2670, the guide piece 2664 is positioned so as to cover the upper portion of the right end of the first stage 2511. As a result (see FIG. 157), even if the game ball bounces to the right from the first stage 2511, it is possible to prevent the game ball from coming into contact with the rotating decoration body 2630 of the front right middle movable decoration body 2610. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the movement of the game ball from being spoiled by the rotating ornamental body 2630, which would impair the original movement of the game ball and give the player a sense of distrust. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the user.

Further, the guide piece 2664 is inclined such that the left end side surface in front view becomes lower at the left end. As a result, when the front right middle movable decoration 2610 is in the normal position, the left end of the guide piece 2664 and the arc-shaped groove formed by the unit base 2502 and the partition member 2520 cause the rotation decoration 2630 to be located below the rotation decoration 2630. Since a space capable of accommodating the game ball can be formed, even if the game ball deviates to the right from the right end side of the first stage 2511, the game ball moves by accommodating and holding the game ball in the aforementioned space. Can be stopped, and the game ball can be prevented from moving differently from the original.

The game ball accommodated and held in the space described above is moved (rotated) from the normal position to the appearance position in the left direction in front view by moving the movable decoration body 2610 in the front right to obliquely move the left end of the guide piece 2664. The side surface thus rolled rolls to the left (toward the first stage 2511) and is sent back to the stage 2510. Therefore, depending on the speed at which the front right middle movable decoration body 2610 is moved from the normal position to the appearance position, the game ball housed and held at the left end of the guide piece 2664 can be blown to the stage 2510 side (FIG. 158). Therefore, it is possible to show the player a movement different from the movement of the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 within the frame of the center accessory 2500, and entertaining the movement of the game medium to the player to lower the interest. Can be suppressed.

The rotary drive mechanism 2670 of the front right center performance unit 2600 is mounted on a predetermined position of the unit base 2502 so that the rotary shaft extends in the front-rear direction, and a rotary shaft of the front second drive motor 2671. The disk-shaped link wheel 2672 is fixed, and the link pin 2673 is slidably inserted into the slit 2663 of the base member 2660, which is supported at a position eccentric from the rotation axis of the link wheel 2672.

Further, the rotation drive mechanism 2670 includes a rotation position detection sensor 2674 attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 2502 and detecting the rotation position of the front right middle movable decoration body 2610 via the base member 2660. The rotation position detection sensor 2674 is attached at a position where the front end of the guide piece 2664 of the motor base 2665 attached to the unit base 2660 can be detected in front view.

In this rotation drive mechanism 2670, when the front and second drive motors 2671 rotate the link wheel 2672, the link pins 2673 revolve around the circumference of a predetermined radius, and the link pins 2673 revolve. At the same time as the link pin 2673 slides in the slit 2663, the link pin 2673 presses the inner wall of the slit 2663 in a predetermined direction, and the base member 2660 rotates about the bearing portion 2662 (support pin 2601). There is.

In the rotation drive mechanism 2670, since the link pin 2673 is arranged between the bearing portion 2662 of the base member 2660 and the front right middle movable decoration body 2610, the front right middle movable decoration body is larger than the revolution diameter of the link pin 2673. The 2610 can be moved greatly. In the front-right middle rendering unit 2600 of the present example, the front-right middle movable decorative body 2610 is positioned by the rotation moving mechanism 2670 at the normal position where the window 2501 is located on the right side in the front view, and the front center side of the window 2501. It can be rotated between the appearance position located at.

The link wheel 2672 of the rotary drive mechanism 2670 is located on the front side of the partition wall member 2520, and a part of the outer peripheral surface thereof faces into the window 2501 (see FIGS. 112 and 133). As a result, a worker such as maintenance person can touch the outer periphery of the link wheel 2672 from the front side of the center accessory 2500 (game board 4) and rotate the link wheel 2672. Even when the body 2610) stops at a rotation position other than the predetermined position, the link wheel 2672 can be rotated from the front side to return the base member 2660 to the normal position without disassembling the center accessory 2500. It is possible to simplify the time and labor required for maintenance and the like, and to shorten the time during which the game is interrupted due to the occurrence of a defect as much as possible, and to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing. You can do it.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the front right center effect unit 2600 of the center accessory 2500 is in the normal position in which the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is located on the rightmost side in the front view, and the support pin 2601 (bearing portion). The support pin 2601, the link wheel 2672, and the like are arranged so that a vertical line passing through the center of 2662) passes between the center of the link wheel 2672 and the link pin 2673. As a result, the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 can be rotated to the left side when viewed from the front, and the appearance position of the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 can be moved closer to the center to make it easier for the player to pay attention. You can do it. In addition, when the movable decoration body 2610 in the front right is returned from the appearance position to the normal position, the revolving link pin 2673 moves across the vertical line passing through the center of the support pin 2601, so that the link pin 2673 is concerned. During the period from reaching the vertical line to revolving to the normal position, the load from the table right middle movable decoration body 2610 acts on the link pin 2673 and the table second drive motor 2671 is loaded, and the table right middle movable decoration is applied. It may be possible that the body 2610 cannot return to the normal position, but as described above, the link pin 2673 is rotated by operating the link wheel 2672 which is partially exposed in the frame of the center accessory 2500. The movable decoration body 2610 in the front right can be returned to the normal position by revolving.

The front right outside effect unit 2700 of the center accessory 2500 is a table that is arranged below the front right middle movable decoration 2610 with the front right middle movable decoration 2610 in the normal position and has a predetermined character decoration on the front surface. The right middle lower decoration member 2710, the front right middle lower decoration substrate 2711 arranged on the rear side of the front right middle lower decoration member 2710 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the front right middle lower decoration member 2710 on the front surface A table right middle upper decoration member 2720 having different character decorations and arranged on the upper side of the table right middle movable decoration body 2610, and a table right middle upper decoration body 2720 and a table right middle lower decoration body 2710 between the table right middle An arc-shaped front right middle outer circumference decoration member 2730, which is arranged so as to surround the right outer circumference of the fixed decoration body 2620 in the movable decoration body 2610 and widens upward, a front right middle outer circumference decoration member 2730, and a front right middle top. The front right middle outer peripheral decoration substrate 2733 is provided on the rear side of the decoration member 2720 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The front right middle lower decorative member 2710 of the front right outer effect unit 2700 is formed so that the character portion has a light-transmitting property, and protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1150 to partially cover the peripheral wall portion 2503. Has formed. The front right middle lower decoration member 2710 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 2502 at a position on the right side of the front view reserved number display 2530 so as to sandwich the front right middle lower decoration substrate 2711. The front right middle lower decoration member 2710 can be light-embellished by appropriately causing the LEDs of the front right middle lower decoration substrate 2711 to emit light.

The front right middle upper decorative member 2720 is formed in a plate shape so that the character portion has a light-transmitting property, and is attached to the upper front surface of the front right middle outer peripheral decorative member 2730. The front right middle upper decorative member 2720 can be light-embellished by appropriately causing the corresponding LED on the front right middle outer peripheral decorative substrate 2733 to emit light.

The front right middle outer peripheral decoration member 2730 of the front right outside production unit 2700 has a frame shape having a plurality of openings whose outer shape is an arc shape whose width becomes wider as it goes upward and whose circumferential length becomes longer as it goes upward. A frame member 2731 and a lens member 2732 that is disposed on the rear side of the frame member 2731 and has a block portion that is inserted into each opening of the frame member 2731 and that has a light-transmitting property are provided. A frame member 2731 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 2502 in the front right middle outer circumference decoration body 2730, and a lens member 2732 and a front right middle outer circumference decoration substrate 2733 are sandwiched between the frame member 2731 and the unit base 2502. It is supposed to be done. The front right middle outer peripheral decoration substrate 2733 has LEDs arranged at positions corresponding to the openings of the frame member 2731, and it is possible to perform light emission decoration for each opening (block portion of the lens member 2732). There is.

In the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, the outer peripheries of the peripheral wall portions 2503 above and to the right of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front are substantially along the inner circumference of the game area 1100 (the inner circumference of the front component member 1110A). It has a shape, and when attached to the game panel 1150, a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed along the outer periphery of the upper and right peripheral wall portions 2503 of the center accessory 2500. ing. As a result, when the game ball is driven so as to enter the clearance on the right outer periphery (so-called right hit), the game ball enters the guide passage 2142a of the attacker unit 2100, and the gate has an extremely high probability. The game ball can be passed through the portion 2105.

Further, when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1150, a region of a predetermined width is formed between the center region 2500 and the inner periphery of the game region 1100 on the outer periphery on the left side. .. With this, when the game ball is hit so that the game ball enters the left side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball flows down in a complicated motion within the area, and the game can be enjoyed by enjoying the motion of the game ball. It has become. In addition, when the game ball is driven so as to flow down the left side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball can enter the warp entrance 2504, so that the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball rolling on the stage 2510. At the same time, it is possible to increase the player's expectation depending on whether or not the game ball that is recirculated and released from the stage 2510 into the game area 1100 is accepted into the first starting opening 2101 and the like, and entertains the player. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

[2-4A. Second embodiment of fixed decorative body in front right middle production unit]
Next, a second embodiment of the fixed decorative body 2620A in the front right middle rendering unit 2600 of the center accessory 2500 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 141 to 144. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the second embodiment of the fixed decorative body in the front right middle rendering unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 142 is an exploded perspective view of the fixed decorative body as shown in FIG. FIG. 143(a) is a perspective view of the front cover and effect sheet of the fixed decorative body of FIG. 141 as seen from the front, and FIG. 143(b) is seen from a position slightly leftward with respect to the front. FIG. 6C is a perspective view seen from a position further left than FIG. FIG. 144(a) is an explanatory view showing the structure of the effect sheet in the fixed decorative body of FIG. 141, (b) is an explanatory view showing a state when the light is turned off, and (c) is a light emitting decoration mode when the blue light is turned on. And (d) is an explanatory view showing a light emitting decoration mode when red light is turned on. In addition, the same reference numerals are given to members having the same configuration, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The fixed decorative body 2620A of this example is replaceable with the front decorative body 2621 and the rear decorative body 2622 of the fixed decorative body 2620 described above. As shown in the drawing, the fixed decorative body 2620A is disposed in the front cover 2625 and a transparent front cover 2625 having a circular outer periphery, a front surface bulging forward and a shallow relief having a predetermined shape formed on the front surface. Thin production sheet 2626, a thin diffusion lens sheet 2627 arranged on the rear side of the production sheet 2626 and having a plurality of fine prisms, and a front cover arranged on the rear side of the diffusion lens sheet 2627. And a transparent disc-shaped holding member 2628 to be inserted into the inside 2625.

In this fixed decorative body 2620A, the effect sheet 2626 is composed of a light-transmitting smoke-colored base film and a colored layer formed on the back surface of the base film so that it looks black when viewed from the front side. (See FIG. 144(b)). When viewed from the front, the fixed decorative body 2620A has a relief-like decoration formed on the front cover 2625 on the front surface of the effect sheet 2626 (see FIG. 143). Accordingly, when the fixed decorative body 2620A is not illuminated and viewed from the front, the relief of the front cover 2625 and the relief reflected in the effect sheet 2626, and the distance between the front surface of the front cover 2625 and the front surface of the effect sheet 2626. Due to the difference between the two, the relief of the front cover 2625 looks three-dimensional more like a decoupage, and it is possible to present the player with an unprecedented decoration, and as shown in FIGS. 143(b) and (c). In addition, since the appearance changes depending on the player's viewing position, the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be entertained.

In addition, in the fixed decorative body 2620A, as shown in FIG. 144(a), the colored layer in the effect sheet 2626 has a black portion 2626a having almost no translucency, a blue portion 2626b having translucency, and a translucent blue portion 2626b. It is composed of a red portion 2626c having a light property and an uncolored portion 2626d which is not colored. As a result, when the LED located on the rear side of the fixed decorative body 2620A on the front right middle decorative substrate 2640 is not emitting light, the smoked color of the base film makes the whole black and the pattern visible as shown in FIG. 144(b). On the other hand, when the LED is made to emit blue light, it emits light with the pattern as shown in FIG. 144(c), and when it is made to emit red light with the pattern as shown in FIG. 144(d). ing.

More specifically, in the colored layer of the effect sheet 2626 in the fixed decorative body 2620A, when the design of FIG. 144(c) and the design of FIG. 144(d) are overlapped, a portion not included in any of the designs is a black portion. 2626a, and a portion included in any of the patterns is an uncolored portion 2626d. Further, when the design of FIG. 144(c) and the design of FIG. 144(d) are overlapped with each other, the portion of only the design of FIG. 144(c) is the blue portion 2626b, and only the design of FIG. 144(d) is present. The part is a red part 2626c. Therefore, when the LED is made to emit blue light, light is transmitted through the blue portion 2626b and the uncolored portion 2626d, and light is not transmitted through the black portion 2626a and the red portion 2626c. The imitation pattern) will emit blue light. When the LED is made to emit red light, light is transmitted through the red portion 2626c and the uncolored portion 2626d, and light is not transmitted through the black portion 2626a and the blue portion 2626b. Therefore, the pattern (characters shown in FIG. The imitation pattern) will emit red light. When the LED is made to emit white light, a pattern as shown in FIG. 144(a) emits light.

As described above, the fixed decorative body 2620A gives a stereoscopic effect by reflecting the relief formed on the front cover 2625 on the effect sheet 2626 when the LED of the front right middle decorative substrate 2640 arranged on the rear side is not illuminated. While it is possible to present a certain decoration, it is possible to display different patterns in a light-emitting manner according to the color of light emitted from the LEDs, and present a variety of effects to the player so that the player is less likely to get tired of it. Note that the relief of the front cover 2625 has substantially the same shape as the pattern that is emitted and displayed when the LED emits blue light, and thus the relief that is emitted in blue together with the relief of the front cover 2625 has a three-dimensional effect. Can be given.

[2-5. Overall configuration of back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 148. 145 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 146 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the back. Further, FIG. 147 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into main constituent members and seen from the front, and FIG. 148 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into main constituent members and seen from the rear. is there.

The back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1150, the front side is opened, and the back wall 3010a is provided with an opening 3010b through which the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces and penetrates in the front-rear direction. 3010 is provided. The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 is a box-shaped opening on the front side and has a substantially rectangular opening 3010b penetrating in the front-rear direction in the rear wall 3010a, and extends outward from the outer periphery of the front end and is fixed to the rear side of the game panel 1150. And a flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c. The opening 3010b of the back box 3010 is formed smaller than the outer shape of the liquid crystal display device 1900 when viewed from the front.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d that is recessed toward the front and has substantially the same size as the outer shape of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the outer periphery of the opening 3010b on the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a, and a rear view of the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d. The liquid crystal fixing portion 3010e formed on the right side and into which the fixing piece 1902 of the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be inserted, and the liquid crystal fixing hole 3010e are formed on the opposite side (right side in rear view) of the liquid crystal inserting portion 3010d, and the locking mechanism 3040. And a lock mechanism attaching portion 3010f to which is attached. In this back box 3010, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted into the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d from the rear side, and the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a inside the liquid crystal insertion portion frame 3010d is a flat surface. The front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900 abuts.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the back box 3010, mounting holes, mounting bosses, etc. for mounting the respective production units 3100, 3300, 3500, boards, covers, etc. are formed at appropriate positions.

Further, the back unit 3000 is mounted near the front end of the back box 3010 near the front end of the back lower decoration board 3020 mounted on the front side unit 2200 at a position corresponding to the front side unit 2200 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. Attached to the front wall of the rear wall 3010a above the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 and the lower back right decorative substrate 3021 attached to the front passage member 2142 of the attacker unit 2100 at a position corresponding to the plurality of LEDs. The back upper relay board 3022, the back right relay board 3023 attached to the front surface of the rear wall 3010a on the right side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 in front view, and the back right relay board 3023 in the back box 3010 on the left side of the opening 3010b in front view of the rear wall 3010a. And a back left relay board 3024 attached to the front surface.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a panel relay board 3025 attached to a rear lower surface of the back wall 3010a of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010b in a lower left corner in rear view, and a rear box disposed on the right side of the panel relay board 3025 in rear view. A first drive board 3026 attached to the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a in 3010; and a second drive board 3027 arranged on the right side of the first drive board 3026 in rear view and attached to the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a in the back box 3010. ing.

The back unit 3000 includes a panel relay board cover 3030 that covers the rear side of the panel relay board 3025 and is attached to the back box 3010, and a first drive board cover that covers the back side of the first drive board 3026 and is attached to the back box 3010. 3031 and a second drive substrate cover 3032 that covers the rear side of the second drive substrate 3027 and is attached to the back box 3010.

The back unit 3000 also includes a lock mechanism 3040 on the back surface of the back wall 3010a of the back box 3010 for removably holding the liquid crystal display device 1900. The lock mechanism 3040 of this example is configured to be slidable in the vertical direction with respect to the lock mechanism attachment portion 3010f of the back box 3010. When the lock mechanism 3040 is slid upward, the fixing piece 1902 of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is moved backward. When an insertion opening that can be inserted from the side is opened, and the locking piece 3040 is slid upward after inserting the fixing piece 1902 from the insertion opening, the rear end of the insertion opening is closed and the fixing piece 1902 does not come off. As a result, the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be locked.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a plate-shaped back left holder 3050 attached in the vicinity of the front end at the left end in the back box 3010, and a second starting opening of the attacker unit 2100 near the front end in the back box 3010. A back right guide member 3060 attached to a position corresponding to 2102 and a general winning opening 2104 and capable of guiding a game ball, a first starting opening 2101 of an attacker unit 2100 and a front side unit 2200 near the front end in the back box 3010. It is provided with a back left guide member 3070 which is attached to a position corresponding to one general winning opening 2201 and can guide a game ball.

Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the back left holder 3050 and the back right guiding member 3060 at predetermined positions to detect magnetism, and the back left guiding member 3070 is placed to a predetermined position. The first starting opening sensor 3081 capable of detecting the game ball received in, the back right guiding member 3060 and the back left guiding member 3070 are respectively attached to predetermined positions to detect the game balls received in the general winning openings 2104 and 2201. It is equipped with a possible general winning a prize sensor 3082.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back horizontal production unit 3100 arranged above the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 and over both left and right sides, and a back production unit 3300 arranged above the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. And an underside effect unit 3500 arranged below the opening 3010b in the inside of the back box 3010.

The back lower left decoration substrate 3020 of the back unit 3000 can light up and decorate the front side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 by appropriately causing the LEDs mounted on the front surface to emit light. Further, the back lower right decoration substrate 3021 can lighten and decorate the guide passage member 2142 of the attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000 by appropriately causing the LEDs mounted on the front surface to emit light.

The back relay board 3022 in the back unit 3000 is for relaying the connection between the peripheral drive board 4010 and the first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027. Further, the back right relay board 3023 is for relaying the connection between the first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 and the back horizontal relay board 3112 of the back right effect unit 3100R in the back side effect unit 3100, The back left relay board 3024 is for relaying the connection between the first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 and the back horizontal relay board 3112 of the back left effect unit 3100L in the back side effect unit 3100.

The panel relay board 3025 in the back unit 3000 connects the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4010, and the main control board 4100 and the first starting opening sensor 3082, the second starting opening sensor 2125, the count sensor 2114, the general winning opening. It is for relaying the connection with the sensor 3082, the gate sensor 2126, the starting opening solenoid 2124, the attacker solenoid 2113, and the like.

The first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 in the back unit 3000 are based on control signals (commands) from the peripheral control board 4010, and each of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256 provided on the door frame 5. 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc., and the LED mounted on each of the decorative boards 2115, 2118, 2127, 2133, 2521, 522, 2640, 3020, 3021, 3129, 3130 and the like provided on the game board 4. Based on a control signal (command) from the light emission control or the peripheral control board 4010, the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 and the drive motors 3123, 3152, 3159 provided in the game board 4, It is for controlling the drive of 3302, 3506 and the like.

The back left holder 3050 in the back unit 3000 supports the magnetic detection sensor 3080 at a position corresponding to the warp entrance 2504 in the center accessory 2500, and uses a magnet to guide the game ball to the warp entrance 2504. It is possible to detect such illegal acts.

The back right guiding member 3060 in the back unit 3000 supports the magnetic detection sensor 3080 at a position corresponding to the first starting opening 2101 in the center accessory 2500, and uses a magnet to make the game ball the first starting opening. It is possible to detect a fraudulent act that induces the user to go to 2101.

The back right guiding member 3060 is arranged on the rear side of the second unit 2120 and the third unit 2130 in the attacker unit 2100, and has an upper opening 3061 on the front surface of the upper end portion that can communicate with the general winning opening 2104. A central opening 3062 that is capable of communicating with the second starting port 2102 is provided on the front surface of the substantially central portion in the vertical direction. Although not shown, the back right guiding member 3060 has a right guiding passage that extends from the upper opening 3061 to the lower end to allow the game balls to flow and has the lower end opening downward. The middle opening 3062 communicates with the middle of the right guiding passage, and the game balls that have entered the upper opening 3061 and the middle opening 3062 are both discharged downward from the lower end by the right guiding passage.

As a result, the back right guiding member 3060 is adapted to allow the game ball, which is received in the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 and guided to the rear side of the game panel 1150, to enter the right guiding passage from the upper opening 3061. At the same time, the game ball, which is received in the second starting opening 2102 and guided to the rear side of the game panel 1150, enters into the right guide passage from the middle opening 3062. In the back right guiding member 3060, a general winning opening sensor 3082 is attached to a position between the upper opening 3061 and the middle opening 3062 in the right guiding passage, and the upper opening 3061, that is, the general winning opening 2104 is a game ball. Only can detect.

The back left guiding member 3070 of the back unit 3000 extends over the portion of the attacker unit 2100 where the first starting port 2101 is arranged and the portion of the front side unit 2200 where the three general winning openings 2201 are arranged. It is arranged on the rear side. A middle guiding passage 3071 in which the game ball can be circulated in the vertical direction at the right end in front view and the upper end can communicate with the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100, and the left side of the middle guiding passage 3071 in front view. It has three left openings 3072 formed on the front surface and capable of communicating with the respective general winning openings 2201 of the front side unit 2200.

A lower end of the middle guiding passage 3071 of the back left guiding member 3070 is opened downward, and the opened front side is closed by the rear surface of the attacker unit 2100. As a result, the game ball received in the first starting port 2101 and guided to the rear side of the game panel 1150 enters the middle guiding passage 3071 from the upper end portion, is guided downward by the middle guiding passage 3071, and is guided from the lower end. It is designed to be discharged downward. In addition, the first starting port sensor 3081 is attached near the upper part and the lower part of the middle guiding passage 3071 so that one gaming ball is detected twice. That is, although details are omitted, the acceptance (winning) of the game ball into the first starting opening 2101 is determined based on the detection pattern of the detection signal of the game ball from the two first starting opening sensors 3081. If a detection pattern different from the preset regular detection pattern is detected, for example, it is determined that a fraudulent act such as putting a fraudulent tool in and out of the first starting opening 2101 is performed, and A predetermined game process is performed.

The back left guide member 3070, though not shown, has a left guide passage on the left side of the middle guide passage 3071 when viewed from the front, having a discharge port at the lower end that communicates with the three left openings 3072 and through which game balls can pass. I have it. A general winning opening sensor 3082 is attached to the outlet of the left guiding passage, and any one of the three general winning openings 2201 can receive the game ball, and one general winning opening sensor 3082 detects the game ball. ing.

[2-6. Back side production unit]
Next, the back horizontal production unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 149 to 156. FIG. 149 is a perspective view of the back horizontal rendering unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 150 is a perspective view of the back horizontal rendering unit in the back unit as seen from the rear. In addition, FIG. 151 is an exploded perspective view of the back horizontal rendering unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 152 is an exploded perspective view of the back horizontal rendering unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 153 is a perspective view of one rotary decorative body unit in the back horizontal rendering unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 154 is a perspective view of one rotary decorative body unit in the rear horizontal rendering unit as seen from the rear. Also, FIG. 155 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary ornamental body unit of the back horizontal rendering unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 156 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary decorative body unit of the rear horizontal rendering unit disassembled and seen from the rear. It is a figure.

The back horizontal production unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is arranged above the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and on both left and right sides, and is attached at positions above and below the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. In the back horizontal production unit 3100, the back right production unit 3100R arranged on the right side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 as viewed from the front and the back right production unit 3100R are formed substantially symmetrically with each other and the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 is formed. The rear left effect unit 3100L and the rear left effect unit 3100L and the rear right effect unit 3100R arranged on the left side in the front view can be independently moved in the left and right directions, and the upper and lower sides of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 can be independently moved. And a back horizontal slide unit 3150 disposed in the.

The back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L in the back horizontal rendering unit 3100 are supported by the back horizontal sliding unit 3150 so that the upper and lower ends thereof can slide in the left-right direction, and face the front side and the opening 3010b of the back box 3010. A vertically-long box-shaped back horizontal base 3110 having an open side facing the center in the left-right direction, and a front side of the back horizontal base 3110 that can cover a part of each of the open front side and the side facing the center. Inside the box-shaped back horizontal base 3110, a back horizontal decorative member 3111 mounted on the back horizontal base 3111, a vertical rear horizontal horizontal relay board 3112 mounted on the outer surface of the rear horizontal base 3111 opposite to the open center side. And three rotary decoration body units 3120 which are attached in a state of being arranged in a vertical direction.

The back horizontal base 3110 of the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L is formed such that the vertical height thereof is slightly higher than the vertical height of the opening 3010b of the back box 3010. Further, the back horizontal base 3110 includes a slider mounting portion 3110a protruding upward from the upper end front surface and connected to the lower end of the right connecting member 3157 or the left connecting member 3162 of the rear horizontal slide unit 3150, and protruding downward from the lower end and extending in the left-right direction. And a guided portion 3110b that is inserted and guided into the lower right guide member 3170R or the lower left guide member 3170L of the back horizontal slide unit 3150. The back horizontal base 3110 is made of transparent synthetic resin.

The back horizontal decoration members 3111 of the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L are positioned at positions corresponding to the rotary decorative bodies 3126 of the three rotary decorative units 3120 mounted in the back horizontal base 3110. A plurality of cutout portions 3111a are provided so as to face the front side of 3126 and the side of the opening 3010b of the back box 3010 facing the center in the left-right direction. The back horizontal decoration member 3111 is a portion between the cutouts 3111a and can hide the lower base 3121 and the upper base 3122 located above and below the rotary decoration 3126 of the rotary decoration unit 3120 from the player side. You can do it.

In addition, the back horizontal decoration member 3111 has a shallow relief-like decoration on the front surface, and a plurality of back and forth decorative members 3111 are formed at positions corresponding to the back horizontal decoration substrate 3130 in the rotary decoration unit 3120 so as to penetrate in the front-back direction along the decoration. Has an opening 3111b. Thereby, the light from the back horizontal decoration substrate 3130 can be directly radiated forward through the opening 3111b of the back horizontal decoration member 3111.

The rotating decorative body unit 3120 of the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L is a plate-shaped lower base 3121 extending in the left-right direction, and the front of the opening 3010b of the back box 3010 from the center of the lower base 3121 in the left-right direction. A box-shaped upper base 3122 mounted on the upper side opposite to the side facing the center in the left-right direction, and a back lateral rotation drive mounted on the upper surface of the upper base 3122 so that the rotation shaft extends to the lower base 3121 side. A motor 3123, a drive gear 3124 that is fixed to the rotation shaft of the back lateral rotation drive motor 3123, and is rotatably supported on the upper surface of the lower base 3121, meshes with the drive gear 3124, and has the same diameter as the drive gear 3124. And a driven gear 3125 having a spur gear shape rotatably supported on the upper surface of the lower base 3121, and a rotation having a bottomed cylindrical shape attached to the upper surface of the driven gear 3125 and extending in the vertical direction and having a substantially square outer periphery. The ornamental body 3126 and a rotational position detection sensor 3127 capable of detecting the rotational position of the rotary ornamental body 3126 and attached to the upper base 3122 are provided.

Also, the rotary ornament unit 3120 is inserted into the rotary ornament 3126 from above and has a semi-cylindrical lens member 3128 that has an upper end attached to the upper base 3122 and extends vertically, and a chord side of the lens member 3128. Mounted on the lens member 3128 side and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface of the vertically long rotating decorative body decoration board 3129, and the upper base 3122 is mounted on the front surface at a substantially central position in the left-right direction and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. And a back horizontal decorative substrate 3130.

The lower base 3121 of the rotary decorative body unit 3120 is formed such that the length in the front-rear direction is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the rotary decorative body 3126, and is located on the opposite side of the driving gear 3124 with the driven gears 3125 at the left and right ends sandwiched therebetween. The end portion is formed in a semicircular shape that is substantially concentric with the shaft center of the driven gear 3125. Further, the lower base 3121 includes a drive shaft portion 3121a that rotatably supports the drive gear 3124 and extends upward, and a driven shaft portion 3121b that rotatably supports the driven gear 3125 and extends upward. .. The drive shaft portion 3121a is adapted to be inserted into a shaft hole (not shown) formed in the lower surface of the drive gear 3124. Further, the driven shaft portion 3121b is adapted to be inserted through the bush 3131 into the shaft hole 3125a penetrating the shaft core of the driven gear 3125.

The upper base 3122 of the rotary decoration unit 3120 is arranged on the side supporting the drive gear 3124 from the center of the lower base 3121 in the left-right direction, and the lower side and the driven gear 3125 side (the side of the opening 3010b facing the center in the left-right direction) are opened. Box-shaped main body portion 3122a, a standing wall portion 3122b that extends upward from the opened driven gear 3125 side at the upper end of the main body portion 3122a, and a lower base 3121 that extends from the upper end of the standing wall portion 3122b to the driven gear 3125 side. And a top plate portion 3122c extending in parallel. In the rotary decorative body unit 3120 of this example, a rotary decorative body 3126 that is rotatable around an axis extending in the vertical direction is arranged between the lower base 3121 and the top plate portion 3122c of the upper base 3122.

The upper base 3122 is configured such that the lower end of the main body 3122a is attached to the lower base 3121. Further, the upper base 3122 is configured such that the back lateral rotation drive motor 3123 is attached to the upper surface of the main body 3122a. The upright wall portion 3122b of the upper base 3122 extends higher than the back lateral rotation drive motor 3123 attached to the main body portion 3122a. The top plate 3122c of the upper base 3122 has a semicircular shape at the tip opposite to the standing wall 3122b, and the lens member 3128 can be attached to the lower surface.

An annular upper guide 3132 having a cylindrical guide tube (not shown) inserted into the rotary ornament 3126 is attached to the lower surface of the top plate 3122c of the upper base 3122. ing. In the upper guide 3132, the outer diameter of the guide cylinder inserted into the rotary ornament 3126 is slightly smaller than the diameter of the inscribed circle of the rotary ornament 3126, and the upper end side of the rotary ornament 3126. Can be rotatably supported.

The drive gear 3124 of the rotary ornament unit 3120 has a shaft portion 3124a whose upper end is fixed to the rotation shaft of the back lateral rotation drive motor 3123 and extends downward, and a flat gear which is formed at the lower end of the shaft portion 3124a and meshes with the driven gear 3125. A gear-shaped gear portion 3124b, a detection piece 3124c that extends in a fan shape in a direction perpendicular to the axis from the vertical center of the shaft portion 3124a, and a shaft hole that is recessed upward from the lower surface side at the center of the gear portion 3124b (not shown). ), and are provided. This drive gear 3124 has a shaft hole inserted into the drive shaft portion 3121a of the lower base 3121, so that the rotation axis core of the gear portion 3124b arranged far from the back horizontal rotation drive motor 3123 does not easily swing. Has become. Further, the detection piece 3124c is adapted to be detected by a rotational position detection sensor 3127 attached inside the main body portion 3122a of the upper base 3122. By detecting the detection piece 3124c of the drive gear 3124, the rotary ornament 3126 is detected. The rotation position of can be detected.

As shown in the figure, the rotary decoration body 3126 of the rotary decoration body unit 3120 is formed into a bottomed cylindrical shape whose outer periphery extends in a substantially square shape in the vertical direction. It is rotatable about an axis extending in the up-and-down direction with the center as a substantial axis. The rotating ornament 3126 has a light-transmitting property, and different decorations are applied to the four outer peripheral surfaces.

The lens member 3128 and the rotary decorative body decorative substrate 3129 of the rotary decorative body unit 3120 have a length extending from the top plate portion 3122c of the upper base 3122 to the vicinity of the lower end of the rotary decorative body 3126 in the assembled state. The entire 3126 in the up-and-down direction can be decorated to emit light substantially uniformly. In addition, the lens member 3128 having a semicircular cross-section has a chord direction that extends in a direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction (a surface parallel to the front surface of the game panel 1150) with respect to the left and right sides of the opening 3101b in the back box 3010. It is attached to the upper base 3122 in a state in which the central side in the direction is inclined so as to retract (for example, in a state of being inclined by about 30 degrees in plan view). As a result, the front surface of the rotating decorative body decoration substrate 3129 attached to the chord side of the lens member 3128 faces the player side, and when the rotating decorative body 3126 is illuminated and decorated, the player feels brighter. Has become.

The back horizontal decoration substrate 3130 of the rotary decoration unit 3120 is attached to the front side of the main body 3122a of the upper base 3122 so as to extend to the upper end of the standing wall 3122b. This back horizontal decoration substrate 3130 is configured such that the LEDs mounted on the front surface are made to emit light as appropriate so that the back horizontal decoration member 3111 can be made to emit light from the rear side.

As shown in the figure, the rotary decorative body unit 3120 of the present embodiment, in the assembled state, is a surface of the outer surface of the rotary decorative body 3126 facing the side opposite to the center side in the left-right direction of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. Except for, it is possible to expose the three sides. Further, the rotary ornament unit 3120 is configured such that the rear surfaces of the lower base 3121 and the upper base 3122 are mounted inside the back horizontal base 3110, respectively.

The rotary decoration unit 3120 is formed symmetrically with respect to the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L.

The rear horizontal slide unit 3150 of the rear horizontal production unit 3100 is attached to a position near the front end in the rear box 3010 above the opening 3010b and extends in the left-right direction so as to extend over the entire width, and a unit base 3151. Of the rear side right slide drive motor 3152, which is attached to the upper rear surface near the right end of the front view and penetrates the unit base 3151 to extend the rotation axis forward, and a flat side fixed to the rotation axis of the back side right slide drive motor 3152. A gear-shaped drive gear 3153, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3154 rotatably supported by the unit base 3151 and meshing with the drive gear 3153 at a position on the left side of the drive gear 3153 in front view, and a first transmission gear 3154. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3155, which is rotatably supported by the unit base 3151 and meshes with the first transmission gear 3154, and a rack gear 3156a, which meshes with the second transmission gear 3155 and which extends in the left-right direction, are rotatably supported at a position on the left side in front view. A plate-shaped right slider 3156 that is supported by the unit base 3151 and is slidable in the left-right direction at a position lower than the second transmission gear 3155 in the unit base 3151. The right connection member 3157 is attached to the slider attachment portion 3110a of the back horizontal base 3110 in the back right effect unit 3100R.

In addition, the back horizontal slide unit 3150 is equipped with a right slide position detection sensor 3158 attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 3151 and capable of detecting the horizontal slide position of the back right effect unit 3100R. The right slide position detection sensor 3158 detects a slide piece of the back right performance unit 3100R via the right slider 3156 by detecting a detection piece (detailed illustration is omitted) provided on the right slider 3156. You can do it.

Further, the rear horizontal slide unit 3150 is attached to the upper rear surface on the left side of the center of the unit base 3151 in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the rear horizontal left slide drive motor 3159 that penetrates the unit base 3151 and extends the rotation axis forward. The rear side left slide drive motor 3159 has a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3160 fixed to the rotary shaft and a rack gear 3161a extending in the left-right direction that meshes with the drive gear 3160. A plate-shaped left slider 3161 slidably supported in the left-right direction at the side front surface, and an upper end is attached to the lower end of the left slider 3161, and the lower end is the slider attachment portion of the back horizontal base 3110 in the back left production unit 3100L. And a left connecting member 3162 attached to the 3110a.

Further, the back horizontal slide unit 3150 is equipped with a left slide position detection sensor 3163 attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 3151 and capable of detecting the left-right slide position of the back left effect unit 3100L. The left slide position detection sensor 3163 detects the slide position of the back left performance unit 3100L via the left slider 3161 by detecting a detection piece (detailed illustration is omitted) provided on the left slider 3161. You can do it.

The back horizontal slide unit 3150 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3151 and includes a plate-shaped unit cover 3165 that covers the front sides of the drive gears 3153, 3160, the right slider 3156, the left slider 3161 and the like.

Further, the back horizontal slide unit 3150 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, the upper side is opened, and extends in the left/right direction. The lower side of the back right effect unit 3100R is slidably guided in the left/right direction. A lower guide member 3170R and a lower left guide member that is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 and is opened on the upper side and extends in the left-right direction so as to guide the lower end of the left-left performance unit 3100L to be slidable in the left-right direction. 3170L. The lower right guide member 3170R and the lower left guide member 3170L are slidably inserted from above from the guided portion 3110b of the back horizontal base 3110 in the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L. The back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L can be slidably guided in the left and right direction via the guided portion 3110b.

The right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161 of the back horizontal slide unit 3150 are respectively provided with rack gears 3156a and 3161a formed at the upper ends thereof so as to extend in the left-right direction, and from the left-right direction end portions of the opening 3010b of the back box 3010 near the left-right center. A detection piece (not shown) that extends upward in a plate shape, and a guide groove (not shown) that is open at the rear side and extends in the left-right direction and that is formed in parallel with each other in the vertical direction are provided. There is.

The right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161 are configured such that a plurality of rollers (not shown) rotatably supported on the front surface of the unit base 3151 are inserted into guide grooves on the rear surface. It can be slid to the left and right. Further, the right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161 are configured to be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction by the unit cover 3164 and the unit base 3151.

The back horizontal slide unit 3150 of the back horizontal extension unit 3100 rotates the back horizontal right slide drive motor 3152 and the back horizontal left slide drive motor 3159 in an appropriate direction to move the right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161 within a predetermined range. Can be independently slid in the left-right direction, and the rear right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering can be performed via the right connecting member 3157 and the left connecting member 3162 attached to the right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161. The unit 3100L can be slid horizontally.

The back horizontal production unit 3100 of the present embodiment is configured to be rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction in each of the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L which are arranged apart from each other in the left-right direction in a front view. The three rotating decorations 3126 are coaxially arranged in the vertical direction, and the rotating decorations 3126 vertically arranged are opposed to each other in the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L. It is located in. The back horizontal production unit 3100 of this example uses the back horizontal slide unit 3150 to separate the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L from a position where they are most separated from each other (retracted position) and a position where they are closest to each other (appearing position). Each can be independently slid to the left and right. In the state where the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L are at the most separated positions, the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L are respectively located outside the window part 2501 in the front view in the center accessory 2500. The player cannot see the game (see FIG. 110 etc.). Then, this state is the normal gaming state.

On the other hand, in the back horizontal rendering unit 3100, when the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L are moved to the positions where they are closest to each other, the rotary ornaments 3126 rotatably supported by each of them are centered. The rotary ornaments 3126 positioned vertically inside the window portion 2501 of the accessory 2500 and arranged vertically from the player side can be visually recognized (see FIG. 159). Further, in the state where the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L are closest to each other, the size of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 that faces the window 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is approximately larger than that in the normal state. It is supposed to be half the size.

This back side production unit 3100 is designed to be movable according to a special lottery result that is drawn by the game balls being received in the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102.

[2-7. Back production unit]
Next, the back production unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 147 and 148.

The back production unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 of this embodiment is attached to the upper side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and is arranged behind the unit base 3151 of the back horizontal slide unit 3150 in the back horizontal production unit 3100. There is. This back production unit 3300 is mounted in the back box 3010 and extends in the left-right direction, and is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 in the vicinity of the left end in front view and penetrates the unit base 3301 so that the rotation axis is forward. A rear drive motor 3302 extending to the rear drive motor, a spur gear-shaped drive gear (not shown) fixed to the rotation shaft of the rear drive motor 3302, and a rack gear that meshes with the drive gear and extends in an arc shape. An arc-shaped plate-shaped slider (not shown) supported slidably in the circumferential direction by the unit base.

In addition, the back effect unit 3300 includes a back decoration body base 3305 attached to the front surface of a slider (not shown), and a back decoration body 3306 attached to the front surface of the back decoration body base 3305 and given a predetermined decoration. A back decorative board (not shown), which is disposed between the back decorative body 3306 and the back decorative base 3305 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, is provided.

Furthermore, the back production unit 3300 is disposed on the rear side of the back decoration base 3305 and is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301 to cover the front surfaces of the drive gear and the slider, and a unit base cover 3308. 3308 and the unit base 3301 support three front and rear end-shaped cylindrical shaft members (not shown) extending in the front-rear direction at predetermined positions, and the shaft members are rotatably inserted into the respective outer circumferences. A plurality of bushes (not shown) capable of contacting the slider are provided. In this back production unit 3300, a slider is supported slidably in the circumferential direction with respect to the unit base 3301 via a shaft member and a bush.

In addition, the back production unit 3300 is attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 3301 and a slide position detection sensor (not shown) capable of detecting the slide position of the slider, and is attached to the predetermined position of the unit base 3301 to provide a back decoration. And a back relay board (not shown) for relaying the connection between the board and the first drive board 3026.

Although not shown in the figure, the back production unit 3300 is provided with magnets at the right end in front view of the back decorative body base 3305 and the right end in front view of the unit base 3301, and attracts each other. It is installed in the orientation.

Although not shown, the unit base 3301 of the rear effect unit 3300 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front side open, and can accommodate a drive gear, a slider, and the like. Further, although not shown, the unit base 3301 has three shaft holes that penetrate the front and rear directions at predetermined positions and into which the rear ends of shaft members (not shown) are inserted.

Although illustration is omitted, the drive gear of the rear effect unit 3300 has an outer diameter of about 2/3 of the height of the unit base 3301 and has a large spur gear shape. It is regarded as a gear.

Although not shown, the slider of the rear effect unit 3300 extends in an arc shape having a center below the unit base 3301 and is formed to have a substantially constant width. A rack gear that meshes with the drive gear is arranged in the. Further, the slider has mounting portions formed at both ends in the circumferential direction for mounting the back decorative body base 3305, slits penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the circumferential direction at substantially the center in the radial direction, and extending in the circumferential direction. A plate-shaped detection piece formed outside the right end of the rack gear when viewed from the front.

The slider of the back production unit 3300 is configured such that a bush inserted into a shaft member whose rear end is supported by a shaft hole of the unit base 3301 comes into contact with the circumferential surface on the radially inner side and the slit. By rotating the bush that is in contact with it, it can slide smoothly in the circumferential direction. Further, both ends of the slit of the slider are closed, and the bushing contact with the circumferential end portion of the slit limits the sliding range of the slider in the circumferential direction. Further, the slider of the back production unit 3300 can detect the detection piece by the slide position detection sensor, and the detection piece detects the slider, that is, the slide position of the back decoration. You can do it.

Although not shown in detail, the back decorative body base 3305 of the back production unit 3300 is formed so as to extend along the slider in a front view, and the left end side in front view is attached to the left end of the slider and the right end side is a unit. The base cover 3308 is attached to the right end portion of the slider through a through hole (not shown) of the base cover 3308. The back decoration body base 3305 is formed in a flat plate shape from the substantial center in the left-right direction to the left side when viewed from the front, and the outer shape is formed along the outer shape of the back decoration body 3306.

The back decoration 3306 of the back production unit 3300 is formed in a shallow (thin) relief shape imitating a clenched fist, and is provided with a translucent decoration portion 3306a made of a predetermined character at a portion corresponding to the back of the hand. (See FIG. 160). The back decoration 3306 is formed in a state of being almost opaque except for the outer periphery and the decorative portion 3306a, and is given a predetermined color by screen printing or the like. Although illustration is omitted, the color of the decoration provided on the front surface of the back decoration 3306 is a color whose brightness becomes lower (darker) as the distance from the outer circumference increases.

The back decoration board of the back production unit 3300 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface at positions corresponding to the outer periphery of the back decoration 3306 and the decorative portion 3306a. As a result, the outer periphery of the back side decorative body 3306 and the decorative portion 3306a can be light-emitted and decorated by the back side decorative substrate.

The back production unit 3300 of this example is configured such that the unit base 3301 and the unit base cover 3308 support the slider at a position on the left side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction. This slider has a state in which the left side of the chord of the slider is slightly lower than the horizontal direction in the front view (the retracted position), and the chord of the slider is substantially perpendicular to the counterclockwise direction in the front view. It is possible to slide in the circumferential direction up to (state of appearance position).

In the normal state, the back production unit 3300 has a state in which the chord with respect to the circular arc of the slider is slightly lowered on the left side with respect to the horizontal, and in this state, the back decorative body 3306 attached to the front side of the slider. However, it is located in front of the unit base 3301. Therefore, in a normal state, the back side decorative body 3306 of the back side effect unit 3300 is located above the window portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and is invisible to the player, that is, in the retracted position. It is in a state (see FIG. 110).

On the other hand, the back production unit 3300 slides the slider in the counterclockwise circumferential direction when viewed from the front by the drive of the back driving motor 3302, and when the chord of the slider is substantially perpendicular to the arc, the slider is moved to the front side of the slider. The attached upper back decorative body 3306 is located below the front of the unit base 3301 and the fist is facing downward. In this state, the back decoration 3306 of the back production unit 3300 hangs down from the upper side of the window 2501 in the center accessory 2500 into the window 2501 and is positioned approximately in the center of the window 2501. The state is visible from the side, that is, the state of the appearance position (see FIG. 160).

[2-8. Underside production unit]
Next, the lower back effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 147 and 148. The lower back production unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 at substantially the center in the left-right direction, and is arranged on the rear side of the back left guiding member 3070.

The back lower effect unit 3500 of this example is formed in a substantially symmetrical predetermined shape and has a partially transparent rear lower decoration 3501 and a rear lower decoration 3501 which is disposed on the front side of the back lower decoration 3501. A lower back decorative board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, a slider (not shown) arranged on the rear side of the lower back decorative board and attached to the lower back decoration 3501, and a rear side of the slider. And a shallow box-shaped unit cover 3504 that is slidable in the vertical direction and supports the slider so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and the rear side is open. The unit cover 3504 is attached to the rear side of the unit cover 3504 and is attached to the inside of the back box 3010. It is provided with a shallow box-shaped unit base 3505 having an open front side, and a back-bottom drive motor 3506 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3505 for vertically sliding the slider.

The underside decorative body 3501 of the underside effect production unit 3500 is formed in a shape simulating a flame. Further, although not shown, the slider of the under side effect unit 3500 includes cylindrical support bosses which are vertically spaced apart from each other at left and right ends and protrude rearward, and a center in the left-right direction between the support bosses. And a pair of slits which are arranged on both the left and right sides with respect to and which penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in the left-right direction.

Although not shown, the unit cover 3504 of the lower back production unit 3500 has a pair of elevating guide grooves that are spaced apart in the left-right direction, penetrate in the front-rear direction, extend in the up-down direction, and support slider bosses are slidably inserted. , A through-hole portion that is arranged symmetrically with the center in the left-right direction sandwiched between the pair of elevating guide grooves, extends in an arc shape so that the center side in the left-right direction bulges, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The unit cover 3504 is capable of supporting the slider so as to be slidable in the vertical direction by a pair of elevating guide grooves.

The outer shape of the unit base 3505 of the underside effect unit 3500 is the same as the outer shape of the unit cover 3504, and the unit cover 3504 can form a box having a shallow depth in the front-rear direction. .. The underside drive motor 3506 of the underside effect unit 3500 is designed to be attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3505 at a position on the left side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is rotated while attached to the unit base 3505. The shaft penetrates the unit base 3505 and extends to the front side.

Although not shown, the lower back production unit 3500 meshes with a drive gear in the form of a spur gear fixed to the rotation shaft of the lower back drive motor 3506 between the unit cover 3504 and the unit base 3505. And a first transmission gear in the form of a spur gear, which is arranged on the right side of the drive gear when viewed from the front and is rotatably supported by the unit base 3505, and which is meshed with the first transmission gear and arranged on the right side of the first transmission gear when viewed from the front. And a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear rotatably supported by the unit base 3505, and the second transmission gear meshes with the second transmission gear and is arranged at the same height as the drive gear on the right side of the second transmission gear in a front view. A spur gear-shaped third transmission gear rotatably supported by the base 3505, and a fan-shaped gear portion that meshes with the drive gear and is rotatably supported by the unit base 3505 at a position on the left side of the drive gear in front view. , An extension piece that extends outward in the radial direction from the gear portion, and a forward projection from the tip of the extension piece that penetrates the through hole on the left side in front view of the unit cover 3504 and slides into the slit on the left side of the slider. A left link member having a transmission pin that is movably inserted, and a fan-shaped gear portion that meshes with the third transmission gear and is rotatably supported by the unit base at a position on the right side of the third transmission gear in front view. A protrusion extending radially outward from the gear portion, and a protrusion protruding forward from the tip of the extension and penetrating through the through hole on the right side of the unit cover 3504 in front view and sliding into the slit on the right side of the slider. A right link member having a transmission pin movably inserted therein.

Although not shown in the figure, the underside effect unit 3500 has a left link member and a right link member that are arranged symmetrically with the center in the left-right direction sandwiched therebetween, and when the back left drive motor 3506 drives the drive gear to rotate. The drive gear and the plurality of transmission gears cause the left link member and the right link member to rotate in mutually opposite directions with their transmission pins at the same height. That is, as the left link member and the right link member rotate, the height positions of the respective transmission pins are changed, and the slider, that is, the lower back decoration 3501 is slid vertically by the transmission pins. It can be raised and lowered.

Further, although not shown, the underside effect unit 3500 is inserted from the rear side into the support boss of the slider which is inserted into the lift guide groove in the unit cover 3504, and is arranged between the support boss and the lift guide groove. An elevating bush, a transmission bush inserted from the front side with respect to the transmission pins of the left link member and the right link member inserted in the slit of the slider and arranged between the transmission pin and the slit, and an extension piece of the left link member. An arc-shaped gear retainer arranged between the drive gear and attached to the unit base 3505, and an ascending/descending position detection capable of detecting the sliding position (elevating position) of the lower back decorative body 3501 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3505. A sensor and a lower back relay board mounted on the front surface of the unit cover and relaying the connection between the lower back decoration board and the second drive board 3027 are provided.

Although not shown, the left link member of the lower back production unit 3500 is provided with a detection piece that extends outward in the radial direction on the side opposite to the gear portion with respect to the rotation axis. By detecting with the up-and-down position detection sensor, the turning position of the left link member can be detected, and thus the up-and-down position of the lower back decoration 3501 can be detected.

In the underside effect production unit 3500 of this embodiment, the underside decorative body 3501 is positioned below the window 2501 of the center accessory 2500 when the underside decorative body 3501 is located at the lower end with respect to the vertical slide end. It is located and is invisible to the player (state of retracted position) (see FIG. 110). On the other hand, when the lower back ornament 3501 is located at the upper end with respect to the vertical slide end, the lower back ornament 3501 is positioned in the upper window portion 2501 from the lower side of the window portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. It is in a state that can be visually recognized from the player side (state of appearance position) (see FIG. 160). Note that, as shown in FIG. 160, the underside decoration 3306 of the underside effect unit 3300 and the underside decorative object 3501 of the underside effect unit 3500 have a lower end and an upper end, respectively, when they are in the appearance position. Are so close that they do not touch.

[2-9. Liquid crystal display device]
Next, the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of this example will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000, and is capable of displaying a predetermined effect image according to the gaming state. As shown in FIGS. 114, 115, etc., the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes fixing pieces 1902 protruding outward from the left and right sides, and is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 via the fixing pieces 1902. It is like this.

Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adapted to be inserted from the rear side into a liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d formed on the rear side of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 protrudes from the left side in front view. After one fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the two liquid crystal fixing portions 3010e on the right side of the back box 3010 when viewed from the rear, the other fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the insertion opening formed by the lock mechanism 3040. By sliding the lock mechanism 3040 downward to close the insertion port, the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be locked and attached to the back box 3010.

In addition, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral control board box 1910 that houses a peripheral control unit 4140, a liquid crystal control unit 4150 (see FIG. 161), and the like on the rear side, as shown in FIG. 115, and a peripheral control board box 1910. And a volume 1912 extending rearward from the lower part of the. By rotating the volume 1912 in an appropriate direction, it is possible to adjust the volume output from the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5 and the speaker 821 provided in the body frame 3. Has become.

Further, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided with an inverter board box 1920 which accommodates an inverter board 1922 having an inverter for driving a cold cathode tube as a backlight, on the left side of the peripheral control board box 1910 in rear view.

[2-10. Movable performance on the game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 4 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 157 to 160. FIG. 157 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the front right middle rendering unit of the center accessory in the front unit, and FIG. 158(a) is a state in which the front right middle movable decorative body of the front right central rendering unit is in the normal position. 4B is a perspective view seen from the front slightly above, and FIG. 7B is a perspective view seen from the front slightly above with the front right middle movable decorative body at the appearance position. Also, FIG. 159 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the back horizontal production unit in the back unit, and FIG. 160 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the back upper production unit and the back lower production unit in the back unit. .. As shown in FIG. 110 and the like, in the game board 4 of this example, in a normal state, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 disposed on the rear side can be visually recognized from the player side through the window portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. It is like this.

Further, in the game board 4, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 110 and the like, the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 of the front right middle effect unit 2600 in the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 has a window portion in a front view. It is located at the right end of 2501 and is in a state in which the outer periphery of the circular fixed decorative body 2620 in the front right middle movable decoration body 2610 is surrounded by the front right middle outer periphery decoration member 2730 of the front right outside production unit 2700. In this normal state, the fixed decorative body 2620 of the back right middle movable decorative body 2610 can be seen from the player side as a whole, whereas the rotary decorative body 2630 can be seen from the player side except a part on the left side in front view. It is invisible.

Further, in a normal state, the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L of the back horizontal rendering unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, the back decoration 3306 of the back rendering unit 3300, and the back decoration of the back rendering unit 3500. The bodies 3501 are located outside the window portion 2501 in the center-view center accessory 2500, respectively, and are invisible to the player.

In the game board 4 of the present embodiment, from the normal state, according to the special lottery result that is drawn by the game balls being received in the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102, the table right middle performance unit 2600, The back side production unit 3100, the back side production unit 3300, and the back side production unit 3500 are appropriately movable so that a predetermined movable production can be performed.

Specifically, for example, in the table front middle effect unit 2600, the table first drive motor 2651 is rotationally driven to rotationally drive the annular rotational decoration body 2630 in the table right middle movable decoration body 2610 in a predetermined direction. be able to. At this time, as described above, since the rotating decorative body 2630 is in a state in which only a part of the left side in front view can be seen from the player side, when the rotating decorative body 2630 rotates in this state, the circular fixed ornament It is possible to show the player a movable effect in which the left side of the body 2620 flows upward or downward according to the rotation direction.

Further, in the front right middle rendering unit 2600, by rotating the front second drive motor 2671, the base member 2660 supporting the front right middle movable decoration body 2610 is centered around the bearing portion 2662 formed at the upper end thereof. The liquid crystal display device 1900 can be rotated, and can be rotated from a normal position, which is the rightmost position in a front view in a normal state, to an appearance position, which is located on the front center side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (see FIG. 157). ). In the state of this appearance position, as shown in FIG. 157, the front right middle movable decoration body 2610 is moved from the front right outer effect unit 2700 to the left side in the front view, and only a part of the left side in the front view is seen from the player side. The rotation decoration 2630 of the front right middle movable decoration 2610, which cannot be visually recognized, comes off from the rear side of the front right middle outer peripheral decoration member 2730, and most of them are visible to the player.

By pivotally moving the front right middle rendering unit 2600 to the appearance position, the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 moves to a position closer to the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the front middle movable decorative body 2610 from the player side. Can stand out. By rotating the rotary decoration body 2630 by driving the table first drive motor 2651 in a state where the front right middle movable decoration body 2610 is moved to the appearance position, the front right middle movable decoration body 2610 can be made more conspicuous. Therefore, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the movable decoration body 2610 on the right side of the table.

As shown in the figure, in the front right-center production unit 2600, in the appearance position, the guide piece 2664 extends to the upper right side of the front surface of the stage 2510, and the front-right middle movable ornament from the stage 2510 side. Even if the game ball bounces to the 2610 side, it can be bounced back to the stage 2510 side by the guide piece 2664.

The guide piece 2664 of the front right middle rendering unit 2600 is arranged on an extension line of the stage 2510 on the right side of the first stage 2511 in front view, and is formed by the unit base 2502 and the partition member 2520. Since it is designed to be guided by the arc-shaped groove (space), the game ball that deviates to the right from the right end side of the stage 2510 (first stage 2511) is in the groove (space) that guides the guide piece 2664. Even if it is housed and held (see FIG. 158(a)), the front right middle effect unit 2600 (front right middle movable decoration body 2610) moves from the normal position to the appearance position, thereby guiding the housed and held game ball. The piece 2664 can be pushed to the left and returned to the stage 2510 side.

The guide piece 2664 of the front right middle rendering unit 2600 makes it possible to fly the game ball accommodated and held on the left end side to the stage 2510 side by the speed of moving the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 from the normal position to the appearance position. (See FIG. 158(b)), so that it is possible to show the player a movement different from the movement of the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 within the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the movement of the game medium to the player. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the back side production unit 3100 of the game board 4, by driving the back side right slide drive motor 3152 and the back side left slide drive motor 3159 in the back side slide unit 3150, the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit. Each of the 3100L can be moved from a position invisible to the player side (retracted position) to the center side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to a position (appearing position) visible from the player side (appearing position). See FIG. 159). When the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are moved to the appearance position, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 arranged on the rear side is changed by the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L in the horizontal direction. The width is narrowed vertically, and the rotating decorative bodies 3126 arranged in three rows in the vertical direction are arranged on the left and right sides of the display screen visible from the player side. Can be strongly attracted to the back right rendering unit 3100R, the back left rendering unit 3100L, and the liquid crystal display device 1900.

In this back horizontal production unit 3100, three rotary decorations 3126 supported respectively by the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L are individually extended in the vertical direction by driving the back horizontal rotation drive motor 3123. It is possible to rotate around the core, and by rotating each of the rotating decorative bodies 3126 of the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L when they are visible from the player side, It is also possible to entertain the movable effect by rotating the rotating decorative body 3126.

Specifically, for example, when the back right rendering unit 3100R or the back left rendering unit 3100L of the back horizontal rendering unit 3100 is moved to the appearance position, the back horizontal rotation drive motor 3123 drives the rotary ornament in the retracted position. 3126 is rotated so that the surface on which the predetermined decoration is applied faces the player side, and then is moved to the appearance position, and the rotation of the rotating decoration body 3126 is changed every time it is moved to the appearance position. The stop positions can be different. As a result, each time the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are made to appear, the decoration of the rotating decorative body 3126 is different, and it is possible to entertain the player by the difference in the appearing decoration.

Alternatively, when the back right effect unit 3100R or the back left effect unit 3100L is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, it is moved to the appearance position while the rotary decorative body 3126 is rotated by each back lateral rotation drive motor 3123. Can also As a result, a plurality of rotary ornaments 3126 that roll on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 like rollers appear, so that the player's interest is strongly focused on the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L. Can be attracted.

Furthermore, after the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L are moved to the appearance position, the rotary decorative body 3126 may be rotated by each back horizontal rotation drive motor 3123. After the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 are covered by the unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L, the rotating decorative body 3126 supported by the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L is rotated, thereby playing the game. The player can be surprised, and the player can pay attention to the rotating decorative body 3126 and the like to entertain the movable effect by the rotating decorative body 3126.

Further, in the back production unit 3300 of the game board 4, by driving the back driving motor 3302, the back decoration 3306 is slid downward in an arc shape from a retreat position invisible to the player. It can be moved to the appearance position where it can be visually recognized from the person side. In the state in which the back decoration 3306 is in the appearance position, as shown in FIG. 160, the approximate center of the fist in the back decoration 3306 imitating a fist is extremely close to the player side located substantially in the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In this state, it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest.

Further, in the underside effect unit 3500 of the game board 4, by driving the underside drive motor 3506, the underside decorative body 3501 is moved from the retracted position invisible from the player side to the upper side visible from the player side. It can be moved to the appearance position. In a state in which the lower back decoration 3501 is at the appearance position, as shown in FIG. 160, the liquid crystal display device 1900 extends upward from the rear side of the stage 2510 in the center accessory 2500 at substantially the center in the horizontal direction. ..

In the game board 4 of this example, when the back production unit 3300 and the under production unit 3500 are both moved to the appearance position, as shown in FIG. 160, the lower end of the under decoration 3306 and the under decoration are shown. The upper end of the body 3501 and the upper end of the body 3501 are in a state of being close to each other, and the back decoration 3306 that imitates a fist performs a movable effect as if it strikes the bottom decoration 3501 that imitates a flame. You can do it.

Although not shown in the figure, the game board 4 includes movable production by the front right middle production unit 2600, movable production by the back horizontal production unit 3100, or movable production by the back production production unit 3300 and the under production production unit 3500. It is possible to perform a movable effect in which the above are combined, and various more various movable effects are presented to the player so that the player does not get tired of it.

[3. Various substrates]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 161 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral control boards 4010, and these two groups share various controls. The group of main boards 4000 is configured to include a main control board 4100 that controls a game operation (progress of a game) and a payout control board 4110 that controls a payout of game balls and the like. In addition, a group of peripheral control boards 4010 includes a peripheral control section 4140 that controls various effects in the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on commands from the peripheral control section 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the display of the effect image.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 161, the main control board 4100 that controls the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a that is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. , A main control I/O port 4100b as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids. A drive circuit 4100g and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing information stored in a RAM 4100e (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in RAM 4100e”) built in the main control MPU 4100a are provided. .. The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM 4100d (hereinafter also referred to as "main control built-in ROM 4100d") and a main control built-in RAM 4100e, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and for preventing fraud. The functions of are also built in.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has a first starting opening sensor 3081 for detecting the game ball received in the first starting opening 2101, and a second starting opening sensor for detecting the game ball received in the second starting opening 2102. 2125 and the general winning a prize opening 2104, the detection signal from the general winning a prize sensor 3082 which detects the game ball which is received in 2201 is input respectively via the main control I/O port 4100b, the gate sensor 2126, the general winning a prize mouth Detection signals from the sensor 3082, the count sensor 2114, and the magnetic detection sensor 3080 attached to the back unit 3000 are input via the panel relay board 3025 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I/O port 4100b. It is supposed to be.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I/O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g, so that the starting opening solenoid 2124 and the attacker 2124 via the panel relay board 3025. A drive signal is output to the solenoid 2113, the first special symbol display device 1185, the second special symbol display device 1186, and the first special symbol through the main control I/O port 4100b, the panel relay substrate 3025, and the function display substrate 1191. It outputs a drive signal to the symbol storage display 1184, the second special symbol storage display 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game state display 1183, and the round display 1190.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the first starting port sensor 3081, the second starting port sensor 2125, the gate sensor 2126, and the count sensor 2114. As the general winning opening sensor 3082, a contact type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switch is used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 and passes through the gate portion 2105 frequently, so the first starting opening sensor 3081, the second starting opening sensor 2125, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2126 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the first starting port sensor 3081, the second starting port sensor 2125, and the gate sensor 2126. In addition, when the big hit game state which is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2103 is opened and the game balls frequently enter, so that the count sensor 2114 also frequently detects the game balls. Therefore, the count sensor 2114 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, in the general winning openings 2104 and 2201 in which the game balls do not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3082 does not frequently occur. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3082.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various kinds of information regarding games (game information) and various kinds of commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or Further, the main control MPU 4100a sends various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I/O port 4100b. (The main control board 4100 and the peripheral control section 4140 are electrically connected to each other by a harness (not shown)). When the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, the main control MPU 4100a shapes these various commands and sends them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 851, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is described). With this capacitor, the main control MPU 4100a can store various kinds of information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

Further, the main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851, and outputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification when those voltages become lower than the power failure notification voltage. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I/O port 4100b and is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Discharge control board]
As shown in FIG. 161, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of gaming balls, etc. performs a payout control unit 4111 for performing various controls related to payout, a firing control by a firing solenoid 654, and a ball feeding by a ball feeding solenoid 585. A firing control unit 4120 for controlling, an error LED display 4130 for displaying the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, an error release switch 860a for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and a prize ball tank. 720, the tank rail 731, and the ball removal switch 860b for discharging the game ball in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation.

[3-2A. Dispensing control section]
As shown in FIG. 161, a payout control unit 4111 that performs various kinds of control related to payouts on the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor in which a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like are incorporated. The payout control MPU 4111a, the payout control I/O port 4111b as an I/O device, and the external watchdog timer 4111c (hereinafter, “external WDT4111c” for monitoring whether the payout control MPU 4111a is normally operating ), and a payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, and a payout control input circuit 4111e to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. , Are provided. The payout control MPU 4111a has a built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "payout control built-in ROM") and RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "payout control built-in RAM") and also for preventing fraud. Functions are also built in.

The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various kinds of information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various kinds of commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port 4111b, or the main control board. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from the 4100 is input via the payout control I/O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, or the out-of-ball switch 750 is input. The detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 may be input via the prize ball relay board 754.

A ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the base unit 741 are detected. The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the prize ball relay board 754 of the prize ball device 740, and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I/O port 4111b. .. The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 is first transmitted through the sensor substrate 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay substrate 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I/O port 4111b.

The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 that detects the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3 and the body frame opening switch 619 that detects the opening of the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are the payout control input circuit 4111e. Is input to the payout control MPU 4111a through the payout control I/O port 4111b.

In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 that detects whether or not the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full in the stored game balls is first the handle device relay board 192, and then the main side relay terminal. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the board 880 and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I/O port 4111b.

The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I/O 4120b and the prize ball relay board 754, and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with an error LED. A signal for displaying on the display unit 4130 is output to the error LED display unit 4130 via the payout control I/O port 4111b, and a command for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is issued for the payout control I/O port 4111b. It is transmitted in a serial manner to the main control board 4100 via, or the number of balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I/O port 4111b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls played by the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The error LED display unit 4130 is a segment display unit, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures and the like to indicate the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 4100 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, out of ball). Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, (Specifically, based on a detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, the payout rotor 748 is provided at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740. And the game ball are engaged with each other in the vicinity of the entrance of the payout rotating body 748 to make it difficult to rotate), and when the number "3" is displayed, it is a "counting switch error" (specifically, Indicates that there is a problem in the counting sensor 751 based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751), and when the number “5” is displayed, it means that “retry error” (specifically, The fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit value is notified, and when the number “6” is displayed, it means “full tank” (specifically, from the full tank detection sensor 550). That the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls), and when the number "7" is displayed, it means "CR not connected" ( "Electrical connection is cut off in any of the payout control board 4110 to the CR unit 6", and when the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock" (specifically Indicates that the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls).

The ball lending request signal of the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are first transmitted via the frequency display board 365, the main side relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Input to the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal board 874, and this signal is issued to the payout control I/O. The information is received by the port 4111b and input to the payout control MPU 4111a. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented gaming balls, and also outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the remaining number display 365c to the CR unit connection terminal. The signal is output to the board 874, the main-side relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input to the remaining frequency display 365c.

[3-2B. Firing controller]
As shown in FIG. 161, the firing control unit 4120, which performs firing control by the firing solenoid 654 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 585, has a firing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches relating to firing are input. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on this clock signal, and this firing A firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse are provided. The firing timing control circuit 4120c generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b so that 100 gaming balls per minute are launched toward the game area 1100, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball-sending reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the firing reference pulse is generated and output to the ball-sending solenoid drive circuit 4120e.

From the touch sensor 516 that detects whether or not the palm or the finger touches the front 506 of the rotating handle body, and the firing stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's intention. The detection signal is first input to the firing control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay substrate 192 and then the main relay terminal plate 880, and then to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit 4120a as a CR connection signal and to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. The signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512, which electrically adjusts the strength at which the game ball is shot toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the rotary handle main body front 506, is first the handle device relay board 192, and then the main relay terminal. It is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d via the plate 880.

The launch solenoid drive circuit 4120d launches a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 with launch strength corresponding to the rotary position of the front of the rotary handle body 506, based on the signal from the rotary position detection sensor 512. When the reference pulse is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e supplies a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay substrate 192 in response to the input of the ball feeding reference pulse. By the output, the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 301 of the dish unit 300, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the constant current By stopping the output of, the game ball received by the ball sending member 584 is sent to the side of the hitting ball launching device 650. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the firing solenoid 654 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. Controlled.

The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 is provided with a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 161, the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls drawing.

[3-3A. Peripheral controller]
As shown in FIG. 161, the peripheral control unit 4140 which performs the effect control in the peripheral control board 4010, the peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, the peripheral control ROM 4140b for storing various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality sound performance. The sound source IC 4140c to be performed and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c are stored.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a has a plurality of built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When receiving various commands from the main control board 4100, each decorative board of the game board 4 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I/O port to the lamp drive board 3041 or the game board. The motor mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 from the game board decoration drive board serial I/O port for outputting drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in FIG. Door side drive data for transmitting to the drive board 3045 and outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5, and provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5. Door-side drive emission data composed of a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like, and door-side drive emission data from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board to the peripheral panel Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted to the door frame base substrate 194 via the relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 or displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is serial I/O for the liquid crystal control unit. In addition to transmitting from the port to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, it also outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d to the sound source IC 4140c.

Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting original positions of various effect units provided on the game board 4 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Has been done. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 5 and the pressing detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 are the door frame base substrate. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a through the peripheral relay terminal plate 882, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on this operation signal. doing.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided in the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882. The speaker 821 is controlled so that music and sound effects according to various effects are played, and is provided on the door frame 5 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base substrate 194. The speakers 130, 222, 262 and the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 are controlled so that music and sound effects suitable for various effects are played. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1910.

In addition to the watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “WDT with built-in peripheral control”) built in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the peripheral control unit 4140 also has an external watchdog timer (not shown) (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external”). WDT”) is also provided, and the peripheral control MPU 4140a diagnoses whether or not its own system is out of control by using the peripheral control internal WDT and the peripheral control external WDT together.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by the serial input/output port. In the present embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 kilo (k). ) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting blink command, the game board side lighting blink command, the movable body drive command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. , A plurality of serial input/output ports different from the display command are used, and in the present embodiment, a bit rate of 250 kbps is set.

The first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 send a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting blinking command via the peripheral side relay terminal board 882. A lighting signal or an output signal is output to LEDs of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc. provided on the door frame 5, or based on the received blinking command on the game board side or The blinking signal is output to the LEDs of the respective decorative boards 2115, 2118, 2127, 2133, 2521, 2222, 2640, 3020, 3021, 3129, 3130 and the like provided on the game board 4.

Further, the first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 send a drive signal based on the received drive command of the movable body to the door frame 5 via the peripheral side relay terminal board 882. It outputs to the dial drive motor 414 provided in the, the drive motors 3123, 3152, 3159, 3302, 3506, etc. provided in the game board 4.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or the operation unit 400 provided in the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 is provided. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are transmitted to the peripheral relay terminal board 882 and the back box. It may be input via the first drive board 3026 or the second drive board 3027 attached to the rear surface of 3010.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and relays the first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the peripheral side relay. The body frame 3 from the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5 via the terminal board 882, or the first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. The speaker 821 is controlled so that music, sound effects, and the like suitable for various effects are played. In the present example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the game window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged on the upper side of the game window 101, and the lower portion of the main body frame 3 are provided. By transmitting an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal including a lower speaker 391 described later or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) to the bass speaker 821. , It is possible to present more realistic sound effects (sound effects).

[3-4. LCD controller]
Next, as shown in FIG. 161, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the peripheral control board 4010 stores the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, various commands, and various data. The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, the VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4150c for controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the character ROM 4150d for storing various data of the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the character ROM 4150d. A character RAM 4150e to which various stored data is transferred and copied.

The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a has a built-in parallel I/O port, serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP 4150c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to draw the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is in control. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. Further, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an in-execution signal to be described later from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b stores, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 and its control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data, which defines the order when various data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e, in time series. The non-resident area transfer data defines the order in which screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e.

The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c, and then the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. In this way, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b one by one from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c.

When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, when the VDP 4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, it outputs a running signal to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The VDP4150c adopts a line buffer method. The "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line for drawing the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the left-right direction is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is a method of outputting.

The character ROM 4150d stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, and the speed of drawing on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is affected. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is basic data that is data before expanding the sprite into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit in the liquid crystal display device 1900. For example, in the case of displaying various persons on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the data for drawing each person is called “sprite”. Accordingly, when displaying a plurality of persons on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in a position where they are arranged on the screen and a vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as “order of sprite superposition”).

The sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "character". In the case of a small sprite, one character can be used for expression, and in the case of a comparatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of six characters arranged in horizontal 2×vertical 3 can be used for expression. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, more characters can be used for expression. In this way, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The liquid crystal display device 1900 repeats main scanning for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel and main scanning in a direction intersecting with the one direction from left to right when viewed from the front. The sub-scanning is performed and the sub-scanning is performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input to the liquid crystal display device 1900, one line worth of data is sequentially processed from left to right when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 as main scanning. Output to each pixel. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and when drawing data for the next line is similarly input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As the main scan, the pixels for one line are sequentially output from left to right when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

[4. Game contents]
The game contents in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 162. FIG. 162 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the main control board. First, a functional configuration relating to game effect control on the main control board 4100 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 162 and the like. Note that the functional configuration related to the payout of gaming balls is omitted. In the main control board 4100 of this example, various game controls and effect controls are realized by executing a predetermined program stored in advance in a ROM (not shown) by the main control MPU 4100a.

When a detection signal of a game ball is input from the gate sensor 2126 to the main control board 4100, a normal random number generation means 4200 for generating a predetermined normal random number that is a lottery result for a normal symbol, and a generated normal random number are predetermined. Normal symbol hold storage means 4202 to temporarily store according to the condition of, and the normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the normal random number executed on the normal symbol hold storage means 4202, ROM of the main control board 4100 Normal symbol variation pattern selection means 4204 for selecting from a predetermined normal symbol variation pattern table stored in, and a normal symbol display control means for varying and displaying a normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 1189 based on the selected normal symbol variation pattern 4206, when the ordinary random number (ordinary lottery result) displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 1189 by the ordinary symbol display control means 4206 is "ordinary hit", the starting port solenoid 2124 is driven to move the movable piece 2106 backward (immersion). The starting opening opening and closing control means 4208, and the normal symbol storage number display control means 4210 for displaying the number of normal symbol random numbers reserved and stored in the normal symbol suspension storage means 4202 on the normal symbol storage display 1188 as the stored number are provided. There is.

The above-mentioned normal symbol reservation storage means 4202 is a normal random number generated by the detection signal of the game ball from the gate sensor 2126 as a trigger, while the normal symbol is being displayed by the normal symbol display control means 4206. ), the execution of the stored ordinary random number is suspended until the variable display of the ordinary symbol becomes possible.

Further, on the main control board 4100, a predetermined first which is the first special lottery result for the first special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the first starting opening sensor 3081 by the starting winning into the first starting opening 2101. A first special random number generating means 4212 for generating a special random number, and a first special symbol holding storage means 4214 for temporarily storing the first special random number generated in the first special random number generating means 4212 according to predetermined conditions, The first special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the first special random number stored on the first special symbol reservation storage means 4214 and executed, the predetermined special symbol variation display pattern stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 4100 First special symbol variation pattern selection means 4216 to be selected from the table, and the first special symbol display of the first special symbol display device 1185 based on the first special symbol variation pattern selected by the first special symbol variation pattern selection means 4216. First special symbol display control means 4218 to be variably displayed, and the first special symbol storage display 1184 to be displayed as the number of the first special random numbers reserved and stored in the first special symbol reservation storage means 4214 as the stored number. It is provided with a symbol memory number display control means 4220.

Further, on the main control board 4100, based on the detection signal detected by the second starting port sensor 2125 by the starting winning into the second starting port 2102, a predetermined second second which is the second special lottery result for the second special symbol. A second special random number generating means 4222 for generating a special random number, and a second special symbol holding storage means 4224 for temporarily storing the second special random number generated in the second special random number generating means 4222 in accordance with a predetermined condition, The second special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the second special random number stored on the second special symbol reservation storage means 4224 and executed, the predetermined special symbol variation display pattern stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 4100 Second special symbol variation pattern selecting means 4226 selected from the table, and the second special symbol display of the second special symbol indicator 1186 based on the second special symbol variation pattern selected by the second special symbol variation pattern selecting means 4226. The second special symbol display control means 4228 to be variably displayed, and the second special symbol storage indicator 1187 to be displayed as the number of the second special random numbers reserved and stored in the second special symbol reservation storage means 4224 as the stored number. It is provided with a symbol memory number display control means 4230.

These first special symbol reservation storage means 4214 and the second special symbol reservation storage means 4224, the first and second special symbol display control means 4218, 4228 newly and special symbols such as the first and second special symbols are variably displayed. When it is not possible to variably display, the first special random number and the second special random number triggered by the detection signals from the first starting port sensor 3081 and the second starting port sensor 2125 are each a predetermined number (for example, four each). ) Is stored, and execution of the stored first special random number and second special random number is suspended until the variable display of the special symbol becomes possible.

In the main control board 4100, the first special random number and the second special random number retained by the first special symbol reservation storage means 4214 and the second special symbol reservation storage means 4224, start prizes to the starting ports 2101 and 2102. It is provided with a priority holding digestion means 4231 that preferentially executes (digests) the second special random number rather than timing, and the priority holding digestion means 4231 relates to the second special random number, that is, the second starting port 2102. The hold of the lottery result is given priority (execution).

Further, in the main control board 4100, the first special random number (first special lottery result) and the second special random number (second) stored in the first special symbol reservation storage means 4214 and the second special symbol reservation storage means 4224. An advantageous game state generating means 4232 for generating an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous based on a special lottery result), and an opening/closing member 2107 for closing the special winning opening 2103 based on an instruction from the advantageous game state generating means 4232. It is provided with a special winning opening opening/closing control means 4234 for controlling the drive of the attacker solenoid 2113 so as to open/close in a predetermined pattern.

Further, on the main control board 4100, according to the first special random number and the second special random number (first special symbol variation pattern and second special symbol variation pattern) in which the advantageous game state is generated by the advantageous game state generation means 4232, It further comprises a fluctuation pattern table changing means 4236 for changing the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table. This fluctuation pattern table changing means 4236 is changed to, for example, a fluctuation pattern table (for example, a high-probability fluctuation pattern table) in which a fluctuation pattern in which an advantageous gaming state occurs is selected with a higher probability than a normal fluctuation pattern table ( So-called, probability change), change to a change pattern table (for example, time-shortening change pattern table) where the change time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is shorter than the normal change pattern table (so-called, shortened time), There is a higher probability that an advantageous game state occurs than usual, and the change pattern table (for example, the probability variation short time variation pattern table) in which the variation time of the special symbol is short is changed (so-called, probability variation/time reduction).

Furthermore, in the main control board 4100, a normal random number, a first special random number, a second special random number, a normal symbol variation pattern, a first symbol variation pattern, a second symbol variation pattern, and a first special symbol storage, A command generation means 4238 for generating a predetermined control command such as an effect command based on the second special symbol storage, and a command transmission means 4240 for transmitting the command generated by the command generation means 4238 to the peripheral control section 4140. It has and.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle device 500 arranged at the lower right of the door frame 5, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are changed to the game panel 1150. The game is started by being driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 arranged on the front surface of the game ball. The game ball hit to the upper part in the game area 1100 will flow down in the game area 1100 on the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle device 500, and can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. Further, in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1150 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the contact of the game balls with the obstacle nails causes the flow of the game balls. The speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed.

When the game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side of the highest part of the peripheral wall portion 2503 of the center character 2500, the plurality of obstacle nails or the inclined upper surfaces of the peripheral wall portion 2503 cause the center. It is guided to the area on the left side of the accessory 2500. Further, when the game ball hit in the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall portion 2503 of the center character 2500, the right outer periphery of the center character 2500 and the game area 1100. It enters into the guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2142 in the attacker unit 2100 through a narrow gap with the inner circumference, and is discharged from the front end left end opening of the guide passage 2142a into the game area 1100 immediately above the gate portion 2105.

Then, when the game ball flowing down the right side of the center role object 2500 in the game area 1100 is guided to the guide passage 2142a and discharged into the game area 1100, the gate sensor 2126 passes through the gate portion 2105 with an extremely high probability. Will be detected by. When the game sphere is detected by the gate sensor 2126, the normal random number generation means 4200 in the main control board 4100 generates an ordinary random number as an ordinary lottery result based on the detection signal.

Based on this normal random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is variably displayed (for example, the normal symbol display 1189 consisting of two LEDs of red and green is alternately emitted), and a predetermined time ( For example, 0.1 seconds to 1 second) after a lapse of time, a normal symbol based on a normal random number (ordinary lottery result) is stopped and displayed (one of the two LEDs of the normal symbol display device 1189 emits light). It In this example, the same variable display is also performed on the normal symbol display board 1191a provided in the second unit 2120 of the attacker unit 2100. The variation display of this normal symbol is to be performed based on the normal symbol variation pattern selected from the predetermined normal symbol variation pattern selection table in the normal symbol variation pattern selection means 4204.

Specifically, if the drawn random number is a “normal hit” random number, it is stopped and displayed with a normal pattern that suggests a hit (the normal pattern display 1189 emits green light), and the drawn random number is a “normal lost” random number. In the case of, it is designed such that a normal symbol that suggests a loss is displayed (normal symbol indicator 1189 emits red light). Then, when the normal pattern indicating the hit is stopped and displayed, the movable piece 2106 that closes the second starting port 2102 retracts for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds), and the second starting port. A game ball can be won in 2102.

In addition, in this example, since the variation time of the ordinary symbol is extremely short compared with the conventional pachinko machine, the game ball that passes through the gate portion 2105 and selects “ordinary winning” is the second starting opening. When the movable piece 2106 that closes the 2102 is reached or not, the movable piece 2106 can be retracted by the starting opening solenoid 2124 to be received in the second starting opening 2102. When a lottery is performed, it is accepted with a very high probability into the second starting opening 2102.

Then, when the game ball is passed to the second starting opening 2102 by passing through the gate portion 2104 and selecting "normal win", it is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2125, and based on the detection signal of the second starting opening sensor 2125. In the main control board 4100, a predetermined payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110, and the payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 in accordance with the payout command to make one game ball. , Are to be paid out to the upper plate 301. That is, in this example, when the game ball performs a driving operation (so-called right-handed driving) that passes through the right side of the center accessory 2500, it passes through the gate portion 2104 with an extremely high probability, and the gate portion 2105. If a game ball that has passed through the "normal win" is drawn, it can be accepted into the second starting opening 2102 with an extremely high probability, so even a beginner or a player unfamiliar with the game can easily enter the second starting opening 2102. It is possible to entertain the player.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the player can easily win the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 by hitting the right side. When the number of game balls to be paid out increases, the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed becomes heavy, and there is a risk that the pachinko machine 1 will be hesitant to be installed. However, in the pachinko machine 1, since the number of game balls to be paid out by winning the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 is one, by the lottery of the special lottery result by the winning to the second starting opening 2102. It is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side while increasing the interest of the player, and to install the pachinko machine 1 without any problem.

Further, in this example, while the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 in a varying manner, when passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2126, the changing regular symbol is stopped and is normally generated/extracted first. Until the result of the random number is fixed, the normal random number (including the normal symbol variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2126 is temporarily stored in the normal symbol storage holding means 4202, and its display is displayed. It is designed to be held, and the number of stored ordinary random numbers (also referred to as a held number) is displayed on the ordinary symbol storage display 1188. This normal symbol memory display 1188 is made up of four LEDs, and the number of LEDs to be lit indicates the number of memories. In this example, up to four are stored and displayed. ing. It should be noted that when the number of stored memory exceeds four, the ordinary random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2126 is discarded.

On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2104 and the “ordinary loss” is drawn, the movable piece 2106 that is arranged immediately below the gate portion 2105 and closes the second starting opening 2102 opens the second starting opening 2102. Since it remains in the closed state, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2105 comes into contact with the upper surface of the movable piece 2106, and rolls leftward on the left shelf portion 2122g from the left outlet 2122f. From the left end of the portion 2122g will be discharged into the game area 1100 below the first winning opening 2101 and the general winning opening 2104 and above the big winning opening 2103.

Also, the game balls that have been driven into the game area 1100 and flowed down on the left side of the center role object 2500 are brought to the center side of the game area 1100 below the center role object 2500 by the shelves 2202 of the front side unit 2200. It has become. When the game balls enter the general winning openings 2104 and 2201 arranged below the center accessory 2500 and are detected by the general winning opening sensor 3082, the main control board 4100 controls the payout based on the detection signal. A predetermined payout command is transmitted to the board 4110, and the payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 according to the payout command so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are It is designed to be dispensed to the plate 301.

In addition, when the game ball hit into the game area 1100 does not win any of the general winning openings 2104, 2201, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, and the special winning opening 2103, the game is played. It is provided at the lower end of the center of the area 1100 in the left-right direction, and is discharged from the outlet 1151 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. In addition, regardless of which of the general winning openings 2104, 2201, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, and the special winning opening 2103, the winning game balls are returned to the game area 1100. It is designed to be discharged to the lower rear side of the game board 4 without being lost.

By the way, when the game ball flowing down the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp entrance 2504 opening on the left side surface of the center character 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2510 of the center character 2500. More specifically, the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2504 is supplied from the warp exit 2505 to the left end of the first stage 2511 in the stage 2510, and mainly falls to the lowest position after rolling the first stage 2511 in the left-right direction. Is emitted from the front. Then, the game ball released forward from the first stage 2511 is supplied to the second stage 2512 arranged on the front side and the lower side of the first stage 2511, and is the most after rolling the second stage 2512 in the left-right direction. From the lowered position, the return flow is discharged forward into the game area 1100 above the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100.

When the game ball rolling on this stage 2510 enters the chance entrance 2513 opened to the rear of the second stage 2512 in the center in the left-right direction, the chance exit 2514 opened immediately above the first starting opening 2101 enters the game area 1100. It is released and is highly likely to be accepted into the first starting port 2101. Then, when the game ball is received by the first starting port 2101 and detected by the first starting port sensor 3081, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls from the prize ball device 740 via the main control board 4100 and the like. Are to be dispensed to the upper plate 301.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when a player wants to win a game ball to the first starting port 2101, a driving operation (so-called left hitting) is performed so that the game ball flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500. In order to win the game ball to the second starting opening 2102, it is sufficient to perform a driving operation (so-called right hitting) such that the game ball flows down the right side of the center accessory 2500. The operation of driving the game ball can be selected according to the interest or mood, and the player's thoughts can be reflected to entertain the player.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the game ball recirculated and released from the stage 2510 into the game area 1100 flows into the lower right side of the first starting opening 2101 without being accepted by the first starting opening 2101. , There is a possibility of being accepted into the special winning opening 2103. On the other hand, when the game ball recirculated and released from the stage 2510 into the game area 1100 flows into the lower left side of the first starting opening 2101 without being accepted by the first starting opening 2101, the general winning opening of the front side unit 2200. 2201 is likely to be accepted.

On the main control board 4100 of the pachinko machine 1 of this example, game balls are won in the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102 and detected by the first starting opening sensor 3081 and the second starting opening sensor 2125. In the first starting port 2101, the first special random number generating means 4212 generates and extracts the predetermined first special random number, and in the second starting port 2102, the second special random number generating means 4222 generates the predetermined second special random number. -Each extraction is performed. Then, based on the extracted special random number, after the variable display of the special symbols displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display device 1185 or the second special symbol display device 1186 of the function display unit 1180 is started, it is extracted. The special symbol corresponding to the special random number is stopped and displayed as the special lottery result.

On the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode suggesting a "big hit", the opening/closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100 opens/closes in a predetermined pattern. A special advantageous game state (for example, a big hit game) occurs, and by winning a game ball into the special winning opening 2103 during that period, more game balls can be obtained. When one game ball wins the special winning opening 2103, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball device 740 to the upper plate 301.

In addition, also in these first starting port 2101, and the second starting port 2102, similarly to the variable display of the normal symbol due to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2105, the first special symbol display device 1185 and the second special symbol display. When the special symbol is variable displayed in the device 1186, or when the special symbol such as during a big hit game as a special advantageous gaming state cannot be variably displayed, the game ball wins the starting openings 2101 and 2102 and the first starting opening sensor 3081, when detected by the second starting port sensor 2125, until the variable display of the special symbol becomes possible, it is extracted based on the detection signals from the first starting port sensor 3081 and the second starting port sensor 2125. The first special random number and the second special random number are stored in the first special symbol holding storage unit 4214 and the second special symbol holding storage unit 4224 to hold the display, and the stored special random number is stored. The number is designed to be displayed on the first special symbol storage display 1184 and the second special symbol storage display 1187.

Each of the first special symbol memory display device 1184 and the second special symbol memory display device 1187 is composed of two LEDs, and the number of memories is suggested by the combination of the light emitting states of the LEDs which are turned off, turned on, and blinked. In this example, up to four of each are stored and displayed. It should be noted that if the number of memories exceeds four, the extracted special random number is discarded. Further, by the priority holding digestion means 4231, the second special random number stored (held) in the second special symbol holding storage means 4224 has priority over the first special random number stored in the first special symbol holding storage means 4214. It is designed to be executed (digested). In other words, the holding of the lottery results related to the second starting opening 2102 and the third starting opening 2415 is executed (digested) with priority over the holding of the lottery results related to the first starting opening 2101.

In the main control board 4100, the first special random number of the first special random number and the second special random number extracted based on the detection of the first starting port sensor 3081 and the second starting port sensor 2125, the first special symbol variation pattern selection By collating with a predetermined random number determination table (also referred to as a special symbol variation pattern table) that is determined in advance by the means 4216 or the second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226, the special random number is “miss” or “big hit”. In addition to determining which is the "big hit", it is also determined whether the "big hit" is any of "4R big hit", "8R big hit", and "16R big hit". In addition, "random probability short-time hit", "probable time-varying hit", "time-varying hit", "probability-changing time short hit", etc. are also determined by the random number determination table.

When the extracted first special random number or second special random number is “big hit”, the main control board 4100 opens the opening/closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100 by the advantageous game state generation means 4232, and then the predetermined number. Opening/closing pattern (1) that opens/closes the opening/closing member 2107 when a certain time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are won in the special winning opening 2103. The opening/closing pattern of times is referred to as 1 round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). If "4R jackpot" is 4 rounds, if "8R jackpot" is 8 rounds, "16R jackpot" In that case, 16 rounds are repeated, and an advantageous game state advantageous to the player is generated. After the predetermined number of rounds, for the “big hit”, the random number determination table is exchanged with a high-probability time saving table or the like by the variation pattern table changing means 4236 according to the extracted special random number.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, according to the first special random number and the second special random number extracted by the start winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101, and the second starting opening 2102 (the special lottery result) In addition to the variable display of the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180, the liquid crystal display device 1900 also responds to a special random number (special lottery result). A performance image is displayed. Specifically, in the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like, the variable display of each symbol row is started in a state where a series of symbol rows including a plurality of different symbols are displayed in a plurality of rows (for example, three rows), and then sequentially. When the symbols are stopped and displayed, and finally all the symbol rows are stopped and displayed, the player is informed of the determination result of the special random number extracted by the combination of the symbols that are stopped and displayed. In other words, according to the special lottery result by the start winning, the effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result is displayed after the plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed. Since the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are larger and easier to see than the special symbols on the first and second special symbol display devices 1185 and 1186, the player is generally displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Attention will be paid to the design.

As one of the effect images in which the plurality of symbol strings are variably displayed, the "reach effect image" in which the combination of symbols stopped and displayed with one variable symbol string being displayed so as to satisfy the specific condition (reach) , And the special lottery results for which this “reach effect image” is displayed include “per reach” and “reach lost”. Further, there is also a "reach development effect image" which is displayed so as to be connected to the "reach effect image", and after the reach display, the remaining variable strings which are variably displayed are highlighted. That is, the reach effect image and the reach development effect image are images used for performing the reach effect (winning effect) to imply that the jackpot may be won, and as a result of these reach effects, According to the stop mode displayed by the variable stop of the symbol sequence, it is recognizable from the player whether it is a big hit or a loss. Further, the liquid crystal display device 1900 can display not only the effect display related to the start winning, but also the “big hit game effect image” displayed during the “big hit” game.

The variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 is directly controlled by the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 162). The variable display of symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control substrate 4150 based on the command related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control substrate 4100 to the peripheral control unit 4140. Has become. With this, since the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like control the variable display of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1900, which is particularly noticeable to the player, a certain one of the lottery results transmitted from the main control board 4100. It is possible to prepare a plurality of variation patterns of symbols for one command in advance and increase the variation patterns of symbols in the liquid crystal display device 1900. Also, the "big hit game effect image" and the like displayed during the "big hit" game are controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like, and effect images of various patterns are prepared in advance. As a result, it is possible to increase the display pattern of the effect image to be displayed without increasing the load of the arithmetic processing in the main control board 4100, and to make the pachinko machine 1 more entertaining to the player and not getting bored. Has become.

Further, in the peripheral control unit 4140, in addition to the control of the effect image, the drive motors 3123, 3152, 3159, 3302, 3506, etc. provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are also based on the command related to the lottery result. The LEDs are mounted on the respective decorative boards 2115, 2118, 2127, 2133, 2521, 22522, 2640, 3020, 3021, 3129, 3130, etc. provided on the game board 4 while appropriately operating. , It is possible to entertain the player with movable production and luminous production.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the image effect by the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 (object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212) in the front unit 2000 are used. Combined effect (collaboration effect) using the liquid crystal display device 1900, and combined effect using the effect units 2550, 2600, 2700, 3100, 3300, 3500 provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more entertaining and entertaining the player, and is hard to get tired of.

[4-1. Performance example]
Next, an example of an effect (an example of collaboration effect) by the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the back side effect unit 3100 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 163 to 165. FIG. 163(a) is an explanatory view showing in a simplified manner a normal state facing the window portion of the center accessory, and FIG. 163(b) shows the back right effect unit and the back left effect unit while rotating the rotary ornament. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect in which the display screen of the liquid crystal display means is divided into three, and (c) is an explanatory view showing a state where the rotary ornament is stopped following (b). Also, FIG. 164 is an explanatory view showing an example of production in which the display screen of the liquid crystal display means is divided into six parts with respect to the appearance of the back right production unit and the back left production unit, unlike FIG. Further, FIG. 165 is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect in which the rotational position of the rotary ornament is made to appear differently before the back right effect unit and the back left effect unit appear.

First, in a normal state, the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L of the back horizontal rendering unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 are located at the retracted positions away from each other, and in this state, The right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L are located on the left and right outside of the window portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 in a front view. Therefore, the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L of the back horizontal rendering unit 3100 are invisible from the player side due to the center accessory 2500 and the game panel 1150, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 through the window 2501. Only the display screen of is mainly visible from the player side (see FIG. 163(a)).

In this state, when the game ball hit into the game area 1100 is received in the first starting opening 2101 or the second starting opening 2102 and the predetermined special lottery result is drawn, the back right performance unit 3100R and the back left Three back and forth rotation drive motors 3123 of the rotary decoration units 3120 provided in each of the effect units 3100L are driven to rotate the three rotary decorations 3126 arranged in the vertical direction around the axis extending in the vertical direction. It should be noted that the rotation speed at this time is a speed at which it is difficult to recognize the decoration provided on the outer peripheral surface of the rotary decoration body 3126.

The back side right slide drive motor 3152 and the back side left slide drive motor 3159 of the back side slide unit 3150 are rotated in a state in which the three rotary decorations 3126 provided in the back right direction unit 3100R and the back left direction unit 3100L are rotated. Are driven, and the back right effect unit 3100R is slid leftward in the front view, and the back left effect unit 3100L is slid rightward in the front view.

On the other hand, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display screen is divided into three parts in the vertical direction so as to correspond to the rotating decorative bodies 3126 arranged in three rows in the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L, respectively. Display different images.

Then, when the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are slid in the direction of approaching each other from the retracted position, from the left and right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in which three different images are displayed above and below, The rotating ornamental body 3126 appears, and the player's interest can be attracted to the rotating ornamental object 3126 and the respective effect images divided into three.

The back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L are slid to the appearance positions that are closest to each other in a state in which the rotary decorations 3126 are rotated (see FIG. 163(a)). In the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L, the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L may be slid while being swung left and right before reaching the appearance position. It is possible to entertain the player by giving a sense of urgency to.

Then, when the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L reach the appearance position, the rotating ornamental body 3126 is stopped. When the rotation of each rotary decoration 3126 is stopped, decorations corresponding to the special lottery result selected by the lottery are applied to the decorations such as the four patterns and patterns provided on the outer periphery of the rotary decoration 3126. It is stopped so that the raised surface faces the player side (see FIG. 163(c)). Thereby, the combination of the decorations shown by the plurality (six in this case) of the rotating decorations 3126 is used to suggest the special lottery result of the lottery to the player, thereby increasing the player's expectation for the game. You can do it.

It should be noted that, in this effect, there are a pattern in which a plurality of rotating decorative ornaments 3126 are stopped all at once and a pattern in which they are sequentially stopped in accordance with the result of the special lottery to be drawn. Further, during this presentation, the LED of the rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3129 is adapted to emit light appropriately.

In addition, as an effect using the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the back side effect unit 3100, in the effect as shown in FIG. 164, an effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed on each rotary decoration 3126. It is also possible to perform an effect of dividing into six parts so that they can be dealt with separately. In this effect, the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are slid to the appearance position in a state where each of the rotary decorations 3126 is rotated, and the display screen is divided into six corresponding to each of the rotary decorations 3126. To display different images (see FIG. 164(a)).

Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed after the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L have reached the appearance positions, the plurality of rotating decorative ornaments 3126 are sequentially stopped from rotating (see FIG. 164(b)). ). The rotation decoration 3126 for stopping the rotation is such that when the rotation of all the rotation decorations 3126 is stopped, the combination of the respective decorations facing the player becomes a combination corresponding to the special lottery result selected by lottery. , The respective rotating ornaments 3126 are sequentially stopped.

After that, when the rotation of all the rotating decorations 3126 is stopped, the combination of the decorations that stop in the rotating decorations 3126 and face the player suggests the result of the special lottery drawn to the player, It is possible to increase the expectation for the game (see FIG. 164(c)).

It should be noted that, in this effect, with the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L as the appearance positions, all the rotating decorations 3126 are rotated, so that light circulates around the six effect images. There is a pattern in which the LEDs of the rotary decorative body decoration substrate 3129 provided in the rotary decorative body unit 3120 sequentially emit light. There is also a pattern in which the light emitting decoration of the rotating decoration body 3126 for stopping the rotation is made to blink, or the LED of the back horizontal decoration substrate 3130 arranged beside the rotating decoration body 3126 is made to emit light. Further, there is also a pattern in which the rotary decoration 3126 is light-emitted and decorated with a color corresponding to the color of the image divided into six and displayed respectively.

Further, as an effect using the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the back side effect unit 3100, a normal state in which the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are in the retracted position (see FIG. 165(a)), That is, in a state in which the rotating decorative body 3126 is not visible from the player side, the rotating decorative body 3126 is rotated, and the surface with the specific decoration according to the special lottery result of the lottery faces the player side. To stop the rotation. Then, in that state, the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are slid to the appearance positions, respectively, and the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L appear and become visible from the player side. The decoration of the rotating ornament 3126 (see FIGS. 165(b1) and (b2)) allows the player to suggest the result of the special lottery, and raises the player's expectation for the game.

As a result, each time the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L (a plurality of rotating decorations 3126) appear, the decoration of the rotating decoration 3126 seen from the player side becomes different (FIG. 165(b1)). , (B2)), it is possible to excite the player depending on the decoration of the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L, which makes the player more entertaining and less entertaining. Can be suppressed.

[5. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described. FIG. 166(a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 166(a), the main control board 4100 according to the present embodiment first stores various registers and RAM as the processing of step S1 on condition that the RAM clear switch 4100c is operated. Initializes the stored data. The RAM clear switch 4100c is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 3 is opened. In addition, the RAM clear switch 4100c outputs a clear signal to the main control board 4100 in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the power is turned on, and the main control MPU 4100a receives the clear signal when the power is turned on. If it is determined that the data is stored, the initialization process (step S1) is executed to initialize the data stored in various registers and the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a.

Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process is executed to save information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. If the RAM clear switch 4100c is not operated when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). Then, a restoration process for restoring the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the RAM clear switch 4100c is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the pachinko machine 1 is set to the initial state by executing the initialization process without executing the recovery process.

Next, as the process of step S2, the random number, which is the number to be updated within the predetermined numerical range, is updated. That is, in the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment, a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) provided for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, the special symbol The variable random number used in the lottery process for the predetermined time (variation time) required for the variable display control of the variable display, the reach in the variable display of the decorative symbol executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. (The left decorative design and the right decorative design are stopped and displayed in the same design, and the middle decorative design is not yet stopped, or the left, middle and right decorative designs are all displayed in sync so that they are the same design. Reach random number used for lottery processing whether or not to do, a symbol random number used for lottery processing to determine the type of big hit when it is determined to be a big hit based on the special random number (first A random number counter for holding random numbers such as a design random number, a second design random number), a random number (ordinary random number) used for a lottery process depending on the winning of the movement trigger of the movable piece 2105, and the like is provided.

In this example, the same reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even if the first winning opening 2101 is the starting winning prize, the second winning opening 2102 is the starting winning prize. Even in the case, the reach random number is configured to be acquired from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the reach production execution rate can be changed by acquiring the reach random number from a counter that has a different range of random numbers. You may make it different, and the first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol as a reach determination table to be compared with the obtained reach random number, and the second special symbol, which is different from the first reach determination table. By providing the second reach determination table in which the determination value is set, the execution ratio of the reach effect may be different.

In the processing of this step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only random numbers (fluctuating random numbers) among these random numbers that are not related to winning or losing are updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this manner, basically only the process of step S2 is repeatedly performed. However, in this embodiment, for example, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 ms.

FIG. 166(b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100.

As shown in FIG. 166(b), in this interrupt control, first, a register saving process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the processing of step S12, detection signals from various switches such as the gate sensor 2126, the first starting opening sensor 3081, the second starting opening sensor 2125, the count sensor 2114, the general winning opening sensor 3082, etc. Is entered. Then, as a process of step S13, a random number updating process for updating the value of the random number counter for generating the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the above-described random numbers, the random numbers (special random numbers, ordinary random numbers) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbols and the ordinary symbols is stopped are updated and the random number counter Counter operation is performed.

Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, as the process of step S14, a special symbol process process including a lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. To execute. Although this special symbol process processing will be described later, here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, the first special symbol process flag, which indicates the progress of the game stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a). Based on the two special symbol process flag), the corresponding process will be selectively executed.

Then, next, the main control MPU 4100a of the same main control board 4100 executes the normal symbol process process including the lottery process for winning or losing the operation trigger of the movable piece 2106 as the process of step S15. Even in this normal symbol process process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, the driving frequency of the movable piece 2106 is higher during the period until the big hit again after the end of the big hit game state (excluding a part of the 4R big hit game state). The lottery process is configured to be performed as described above (so-called time saving state). In this embodiment, after the jackpot gaming state is over, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is increased until it becomes a jackpot again, and the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbol is shortened, and the ordinary symbol is selected by lottery. When the result is a win, such a shortened state is realized by extending the opening time of the movable piece 2106.

Further, when the special symbol process process (step S14) and the normal symbol process process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 then performs the special symbol process process as the process of step S16. Then, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4010 or the like is performed. Next, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting the command similarly set in the predetermined area of the RAM in the normal symbol process process to the peripheral control board 4010 or the like is performed.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 next performs an information output process for outputting data such as hit information (15R big hit, 10R big hit) supplied to the hole management computer as the processing of step S18. ..

Then, next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 detects the first starting opening sensor 3081, the second starting opening sensor 2125, the count sensor 2114, the general winning opening sensor 3082, etc. as the processing of step S19. When the signals are in the ON state, the payout control command is output to the payout control board 4110 so that the prize balls according to the signals are paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU 4111a mounted on the payout control board 4110 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4111d to the payout motor 744 and pays out a prize ball to the player.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 next executes a storage process of checking the increase/decrease in the number of stored memories as the process of step S20. Next, as the process of step S21, a test terminal process that is a process of outputting a test signal for allowing the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. Then, after that, the drive control of the actuator that always operates is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and the control is ended when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24). Becomes

By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol process process (step S14).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 167, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first uses the first starting opening sensor 3081. On condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the first starting port 2101) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter and is stored in the RAM first. The first starting opening passage processing such as storing in one special symbol reserved storage area is executed (step S32). In addition, on condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2125 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2102) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the above random number. A second starting opening passing process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM is executed (step S34).

Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is controlled (step S35), and if the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit game state is controlled. The big hit control process (step S39) is executed. In the jackpot control process, the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is “4R latent probability variation jackpot (specific 1)”, “4R probability variation jackpot” (Specific 2)", "4R normal big hit (non-specific)" when it becomes a mode to suggest, 4R big hit control the big winning opening 2103 to the open state according to the game state, "8R probability variation big hit (specific 4)” is suggested, the above-mentioned special winning opening 2103 is controlled to an open state in accordance with the 8R jackpot gaming state, and “16R sudden probability jackpot (specification 3)”, “16R probability variation jackpot (specification 5) )” is suggested, a process of controlling the special winning opening 2103 to be in an open state is executed according to the 16R big hit game state of short-time opening or long-time opening.

If the jackpot execution flag is not set, on the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of the second special random number stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is "0". (Step S36), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S37), and the second special symbol reserved storage area is stored. On condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S36), the second special symbol including the lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. Process processing is executed (step S38). In this way, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not "0", the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the above-mentioned first starting opening passage processing (step S32).

Now, in the process of step S31, if it is determined that the first starting opening sensor 3081 is in the ON state and the game ball enters the first starting opening 2101, as shown in FIG. 168. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first obtains the counter value of the first special reserved number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as the process of step S41. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved first special symbols is "4" which is the maximum value.

In the processing of this step S41, if it is determined that the number of holding of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps to newly hold the variable display control of the first special symbol, The processing of S42 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S42, the first special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Then, as the process of step S43, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as a process of step S44, the random numbers thus obtained are stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special reserved number counter. To store.

However, in the processing of step S41, when it is determined that the number of holding of the first special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S42 to S44, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second starting opening passage processing (step S34).

Now, in the process of step S33, if it is determined that the second starting opening sensor 2125 is in the on state and the game ball enters the second starting opening 2102, as shown in FIG. 169. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first acquires the counter value of the second special pending number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as the process of step S51. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved second special symbols is "4" which is the maximum value.

In the processing of this step S51, if it is determined that the number of holding of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, in order to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol to the holding state, the following steps The processing of S52 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S52, the second special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S53, the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as a process of step S54, each random number thus obtained is stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as a second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special reserved number counter. To store.

However, in the process of step S51, when it is determined that the number of holding the second special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

170 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process process (step S38). The first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process are the same program module, and a random number used for determination. Since the tables are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, depending on the first special symbol process flag described above, one of the following five process processes will be selectively executed.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU4100a is read, and based on the read first special random number, the first special random number selection process or the like for the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed. Pattern normal processing (step S80)
2. Based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, the determination process of the mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, etc. is performed. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81). )
3. A lottery process for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1185 based on the variable random number and the variation mode of the effect display executed corresponding to the special symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1900. First fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82)
4. First special symbol variation process to wait until the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 is stopped (step S83)
5. As the mode at the time of fluctuation control stop of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the fluctuation control stop of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 1185. First special symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S84)

The first special symbol process flag is operated so as to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 166).

FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 171, the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100, first, step S101. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state based on the counter value by the first special suspended number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state, then as the process of step S102, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) is read from the same RAM. .. Then, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserve number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reserve storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is stored in each storage area. The random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped is shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reserved storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in accordance with the occurrence of a start winning from the first (first) area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n+1)th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N=2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (the hold that occurred first). become.

Then, after that, as a process of step S105, a big hit determination process, which is a lottery process for winning the big hit, is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Then, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) (step S106), this process ends.

FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S105).

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, when the current game state is a high probability state (high probability time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S111), at the time of high probability shown in FIG. 206(A). Select the big hit determination table (step S112), if the current game state is a low probability state (step S111), select the big hit determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 206 (A) (step S113), select The big hit determination table and the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process are compared (step S114).

The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 173(A) is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and when the gaming state is at a low probability (normal state (low probability non-time saving state) and time saving state (low probability time saving state)) The low-probability big-hit determination table used at the time of, and the high-probability big-hit determination table used when the game state is high-probability time (high-probability non-time saving state, high-probability time saving state). Then, in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability, the six types of first special random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and the 2393 types of first special random numbers indicate the above-mentioned deviance determination. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the values. In the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number, it is compared with the first special random number. Similarly to the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability that is referred to, 6 types of second special random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination values indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 2393 types of the second special random numbers are out of the above range. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that.

Further, in the high probability big hit determination table, 60 kinds of first special random numbers including the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the low probability big hit determination table match the big hit determination value, The above-mentioned first special random numbers are associated with each other so that the 2339 kinds of first special random numbers coincide with the deviation determination values. As described above, in this embodiment, in the high-probability state (high-probability time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state), when the big-hit judgment value indicating that the jackpot is won is low probability (normal state (low-probability non-time-saving state) ) And the time saving state (low probability time saving state)). Incidentally, in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S39 of the special symbol process processing, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number, it is compared with the first special random number. Similar to the high probability big hit determination table referred to for this, 60 kinds of second special random numbers including the same second special random number as the second special random number set in the low probability big hit determination table The second special random numbers are associated with each other so that they match the jackpot determination value indicating that they have won, and the 2339 types of second special random numbers match the deviation determination values that indicate that they are the above deviations.

When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that it is a big hit as a result of the comparison between the selected big hit determination table and the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S115). ), sets the big hit flag indicating that the variation is a big hit and ends the process (step S116), and selects the big hit determination table and the first special symbol normal process first special read in step S102. When the result of comparison with the random number indicates that the reach is out of alignment, the reach determination table shown in FIG. 173(B) is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S117).

The reach determination table shown in FIG. 173(B) is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and is used when the gaming state is a certain time variation (high probability state (high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state)). A reach determination table for time and a reach determination table for normal time used when the gaming state is normal (normal state) are provided. Then, in the reach determination table at the time of probability change, the reach random numbers do not match the reach determination values indicating that all 239 types of reach random numbers reach, and the reach random numbers are set to match the reach determination values indicating not to reach. Associated with each. As described above, in the case of probability change (high probability state), if it is determined that the reach is out, the reach is not determined to be out. Therefore, the reach flag described below is not set, and the reach effect is executed. There is no. Therefore, when the reach is formed at the time of probability change and the reach effect is executed, it can be recognized that a big hit will be given at that time, and the reach effect can be enjoyed with peace of mind.

Further, in the normal reach determination table, the reach random numbers are matched so that 7 types of reach random numbers reach with the reach determination value and 232 types reach reach with the reach determination value indicating that the reach does not reach. Are associated with each other. As described above, in the normal time (normal state), unlike the probability change time (high probability state), the reach determination value indicating that the reach is performed is provided. Therefore, even if the reach is formed in the normal time and the reach effect is executed, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the jackpot is a big hit until all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S117). Is set to reach, and the process ends (step S119).

FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 174, the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100, first, The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S105) is determined. The determination of the lottery processing result is performed by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S121).

The main control MPU4100a, if the big hit flag is set in step S121, by comparing the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 173(C). (Step S122), the type of big hit is determined, and the mode at the time of fluctuation control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of big hit (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S123).

As shown in FIG. 173(C), in the symbol determination table, each determination result (specific 1 4R latent probability variation big hit, specific 2 4R probability variation big hit, specific 3 16R sudden probability variation big hit, specific 4 8R probability variation big hit, The specific 5R 16R probability big hit, non-specific 4R normal big hit) is stored in the form of being associated with a symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, the jackpot type is determined by identifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the determination probability of the jackpot type determined based on the first symbol random number and the determination probability of the jackpot type determined based on the second symbol random number are set to be different. ing.

In particular,
1.4R big hit game state (the opening and closing pattern for opening and closing the opening and closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100 is repeated 4 times (4 rounds)), and after the 4R big hit game state ends, the high probability non-time saving until the big hit occurs again. In the liquid crystal display device 1900, it is difficult to determine whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1900 is in a high probability state. After the jackpot game state is over, until it becomes a jackpot again, it is controlled to the above high-probability time-saving state. (Repeat) is controlled in a manner in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and after the 16R big hit game state is finished, it is controlled to the high-probability time-saving state until it becomes a big hit again. (The opening/closing pattern for opening/closing the opening/closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100 is repeated 8 times (8 rounds)), and the high probability time saving state is controlled until the big hit is reached again after the 8R big hit game state is ended. 8R probability variation big hit 5.16R jackpot gaming state, control to the high probability time saving state until the big hit again after the 16R jackpot gaming state ends, control to the specific 5 16R probability variation big hit 6.4R jackpot gaming state, After the 4R big hit game state is finished, it is controlled to the low probability non-time saving state (normal state), and it is difficult to determine whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the high probability state. 4R regular jackpot, 6 kinds of jackpots, and any one jackpot.

In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. Then, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the determination value is set to be different as compared with the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, and the determination ratio of each jackpot is made different. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 173(C), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, the specific 1 4R latent probability variation big hit, the specific 2 4R probability variation big hit, the specific 3 16R sudden probability variation big hit, Specified 4R 8R probability variation big hit, whereas the determination value distribution is set for non-specific 4R normal big hit, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, 4R latent probability variation big hit of the specification 1, specified The determination value distribution is set for the 5R 16R probability big hit and the unspecified 4R normal big hit.

In this example, the opening time of the special winning opening 2103 per round in the big hit game state with the specific 1, 2, 4 to 6 and the non-specific and the specific 3 (the opening/closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100 is controlled to be opened). Different times). Specifically, in the case of specific 1, 2, 4 to 6 and non-specific, the opening time of the special winning opening 2103 per round is controlled to a long open state of 30 seconds. In the case of the 16R sudden variation jackpot of the specific 3, the opening time of the special winning opening 2103 per round is controlled to a short opening state which is 0.05 seconds which is extremely shorter than the long opening state. In this way, in the case of the 16R sudden sudden change big hit of the specific 3, since the opening time of the special winning opening 2103 per round is too short, the opening control of the opening/closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100 is recognized. However, it is difficult to win the game ball into the special winning opening 2103. That is, during the control of the short open state in the big hit game state, the game balls hardly win the big winning opening 2103, and unlike the control during the long open state, a lot of game balls are expected to be obtained. I can't.

Further, when the type of big hit is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of big hit is determined as the mode at the time of stopping the first special symbol. Specifically, when it is determined to be a specific 1R 4R latent probability jackpot, it is determined to be a 4R latent probability variation jackpot design of the first special symbol, and when it is determined to be a particular 2R 4R probability variation jackpot, the first special symbol 4R Determined to the probability variation jackpot design, 16R sudden probability variation jackpot of the specific 3 If determined to the 16R sudden probability variation jackpot design of the special symbol, if the 8R probability variation jackpot of the specific 4 is determined to the first special symbol The 8R probability variation big hit symbol is decided, and when the non-specific 4R normal big hit is decided, the 4R normal big hit symbol of the first special symbol is decided. On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S121, the deviation symbol is determined as the mode when the variation of the first special symbol is stopped (step S124).

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, as a process of step S125, these lottery results (type of jackpot, out-of-reach, out-of-order instruction (a mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the instruction may be given)) to the peripheral control board 4010. Then, after that, as the process of step S126, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82), this process ends. The peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command.

Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4140a identifies the 4R probability variable jackpot of the specific 2 out of the jackpots from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped. In the case of 4R probability variation big hit design (combination of the same odd decorative pattern of "1", "3", "5", "7") decided, 8R probability variation big hit of specific 4 out of the big hits In the case of 8R certainty variation jackpot design (combination of the same odd decorative symbols of "1", "3", "5", "7". 4R certainty variation jackpot design is common), it is decided to 16R certainty variation jackpot of specific 5 If you specify the 16R probability variation jackpot design (combination of the same odd decorative symbols "1", "3", "5", "7". 4R probability variation jackpot design and 8R probability variation jackpot design common) Then, when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the liquid crystal display device 1900. In this way, when the combination of the same number of the same decorative symbols of "1", "3", "5", and "7" as the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 has stopped fluctuating, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped. It is impossible to discriminate any of the specific 2 4R probability variation big hit, the specific 4 8R probability variation big hit, and the specific 5 16R probability variation big hit, but it is high after the completion of the 4R jackpot gaming state, the 8R jackpot gaming state or the 16R jackpot gaming state. It is possible to discriminate between controlling to the stochastic state. Then, until the effect result in the 4R big hit game state is derived, it is impossible to determine whether or not to continuously control the 8R big hit game state or the 16R big hit game state after the end of the 4R big hit game state.

Further, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a specifies the 4R latent probability variation big hit of the specific 1 among the big hits from the received judgment result notification command as the mode (stopping pattern) when the variation of the decorative design displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped (stop design). In the 4R latent probability variation big hit pattern (combination of the same number of the same decorative pattern of "2", "4", "6") decided, 4R normal when big hit is unspecified 4R normal Big hit design (combination of the same even number of decorative designs of "2", "4", "6". Common with 4R latent probability variation big hit design) When the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command elapses (game At the end of the effect), the determined stop design is displayed and controlled on the liquid crystal display device 1900. In this way, when the combination of the same number of even decorative symbols of “2”, “4”, and “6” as the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 has stopped fluctuating, the specific symbol from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is specified 1. It is difficult to determine whether it is the 4R latent probability variation big hit or the non-specific 4R normal big hit, and it is difficult to determine whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in the high probability state even after the 4R big hit game state ends. Since the effect is executed, it is impossible to determine whether or not to control to the high-probability state after the end of these jackpot gaming states.

Further, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a specifies the 16R sudden probability variation big hit of the specific 3 out of the big hits from the received judgment result notification command as a mode (stopping pattern) when the variation of the decorative design displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped (stop design). 16R sudden probability variation big hit pattern (a combination of predetermined decorative patterns among the outlying patterns (separation). Specifically, a combination of decorative symbols of "357") is determined and specified from the variation pattern command. When the variable time has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the liquid crystal display device 1900. In this way, when the combination of the decorative designs of "357" as the decorative design displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 has stopped fluctuating, it is determined from the stop design of the decorative design that 16R of the specific 3 is the sudden probability jackpot, and 16R. It is possible to determine to control to a high-probability state after the jackpot gaming state (16R jackpot gaming state in which the game ball is difficult to enter).

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, as a mode (stop pattern) when the decorative pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops changing (stop pattern), when the reach failure is specified from the received determination result notification command, the failure pattern accompanied by the reach. (A combination of decorative patterns that are not the same. However, the decorative patterns on the left and right are the same.) If you determine the deviation, the deviation pattern that does not involve reach (the combination of the decoration patterns that are not the same. However, the decoration patterns on the left and right. Are determined to be non-identical), and when the variation time specified by the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the jackpot flag as shown in FIG. 175. If it is (step S141), the type of big hit determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, and the fluctuation pattern table at the time of big hit according to the current game state are selected (step S142), reach. If the flag is set (step S143), the variation pattern table at the time of reach according to the current game state is selected (step S144), and when neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, the normal In the case of the deviation (the deviation without executing the reach effect), the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the deviation is selected (step S145).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S146), and the variation pattern table to start is determined. The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 4010 is set and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1185 is started (step S147). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets, in the fluctuation timer, the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern (step S149). As a result, the effect control is performed on the first special symbol display device 1185 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 only for the fluctuation time thus determined.

The variation pattern table of this example is provided in plural types for each determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the design random number (first design random number, second design random number). Further, in the variation patterns set in each variation pattern table, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. The variable random numbers are stored so as to be associated with each other. Then, the main control MPU4100a, the variation pattern table selected from among a plurality of types of variation pattern table according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number, and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process By comparing, and by acquiring the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number from this table, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. Thereby, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) will be performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 4100a.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of the reach of this example, it is set to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. .. For example, among the reach effects, a super reach effect (e.g., corresponding to a winning effect of SP1 type and SP2 type in FIGS. 186 and 188 described later) is a normal reach effect (for example, a winning type of a normal type in FIGS. 186 and 188 described later). The expectation of the jackpot is higher than that of the equivalent), and when the super reach effect is executed, the expectation of the player for the jackpot gaming state is increased. A detailed description of the reach effect in the pachinko machine 1 of this example will be described later.

Further, when the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, then as the process of step S149, the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S83). At the time of updating, this process ends.

In this example, in the variation pattern table of time saving, variation time information of one type of special symbol set to about 1 second is associated with all of the special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol). In the form, the variation pattern of special symbols is set. On the other hand, in the non-time saving variation pattern table, the variation time information of a plurality of types of special symbols set in the range of 10 to 120 seconds is associated with each of the special symbol random numbers, and the variation of the special symbol The pattern is set. That is, in the time variation pattern table, the variation time information of the special symbol is set so that the time required for the variation display control of the special symbol is about 1 second shorter than the variation pattern table of the non-time reduction. ing.

FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 176, the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100, first, step S171. As the process, the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time is set according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the fluctuation pattern is subtracted by 1. When it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the variation time selected by the lottery has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, at the time when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84), this process ends.

FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop processing (step S84).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 177, the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100, first, step S181 As the process, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display device 1185, and the first special symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative design according to the stop design is set as a command to the peripheral control board 4010 (step S182).

Next, when the jackpot flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game state is started (step S187), and the jackpot game is played. The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying that the big hit game state is started) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Then, the big hit running flag indicating that the big hit game state is being executed is set and the time saving flag is reset (step S189), and the first special symbol process flag is the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value. When the process is updated so that the process is transferred (step S190), this process ends. The big hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010 and is classified into types of big hits (4R latent probability big hit, 4R probability big hit, 16R sudden positive big hit, 8R positive big hit, 16R positive big hit, 4R regular big hit, 4R normal big hit). It is prepared individually according to. In step S187, the jackpot start command (4R latent probability variation big hit start command, 4R probability variation big hit, 4R probability variation big hit, 16R sudden probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit, 4R latent probability variation big hit start command, 4R probability variation) Jackpot start command, 16R sudden probability big hit start command, 8R probability variation big hit start command, 16R probability variation big hit start command, 4R normal jackpot start command. Thereby, the effect of the big hit game state according to the kind of big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamps/LEDs and the speakers 130, 222, 262 and the like.

FIG. 178 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the above-mentioned ordinary symbol process processing (step S15).

Now, in the processing of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2126 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2105, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 4100a of the control board 4100, as the processing of step S802, first acquires a normal random number of the ordinary symbol from the random number counter and stores it in the ordinary symbol reservation storage area of the RAM to execute a gate passage process. To do.

Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. A normal random number stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is read out, and a normal lottery process is performed on the basis of the read out normal random number such as a lottery process for the display mode when the variation control of the above normal symbols is stopped (step S803)
2. Normal symbol variation time determination process (step S804) in which lottery processing or the like is performed on the variation mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 1189 based on the ordinary symbol variation random number.
3. Ordinary symbol variation process to wait until the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 1189 is stopped (step S805)
4. Change display of the normal symbol so that the mode of change control stop of the normal symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the change control of the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display device 1189 Ordinary symbol stop processing to stop the (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "universal pattern hit", the movable piece 2106 retracts to receive the game ball into the second starting opening 2102. Ordinary electric accessory release process (step S807) to execute control process

The normal symbol process flag is operated so as to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 166).

FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate passage processing (step S802).

Now, in the processing of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2126 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2105, as shown in FIG. As the processing of step S811, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first obtains the counter value of the normal hold number counter from the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of normally held symbols is "4", which is the maximum value.

In the processing of this step S811, when it is determined that the number of holding of the above-mentioned normal symbol is not the maximum value thereof, in order to newly hold the variable display control of the above-mentioned normal symbol, the following steps S812 to S814 are performed. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S812, the normal hold number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, in step S813, the ordinary random number and the universal figure fluctuation random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as a process of step S814, each random number thus obtained is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal reservation number counter in the storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a.

However, in the processing of the step S811, when it is determined that the number of the normal symbols to be held is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly held. That is, by not performing the processing of steps S812 to S814, the variable display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal processing (step S803).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 180, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first, as the process of step S821, It is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the on-hold state, based on the counter value by the ordinary on-hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the suspended state, then as the process of step S822, the normal symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is normally stored. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the symbol (for example, ordinary random number, universal figure variation random number) is read from the RAM. Then, next, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, while counting down the normal holding number counter, when the variable display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the normal holding storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU4100a is stopped. In the first-first-out (First-in first-out) mode, the shift operation is performed on the random numbers (ordinary random number, universal figure fluctuation random number) relating to the display mode in FIG.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2105 are sequentially arranged from the first (first) area. Remember. When the game ball passes through the gate unit 2105 when random numbers are stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area, the random numbers extracted to the n+1th (n=1 to 3) storage area are stored. The random number stored in the first storage area is read out when the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, and the Nth storage area (N=2 to 4) is read out. The various random numbers stored in are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (the hold that occurred first). ..

Then, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, if the current gaming state is a time saving state (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state) (step S826), the time saving time universal figure hit determination table (not shown). ) Is selected (step S826), and the current game state is the non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S825), the non-time saving general drawing hit determination table (not shown) ) Is selected (step S827), and the selected ordinary figure hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal process are compared (step S828).

In addition, the universal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and the universal figure hit determination table used when the gaming state is a short time (low probability short time state and high probability short time state), It is provided with a non-time saving universal figure hit determination table used when the game state is non-time saving (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state). Then, in the time saving general-purpose figure judgment table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random numbers, all 251 kinds of ordinary random numbers coincide with the general-use figure determination value indicating that each ordinary figure is won, The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so that they do not match the deviation determination value indicating the deviation. In this way, in the time saving, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105, it is surely won per universal figure, and the movable piece 2106 retracts to receive the game ball into the second starting opening 2102. It is possible to control.

In addition, in the non-time saving general-purpose figure judgment table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all 251 kinds of ordinary random numbers may coincide with the universal figure determination value indicating that the ordinary random number has been won. However, the ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the general-university-deviation determination value indicating that the general-university figure is out of sync. In this way, in the non-time saving, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105, the movable piece 2106 retreats to the second starting opening 2102 because it does not win the game. There is no possibility to control the acceptance of the game ball.

When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected ordinary figure hit determination table with the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal process, and determines that it is an ordinary figure hit (step S829). ), after setting the universal symbol hit flag indicating that the variation is won per universal symbol (step S830), the regular symbol hit as a mode (variable symbol stop symbol) when the variation control of the regular symbol is stopped The symbol is determined (step S831), on the other hand, as a result of the comparison between the selected universal symbol determination table and the ordinary random number read out in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal processing, if it is determined that the symbol is out, fluctuation of the ordinary symbol The non-universal figure as the mode (stop symbol of the normal symbol) when the control is stopped is determined (step S832). Then, after that, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation time determination process (step S804) (step S833), this process ends.

[6. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, the processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 181, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs initial setting processing (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM of the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and the like are performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady process, the process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (incrementing the 16 ms progress monitoring counter by 1) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, when 16 ms has elapsed, 16 ms has elapsed. The flag T is set, and the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). In this way, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to "0". If the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and then the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S504).

In this 16 ms steady processing, processing for controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900, lamps/LEDs, speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. is executed based on the command received from the main control board 4100. When the 16 ms steady process is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms, the above steps S503 to S504 are repeated. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set (16 ms elapsed flag T is "0") in step S502, the loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing an example of the 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub-main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis process of step S601, the peripheral control MPU 4140a analyzes a command (for example, a production command) received from the main control board 4100, and according to the analysis result, a plurality of types of flags stored in the peripheral control RAM 4140e are displayed. Of these, the flag corresponding to the command is set.

In the effect control process of step S602, the control process related to the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executed based on the command received from the main control board 4100. The command received from the main control board 4100 is, for example, a variation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first variation pattern setting process, a process corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process of the second special symbol process process (second variation pattern setting). Process)) and the variation pattern command transmitted by being set in the starting port passing process (steps S45 and S47 of the first starting port passing process, steps S55 and S57 of the second starting port passing process) And the random number designation command and the like. In the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010, in the peripheral control ROM 4140b, a "production pattern" as a pattern of display production performed in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is associated with each variation pattern based on the variation pattern command. Each is remembered. In the effect control process of step S602, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines the effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command, and causes the liquid crystal display MPU 4150a to execute the display effect based on the effect pattern on the liquid crystal display device 1900. .. Detailed processing of the effect control processing will be described later.

Further, in the sound control processing of step S603, control processing relating to the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. is executed. In the lamp control processing of step S604, control processing relating to the lamp/LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp/LED lighting signal to the lamp drive substrate 3013 is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating a random number (for example, a read-ahead random number) used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

Note that the processing of steps S601 to S606 in the 16 ms steady processing ends within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, immediately after the 16 ms steady process has started 16 ms, the 16 ms steady process starts from the beginning (command of step S601). Do not execute (from parsing process). That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is executed. To start.

Further, in this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S606) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) of updating various random numbers is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in either or both of the loop process and the 16 ms steady process in the sub-main process.

In the following, detailed processing of the effect control processing (step S602 in FIG. 182) will be described. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing a processing example of the effect control processing. As shown in FIG. 183, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes any one of steps S1210, S1220, and S1230 with reference to the value of the process selection flag indicating the progress state of the game. The processing selection flag is held in the peripheral control RAM 4140e, for example.

In the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is "0", setting is made to start the variable display of the decorative symbol if the variation pattern command is received. Specifically, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined according to the variation pattern command and the big hit command, and the notice effect is set. Here, the big hit command is one of the commands that the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives from the main control board 4100 in step S601 of FIG. 182, and is a command indicating that the special symbol lottery result is a big hit. The received jackpot command is analyzed for the jackpot information indicated by the command by the command analysis processing in step S601.

In the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220) executed when the process selection flag is “1”, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the variation stop command regarding the variation stop of the special symbol from the main control board 4100, and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 ( In particular, a display command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a) to perform control to stop the variable display of decorative symbols.

In the big hit display process (step S1230) executed when the process selection flag is “2”, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays a liquid crystal display via the liquid crystal control unit 4150 according to the big hit start command transmitted from the main control board 4100. The device 1900 is controlled to display a start of the big hit game state and a display during the big hit game state (for example, a round display).

FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing a processing example of the decorative symbol variation start processing. As shown in FIG. 184, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first determines whether or not the variation pattern reception flag is set (step S1211). The fluctuation pattern reception flag is a flag that is set in the command analysis process (step S601) described above and indicates that the fluctuation pattern command has been received from the main control board 4100. The variation pattern reception flag is held in the peripheral control RAM 4140e, for example. If the fluctuation pattern reception flag is not set in step S1211, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines that it has not received the fluctuation pattern command, and ends the processing.

When the variation pattern reception flag is set in step S1211, the peripheral control MPU 4140a resets the variation pattern reception flag (step S1212), and the variation pattern based on the received variation pattern command causes a big hit ( It is determined whether or not it is a hit pattern (step S1213).

When the variation pattern is the hit pattern in step S1213 (YES in step S1213), the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol forming the big hit symbol array that suggests the big hit, based on the variation pattern ( Step S1214). If the variation pattern is not the hit pattern in step S1213 (NO in step S1213), the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol forming the defect symbol array that suggests the variation based on the variation pattern. (Step S1215).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the decorative symbol is a symbol displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, which varies with the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the special symbol. The stop display is performed in a mode corresponding to the stop mode of. That is, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a win (big hit), the variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern of the hit pattern is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4010 (peripheral control section 4140, peripheral area). It is transmitted to the control MPU 4140a) and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a hit mode, and the decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in the stop symbol forming the big hit symbol array. Further, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “out” which is not a hit (big hit), a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern of a deviating pattern which is not a hit pattern is issued from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control. It is transmitted to the board 4010 (peripheral control unit 4140, peripheral control MPU 4140a), and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the disengaged mode, and the decorative symbol is also disengaged. Is displayed.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes a notice selection process for determining whether or not to execute a notice effect based on the notice determination random number (step S1216), and an effect pattern based on the variation pattern (details will be described later). , The special time (first special symbol or the second special symbol) is determined based on the variation time of the production time (variation time), the notice pattern stored in the notice type storage area, and determined in step S1214, S1215 Set a display command corresponding to the stop design of the decorative design. It should be noted that in the case of a pachinko machine that does not have the notice production, the notice selection process in step S1216 is not necessary, and in the processes after step S1217, the process of information relating to the notice production (for example, input/output to/from the notice type storage area) is performed. Processing) is unnecessary. After that, the peripheral control MPU 4140a updates the process selection flag to "1" (step S1218) and ends the process.

The display command set in step S1217 is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 in the information output process (step S605 in FIG. 182). The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 starts variable display of decorative symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the received display command. Peripheral control MPU4140a, when receiving the production stop command from the main control board 4100, transmits the production stop command to the liquid crystal control MPU4150a of the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and the liquid crystal control MPU4150a, based on the received production stop command, the decorative design. End the variable display of.

In addition, when the notice pattern stored in the notice type storage area is read in step S1217, the content of the notice type storage area is cleared after the notice pattern is read, thereby changing the next decorative design. At the time of display, it is possible to prevent the notice effect based on the notice pattern determined when the variable display of the previous decorative pattern is started from being erroneously executed.

[6-1. Decision of production pattern including winning/drafting production]
Next, the “effect pattern based on the variation pattern” described in step S1217 of FIG. 184 will be described in detail. The "effect pattern" is determined by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 based on the variation pattern (of the special symbol) determined by the main control board 4100. In other words, the "decorative pattern variation pattern". Is. As the effect pattern (variable pattern of the decorative pattern), a pattern to be executed is determined from a plurality of kinds of effect patterns stored in the peripheral control ROM 4140b or the like in advance. Such effect patterns include a variation pattern capable of executing a display effect including a win effect (effect pattern including a win effect) and a change pattern capable of executing a display effect not including a win effect (effect pattern not including a win effect). ) There is. Strictly speaking, the winning effect includes an effect that forms a reach state and an effect that suggests whether or not it will be a big hit (after-reach effect). It is called (reach production).

Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a advances the effect in accordance with the effect content indicated by the determined effect pattern. In this case, the peripheral control MPU 4140a outputs a sound from the speakers 121 and 391 by outputting a control signal (sound command) to the sound source IC 4140c, and outputs a drive command to the motor drive board 3013a to operate the pistol unit 3075. The liquid crystal display unit 1900 is operated to output a display command to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 (liquid crystal control MPU 4150a) to display an image on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Below, among such effect patterns, effect patterns including winning/descending effects will be described in detail.

FIG. 185 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the determination result and the effect time in the special symbol variation pattern. As described above with reference to FIGS. 174 and 175, the main control board 4100 sets the determination result notification command (step S125) based on the result of the special lottery and the variation pattern command (step S147) according to the variation pattern of the special symbol. .. Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines the variation pattern of the decorative pattern based on the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command received from the main control board 4100. FIG. 185 summarizes the relationship example between the special lottery result (determination result) and the variation time (effect time) for the special symbol variation pattern thus transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010. In FIG. 185, as an example, for a part of the variation pattern of the first special symbol (see step S146 in FIG. 175), the determination result of the special lottery (in this case, the first special lottery result in the normal state) and the effect time ( The relationship with (variation time) is shown (special symbol variation pattern table). In addition, in the following description regarding the winning/winning effect, the first special symbol will be described for simplification, but the present invention is not limited thereto.

The determination result column of FIG. 185 is divided into “out”, “low hit”, and “high hit” based on the special lottery result notified by the determination result notification command. For example, in the “off” column of FIG. 185, the variation patterns transmitted in combination with the determination result notification command for notifying “out” or “reach out” are summarized. Note that, in FIG. 185, the variation patterns having variation times of 20 seconds or more are summarized, and the reach flag is set (reach is formed) in all of the variation patterns of the shift pattern in such a relatively long variation time. ). In other words, the variation pattern of “off” shown in FIG. 185 is a variation pattern corresponding to a special random number such that “with reach” is selected in the reach determination table shown in FIG. 173(B). This is a variation pattern corresponding to "reach loss" (in the following description in this section, for simplicity, simply referred to as "off edge" or "off edge pattern"). The peripheral control MPU 4140a that has received the special symbol variation pattern of such a stray pattern, as the effect pattern based on the special symbol variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the display effect including the winning effect is executed (the effect pattern including the winning effect). The display command is selected and a display command is set based on the selected variation pattern or the like (see step S1217 in FIG. 184).

Also, in the “low hit” column of FIG. 185, the variation patterns transmitted in combination with the determination result notification command for notifying the big hit corresponding to the “low hit” are summarized, and the “high hit” column of FIG. 185. Shows the variation patterns transmitted in combination with the determination result notification command for notifying the big hit corresponding to the "high hit".

Here, the “high hit” and “low hit” used in the present embodiment are tentative names when a plurality of types of big hits in the pachinko machine 1 are classified based on a predetermined criterion relating to the degree of advantage. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of big hits, and specifically, for example, a big hit round such as "4R big hit", "8R big hit", "16R big hit". There are jackpots of different numbers. Further, for example, there are also big hits such as "probability change" and "time saving" in which the game states controlled after the big hit are different. In addition to this, it is also possible to consider a big jackpot (a big jackpot whose opening time of the jackpot 2103 is relatively long, a jackpot which is relatively short, etc.) in which the opening/closing pattern of the jackpot 2103 in each round during the jackpot is different.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, such a plurality of types of big hits are classified into “high hit” which has a relatively high degree of advantage and “low hit” which has a lower degree of advantage than “high hit”. It is possible to change the distribution ratio of the winning effect described later depending on whether the big hit is “high hit” or “low hit”.

In the following description of the embodiments, the probability variation big hit is referred to as "high hit" and the other big hits (so-called normal big hits) are referred to as "low hit". That is, in the specific type of the big hit illustrated in FIG. 173(C), the specific 1 to the specific 5 correspond to the “high hit” and the specific 6 corresponds to the “low hit”. According to the example of FIG. 173(C), in the special lottery using the first special symbol (first special lottery), the case where the first symbol random number is "40-199 (160 pieces)" is "high hit". When the first symbol random number is "0-39 (40 pieces)" is "low hit", the ratio between "high hit" and "low hit" by the first special lottery is 160:40=4: However, in the following description, for the sake of simplicity, the ratio of “high hit” and “low hit” in the first special lottery is 1:1. Further, other examples regarding the classification and setting of “high hit” and “low hit” will be described in detail in [6-5].

FIG. 185 exemplifies, for each classification of the determination result of the special symbol, at what ratio the effect time (fluctuation time) of the variation pattern becomes. For example, in the case of “out”, 34% has a fluctuation time of 20 seconds, 50% has a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, 15% has a fluctuation time of 60 seconds, and 1% has a fluctuation time of 120 seconds. At this time, the average fluctuation time at the time of "disengagement" is 32 seconds. Similarly, in the case of "low hit" or "high hit", 5% of the fluctuation time is 20 seconds, 50% is the fluctuation time of 30 seconds, 60% is the fluctuation time of 60 seconds, and 10% is the fluctuation time of 120 seconds. It will be time. The average fluctuation time at the time of "low hit" or "high hit" is 56.5 seconds. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of the special symbol as shown in FIG. 185, when the reach effect appears, it is more average when the result is a win (low hit or high hit) than when it is out. Fluctuation time tends to be long.

Also, considering the breakdown of the determination results when the fluctuation times are the same with reference to FIG. 185, all of “out”, “low hit”, and “high hit” are listed with the denominator being 100. From this, the distribution ratio of each determination result can be used to calculate the appearance ratio of each determination result based on the fluctuation time. For example, in the case of a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, the distribution ratio of each determination result is that "outside" is 50, "low hit" is 25, and "high hit" is 25, so the appearance ratio is "outside". : “Low hit”: “High hit”=50:25:25=2:1:1. Further, since "big hit" is the sum of "low hit" and "high hit", the appearance ratio of "off" and "big hit" when the fluctuation time is 30 seconds is "outside": "big hit"= 50:50=1:1. That is, in the case of a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, “out” and “big hit” appear one to one, and the expectation (reliability) for winning the big hit is 50%.

In addition, when considering low hit and high hit separately, from the above relationship of “out”: “low hit”: “high hit”=50:25:25=2:1:1, low hit and high hit When the appearance ratio of 1 is 1, the deviation appearance ratio is 2. At this time, 1/4 (25%) is a low win or a high win, and 2/4 (50%) is a miss, so in the case of a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, the expectation for winning the "low win", and The odds of winning a "high hit" are 25% each.

[6-1-1. Distributing effect patterns with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds (Part 1)]
FIG. 186 is a diagram (distribution table 1A) for explaining distribution of effect patterns including winning effects. The effect pattern (variation pattern of the decorative symbol) is determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol. However, when the effect pattern thus determined is the effect pattern including the winning effect (reach effect), the winning effect is changed. An effect pattern to be executed (substantially, there is no problem in reading the winning effect to be executed) is selected from among the plurality of effect patterns that the user has. FIG. 186 exemplifies distribution of selection of effect patterns including such a winning effect, and allocation of effect patterns used when the variation time is “30 seconds” as the variation pattern of the special symbol. It is a table, and the effect time (variation time of the decorative symbol) of each winning effect shown in FIG. 186 is within 30 seconds. As described above with reference to FIG. 185, when the variation time of the variation pattern of the special symbol is 30 seconds, the jackpot is won with a probability of 50% (reliability 50%). In other words, when the distribution table shown in FIG. 186 is used, the result of the special lottery is a big hit (50%), and the variation time of the special symbol is “30 seconds”. It should be noted that the distribution of the winning effects shown in FIG. 186 is an example for the sake of brief description, and does not limit the type and the type of winning effects in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The setting contents of each distribution are stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4140b or the like, and can be read by the peripheral control MPU 4140a as necessary.

The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment stores a game result in the peripheral control RAM 4140e or the like when a production pattern including a specific winning/winning effect is selected and executed, and when the winning design causes the decorative design to come off and to stop in the design arrangement. However, (recording of battle history), in the subsequent games, it is possible to change the distribution of the effect patterns including the winning/descending effect selected from the plurality of effect patterns. The specific content of the distribution change will be described with reference to FIG. 186. The effect pattern including the "specific winning effect" is an effect pattern in which the "specific winning effect" is executed, and selecting and determining such an effect pattern is substantially the "specific winning effect". Is synonymous with selecting and determining. Therefore, in the following description, for the sake of simplification, “winning effect” may be described instead of “effect pattern including winning effect”.

First, the "type" in FIG. 186 is a type that roughly divides the winning effects, and "normal", "SP1", and "SP2" are provided as an example. The winning effects included in “SP1” and “SP2” correspond to winning effects generally called super-reach, and are a big hit compared to when the “normal” type winning effects are revealed. Expectation level (reliability) is set relatively high. In FIG. 186, as an example, the types are roughly classified based on the effect contents of the winning effects, and in the winning effects of the “SP1” type, the effects in the manner that the story progresses progresses, and the jackpot depending on the progress result ( And its type) is displayed in such a manner that it can be recognized. In addition, in the “SP2” type winning/winning effect, for example, the effect in a battle format progresses, and it is displayed in a mode in which it is possible to recognize whether it is a big hit (and its type) or not depending on the progress result. Also, the winning effect, which is a progress mode different from that of "SP1" and "SP2", is set to "normal" type. Although details will be described later, the distribution of the winning effect in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is based on the appearance status of the winning effect (which winning effect is selected and executed, and further, the winning effect is associated with a big hit. It has a feature that the distribution contents are changed by accumulating the "war history" depending on whether or not), but the "initial setting" (corresponding to the war history P) before the change due to the accumulation of the war history. In the above, it is assumed that the expectation (reliability) for the big hit for each type is set to be higher in the order of “normal”, “SP1”, and then “SP2”. The effect contents of the winning effect described in FIG. 186 will be described with reference to specific examples in FIGS.

The “effect name” in FIG. 186 is an example of the name of each winning effect. For example, “normal” and “long” are described in the effect names included in the “normal” type, and “story A”, “story B”, and “story C” are included in the effect names included in the “SP1” type. Is described, and "battle A", "battle B", and "battle C" are described in the effect names included in the "SP2" type. “A” to “C” in “SP1” and “SP2” are for distinguishing characters, scenes, and the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 when each winning effect is executed.

In addition, the "battle history" in FIG. 186 is a category indicating a combination of distribution of the winning effects, and which distribution of the winning history is used is selected based on the appearance status of the winning effects as the game progresses. To be done. Referring to FIG. 186 specifically for the distribution of the winning/losing effect, for example, when “battle history P” is used, the peripheral control is performed based on the reception of the variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern of the falling pattern from the main control board 4100. The winning effect determined by the MPU 4140a is the "normal" winning effect (normal reach) selected by 30 allocations (ie, 30%) of the denominator 100, and the "long" winning effect by 14 allocations (14%). The production (long reach) is selected, and the winning production (story A reach) of “Story A” is selected by the distribution of 20 (20%) (corresponding to the distribution “X1-P” of FIG. 186). In the distribution “X1-P”, the normal reach is most easily selected from all the winning effects, and the winning production (Battle C reach) is most difficult to be selected. In addition, the winning effect determined by the peripheral control MPU 4140a based on the reception of the variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern of the low hit pattern from the main control board 4100 is one of the denominators 100 (1%). The winning production of “Normal” (normal reach) is selected, the winning production of “Long” is selected by allocation of 3 (3%), and the winning of “Story A” is distributed by allocation of 3 (3%). The production (story A reach) is selected (corresponding to the distribution “Y1-P” in FIG. 186). In the distribution “Y1-P”, the winning effect (Battle C reach) of “Battle C” is most easily selected from all the winning effects. Further, in the battle history P of FIG. 186, the distribution of the high hit pattern (corresponding to the distribution “Z1-P” of FIG. 186) is set to be the same as the distribution “Y1-P” of the low hit pattern. The same applies to the winning effect determined in the case of the variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern of the high hit pattern.

Note that, in FIG. 186, at least a part of the distribution of the winning effects selected at the time of winning (big hit) is set to be different for each battle history. Here, as an example, the combination of distribution as the initial setting of the pachinko machine 1 is set as “battle history P”, and “battle history Q”, and further “battle history” are executed based on the execution of a specific winning effect stopped at the outlier symbol arrangement. It is assumed that the selection destination moves to "R". Speaking according to the lottery result of the special lottery, when the selection destination of the battle history is "battle history Q", the distribution "X1-Q" is selected when "out of bounds", and the distribution "Y1-Q" is selected when "low hit". At the time of "high hit", the distribution "Z1-Q" is used. Further, when the selection destination of the battle history is "Race history R", the distribution "X1-R" is assigned when "out of bounds", the distribution "Y1-R" is assigned when "low hit", and the distribution "Z1 is assigned when "high hit". -R" is used. Then, as a specific example of the transition condition in which the selection destination of the battle history shifts, once when the winning effect of “Battle A” is selected at the time of “off” (that is, when the outlying battle A reach appears), once. Each time the selection is made, the selection destinations are changed in the order of "battle history P", "battle history Q", and further "battle history R". After the selection destination becomes "battle history R", until the big hit is won. It is assumed that the selection destination is not changed from "battle history R". Below, what kind of effect pattern is selected when FIG. 186 is used according to such a transition condition of the battle history will be described.

First, in the case of “Battle History P”, which is the allocation destination in the initial setting, the ratio of the battle A reach selected from the outlying production patterns is 12%, and the battle is included in the winning production patterns. A-reach is selected at a rate of 8%. In response to the display command based on the winning effect (including the effect pattern) selected in this manner, the battle A reach is displayed (appears) on the liquid crystal display device 1900. , The decorative pattern fluctuates and stops in the off mode, and in the case of the effect pattern that hits, the decorative pattern fluctuates and stops in the big hit mode. The effect pattern to be a hit includes an effect pattern showing a low hit and an effect pattern showing a high hit, but if the low hit is a normal big hit and the high hit is a probability variation big hit, the effect pattern of the low hit is In the case, the decoration pattern fluctuates and stops in the big hit mode of the normal big hit, and in the case of the effect pattern showing high hit, the decoration pattern fluctuates and stops in the big hit mode of the probability variation big hit. Alternatively, other than this, the same decorative pattern may be stopped in a low hit or a high hit, and the low hit or the high hit may be taught during the big hit game. By doing so, even if the result of the special lottery is a low hit, it is possible to make the player expect a high hit and play a big hit game.

Here, the distribution table 1A of FIG. 186 is used when the fluctuation time is 30 seconds, and as described above with reference to FIG. 185, the breakdown of the determination result when the fluctuation time is 30 seconds is “ “Out”: “Low hit”: “High hit”=2:1:1, and “Out”: “Big hit”=1:1. Therefore, when the distribution table of FIG. 186 is used, the expectation of winning the “low hit” and the expectation of winning the “high hit” are 25%, respectively, and the expectation of winning the “big hit” is 50%.

Further, by referring to the variation pattern table (FIG. 185) and the distribution table (FIG. 186), it is possible to calculate the degree of expectation for a big hit when a specific winning/drafting effect is revealed. The degree of expectation for a jackpot when a specific winning/drafting effect is displayed can be calculated by the ratio of "allocation of the distribution with the appearance ratio" to "total sum of the distribution with the individual appearance ratio". .. For example, considering the degree of expectation for the big hit when the battle A reach appears in the battle history P, referring to FIG. 186, the low hit distribution is 8 (distribution Y1-P) and the high hit distribution is The minute is 8 (distribution Z1-P), and the off-balance is 12 (distribution X1-P). From FIG. 185, the appearance ratios are 1 for low hits and 1 for high hits, but 2 for each hit ratio. From the above, the expectation level of the jackpot when Battle A reach appears in battle history P,
[(8×1+8×1)/((8×1+8×1)+(12×2))]×100
It is shown that it is "40.0%" using the calculation formula of.
Also, regarding the degree of expectation for high hits when Battle A reach appears in battle history P, [(8×1)/((8×1+8×1)+(12×2))]×100
It is shown that it is "20.0%" using the calculation formula of.

In the following description, the jackpot expectation (reliability) is calculated using the method described above, but the calculation formula in the middle is omitted as appropriate.

Next, when the battle A reach that is out of position in the battle history P is selected, the peripheral control MPU 4140a has not won the jackpot due to a specific winning effect (here, battle A reach) (in other words, out of reach). If a specific winning effect is revealed) and a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the example of the latter stage, if the flag value of the effect result storage flag is "1"), the subsequent game The selection destination of the winning/drafting effect is changed to “war history Q”.

Here, as a method of “recording a battle history” for recording that a big hit has not been won due to a specific winning/winning effect, for example, a predetermined flag (effect result storage flag) is held in the peripheral control RAM 4140e and the peripheral control MPU 4140a is held. Should update (add) the flag value. The update timing of the flag value for the effect result storage flag is not limited to the time when the battle A reach is selected. For example, the display effect by the battle A reach appears on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the decorative pattern is removed. It may be the timing of stopping, the stop timing of the special symbol in the game, or the like. In any case, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines the selection destination of the distribution according to the flag value of the effect result storage flag that is rewritten based on the appearance of a specific winning effect (missing Battle A reach). For example, when the flag value of the effect result storage flag is “0”, the battle history P is selected, and when the flag value is updated (added) to “1”, the battle history Q is selected. Then, when the flag value is updated (added) to “2”, the strategy R may be selected. Further, the information stored in the "record of battle history" is limited to a form such as a flag (effect result storage flag) whose value is changed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition as described above. is not. For example, a command or data capable of specifying a reach pattern corresponding to a specific winning effect may be stored, and the storage destination is not limited to the storage medium of the peripheral control board 4010. The storage medium 4100, a storage medium such as another substrate, or a plurality of storage media may be stored.

In this example, the information about “record of battle history” is stored in the peripheral control RAM 4140e by the peripheral control MPU 4140a. However, when the information about “record of battle history” is managed by the peripheral control board 4010 in this way. , Peripheral control MPU4140a, under the condition that within the variation time of the special symbol shown in the variation pattern of the special symbol, because it is possible to select the effect pattern of the decorative symbol based on the "record of the battle history", It is possible to realize selection of various effects that do not have a one-to-one correspondence with the variation pattern. In addition, as another example, when the information regarding “record of battle history” is managed by the main control board 4100, if the main control MPU 4100a selects the variation pattern of the special symbol based on “record of battle history”. , It is also possible to change the variation time of the special symbol based on the “record of battle history”. Then, for example, if the variation time of the special symbol is shortened, the time required for one game digestion is shortened, so that the number of rotations per unit time can be improved and the gaming efficiency can be expected to be improved. Further, for example, when the variation time of the special symbol is extended, the non-rotating period in which the symbol is not displayed in a variable manner can be reduced, so that the effect of extending the period during the game and making it less likely to cause a gap between the games can be expected.

In the “warfare history Q”, a part of the distribution in the winning effect pattern is changed as compared with the “warfare history P”. The specific change contents of distribution are confirmed with reference to FIG. 186. To change each distribution, the distribution X1-P and the distribution X1-Q may be compared for the out-of-range pattern, and the distribution Y1-P and the distribution Y1-Q may be compared for the low hit pattern. For the high hit pattern, the distribution Z1-P and the distribution Z1-Q may be compared. At this time, in the outlying pattern and the low hit pattern, the distribution content does not change even if the battle history P is changed to the battle history Q. However, in the high hit pattern, the distribution of the story A reach is decreased by 2 from “3” to “1” and the distribution of the story B reach is changed from “5” to “3” among the winning effects of the SP1 type. Decrease, and the distribution of Story C reach is reduced by 5 from "10" to "5". In total, the distribution of the winning effects (story A to C) of the entire SP1 type is "18" in the battle history P, but becomes "9" in the strategy Q and is decreased by 9. Furthermore, in the high hit pattern, among the winning effects of the SP2 type, the allocation of the battle A reach is increased from “8” to “17” by 9, and the winning effects of all the SP2 types (battles A to C) are distributed. In battle history P, "78" was replaced by "87", which is an increase of 9.

Further, when the distribution by “war history Q” is compared with the case of “war history P” by the degree of expectation (reliability) of the big hit when each winning effect is revealed, the result is as follows. The reliability regarding each winning effect is calculated in the same manner as the reliability of the battle A reach described above.

First, regarding the reliability of the big hit (combined low hit and high hit) in "war history P" and "war history Q",
In battle history P,
The reliability of Story A reach is 13.0% (6/46×100),
The reliability of Story B reach is 33.3% (10/30×100),
The reliability of Story C reach is 62.5% (20/32×100),
The reliability of the entire SP1 type is 33.3% (36/108×100).
The reliability of Battle A reach is 40.0% (16/40×100),
The reliability of Battle B reach is 80.0% (40/50×100),
The reliability of Battle C reach is 94.3% (100/106×100),
The reliability of the entire SP2 type is 79.6% (156/196×100).
On the other hand, in battle history Q,
The reliability of Story A reach is 9.1% (4/44×100),
The reliability of Story B reach is 28.6% (8/28×100),
The reliability of Story C reach is 55.6% (15/27×100),
The reliability of the entire SP1 type is 27.3% (27/99×100).
The reliability of Battle A reach is 51.0% (25/49×100),
The reliability of Battle B reach is 80.0% (the same as the battle history P),
The reliability of Battle C reach is 94.3% (the same as battle history P),
The reliability of the entire SP2 type is 80.5% (165/205×100).

That is, comparing the "battle history P" and the "battle history Q" with respect to the degree of expectation for a big hit, in the "battle history Q", compared to the "battle history P", each winning effect (story A to C) and type of SP1 type While the degree of expectation for a big hit in the whole is lowered, the degree of expectation for a big hit in the specific winning effect (battle A) of the SP2 type and the whole type is improved. In addition, the degree of expectation for a big hit in the winning effects (battle B, C) other than the specific winning effect of the SP2 type does not change.

The above-mentioned change in expectation (reliability) becomes remarkable especially in high hits. For the reliability of high hits in "War P" and "Q" (the degree of expectation for high hits),
In battle history P,
The reliability of Story A reach is 6.5% (3/46 x 100),
The reliability of Story B reach is 16.7% (5/30×100),
The reliability of Story C reach is 31.3% (10/32×100),
The reliability of the entire SP1 type is 16.7% (18/108×100).
The reliability of Battle A reach is 20.0% (8/40 x 100),
Battle B reach has a reliability of 40.0% (20/50 x 100),
The reliability of Battle C reach is 47.2% (50/106×100),
The reliability of the entire SP2 type is 39.8% (78/196×100).
On the other hand, in battle history Q,
The reliability of Story A reach is 2.3% (1/44×100),
The reliability of Story B reach is 10.7% (3/28 x 100),
The reliability of Story C reach is 18.5% (5/27×100),
The reliability of the entire SP1 type is 9.1% (9/99×100).
The reliability of Battle A reach is 34.7% (17/49×100),
The reliability of Battle B reach is 40.0% (the same as battle history P),
The reliability of Battle C reach is 47.2% (the same as battle history P),
The reliability of the entire SP2 type is 42.4% (87/205×100).

That is, comparing the "warfare history P" and the "warfare history Q" with respect to the degree of expectation for high hits, in the "warfare history Q", compared to the "warfare history P", each winning effect (story A to C) of SP1 type and Expectations for high hits across all categories are significantly reduced. For example, the reliability of the high hit of the entire SP1 type is 16.7% in the battle history P, but is lowered to 9.1% in the battle history Q. On the other hand, the degree of expectation for a specific winning effect (battle A) of the SP2 type and high hit in the entire type is significantly improved. For example, the reliability of the high hit in the battle A is 20.0% in the battle history P, but is improved to 34.7% in the battle history Q. Further, the expectation level for high hits in the winning prizes (battle B, C) other than the specific winning prize among the SP2 types does not change like the expectation ratio for the big hits.

Next, when the battle A reach that is deviated in the battle history Q is selected, the peripheral control MPU 4140a does not win the jackpot due to the specific winning/losing effect (here, the battle A reach), as in the case of the battle history P. This is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 4140e (effect result storage flag). By this process, when the flag value of the effect result storage flag is updated (added) from "1" to "2", the peripheral control MPU 4140a selects "Battle history R" as the selection destination of the winning effect in the subsequent games. Change to ".

In the “battle history R”, a part of the distribution in the winning effect pattern is further changed from the “battle history Q”. The specific change contents of distribution are confirmed with reference to FIG. 186. The change of each distribution can be made by comparing the distribution X1-Q and the distribution X1-R for the out-of-range pattern, and by comparing the distribution Y1-Q and the distribution Y1-R for the low hit pattern. For the high hit pattern, the distribution Z1-Q and the distribution Z1-R may be compared. At this time, in the outlying pattern and the low hit pattern, the distribution content does not change even if the battle history Q is changed to the battle history R. However, in the high hit pattern, the distribution of the story A reach remains “1” among the winning effects of the SP1 type, but the distribution of the story B reach is reduced from “3” to “1” by 2, The distribution of Story C reach is reduced by 4 from "5" to "1". In total, the distribution of the winning effects (story A to C) of the entire SP1 type is "9" in the battle history P, becomes "3" in the strategy Q, and decreases by 6. Further, in the high hit pattern, among the winning effects of the SP2 type, the allocation of the battle A reach is increased from “17” to “23” by 6, and the distribution of the winning effects (battles A to C) of the entire SP2 type is In battle history P, it was "87" instead of "87", and is increased by 9.

At this time, similarly to the description of the “battle history P” and the “battle history Q”, the expectation (reliability) to the jackpot when each winning/drafting effect appears in the distribution of the “battle history R”, and the high The degree of expectation (reliability) for winning is as follows.

First, regarding the reliability of big hits (combined low hits and high hits) in "Battle History R",
The reliability of Story A reach is 9.1% (4/44×100),
The reliability of Story B reach is 23.1% (6/26×100),
The reliability of Story C reach is 47.8% (11/23×100),
The reliability of the entire SP1 type is 22.6% (21/93×100).
Also, the reliability of Battle A reach is 56.4% (31/55×100),
The reliability of Battle B reach is 80.0% (the same as battle history P and Q),
The reliability of the Battle C reach is 94.3% (the same as the battle history P and Q),
The reliability of the entire SP2 type is 81.0% (171/211×100).

In other words, when comparing the "warfare history Q" and the "warfare history R" about the degree of expectation for a big hit, in the "warfare history R", compared to the "warfare history Q", the winning effect (story B, C) of SP1 type and the whole type In the meantime, the expectation for the big hit in the SP2 type is improved, while the expectation for the big hit in the entire SP2 type is improved. In addition, the reliability of winning and winning effects (battles B and C) other than the specific winning and winning effects of the SP2 type does not change.

Also, regarding the reliability of high hits in "Battle R",
The reliability of Story A reach is 2.3% (the same as the battle history Q),
The reliability of Story B reach is 3.8% (1/26×100),
The reliability of Story C reach is 4.3% (1/23×100),
The reliability of the entire SP1 type is 3.2% (3/93×100).
The reliability of Battle A reach is 34.7% (23/55×100),
Battle B reach has a reliability of 40.0% (the same as P and Q in battle history),
The reliability of Battle C reach is 47.2% (the same as P and Q in battle history).
The reliability of the entire SP2 type is 44.1% (93/211×100).

That is, comparing the "warfare history Q" and the "warfare history R" with respect to the degree of expectation for a high hit, in the "warfare history R", compared to the "warfare history Q", each winning effect (story B, C) of SP1 type and Expectations for high hits across all categories are significantly reduced. For example, the reliability of the high hit rate of the entire SP1 type is 9.1% in the battle history Q, but is lowered to 3.2% in the battle history R. On the other hand, the degree of expectation for a specific winning effect (battle A) of the SP2 type and high hit in the entire type is significantly improved. For example, the reliability of the high hit in the battle A is 34.7% in the battle history Q, but is improved to 41.8% in the battle history R. Further, the expectation level for high hits in the winning prizes (battle B, C) other than the specific winning prize among the SP2 types does not change like the expectation ratio for the big hits.

FIG. 187 is a diagram summarizing the reliability when each winning effect is revealed using the distribution table 1A. In each column of FIG. 187, the reliability calculated respectively by the above-described calculation method is described.

As described above, by using the distribution table 1A illustrated in FIG. 186, the combination of distribution is determined based on the fact that a specific winning/losing effect (battle A reach) has been brought out without being a big hit (out of sync). In a subsequent game after the change, at least some winning effects (other winning effects: stories A to C) other than the specific winning effect are selected in a hit pattern (strictly, a high hit pattern). While the distribution can be suppressed low, it is possible to increase the distribution selected for a specific winning/winning effect in a hit pattern (strictly speaking, a high hit pattern). Even if the battle history of the selection destination shifts, the distribution of distribution selected in the out-of-match pattern does not change. As a result, in the game after the combination of distribution (war history) has been changed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for big hits and high hits when "other winning effects" where the distribution is kept low appear Is lower than the reliability before the change, while the reliability when a specific winning/drafting effect is displayed can be made higher than the reliability before the change.

Also, when the selection destination of the distribution combination (battle history) shifts to multiple stages, the distribution change as described above is performed each time the selection destination shifts, so in the subsequent games, a specific winning or losing It is possible to further increase the distribution of the effects selected in the hit pattern, and it is possible to further increase the expectation for the big hit and the high hit when a specific winning effect is revealed.

[6-1-2. Distributing effect patterns with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds (Part 2)]
FIG. 188 is a diagram (distribution table 1B) for explaining distribution of effect patterns including winning effects. The distribution table 1B shown in FIG. 188 is another example of the distribution table of effect patterns that can be used instead of the distribution table 1A shown in FIG. 186. Similar to the distribution table 1A, the distribution table 1B is a distribution table of effect patterns used when the variation time of the special symbol is “30 seconds” as a variation pattern of the special symbol, and each winning/losing effect shown in FIG. 188. The production time (variation time of the decorative pattern) is within 30 seconds. As described above with reference to FIG. 185, when the variation time of the variation pattern of the special symbol is 30 seconds, the jackpot is won with a probability of 50% (reliability 50%). In other words, when the distribution table shown in FIG. 186 is used, the result of the special lottery is a big hit (50%), and the variation time of the special symbol is “30 seconds”. It should be noted that the distribution of the winning effects shown in FIG. 188 is an example for simple explanation, and does not limit the type and the type of the winning effects in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The setting contents of each distribution are stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4140b or the like, and can be read by the peripheral control MPU 4140a as necessary.

Similar to the distribution table 1A, the distribution table 1B shown in FIG. 188 is selected based on the fact that the battle history is recorded based on the fact that a specific winning effect (battle A reach) has appeared in an outlying manner. The previous battle history shifts from “war history P” to “war history Q” and “war history R”. The difference between the distribution table 1B and the distribution table 1A is the breakdown of distribution according to the transition of the battle history, which will be specifically described below.

In the distribution table 1B, when the “warfare history P” is changed to the “warfare history Q”, in the high hit pattern, the distribution of the battle A reach, which is the “specific winning/winning performance”, among the winning performances of SP2 type is “. Increased from "8" to "23" by 15, the distribution of battle B reach, which is another winning effect of SP2 type, decreased from "20" to "15" by 5, and the distribution of battle C reach from "50" Decrease by 10 to "40". It should be noted that the distribution of the winning effects (battles A to C) of all SP2 types in the high hit pattern remains "78". Further, the distribution of the winning effects included in the normal type or the SP1 type, which is a type (winning effect group) other than the SP2 type, is not changed.

Further, in the distribution table 1B, even when the "warfare history Q" is changed to the "warfare history R", the distribution in the high hit pattern is changed as in the case where the "warfare history P" is changed to the "warfare history Q". .. Such distribution change is performed only between the winning effects included in the SP2 type, and does not affect the winning effects included in the other types. Specifically, among the winning effects of SP2 type in the high hit pattern, the distribution of the battle A reach which is the "specific winning effect" is increased from "23" to "43" by 20 and the other winning effects of SP2 type. The distribution of Battle B reach, which is a production, is reduced by 5 from “15” to “10”, and the distribution of Battle C reach is reduced by 15 from “40” to “25”. The distribution of the winning effects (battles A to C) of all the SP2 types in the high hit pattern does not change and remains “78”, and the winnings included in the normal type and the SP1 type other than the SP2 type (the winning effect group). The distribution of production is not changed.

FIG. 189 is a diagram summarizing the degrees of reliability when each winning/winning effect is revealed using the distribution table 1B. The reliability of each column is calculated using the same calculation formula as in FIG. 187 in the case of the distribution table 1A, but detailed description is omitted.

Referring to FIGS. 188 and 189, the reliability when each winning effect is revealed using the distribution table 1B does not change in the big hit or the reliability for each hit for each type, and the SP2 type specific It is shown that the expectation for big hits and high hits in the winning effect (Battle A) is improved, while the expectation for big hits and high hits of other winning effects (Battle B, C) of SP2 type is decreased. Be done. This characteristic becomes more significant by shifting from “war history P” to “war history Q” to “war history R”. Specifically, in the battle history P, the reliability of the jackpot when a specific winning effect (Battle A reach) is revealed is 40.0%, but in the battle history Q, it is 56.4%. Furthermore, in the battle history R, it has improved to 68.0%. Moreover, the change in the expectation for high hits is even more remarkable, and the reliability of the high hits when the Battle A reach is revealed is 20.0% when the battle history is P, but when the battle history is Q. 41.8%, more than doubling, and 57.3% if the battle history is R, which is nearly 3 times higher than the battle history P. On the other hand, although the distribution of the high hit pattern of the battle B reach and the battle C reach of the same type as the specific winning/descending effect is suppressed, the reliability of the entire SP2 type changes depending on the transition of the battle history. Not not.

According to such a distribution table, the combination of distributions is changed based on the fact that a specific winning/losing effect (battle A) has appeared without being a big hit (out of sync), and after the change, In the game, at least some winning effects (other winning effects within the same type: battle B, C) other than the specific winning effect in the winning effect group (type) including the specific winning effect are hit patterns. The distribution selected in the (strictly high hit pattern) can be suppressed low, while the distribution selected in the winning pattern (strictly, the high hit pattern) can be increased for a specific winning effect. Even if the battle history of the selection destination shifts, the distribution of distribution selected in the out-of-match pattern does not change. As a result, in the game after the combination of allocations (battle history) has been changed, the degree of expectation for big hits and high hits when "other winning effects in the same type" where the distribution is kept low appear While the (reliability) is lower than the reliability before the change, the reliability when a specific winning/drafting effect is displayed can be higher than the reliability before the change.

[6-1-3. Characteristic of the production pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds]
As described above with reference to the distribution table 1A (see FIG. 186) and the distribution table 1B (see FIG. 188), according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a specific winning effect is present in a deviating manner. The battle history is recorded based on what is issued, and the distribution combination is changed based on the record of the battle history (transition of the battle history), so that the specific winning/drafting effect is revealed after the transition of the battle history. In this case, the expectation for the big hit can be increased, and in particular, the expectation for the high hit, which is highly advantageous, can be increased.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a causes the peripheral control RAM 4140e to select and execute an effect pattern including a specific winning effect, and when the decorative pattern is stopped due to the winning effect, the peripheral control MPU 4140a stops. The “record of battle history” is stored to store the game result, etc., and the player is instructed of the information regarding the winning/drafting effect stored in such “record of battle history” (teaching of battle history). The teaching of the battle history is realized, for example, by the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a displaying a predetermined image or the like that indicates that the liquid crystal display device 1900 has shifted in a specific winning effect according to an instruction from the peripheral control MPU 4140a. To be done. Then, by instructing the battle history, the player is instructed that the degree of expectation for the big hit of the winning effect related to the taught content is improved. Specifically, for example, when the battle history is taught in a manner suggesting the character "A" corresponding to the battle A reach (corresponding to a teaching area 1900a shown in FIG. 192 described later), the character "A" is strengthened. The state (power up of the character) is shown, and the player who sees this can recognize that the expectation of the big hit is high for the battle A reach, which is the winning effect for the character “A”. That is, by teaching the battle history related to the battle A, it is possible for the player to recognize that the character "A" is powering up, and a big hit is expected when the battle A reach appears in the subsequent games. Teach situations that are easy to do. In addition, in order to supplement the recognition of the situation where the character "A" is powered up, characters such as "character A powering up" may be displayed (supplemental display of power up state). However, even if a supplementary display of the power-up state is performed, the area that does not interfere with the display by the winning effect (Battle A reach) (so-called “area where the player recognizes whether or not the Battle A reach hits”) It is desirable to be displayed in non-overlapping areas). In this way, by performing the supplementary display of the power-up state in the area that does not interfere with the display of the winning effect, both the recognition of the powered-up character by the supplementary display and the recognition of the winning result by the display of the winning effect are performed. Can be satisfied.

The image data and the like used for teaching the battle history are stored in, for example, the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b or the character ROM 4150d in the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and when the battle history is taught, by the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a (or VDP 4150c). Appropriate image data is read and drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900. A specific example of teaching the battle history will be described again in the next section. However, when a specific winning/drafting effect appears in a game situation in which such teaching is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the player Since it can be recognized that the reliability of a particular winning effect is higher than in the past (for example, initial setting), the expectation for a big hit can be further increased, and the interest can be expected to be improved.

Further, when the above-mentioned battle history is taught using the sorting table 1A on the liquid crystal display device 1900, other than a winning effect such as battle B reach or battle C reach, which is relatively reliable from the beginning. In addition, even if a specific winning effect (battle A reach) is generated, the reliability is high, so that the player is more likely to expect the reach state to occur. Further, when the above-mentioned battle history is taught using the distribution table 1B, the reliability of the winning production such as the battle B reach and the battle C reach, which is relatively high, is secured to some extent. Since the reliability will be high even if a specific winning effect (Battle A reach) included in the same type occurs while remaining (for example, the degree of expectation is 50% or more), the player may not reach the reach state. I feel more excited. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it can be expected that the player's expectation regarding the progress of the game can be improved, and in the situation where the battle history is being taught, it is unnecessary to end the game. It can be expected to inspire and motivate the player to continue playing.

In addition, the "specific winning effect" used in the above description is a winning effect (or may be read as an effect pattern including the winning effect) in which distribution of distribution can be increased with the transition of the battle history. , Which is predetermined in the design stage, for example. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the “specific winning effect” may be a plurality of types of winning effects. Specifically, in FIGS. 186 and 188, “battle history P” to “battle history R”, which focus only on “Battle A reach” as a particular winning/winning effect, are illustrated, but with the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, “specific The "winning effect" is not limited to one type of winning effect (or an effect pattern including the winning effect). For example, in the case where each of the battle A reach and the battle B reach is a "specific winning/defeating effect", an embodiment in which the transition of the battle history relating to the battle A and the transition of the battle history relating to the battle B are combined. Can be devised. When the distribution table 1A is used in the transition of the battle history related to the battle B, the distribution of the stories A to C in the high hit pattern is decreased to reduce the distribution of the high hit pattern in the same manner as the transition of the battle history related to the battle A. Battle B should be increased. When the distribution table 1B is used, the distribution of other winning effects (battles A and C) of SP2 type in the high hit pattern is reduced to increase the distribution of battle B in the high hit pattern. You can do this. At this time, the teaching of the battle history is performed such that the character A corresponding to the battle A and the character B corresponding to the battle B are powered up.

In addition, when a plurality of winning and winning effects within the same type are targeted for recording the battle history as “specific winning and winning effects” by using the distribution table 1B, by recording the respective battle history based on the appearance of each winning and losing effect, It is expected that the distribution of distribution will be interfered, but the processing in such a case is not particularly limited, and the distribution is flexibly changed each time a winning/drafting performance appears and the battle history is recorded. It should be done. To give a specific example, when each of the battle A reach and the battle B reach is a "specific winning/defeating effect", at the time of transition of the battle history related to the battle A, the battle B is changed every one stage for the distribution of the high hit pattern. Decrease the reach distribution by "5", decrease the battle C reach distribution by "3" and increase the battle A reach distribution by "8". The allocation of battle A reach may be decreased by "4", the allocation of battle C reach may be decreased by "3", and the allocation of battle B reach may be increased by "7". The range of increase/decrease at this time is not limited, and may be set appropriately. FIGS. 190 to 192 described later show examples of screens when the battle history changes in each of the battles A to C reach. Further, the “specific winning effect” is not limited to the battle reach of SP2 type, and may be another type of winning effect, but in such a case, the same type as the winning effect (winning effect group). The distribution of other winning effects included in is suppressed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a plurality of types of winning/drafting effects are preset as target candidates for the “specific winning/winning effect”, and “specific winning/winning effect” is selected from among the target candidates according to the player's request. May be designated. As a specific operation of such designation, for example, an input screen can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to a predetermined operation of the player, and based on the fact that the player has performed an operation on the input screen, "Specific winning/winning performance" is determined. As an internal process, a distribution table that manages the distribution change regarding the transition of the battle history related to each winning/descending effect of the target candidate is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4140b in advance, and the peripheral control MPU 4140a selects it by the operation of the player. The sorting table to be used for selecting the winning effect may be determined based on the selected "specific winning effect".

[6-2. Example of winning/drafting production]
Here, with regard to the winning effects described in FIGS. 186 and 188, the effect contents will be described for each type of winning effects executed based on the special figure variation pattern having a variation time of 30 seconds, with reference to FIGS. .. The effect illustrated in each drawing is executed according to the effect pattern selected by the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a causes the liquid crystal display device 1900 to display based on the effect pattern.

FIG. 190 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the effect image when the normal type winning/winning effect is executed. 190(A) to (D) schematically show effect images in the liquid crystal display device 1900, respectively. In FIG. 190(A), teaching areas 1900a, 1900b, and 1900c are areas in which information regarding a winning/losing effect for which a battle history is recorded is displayed. Specifically, for example, the teaching area 1900a is an area for teaching (indicating) that the history of the battle history regarding the battle A has been recorded based on the fact that the battle A reach has appeared at the end. Based on the record of the battle history by the A reach, for example, an image that emits light of a predetermined color is displayed on the background of the character “A”. Similarly, the teaching area 1900b is an area for teaching (indicating) that the battle history regarding Battle B has been recorded based on the fact that the battle B reach has appeared, and the teaching area 1900c is the battle area. It is an area for teaching (indicating) that the history of battle C has been recorded based on the fact that the C reach is out of the way. Like the teaching area 1900a, “B” and “C” are provided. An image that emits light of a predetermined color can be displayed on the background of the characters. In FIGS. 190A to 190D, it is assumed that the teaching areas 1900a to 1900c are not particularly light-emitted and displayed, and specific emission colors and the like will be described later with reference to FIG.

An image display area 1900d shown in FIG. 190(A) is an area in which a symbol row of decorative symbols, an image of a winning effect, and the like are displayed. For example, the arrow shown in the image display area 1900d means a decorative pattern that is changing, and since three arrows are shown in the image display area 1900d in FIG. 190A, the left, middle, and right arrows are displayed. The decorative pattern is changing in each row.

The character display area 1900e shown in FIG. 190(B) is an area in which characters and symbols can be displayed in the image display area 1900d, and predetermined characters and the like are displayed according to the effect situation. For example, in FIG. 190(B), as shown in the image display area 1900d as “7, arrow, 7”, the decorative symbols in the left and right columns stop at “7” symbols, and the decorative symbols in the middle column change. Since it is in the middle state, the reach state is formed. At this time, the character "REACH!" is displayed in the character display area 1900e, so that the player can be surely notified of the formation of the reach state.

In addition, in FIGS. 190(A) to (D) and FIGS. 191(A) to (E) and FIGS. A part having the same symbol as the region 1900e indicates the same region, and a description thereof will be omitted.

When the reach state is formed as shown in FIG. 190(B), an effect screen of a normal type winning effect (normal reach or long reach) is displayed. Specifically, the decorative symbols in the middle row which are changing are stopped at any of the symbols after the lapse of a predetermined time, and the game result is displayed by the winning effect. When the game result is a win (big hit), the peripheral control MPU 4140a has selected the effect pattern including the hit effect of the hit pattern, and thus the effect result corresponding to the effect pattern is shown in FIG. 190(C). In this way, the same symbols (in this case, “7” symbols) as the decorative symbols in the left and right rows forming the reach state are stopped together. As a result, the player can recognize from the effect result displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 that the big hit has been won in this game. In addition, depending on the display regulation of the big hit symbol in the pachinko machine 1, it is not necessary to limit to the same symbol arrangement, and for example, a specific symbol indicating the big hit may be stopped. When the big hit is won as in FIG. 190(C), the big hit game is started after the stop of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the game.

In addition, when the game result is out of alignment, an effect pattern including a win/loss effect of the outlier pattern is selected by the peripheral control MPU 4140a, so that an effect result corresponding to the effect pattern is as shown in FIG. In addition, the symbols (here, “2” symbols) different from the decorative symbols in the left and right rows forming the reach state are stopped. As a result, the player can recognize from the effect result displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 that he has failed to win the jackpot in the present game (off). If the big hit is not won as in FIG. 190(D), after the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the game is stopped, the next game is started.

In addition, although normal reach and long reach are illustrated as the normal type winning and winning effects, the difference between the two is distinguished by, for example, the law of decorative design that stops in the middle row, and in the case of long reach, the middle row that stops at the time of leaving The decorative pattern is a pattern that is numerically or arrayed close to the pattern forming the reach state (for example, 1 to 2 frames before and after), and in the case of normal reach, the decorative pattern in the middle row that stops at the time of leaving is other than that. It is assumed that it is a pattern that is far from the pattern forming the reach state numerically or in an array. As described above, by making the behavior in the long reach different from that in the normal reach, it can be expected that the player has a higher expectation for a big hit than the normal reach. However, the normal type winning/winning effect is not such that a special effect screen is displayed after the reach state is formed, as shown in FIG. 190, and the expectation for a big hit is SP1, SP2 type described later. It's not as expensive as the winning result.

FIG. 191 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the effect image when the winning effect of the SP1 type is executed. 191(A) to (G) schematically show effect images in the liquid crystal display device 1900, and FIGS. 191(A) and (B) are the same as FIGS. 190(A) and (B). Since it is a production screen of, the description is omitted.

When the reach state is formed as shown in FIG. 191(B), an effect screen of winning effects (Story A reach, Story B reach, or Story C reach) of SP1 type is displayed. Here, "Story Reach", which is a winning effect of SP1 type, is a kind of super reach, and a special winning effect screen as shown in FIG. 191(C) is displayed, and the winning effect types "A" to " A different effect such as a character or a traveling route is performed corresponding to "C". More specifically, first, the variable display of the decorative pattern that was displayed in the image display area 1900d up to FIG. 191(B) is displayed in the second image display area 1900f, and in the image display area 1900d, A screen appears as if the character were moving toward the goal. Since FIG. 191C illustrates the story reach A, the character “A” is drawn. In such a story reach production screen, a hole (a striped portion in FIG. 191C) is drawn at the destination of the character "A", and whether the character "A" can reach the goal through the hole. Whether or not the game result is a big hit is suggested by whether or not it is a big hit.

After that, after the effect screen shown in FIG. 191(C), the effect screen of the story A reach transitions, and when the game result is a hit (big hit), the effect including the hit effect of the hit pattern by the peripheral control MPU 4140a. Since the pattern is selected, as the effect result corresponding to the effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 191(D), an effect screen indicating that the character “A” has successfully reached the goal is drawn. At the same time, in the second image display area 1900f, a combination of decorative symbols (for example, “7” symbol alignment) showing a big hit is stopped and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 191(E), the arrangement mode of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the second image display area 1900f is greatly displayed in the image display area 1900d, and the player has won the big hit in this game. Made recognizable. When the big hit is won as in FIG. 191(E), the big hit game is started after the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the game is stopped.

Further, when the game result is out of alignment, an effect pattern including a win/loss effect of the outlier pattern is selected by the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and therefore, as an effect result corresponding to the effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 191(F). An effect screen showing that the character "A" was fitted in the hole and could not reach the goal is drawn. At the same time, a combination of decorative symbols (for example, "7/5/7") other than the big hit is stopped and displayed in the second image display area 1900f. Then, as shown in FIG. 191(G), the arrangement mode of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the second image display area 1900f is greatly displayed in the image display area 1900d, and the jackpot cannot be won in the present game (it is off. ) Is made recognizable by the player. When the big hit is not won as shown in FIG. 191(G), after the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the game is stopped, the next game is started.

In addition, each winning effect (story A to C) of SP1 type can be calculated from the distribution shown in FIG. 186, for example, at least in the initial setting (battle history P), the reliability is in the order of story A, story B, and story C. Is set high. Therefore, by causing the character "B" to appear as a more useful character than the character "A" and the character "C" to appear as a more useful character than the character "B", different expectations can be given to the player even in the case of the same SP1 type winning effect. Can hold you. Further, since the expectation (reliability) for the big hit by the SP1 type winning effect is higher than the reliability by the normal type winning effect, as described above, it gives a special impression than the normal type winning effect. It is preferable that the obtained effect screen is drawn.

FIG. 192 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the effect image when the winning effect of SP2 type is executed. First, FIG. 192(A) shows that the decorative pattern is changing in each of the left/middle/right columns similarly to FIG. 190(A) and FIG. 191(A). 1900b is shown with a different pattern from the teaching area 1900c.

Here, in the teaching areas 1900a to 1900c, the background display changes based on the fact that the battle history is recorded when the corresponding specific winning effect (battle A to C reach) appears in a deviated manner. Yes (change of power-up display). For example, if the transition stage of the battle history for each of battles A, B, and C is set to four stages including the initial setting, the background color is set to "white" in the first stage of the initial setting and the background color is set in the second stage of the next stage. The color is set to "blue", the background color is set to "green" in the next third step, and the background color is set to "red" in the next fourth step. In FIG. 192A, the hatched pattern in the teaching area 1900a indicates “green”, the satin pattern in the teaching area 1900b indicates “blue”, and the plain pattern in the teaching area 1900c indicates “white”. Further, the lattice pattern of the teaching area 1900a shown in FIGS. 192(F) and (G) shows “red”. That is, in FIG. 192(A), the battle history relating to battle A shifts to the third stage, the battle history relating to battle B shifts to the second stage, and the battle history relating to battle C is the first stage which is the initial setting. I understand. If this state is described as the power-up state of each character, the character A and the character B are in a power-up state. However, the character A is more powerful. The display of each stage in the teaching areas 1900a to 1900c as described above basically corresponds to the selection destination of the internal distribution table selected as the distribution combination of the effect patterns including the winning effect. ing.

Next, when the reach state based on the “7” symbol is formed in FIG. 192(B), an effect screen of winning effects (Battle A reach, Battle B reach, or Battle C reach) of SP2 type is displayed. Here, "Battle Reach", which is the winning effect of the SP2 type, is one type of super reach, and a special winning effect screen as shown in FIG. 192(C) is displayed, and the winning effect types "A" to " A different effect such as a character or a battle format is performed corresponding to "C". More specifically, first, the variable display of the decorative pattern that was displayed in the image display area 1900d up to FIG. 192(B) is displayed in the second image display area 1900f, and in the image display area 1900d, A screen is displayed in which an ally character battles with an enemy character. Since FIG. 192(C) illustrates the battle reach A, the ally character “A” is drawn. In such a battle reach effect screen, the teammate character “A” confronts the enemy character (“Z” in FIG. 192(C)), and whether or not the game result is a big hit is suggested depending on whether or not the player can win. It A gauge area 1900g in FIG. 192(C) is a display area showing the physical strength of the enemy character, and the smaller the shaded area, the weaker the enemy character is damaged. The enemy character “Z” is another character (for example, an enemy character “X” that looks weak, an enemy character “Y” that looks strong, etc.) according to the type of battle reach and the battle history in the game. May be drawn.

Further, in FIG. 192(C), the teaching area 1900a is displayed in a more emphasized state than in the normal state based on the fact that the battle A reach, which is a "specific winning/winning production" in which the battle history is recorded, is performed. .. By highlighting the teaching area 1900a corresponding to the winning effect thus displayed, it is clear to the player that the effect pattern by the "specific winning effect" in which the battle history is recorded is being executed. Can be recognized (for example, visually recognized), and the reliability of the battle A reach at this time is higher than the initial setting, so that an effect of significantly increasing the interest of the player can be expected. In addition to visually emphasizing the teaching area 1900, the player may be made aware of the appearance of the battle A reach, which is a "specific winning effect", by voice or character display. Further, on the effect screen when the teaching area 1900a is highlighted, the ally character "A" is drawn with a different appearance (for example, a display mode as if the surroundings are emitting light) from the normal battle A reach. In this way, it may be taught that a special effect is in progress.

After that, after the effect screen shown in FIG. 192(C), the effect screen of the battle A reach transitions, and when the game result is a hit (big hit), the effect including the hit effect of the hit pattern by the peripheral control MPU 4140a. Since the pattern is selected, as the effect result corresponding to the effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 192(D), an effect screen indicating that the ally character “A” has won the enemy character “Z” is drawn. It In the gauge area 1900g, a state in which the shaded area is removed is drawn. At the same time, in the second image display area 1900f, a combination of decorative symbols (for example, “7” symbol alignment) showing a big hit is stopped and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 192(E), the arrangement mode of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the second image display area 1900f is greatly displayed in the image display area 1900d, and the player has won the big hit in this game. Made recognizable. When the big hit is won as in FIG. 192(E), the big hit game is started after the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the game is stopped. When the jackpot is reached in the battle A reach, as an example of the battle history recording method and the teaching method, the background color in the teaching area 1900a is returned to the initial setting of “white” and the battle history record regarding the battle A is erased ( While resetting), the background color in the teaching area 1900b is kept at the current “blue” and the record of the battle history regarding the battle B is left.

In addition, when the game result is out of alignment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a selects an effect pattern including a win/loss effect in the off pattern, and therefore, as an effect result corresponding to the effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 192(F). An effect screen showing that the ally character "A" has been defeated by the enemy character "Z" is drawn on. At the same time, a combination of decorative symbols (for example, “7,6,7”) other than the big hit is stopped and displayed in the second image display area 1900f. Then, as shown in FIG. 192(G), the arrangement mode of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the second image display area 1900f is greatly displayed in the image display area 1900d, and the jackpot cannot be won in the present game (it is off. ) Is made recognizable by the player. If the big hit is not won as in FIG. 192(G), after the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the game is stopped, the next game is started.

Note that, in FIG. 192(F), the battle A reach, which is the “specific winning/winning effect”, appears in a falling state, so that the condition for recording the battle history regarding the battle A reach is satisfied. At this time, as shown in an example in FIG. 192(F), the background color of the teaching area 1900a is a shaded pattern (in the third stage) in such a manner that the defeat result (battle history) of "A" is recorded. The pattern is changed from "green") to a lattice pattern ("red" in the fourth stage). Along with the transition of the battle history stage related to the battle A, the selection destination of the combination relating to the distribution of the winning/falling effects of the hit pattern (the selection destination of the battle history in the distribution table) is also migrated. Then, in subsequent games, the teaching area 1900a for teaching the record of the battle history regarding the battle A is displayed in a lattice pattern on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 as shown in FIG. 192(A) (character A If the battle A reach appears again, it is possible to suggest to the player that the winning effect will be more reliable.

Further, each winning effect (battle A to C) of SP2 type can be calculated from, for example, the distribution shown in FIG. 186, at least in the initial setting (battle history P), the reliability in the order of battle A, battle B, and battle C. Is set high. Therefore, by causing the ally character "B" rather than the ally character "A" and the ally character "C" rather than the ally character "B" to appear as useful (strong) characters, it is possible to achieve the same SP2 win/loss production. Also, the player can have different expectations. In addition, since the expectation (reliability) for the big hit by the SP2 type winning effects is higher than the reliability by the normal type and SP1 type winning effects, as described above, a special impression than these other winning effects. It is preferable that an effect screen that allows the player to be drawn is drawn.

As described using the distribution table 1B of FIG. 188, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is based on the fact that the battle A reach, which is a specific winning effect, appears in an outlying manner that does not reach the jackpot. The battle history related to Battle A is recorded and transferred, but if the transition of battle history related to Battle A progresses in multiple stages, the reliability of the big hit (and high hit) when the Battle A reach appears is the same type. It may be higher than other winning effects (for example, battle B reach) of a certain SP2 type. In this way, when the reliability of the specific winning effect (Battle A reach) is increased to such an extent that the order of the reliability in the initial setting is changed, the ally character “A” is changed to the ally character “A” when the battle A appears. It may be possible to perform a special effect effect that makes the player appear as if he/she is a stronger character than "B", and as a result, it can be expected to invite the expectation of the player for the battle A whose reliability is significantly increased. In addition, when the battle history related to battle A shifts to a higher stage and the reliability is increased, while the distribution regarding battle B decreases and the reliability decreases, the teammate character “A” is taught as the battle history. "," may be displayed in a mode in which the ally character "B" is weaker than usual (power down). By performing such a display, the player's expectation for the battle A reach corresponding to the ally character "A" can be effectively increased.

[6-3. Another example regarding winning/drafting]
The features of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment when selecting and producing an effect pattern including a winning effect have been described above, but the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned example. It may be realized by an example.

First, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the conditions for transition between battle histories and the setting of the distribution number in each battle history are not limited to the exemplary conditions. For example, as a transition condition between battle histories, the transition may be performed when a specific winning/losing effect in an outlying form appears a prescribed number of times, or the prescribed number of times may be set to a different number between battle histories. .. Further, in addition to this, for example, when the battle A is being displayed at the time of leaving, a so-called "prefetching hold" is performed for the hold based on the game ball winning the starting opening 2101 (this. At this time, the expectation of jackpot of the holding is increasing), but the battle history may be shifted to two stages at once, instead of the one-stage transition of the battle history as described above. In such a case, it is desirable to set the expectation for the big hit after the transition of the battle history to a value higher than the expectation (for example, 50%) up to that point. In addition, the number of set battle history is not limited, and a “race history S” or a battle history that is a further transition destination may be set as a transition destination prior to the “race history R” illustrated in FIGS. 186 and 188. ..

Further, for example, in the examples of FIGS. 186 and 188, it is described that the distribution is preset for each battle history, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. In this case, the distribution number of a specific winning/drafting effect may be adjusted according to a predetermined rule or probability. Specifically, for example, when the outlying battle A reach is selected and the transition condition of the battle history is satisfied, the distribution of the winning effects of SP1 type in the high hit pattern is subtracted from “0” to “5”, respectively. , "9" may be added to the distribution at the time of the battle A reach, and so on. However, from the viewpoint of efficiently performing the internal processing, it is more preferable that the total value of the subtraction number of distribution and the total value of the addition number are set to be the same.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the teaching area (teaching areas 1900a to 1900c in FIGS. 190 to 192) in which the teaching based on the record of the battle history is performed, the background color of the characters such as “A” to “C” is selected. However, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment does not limit the mode of teaching based on the record of such a battle history to the background color. The display method (size, brightness, etc.) of the corresponding teaching area can be changed in accordance with the transition of "," and the display method (size, color, etc.) of characters such as "A" to "C" that can suggest a specific winning effect. May be changed. Further, as another example of a battle history teaching method, a character (for example, a character “A” to a character “C”) corresponding to a winning effect to be recorded as a battle history appears in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It may be possible to suggest the winning effect in which the battle history is recorded, for example. In any case, a display capable of recognizing the correspondence relationship with a specific winning/losing effect (for example, battle A reach) (such as a strengthened display of "A" or a power-up display of the character "A") may be performed.

Further, regarding the timing of teaching the battle history, in the example of FIG. 192, the latest situation of the battle history is always displayed in the teaching areas 1900a to 1900c, but the present invention is not limited to the above. When the recorded specific win/loss effect appears next time, the battle history regarding the specific win/loss effect may be taught at an arbitrary timing in the display process on the effect screen. In such a case, the player is notified at the time when the battle history is taught that the game is a game in which a winning effect whose reliability is improved based on the record of the battle history is performed. Therefore, it is possible to expect an effect of rapidly increasing interest in the game and having a sense of expectation for a big hit and a high hit. Further, for example, when a plurality of winning effects are targeted for "record of battle history", it is not necessary to perform "teaching of battle history" for all target winning effects, and it is possible to limit the winning effects with a higher appearance frequency. It is also possible to implement various controls such as only "teaching the battle history" relating to the winning/descending effects of the target that has appeared in the previous or past predetermined number of games.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, whether or not to display the teaching based on the record of the battle history in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 may be set to be selectable by the player. In such a case, , Providing game production according to the player's preference, such as wanting to enjoy the result while intentionally obscuring whether or not the reliability is high due to the record of the battle history when a specific winning production appears be able to. By enabling the “teaching of battle history” in various ways as described above, the playability can be further enhanced.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the battle history is recorded based on the fact that a specific winning/drafting effect appears out of sync, and the selection destination of the distribution combination is changed (shift of the battle history), so that Although it has been described that the reliability of the big hit and the high hit when a specific winning effect is revealed in the game is increased, the transition condition and the maintaining condition of the battle history are not limited to the above example. For example, the transition condition of the selection destination does not have to be a case in which a specific winning/drafting effect is continuously displayed in an outlying manner, and the recording of the battle history or the transition of the battle history does not necessarily have to be performed every time. In addition, the selection destination of the battle history may be changed when a specific winning effect is revealed in a predetermined number of times in a predetermined period, or, as described above, other predetermined conditions are satisfied. The selection destination may be shifted based on the above.

In addition, specifically, regarding the transition of the battle history when a plurality of winning/drafting effects are targeted for the record of the battle history, the battle history regarding Battle A is recorded by the appearance of the battle A reach in an outlying manner, and the battle A is recorded. When the battle B reach appears in the off mode after the power-up display of the character "A" is performed as the instruction of the corresponding battle history, regardless of whether or not the battle history based on the appearance of the battle B reach is recorded. It is preferable that the power-up state of the character "A" be left. By being controlled in this way, the power-up state of the character "A" is not erased by the appearance of the battle B which seems to be irrelevant, and therefore, the expectation for the battle A even after the battle B reach is revealed. It is possible to provide the player with a sense of security that the feeling can be maintained. Then, when the battle history corresponding to battle B is taught (power-up of the character "B") by the missed battle B reach, the player's expectation can be further increased.

An example of a battle history transition condition in which a battle history transition is not always performed when a specific winning/drafting effect that is the target of a battle history record is revealed, 186 will be described using the distribution table 1A of FIG. 186. Specifically, when the battle A reach that is out of the battle history P appears, the probability of transitioning to the battle history Q is 1/2 (50%), and further, the battle A reach that is out of the battle history Q appears. When it is played, it is assumed that there is a 1/5 (20%) probability of moving to the battle history R. In this way, when the battle history is not necessarily transferred even if the battle history is recorded, even if the battle history is shifted, it corresponds to the battle A reach when the battle history is taught. Since it is possible to expect that a character “A” power-up effect will be executed, even if a specific winning effect is missed, whether or not the battle history is changed is a game. It is possible to direct the enjoyment and expectation of the player and to improve the game playability. Furthermore, when the transition condition from the battle history P to the battle history Q (probability 50%) is set to be stricter than the transition condition from the battle history Q to the battle history R (probability 20%), the first stage (initial stage) to the first stage Since it is relatively easy to shift to the two stages, it is easy to teach the battle history such as power-up of the character “A”. As a result, the chance of being provided with a special state in which the character is powering up can be increased, and the effect of enhancing the interest of the player and promoting the operation can be expected.

Further, the information stored in the “record of battle history” may be partially or entirely erased as appropriate by the peripheral control MPU 4140a or the like when a predetermined condition is satisfied as the battle history shifts. By erasing the information stored in the “record of battle history” in this way, it is possible to expect an effect of suppressing excessive retention of data that is not used and suppressing deterioration of processing capacity.

One of the opportunities to erase information about the history of battles is to reset the history. Resetting the battle history is to return the battle history to the initial state, triggered by a predetermined game result. As a condition for resetting the battle history, for example, a case of winning the jackpot may be considered, but the battle history may be reset to the initial setting when the player wins any predetermined jackpot (for example, high hit) next time. , You may keep the battle history of the transition destination until you win the predetermined jackpot due to the specific winning effect, or return the battle history to the predetermined stage when you win the predetermined jackpot due to the specific winning effect. You may make it a selection destination. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is not necessary to reset all the battle histories when a big hit is won. Specifically, for example, when the characters “A” and “B” are powered up (state in which battle history regarding battles A and B is being taught), when high hit is reached by battle A reach. , The battle history relating to battle A may be reset to the initial state to release the power-up of the character “A”, the battle history relating to battle B may be maintained, and the power-up state of the character “B” may be left. In the case of controlling in this way, it is unreasonable that the player may have an unreasonable power-up state of the unrelated character "B" even though he/she wins the big hit in the battle A reach related to the character "A". You can control your feelings. Then, even after the big hit, the player's expectation can be maintained with respect to the appearance of the battle B reach related to the character “B”, so that the effect of promoting the continuation of the game can be expected. Further, as another example, when a low hit is won by a specific winning effect, the battle history may be maintained without being reset. It is possible for the player to more appropriately experience the effect of this embodiment that can be enhanced.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a function of performing opening/closing control of the special winning opening 2103 (so-called, small hit) similar to that at the time of a big hit, although a special lottery result different from the big hit is obtained. If there is a small hit, it is preferable that the information regarding the record of the battle history is not deleted. Further, even if a special game period (for example, an advantageous period such as a chance zone) shifts to a small hit, it is preferable that the information regarding the record of the battle history is not deleted. By performing such control, even if it seems that the game state has been changed from the player's point of view, the information regarding the record of the battle history will be changed if the internal game state is not changed. As a result, the player can retain his/her battle history until he/she wins the jackpot, etc., until he/she substantially wins the bonus, and the player can feel the contribution of the battle history record to the improvement of the expectation for the jackpot. I can expect to be made.

Further, it is possible to assume that the distribution value for a certain winning effect becomes “0” when the distribution is repeatedly changed due to the transition of the battle history, but in order to avoid such a situation, A minimum threshold value may be defined in advance and control may be performed so as not to fall below the threshold value. When the distribution of the winning effect becomes “0”, the winning effect is not selected, so that the selection range of the winning effect is reduced, which may impair the game playability, but the control is performed in this way. As a result, it is possible to achieve the transition of the battle history that changes the degree of expectation for a big hit (high hit), while securing the types of winning effects that can be selected. Further, from the viewpoint of the player, there is no change in the situation in which various winning effects are provided, and there is an effect that the interest is enhanced when a specific winning effect is revealed. Similarly, the upper limit of the distribution value for a specific winning effect may be controlled by a threshold value.

In addition, in the present embodiment, based on the fact that a specific winning effect (for example, Battle A reach) appears in a non-hit mode (miss), in the subsequent game, the particular winning effect is shaken during a high hit. By increasing the amount, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for a big hit (high hit) when the particular winning effect is presented, but according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the particular winning result is achieved. The method of increasing the expectation for a high hit when the effect (Battle A reach) is displayed is not limited to this. For example, based on the fact that a specific win/loss effect (for example, Battle A reach) has appeared in a non-hit mode (lost), in the subsequent games, the particular win/loss in the "lost time" and "low hit time". By reducing the distribution of the effects, it is possible to relatively increase the degree of expectation for a high hit when the particular winning/winning effect is revealed. However, changing the distribution of the hits increases the chances of a game winning the big hit with a specific winning effect, so the player's interest in the winning effect that can be expected for the big hit corresponding to the teaching of the battle history It becomes possible to further promote the improvement.

[6-4. In the case of fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times]
In the description so far, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, when a variation pattern of a special symbol having a variation time of 30 seconds is selected, a decorative pattern effect pattern (based on the variation pattern) ( I have described the method of determining the winning/winning production. However, as illustrated in FIG. 185, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol has a fluctuation pattern having plural kinds of fluctuation times, and a fluctuation pattern different from the fluctuation time of 30 seconds (for example, fluctuation time of 60 seconds) is selected. In this case, the effect pattern determination process as described above cannot be performed.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a variation pattern different from a predetermined variation pattern (variation pattern of a special symbol having a variation time of 30 seconds) that can bring out a specific effect (for example, battle A reach). Even when it is selected, the "specific effect" can be displayed by executing the "alternative effect" described in detail later. Hereinafter, such control processing will be described. The "variation pattern different from the predetermined variation pattern" is a "variation pattern of a special symbol having a variation time of 60 seconds (special symbol variation pattern)".

Further, the distribution of the winning effect determined based on the "special symbol fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds" will be described below. The processing in the case of the "special symbol variation pattern" and the processing in the case of the "special symbol variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds" described in [6-1-1] to [6-1-3] are combined. Can be configured. Specifically, when the variation time of the variation pattern is 30 seconds, the distribution table 1A (FIG. 186) described in [6-1-1] or the distribution table described in [6-1-2]. 1B (FIG. 188) and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern is 60 seconds, the distribution table 2A (FIG. 193) of [6-4-1] described later or [6-4-]. 2] of the distribution table 2B (FIG. 194) may be used.

[6-4-1. Distributing effect patterns with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds (1)]
FIG. 193 is a diagram (allocation table 2A) for explaining allocation of effect patterns including winning effects. The distribution table 2A shown in FIG. 193 is a distribution table of effect patterns used when the fluctuation time of the special symbol is “60 seconds” as a fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and the effect time of each winning effect shown in FIG. 193. (Variation time of decorative pattern) is within 60 seconds. As illustrated in FIG. 185, the rate of selection of the variation pattern of the special symbol having a variation time of 60 seconds based on the special lottery result is 15/100 in the case of “out”, and “low hit” Or, in case of "high hit", it is set to 60/100 respectively. From another point of view, when a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is selected, the ratio of each judgment result is “out”: “low hit”: “high hit”=15:60:60=1:4 : 4, and 11.1% (1/9) is “out”, and 88.9% (8/9) is a big hit (low hit or high hit). In other words, when the winning effects are distributed using the distribution table 2A shown in FIG. 193, the result of the special lottery is 11.1% is “out”, “88.9%” is a big hit, and The variation time of the special symbol is “60 seconds”. It should be noted that the distribution of the winning effects shown in FIG. 193 is an example for the sake of brief description, and does not limit the type and the type of winning effects in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The setting contents of each distribution are stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4140b or the like, and can be read by the peripheral control MPU 4140a as necessary.

Each item (type, effect name, battle history, etc.) of the distribution table 2A shown in FIG. 193 is the same as that of the distribution table 1A of FIG. 186 or the distribution table 1B of FIG. “SP3” is provided in the “type” of the distribution table 2A. The winning effect included in “SP3” corresponds to a winning effect generally called super-reach, and the expectation for a big hit is set particularly high in the super-reach. In the "SP3" type winning effect, as an example, as in the case of the "SP2" type winning effect, the effect based on the battle form progresses with a longer variation time than the SP2 type, and whether it is a big hit (and its type) or not depending on the progress result. Is displayed in a recognizable manner. And, there are 6 winning and falling effects included in the SP3 type ("long battle A", "long battle A'", "long battle B", "long battle B'", "long battle C", "long battle C'. )), but if classified according to the characteristics of the effect contents (for example, the characters A to C that are selected as the teammate characters in the battle effect), there are 3 types of “long A”, “long B”, and “long C”. It can be divided into types.

Out of the SP3 types of winning effects, an outline of the effect contents of two types of winning effects classified into the same type of long (here, long B) such as long battle B reach and long battle B'reach. explain. First, similar to the battle B reach described in FIGS. 196 and 188, both reach included in the long B will be a big hit depending on whether or not the ally character and the enemy character play a battle and can win the enemy character. This is the battle-type reach effect shown, and basically, the character B is selected as the teammate character. However, the battle period (variation time) of the battle B reach is 30 seconds or less, while the long B reach is set to be 60 seconds or less. Here, in the long battle B reach, the character B is the main character through the reach effect, whereas in the long battle B'reach, although the overall effect contents are similar to the long battle B reach, the reach is concerned. It is characterized in that it is switched (replaced) with another effect content different from the long battle B reach at any timing of the effect. The content of the effect to be switched is an effect based on the record of the battle history. Specifically, for example, when the “record of battle history regarding battle A” is performed based on the appearance of the battle A reach in the outlying mode, when the long battle B′ reach is executed, While the same effect (or similar) as Battle B reach is in progress, the same effect (or similar) as the effect of "Battle A reach" appears based on "Record of battle history regarding Battle A". .. Similarly, when the long battle C'is selected when the "record of battle history regarding battle A" is performed, the battle history is in the process of producing the same (or similar) production as the long battle C reach. Based on the record of, the same (or similar) effect as the effect of "Battle A reach" appears. As described above, although the types of the long battle B'reach and the long battle C'reach are long B or long C winning and winning effects, at least a part of the effects is a specific effect (Battle A) based on the record of the battle history. This is an alternative production to the reach production) and can be called an "alternative production". Detailed effect screens of "alternative effect" and screen transitions thereof will be described later in [6-5].

In the same manner as described in [6-2] with reference to FIG. 192 and the like (specifically, the teaching areas 1900a to 1900c), the variable time 60 in the game after the "record of battle history" is performed. Even when the SP3 type winning/winning effect appears as the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the second variation pattern, the “teaching history” is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. Specifically, for example, when the battle history regarding the battle A reach is recorded, the “teaching history” is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in a mode in which the battle A or the character A can be recognized. Further, in this state, when a long battle B'reach or a long battle C'reach is executed to produce the same (or similar) effect as the effect of the battle A reach, it is indicated by "teaching history". It is preferable to perform highlighting so that the player can surely recognize that the effect corresponding to the information (the effect of the battle A reach) is displayed. The display form of "Teaching history" may take various forms as in [6-2].

In the distribution table 2A of FIG. 193, the transition conditions of the battle history P, the battle history Q, and the battle history R are the same as those of the distribution tables 1A and 1B shown in FIGS. When the "specific winning/drafting effect" is set, the battle history is recorded based on the appearance of the battle A reach in an outlying manner, and the battle history selected in the distribution table 2A based on the record of the battle history. Will shift.

Next, in the distribution table 2A of FIG. 193, the distribution of the winning effect changed with the transition of the battle history will be described. The distribution of the battle history P (distribution X2-P, Y2-P, Z2-P) is the distribution used in the initial setting. In the distribution table 2A of FIG. 193, as an example of the distribution table used when “recording the battle history of battle A” is performed with the battle A reach as a specific winning/losing effect, there is no distribution for the long battle A′. .. Further, in the initial battle history P, it is assumed that there is no distribution for the long battle B'and the long battle C'.

When the battle history relating to the battle A is recorded in the state in which the "battle history P" is selected and the predetermined battle history transition condition is satisfied, the "battle history Q" is selected when determining the winning effect. Become. Compared to the “battle history P” in the “battle history Q”, in the long B and the long C, a part of the distribution in each pattern (departure, low hit, high hit) is changed.

Specifically, according to the distribution X2-Q of the outlier pattern, the distribution of the long battle B reach of the long B is decreased by “3”, and the distribution of the long battle B′ reach is reduced, compared with the distribution X2-P. Allotment increases by "3". Then, of the long C, the distribution of the long battle C reach is decreased by “3” and the distribution of the long battle C′ reach is increased by “3”. Further, according to the distribution Y2-Q of the low hit pattern, the distribution of the long battle B reach is decreased by “10” from the distribution of the long B compared to the distribution Y2-P, and the distribution of the long battle B′ reach is distributed. Is increased by "10". Then, of the long C, the distribution of the long battle C reach is decreased by “10” and the distribution of the long battle C′ reach is increased by “10”. Further, the distribution Z2-Q of the high hit pattern is also increased or decreased by "10" as in the case of the distribution Y2-Q of the low hit pattern. However, the total number of distributions for each type (long A, B, C) has not changed.

As described above, in the distribution table 2A, the number of distributions for the long battle B reach and the long battle C reach decreases with the transition from “war history P” to “war history Q”, but the The number of allocations for the long battle B'reach and the long battle C'reach that were "0" is increased. However, the increase/decrease in the distribution number is more than the increase/decrease number in the “out” (“3”), and the increase/decrease number in the “big hit” (“20” when the low hit is “10” and the high hit is “10”). Is decided to be more.

Next, when the battle history regarding Battle A is further recorded in the state in which the "battle history Q" is selected and the predetermined battle history transition condition is satisfied, the "battle history R" is selected when determining the winning effect. Will be done. In “Battle history R”, compared to “Battle history Q”, in Long B and Long C, a part of the allocation in each pattern (departure, low hit, high hit) has been changed. This is the same as the change of the sorting content when the battle history P is changed to the battle history Q.

In this way, as the battle history P is changed to the battle history Q, and further to the battle history R, the distribution numbers for the long battle B reach and the long battle C reach are gradually reduced, and the distribution number is initially set. The number of allocations for the long battle B'reach and the long battle C'reach of "0" gradually increases. Further, the difference between the increased/decreased number of distributions in “out” and the increased/decreased number of distributions in “big hit” is gradually increased. That is, when the battle history selected based on the record of the battle history shifts, the long battle B'reach is displayed when the long B type winning effect is selected, or the long C type winning effect is selected. The long battle C'reach will appear when you play. Then, when such a reach effect (long battle B', C') is executed, as described above, the battle A, which is the target of the record of the battle history, is in the middle of the effect contents similar to those of the long battle B, C reach. The reach screen (or the screen related to battle A reach) is displayed. That is, a variation pattern (for example, a long battle with a variation time of 60 seconds) different from a predetermined variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern with which the battle A reach can be selected with a variation time of 30 seconds) that can bring out a specific effect (battle A reach). Even if a variation pattern in which B can be selected is selected, the specific effect (battle A reach) can be made to appear by being able to show an alternative effect (for example, long battle B'reach).

In each of the battle histories P, Q, and R, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit (low hit or high hit) when each winning effect (reach effect) appears is as follows. Note that, as described above, each reliability is calculated in consideration of the appearance ratio of “off”: “low hit”: “high hit”=1:4:4, but details of the calculation formula are omitted. .. Also, the reliability of the reach effect whose distribution is “0” is not described.

First, regarding the reliability of big hits (combined low hits and high hits) in "War P",
Reliability of long A (long battle A) reach is 76.2% (160/210×100), reliability of long B (long battle B) reach is 88.9% (240/270×100), long C (Long Battle C) Reach reliability is 95.2% (400/420×100),
The reliability of the entire SP3 type is 88.9% (800/900×100).

Next, regarding the reliability of big hits (combined low hits and high hits) in "War history Q",
The reliability of the long A (long battle A) reach is 76.2% (as in the battle history P),
The reliability of Long Battle B reach is 85.6% (160/187×100),
The reliability of long battle B'reach is 96.4% (80/83×100),
The reliability of the whole Long B is 88.9% (the same as the battle history P),
The reliability of Long Battle C reach is 95.0% (320/337×100),
The reliability of long battle C'reach is 96.4% (80/83×100),
The reliability of the whole Long C is 95.2% (the same as the battle history P),
The reliability of the entire SP3 type is 88.9% (the same as the battle history P).

Next, regarding the reliability of big hits (combined low hits and high hits) in "Battle History R",
The reliability of the long A (long battle A) reach is 76.2% (as in the battle history P),
The reliability of long battle B reach is 76.2% (80/105×100),
The reliability of long battle B'reach is 97.0% (160/165×100),
The reliability of the whole Long B is 88.9% (the same as the battle history P),
The reliability of Long Battle C reach is 94.1% (240/255×100),
The reliability of the long battle C'reach is 97.0% (160/165×100),
The reliability of the whole Long C is 95.2% (the same as the battle history P),
The reliability of the entire SP3 type is 88.9% (the same as the battle history P).

In this way, when the “warfare history P” is changed to the “warfare history Q” and further to the “warfare history R”, the winning effect (long battle B′, C′) in which the distribution is newly added (increased) is present. There is a low probability that it will be "out of the picture" when it is released, but with a high probability (95% or more), you can strongly expect a big hit. That is, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the distribution table 2A is used, a predetermined variation pattern (for example, a battle A reach with a variation time of 30 seconds) that can cause a specific effect (battle A reach) to appear. Even if a fluctuation pattern different from the fluctuation pattern that can be selected (for example, a fluctuation pattern in which the long battle B can be selected with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds) is selected, an alternative effect (for example, long battle B'reach) can appear. By doing so, the particular effect (battle A reach) can be displayed, but such an alternative effect is selected when the expectation for a big hit is high. In other words, if the result of the special lottery is a big hit while recording the battle history, it is assumed that a "variation pattern different from the predetermined variation pattern that can bring out a specific effect" is selected. Also, since the "alternative effect" is easily selected as the winning effect, the "specific effect" is likely to appear. Therefore, when the "specific effect" is displayed while the battle history is being recorded, it is possible to realize a high degree of expectation for the big hit.

[6-4-2. Distributing effect patterns with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds (Part 2)]
FIG. 194 is a diagram (distribution table 2B) for explaining distribution of the effect pattern including the winning effect. The distribution table 2B shown in FIG. 194 is another example of the distribution table of effect patterns that can be used instead of the distribution table 2A shown in FIG. The distribution table 2B is a distribution table similar to the distribution table 2A shown in FIG. 193, except that the distribution contents according to the transition of the battle history are different, and the setting of each winning effect, battle history, etc. will be described. Omit it.

When compared with the distribution table 2A of FIG. 193, the distribution table 2B of FIG. 194 has different distribution amounts for the long battle B and the long battle C in the low hit pattern in the battle history Q and the battle history R. Specifically, in the distribution Y2-Q in the low hit pattern of the battle history Q, the distribution amount for the long battle B reach is reduced by "5" as compared with the distribution Y2-P in the low hit pattern of the battle history P. , The amount of distribution for the long battle B'reach increases by "5", the amount of distribution for the long battle C'reach decreases by "5", and the amount of distribution for the long battle C'reach increases by "5". Furthermore, in the distribution Y2-R in the low hit pattern of the battle history R, the distribution amount for the long battle B reach is reduced by "5" compared to the distribution Y2-Q in the low hit pattern of the battle history Q, and the long battle The distribution amount for the B'reach increases by "5", the distribution amount for the long battle C reach decreases by "5", and the distribution amount for the long battle C'reach increases by "5". It should be noted that the distribution amount in the high hit pattern is changed by "10" in each of "Battle history Q" and "Battle history R", as in the distribution table 2A.

As described above, in the distribution table 2B of FIG. 194, when the battle history changes based on the record of the battle history regarding the battle A (battle history Q, R), the long battle B'reach and the long battle C'in the low hit pattern are performed. The amount of distribution to the reach is made smaller than the amount of distribution to the same reach in the high hit pattern. Further, as in the case of the distribution table 2A, the increased/decreased number in the “big hit” (the low hit “5 in the battle history P to the battle history Q” is more than the increased/decreased number in the “out” (the battle history P to the battle history Q is “3”). "And "10" for high hits are summed up to "15"). Furthermore, it is preferable that the increase/decrease number in the “off” is set to be at least larger than the increase/decrease number in the “high hit”. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment uses the distribution table 2B as described above, and as with the distribution table 2A, a predetermined variation pattern that can bring out a specific effect (battle A reach). Even if a fluctuation pattern different from (for example, a fluctuation pattern in which the battle A reach can be selected with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds) (a fluctuation pattern in which long battle B or long battle C can be selected with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds) is selected, Not only can the specific effect (Battle A reach) be revealed by the appearance of the alternative effect (for example, long battle B'reach or long battle C'reach), but also such alternative effect can be achieved with a low hit. It can be more easily selected in the case of high hits.

As described above, the alternative effects (long battle B'reach, long battle C'reach) are more likely to be selected when the hit is higher than the low hit. Calculate and verify the reliability when issued.

First, in the "battle history P", neither the long battle B'reach nor the long battle C'reach is assigned, so that they are not displayed.

Next, in "Battle History Q",
The jackpot reliability of the long battle B'reach is 95.2% (60/63 x 100),
Breakdown by jackpot,
High hit reliability is 63.5% (40/63×100),
The low hit reliability is 31.7% (20/63×100).
The jackpot reliability of the long battle C'reach is 95.2% (60/63 x 100),
Breakdown by jackpot,
High hit reliability is 63.5% (40/63×100),
The low hit reliability is 31.7% (20/63×100).

Next, in "Battle R",
The jackpot reliability of the long battle B'reach is 96.0% (120/125 x 100),
Breakdown by jackpot,
High hit reliability is 64.0% (80/125×100),
The low hit reliability is 32.0% (40/125×100).
The jackpot reliability of the long battle C'reach is 96.0% (120/125×100),
Breakdown by jackpot,
High hit reliability is 64.0% (80/125×100),
The low hit reliability is 32.0% (40/125×100).

From the above calculated values, it is shown that when each alternative effect is revealed, the expectation for the high hit is higher than that for the low hit.In other words, each alternative effect is higher when the high hit is won than when the low hit is won. This is a winning effect that is easy to execute. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment uses the distribution table 2B as described above, and when the result of the special lottery is high hit while recording the battle history, the "specific effect" is given. Even if a “variation pattern different from the predetermined variation pattern that can cause the display” is selected, the “replacement effect” is easily selected as the winning effect, and thus the “specific effect” is easily displayed. Thus, a high degree of expectation for a high hit can be realized when the "specific effect" is displayed while the battle history is being recorded.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, regarding the teaching of the battle history as described in [6-2], "the variation pattern that can bring out a specific effect (battle A reach with a variation time of 30 seconds) varies. It has been described above that even in the case of a variation pattern with different times (alternate effect with a variation time of 60 seconds), it is executed in the same manner as in the case of the "variation pattern with the same variation time", but as described in [6-3]. Another example (processing relating to the timing of teaching the battle history, the process of resetting the battle history, and the like) can be similarly executed in the case of the alternative effect in which the variation time is 60 seconds. The explanation of each different example is omitted because it overlaps with the explanation of [6-3], but especially regarding the opportunity to erase the information about the record of the battle history, it is triggered by the fact that the alternative production was selected and it became a big hit. By erasing (or resetting) the information, even if "a variation pattern whose variation time is different from the variation pattern that can bring out a specific effect" is selected, it is based on the battle history. It is possible to change the distribution of the production, and it is possible to reflect that the big hit by the relevant production (alternative production) is reflected in the battle history, so to the big hit when a specific production appears based on the record and teaching of the battle history It is possible to more reliably provide the characteristic effect of improving the expectation of.

[6-5. Alternative production pattern]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a predetermined variation pattern that can cause a specific effect (for example, Battle A reach) to appear (for example, a variation pattern that Battle A reach can be selected with a variation time of 30 seconds). Even if a variation pattern different from (for example, a variation pattern in which a winning effect (long B, long C) of SP3 type can be selected with a variation time of 60 seconds) is selected, a specific effect based on the record of the battle history is substituted. It is possible to execute an "alternative effect (e.g., long battle B'reach or long battle C'reach)" that is displayed. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the distribution table such as the distribution table 2A (FIG. 193) or the distribution table 2B (FIG. 194) is used, so that the battle history is transferred based on the record of the battle history. When a big hit (or a high hit) is won while the player is in the midst of playing, it is easy to select such an alternative effect, and by executing the alternative effect, it is possible to bring out a specific effect in which the battle history is recorded. Become. In the following, regarding a specific effect pattern by such "alternative effect", a specific effect is described as an effect for battle A reach, and an alternative effect is referred to as a long battle B'reach. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the alternative effects shown by the following effect patterns may be combined and executable, and the effect pattern to be displayed as the alternative effect may be selected from the plurality of effect patterns. You can

In the above description, "Battle A reach" has been specified as a specific effect, but in the following, "Battle A reach effect (also referred to as "Battle A effect")" will be specified for more strict explanation. Directing. This "battle A reach production (battle A production)" is the reach state of "a series of productions by battle A reach" from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the formation of the reach state and then the variation of the decorative pattern. The effect after being formed is meant, and specifically corresponds to a battle-type effect in which the character A appears (for example, an effect after FIG. 192(C)). That is, the battle A reach consists of an effect until the reach state is formed (pre-reach effect) and a battle A effect. As the display period of the battle A reach, for example, in FIG. 199 described later, the pre-reach effect is displayed for 8 seconds, and then the battle A effect is displayed for 22 seconds.

[6-5-1. First production pattern of alternative production]
First, as a first effect pattern of the alternative effect, an alternative effect that causes a specific effect to appear in the first half of the display period of the alternative effect will be described.

195 and 196 are diagrams for explaining the transition of the effect image when the alternative effect according to the first effect pattern is executed. Each of FIGS. 195 and 196 shows an example of the effect screen of the long battle B'reach that appears when the record of the battle history regarding the effect of the battle A is being performed, and FIGS. 195(A) to 195(D). Up to here are examples of effect screens that appear in the first half of the display period of the long battle B'reach. It should be noted that, in each of FIGS. 195 and 196, the description of the effect screens similar to those described in FIGS. 190 to 192 will be simplified, and the simplification of such description is the same in FIGS. 197 and 198 described later. To do.

FIG. 195(A) shows a state in which the decorative pattern before the reach state is being changed (pre-reach state), and FIG. 195(B) shows the same decorative pattern (7) in the left column and the right column. It shows a state in which the reach state is formed by stopping the (pattern). The display state of the teaching areas 1900a to 1900c in FIG. 195A is similar to that in FIG. 192A. Specifically, when the transitional stage of the battle history is set to four stages including the initial setting (first stage), the teaching area 1900a in which the record of the battle history regarding the battle A effect is displayed is the green of the third stage, The teaching area 1900b in which the record of the battle history regarding the B effect is displayed is blue in the second stage, and the teaching area 1900c in which the record of the battle history regarding the C effect is displayed is white in the first stage.

When the reach state is formed in FIG. 195(B), the effect screen by the long battle B'reach is displayed, but at this time (in the first half of the display period of the long battle B'reach), it is a specific effect. The battle A effect appears (FIG. 195(C)). In FIG. 195(C), a confrontation effect between the ally character (character A) and the enemy character (character Z) is displayed. The details of the screen display and screen transition are shown in FIG. 192, SP2 type battle A. It may be similar to the reach, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described with reference to FIG. 192, also in FIG. 195(C), the teaching area 1900a is displayed more emphasized than in the normal state, so that the battle A effect in which the battle history is recorded is performed. The player can clearly recognize (visually recognize). Further, when the effect based on the record of the battle history appears, the reliability is enhanced, so the reliability of the Battle A effect displayed here is higher than the initial setting. It can be expected to have the effect of significantly increasing the interest of the.

After that, in the image display area 1900d, the battle production by the battle A production is displayed. As a result, when the character A wins due to the settlement within a predetermined production time (for example, 22 seconds), the victory screen is displayed ( 195(D)), when the settlement is not completed within a predetermined effect time, the confrontation effect by the character A is continuously displayed (FIG. 196(G)). Here, the predetermined effect time is a time until the first half of the display period of the alternative effect elapses, and is 22 seconds based on an example of a time chart (FIG. 197) described later. Then, in the case of shifting from FIG. 195(C) to FIG. 195(D), in the first half of the display period of the long battle B'reach, the character A wins by a confrontation effect similar to that of the battle A reach. The production ends.

In FIG. 195(D), the character A wins in the image display area 1900d, and the decorative pattern of the same symbol (“7” in the figure) is displayed in the second image display area 1900d. However, the decorative design shown in the second image display area 1900d in FIG. 195(D) is not stopped and displayed, and at least one decorative design is in a swinging state. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 195(E), the decorative pattern shown in the second image display area 1900d is displayed in the entire image display area 1900d, but at this time, at least one decorative pattern is in a swinging state. To be done. In other words, the swinging state of the decorative design is maintained in the latter half of the display period of the alternative effect, and after a predetermined time, the decorative designs in the left, middle, and right columns are stopped and displayed in the same design, and the big hit is won. Is shown (FIG. 195(F)). As a result, the player can recognize from the effect result displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 that the big hit has been won in this game. When the big hit is won as in FIG. 195(F), the big hit game is started after the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the game is stopped. In this way, the effect screens transiting in the order of FIGS. 195(A) to (F) are displayed in the long-battle pattern long battle B'reach.

On the other hand, after the battle A effect is started (FIG. 195(C)), if the settlement cannot be completed within a predetermined effect time, the confrontation effect by the character A continues as shown in FIG. 196(G). And displayed (extension effect of battle A). The extension effect of the battle A is continuously displayed even after entering the latter half of the display period of the alternative effect, and finally the battle result of victory or defeat of the character A is displayed according to the result of the special lottery. FIG. 196(H) is an example of the defeat screen of the character A displayed when the result of the special lottery is out of alignment. After that, a combination of decorative symbols other than the big hit (for example, "7/5/7") It is stopped and displayed (FIG. 196(I)). If the big hit is not won as in FIG. 196(I), after the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the game is stopped, the next game is started. Such an effect screen that transitions from FIG. 195(A) to (C) in the order of FIG. 196(G) to (I) is displayed in a long battle B'reach with a falling pattern.

In addition, in the above description, in the long battle B'reach of the outlier pattern, it is assumed that the transition is made from FIG. 195(A) to (C) to FIG. 196(G). In the production, such a production screen may be displayed. At this time, even if the effect screen of FIG. 196(G) is displayed without shifting to FIG. 195(D) in which the character A wins after FIG. 195(C), it may be an effect screen of the long battle A reach. Therefore, since the game result is not definitely determined as a failure, it is possible to prevent the player from giving up the game result. More specifically, when a long-battle pattern long-battle A reach appears, after the extension effect of the battle A is displayed in FIG. 196(G), the effect screen for the character A to win is displayed and the big hit. Is shown. When the long battle A reach of the off pattern or the long battle B'reach of the off pattern is selected, the effect screens of FIGS. 196(H) to (I) are displayed, and the game result of the off is confirmed. To do.

In this way, by displaying the effect screens shown in FIGS. 195 and 196, it is possible to realize an alternative effect of the first effect pattern that causes a specific effect to appear in the first half of the display period.

Next, another example of the alternative effect according to the first effect pattern will be described. 197 and 198 are separate diagrams for explaining the transition of the effect image when the alternative effect according to the first effect pattern is executed. 197 and 198 each show an example of the production screen of the long battle B'reach that appears when the record of the battle history regarding the battle A production is being performed, and FIGS. 197(A) to 197(D). Up to here are examples of effect screens that appear in the first half of the display period of the long battle B'reach. Note that FIGS. 197(A) to (D) and FIGS. 198(H) to (J) are the same effect screens as FIGS. 195(A) to (D) and FIGS. 196(G) to (I), respectively. Therefore, the description is omitted.

197 and 198, as another example of the alternative effect according to the first effect pattern, the battle A effect appears in a manner in which the character A wins in the first half of the display period of the long battle B'reach (alternative effect). The example of the effect screen in which the effect screen (episode A) regarding the character A is displayed in the latter half of the subsequent display period is shown. Specifically, when the long-hit pattern B'reach of the big hit pattern is selected, after the character A wins the character Z in FIG. 197(D), the character A in FIG. Episode A is displayed as shown in (F), and then a stop display of a decorative pattern showing a big hit is performed (FIG. 197 (G)). On the other hand, when the long battle B'reach of the detachment pattern is selected, the process transits to FIG. 198(I) after FIG. 197(C) and the effect screen showing the game result of the detachment is displayed as in FIG. 196. Will be.

In this way, even when the effect screens shown in FIGS. 197 and 198 are displayed, as in the case of the effect screen examples shown in FIGS. 195 and 196, the specific effect is displayed in the first half of the display period. , It is possible to realize an alternative effect of the first effect pattern.

196(H) to (I) and 198(I) to (J) show that the game result is not a big hit but is out of spite of the appearance of the battle A effect. , This outlying game may be the record target of the battle history. At this time, as shown in FIG. 196(H) and FIG. 198(I), the display contents of the teaching area 1900a corresponding to the battle history of "A" change, and specifically, from the green of the third stage to the fourth. It becomes red in the stage (shaded in the figure). In this way, when the big hit cannot be obtained despite the specific effect (Battle A effect) being displayed in the alternative effect, the history of the battle is recorded, and the player is notified of the result of this game. It is possible to make the expectation for a higher jackpot higher in the case where a specific effect is again displayed in the subsequent game without making it feel useless.

As described above, in the alternative effect according to the first effect pattern, a specific effect regarding the recording of the battle history appears in the first half of the display period of the alternative effect, but the display timing of each effect screen accompanying the transition of the effect time. Will be explained again in chronological order. FIG. 199 is a time chart for explaining an alternative effect according to the first effect pattern. In FIG. 199(A), when the alternative effect (long battle B'reach) by the first effect pattern appears, FIG. 195(A) to (F) or FIG. 197(A) to (G) is displayed. FIG. 199(B) is a time chart when the big hit is shown in the flow, and FIG. 199(B) or FIG. 196(G) when the alternative effect (long battle B'reach) by the first effect pattern appears. It is a time chart at the time of shifting to 198 (I).

In FIG. 199(A), first, 8 seconds elapse in the “pre-reach state” until the variable display of the decorative pattern is started and the reach state is formed (for example, FIGS. 195(A) to (B)). Then, triggered by the formation of the reach state, the battle A effect appears for 22 seconds (for example, FIG. 195(C)). After that, when the character A wins in the battle A (for example, FIG. 195(D)), the decorative pattern of the same symbol is displayed in a swinging state for 30 seconds (for example, FIG. 195(E)), and then a big hit. Is displayed (for example, FIG. 195(F)). In addition, instead of the decorative design of the same design being displayed in a swinging state, episode A may be displayed for 30 seconds (for example, FIGS. 197(E) to (F)).

In FIG. 199(A) as described above, the entire display period of the alternative effect is 60 seconds, and the variation time of the special symbol variation pattern in which the winning effect (including the long battle B'reach) of the SP3 type can be selected. It corresponds. Then, it is understood that the battle A effect, which is a specific effect, has appeared by the time 30 seconds in the first half of the display period of the alternative effect have elapsed. The time chart shown in FIG. 199(A) shows the case of the alternative effect (long battle B′) of the big hit pattern.

Further, in FIG. 199(B), after the state in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is started and the reach state is formed (pre-reach state), the battle A effect is 22 seconds in the first half of the alternative effect display period. Although it appears all over, the battle A effect is continuously displayed in the latter half of the display period of the alternative effect as “extension effect of battle A” without being settled in the battle (for example, FIG. 196 (G)). .. After that, the settlement of the battle is displayed, and the player is shown whether or not the game result of this game is a big hit (off). The time chart shown in FIG. 199(B) shows the case of alternative production (long battle B') of a falling pattern or the case of winning production (long battle A) of the same type (SP3 type) different from the alternative production. There is.

As described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 199, in the alternative effect according to the first effect pattern, a specific effect appears in the first half of the display period of the alternative effect based on the recorded (and taught) battle history. Therefore, the player can increase the expectation of a big hit (especially a high hit) by recognizing that the specific effect has appeared from the beginning of the alternative effect. Then, even if the particular production (for example, Battle A production) has a relatively low expectation (ie, reliability in Battle A reach) for the particular production, it appears as an alternative production based on the record of the battle history. When the game is played, since the production is performed with high reliability, it is possible to make the player have an expectation for a big hit (particularly, a big hit), and it is possible to enhance the interest of the player.

In addition, in the description with reference to FIGS. 195 to 199 described above, when the long battle B'reach is executed as the alternative production when the battle history with the battle A production as the specific production is recorded, after the reach state is formed. Since the battle A effect is immediately displayed, the battle A effect is internally displayed even though the B-type (non-A-type) winning effect that is unrelated to the character A is internally selected. That is not recognized by the player. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as another example, when executing the alternative production, the player is made aware that the non-A winning presentation is selected, and the battle A production is displayed. You may do it. Specifically, for example, after the reach state is formed as shown in FIG. 195(B), a screen (character selection screen) for selecting the character to be displayed is displayed before the game is transferred to the competition production. To Then, on the character selection screen, the initial state is set to the state in which the character B is selected, the character A is selected at the time of determination, and the battle A effect by the character A appears in the subsequent confrontation effect. do it.

By doing so, it is possible to cause the player to recognize the winning effect for the character B and to cause the battle A effect, which is a specific effect, to appear in the first half of the alternative effect. Then, in such a case, the change of the selected character from B to A is clearly indicated, whereby the player's expectation can be increased. More specifically, for example, even if the expectation to the big hit regarding the winning effect for the character B is not relatively high, by changing to a specific effect based on the record of the battle history (battle A effect), The expectation for a big hit (especially a high hit) can be sharply increased. Further, in the initial state of the character selection screen, a non-A winning effect (in this case, for example, a reach of a battle B type) is expected, so that the player is expected to have a big hit by the winning effect, and then, By selecting the character A corresponding to the record of the battle history, it is possible to make the player have a higher expectation for a big hit (particularly, a big hit). Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment as described above. If so, the interest of the player can be gradually increased.

[6-5-2. Second production pattern of alternative production]
Next, as a second effect pattern of the alternative effect, a specific effect is displayed within the display period of the alternative effect, and a related effect related to the specific effect is displayed between the specific effects that are displayed. The alternative effect to be displayed will be described. In addition, when a specific effect (battle A effect) appears in the second effect pattern and the third and fourth effect patterns described later, FIGS. Although a confrontation effect by the character A with the enemy character is displayed as in 198, the details are omitted because they are duplicated.

FIG. 200 is a time chart for explaining the alternative effect according to the second effect pattern. FIG. 200(A) is a time chart of the first example of the alternative effect according to the second effect pattern, and FIG. 200(B) is a time chart of the second example of the alternative effect according to the second effect pattern. The first example and the second example have different timings at which the related effects are displayed, but a specific effect (battle A effect) appears within the display period of the alternative effect (long battle B'reach), Moreover, there is no change in the point that the related effect appears between the specific effects. In the second effect pattern, as in battle A1 to battle A4 shown in FIG. 200(A), in the case of other effect patterns, a specific effect (battle A effect) that is continuously displayed is repeated a plurality of times. It is divided into two and appears.

First, in the first example of the alternative effect by the second effect pattern shown in FIG. 200(A), the battle A effect (battle A1 to battle A4) that appears during the display period of the alternative effect, the battle A The related productions (cut-in 1 to cut-in 3) related to the production are displayed multiple times.

Specifically, when the reach state is formed 8 seconds after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the battle A effect is first started (battle A1). In the battle A1, for example, the start of the confrontation effect between the ally character A and the enemy character Z is displayed. When 6 seconds have elapsed after the image regarding the battle A1 is displayed, the first related effect is displayed (cut-in 1). In the cut-in 1, for example, the character A makes a punch attack on the character Z, and whether or not the attack is hit is displayed. Whether or not the attack is hit may be determined by an internal calculation based on the result (whether or not it is a big hit) of the special lottery in the present game. When the attack hits, the physical strength of the enemy character shown in the gauge area 1900g (see FIG. 195C, for example) is reduced to give the player an impression of approaching victory.

After the cut-in 1 display period (8 seconds) has elapsed, the continuation of the battle A effect is displayed again for 4 seconds (battle A2). After that, the second related effect is displayed for 8 seconds (cut-in 2). In the cut-in 2, for example, similarly to the punch attack in the cut-in 1, the character A makes a kick attack on the character Z, and whether or not the attack is hit is displayed. When the attack hits, the physical strength of the enemy character shown in the gauge area 1900g is further reduced, and the player is given an impression of being closer to victory.

Then, it returns to the continuation of the battle A effect again (battle A3), and after 4 seconds, the third related effect is displayed for 14 seconds (cut-in 3). In the cut-in 3, for example, the mysterious attack is displayed as a stronger attack than the attacks in the cut-in 1 and the cut-in 2, and when the result of the special lottery in this game is a big hit, the mysterious attack is targeted to the enemy character. The display will appear as if it were centered. When the mysterious attack hits, the physical strength of the enemy character shown in the gauge area 1900g is reduced to 0 in the subsequently displayed battle A effect (battle A4) to show the victory of the character A, and the book. Let the player recognize that the game result of the game is a big hit. When the mysterious attack does not hit the target (failure), the defeat of the character A is shown in the battle A4, and the player is made to recognize that the game result of this game is a failure. The production time of the battle A4 shown in FIG. 200(A) is 8 seconds, which is the longest among the divided battle A productions (battle A1 to battle A4).

According to the production of the first example as described above, the related production is displayed multiple times in the interval in which the battle A that is a specific production is displayed, so that the degree of expectation for the outcome of the battle A can be increased. It can be increased/decreased for each related performance, and the expectation of the player can be variously changed. Specifically, the more successful the above-mentioned punch attack and kick attack, the more you can expect a big hit, or even if both punch attack and kick attack do not succeed, as long as the last secret attack hits. You can expect a comeback victory.

Further, the content of the related effect in the first example is not limited to the attack of the character A as described above, and may be various effects having the meaning of enlivening a specific effect. For example, the attack of the enemy character Z may be displayed to determine whether or not the attack can be avoided, or the expectation level may be changed depending on the attack pattern (type of technique) to appear between the characters. Further, the display color may be changed to change the degree of expectation, which is performed not only in the related effects (cut-in 1 to cut-in 3) but also in the specific effects (battle A1 to battle A4). Good.

Next, in the second example of the alternative effect according to the second effect pattern shown in FIG. 200(B), the battle is performed between the battle A effects (battle A1 and battle A4) that appear during the display period of the alternative effect. Related effects (cut-in) related to A effects are continuously displayed.

Specifically, when the reach state is formed 8 seconds after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the battle A effect is first started (battle A1). In the battle A1, for example, the start of the confrontation effect between the ally character A and the enemy character Z is displayed. When 10 seconds have elapsed after the image regarding the battle A1 is displayed, the related effect of the battle A is displayed (cut-in). In the cut-in, for example, a conversation between the character A and the character Z is displayed, and thereafter, a display as if the character A is powered up is performed. The effect result by cut-in may be determined by internal calculation based on the result of the special lottery. The expectation for the jackpot is changed according to the content of the conversation and the display color exchanged between the character A and the character Z, and if the character A succeeds in powering up, the attack power of the character A is increased. Give the player the impression of approaching victory.

Then, after the cut-in effect is displayed for 30 seconds, the continuation of the battle A effect is displayed for 12 seconds, and it is determined whether or not the character A wins (battle A4). When the long hit B'reach of the big hit pattern is selected, the victory of the character A is shown in the battle A4, and the player is made to recognize that the game result of this game is the big hit. If the long battle B'reach of the off pattern is selected, the defeat of the character A is shown in the battle A4, and the player is made aware that the game result of this game is off.

According to the production of the second example, the related production (cut-in) for a long time of 30 seconds appears between the appearance of the battle A which is the specific production, so that Over a time longer than the original fluctuation time (30 seconds for the entire Battle A reach including the Battle A effect) (52 seconds in total for Battle A1, A4, and cut-in in Fig. 200(B)) A relevant production will be revealed. As a result, the player's attention level and expectation level with respect to a specific effect can be improved, and the expectation of a big hit (particularly high hit) can be increased.

As described in the first and second examples above, in the battle A4, the final determination result (whether or not it is a big hit) of the winning effect by the alternative effect is shown. Therefore, the effect period of the battle A4 Can be said to be one of the most important production periods in the progress of the alternative production. Therefore, in the second pattern of the alternative production, among the battle A productions (battle A1 to battle A4) that appear in multiple times, the production time of the battle A production that appears last (that is, battle A4). Is preferably set to be the longest. For example, in FIG. 200(A) of the first example, the effect time of the battle A4 is 8 seconds, which is longer than the effect time of up to 6 seconds by the other battle A effects (battle A1 to battle A3). Further, for example, in FIG. 200(B) of the second example, the effect time of the battle A4 is 12 seconds, which is longer than the effect time of 10 seconds by the other battle A effects (battle A1).

In this way, in the second effect pattern of the alternative effect, among the specific effects (battle A effect) that appear multiple times during the display period of the alternative effect, the determination result in the alternative effect is displayed. When the effect time of the effect (battle A4) is set to be longer than the effect time of another specific effect (battle A1 to battle A3) that has been divided, the "determination result (for example, whether or not a big hit)" is set. Since it is possible to secure a long period for displaying, it is possible to expect the effect of sufficiently attracting the interest of the player and enhancing the interest.

In the second effect pattern of the alternative effect, the display pattern of the related effect that appears during the time when the specific effect appears is selected from a plurality of types (for example, the first example and the second example). In addition, it is possible to make a difference in the degree of expectation for a big hit for each display pattern. In such a case, since it is possible to make a difference in the degree of improvement in the player's expectation, it is possible to expect an increase in playability. Further, as described above, even if the specific effect is an effect with a relatively low reliability in the initial setting, the reliability is increased when the alternative effect is displayed, so that the player's interest is high. The effect of suppressing the decrease of

It should be noted that, with reference to FIGS. 200(A) and (B), the example of the effect in the case where the long battle B'reach is selected as the alternative effect while the battle history regarding the battle A effect is being recorded has been described. However, the production of another winning production of SP3 type (specifically, long battle A reach) having the same variation time as the alternative production of the long battle B'reach is similar to the production content except the related production of the alternative production. You may do so. In such a case, comparing the long A battle reach and the alternative effect (long battle B'reach), the variable time is 60 seconds, and the point that the battle-type effect screen by the character A is displayed. The common difference is whether or not a cut-in as a related effect is generated. Further, the degree of expectation for a big hit (or a big hit) is higher in the alternative effect as described with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194. Therefore, the player cannot determine whether it is the long battle A reach or the long battle B'reach (alternative performance) until the cut-in (related performance) occurs, and further, when the cut-in occurs, the expectation level is high. Since you can guess the high long battle B'reach, you can hold more expectations depending on the progress status of the production.

In addition, the production of Long Battle A reach can also display a production screen similar to the related production in Long Battle B'reach, making it even more similar to Long Battle B'reach than the long battle A reach described in the previous section. May be. In such a case, it becomes more difficult to distinguish between the long battle A reach and the long battle B'reach, and the player can enjoy the display result until the effect is completed.

Further, in the second effect pattern of the alternative effect, a short battle of 30 seconds including a specific effect (for example, in FIGS. 200(A) and (B), a pre-reach state of 8 seconds and a battle A effect of 22 seconds in total). Insertion control for inserting an interstage effect (e.g., corresponding to the cut-in effect in FIGS. 200A and 200B) when the performance appearance control for displaying a 30-second effect including and is performed. When the insertion control is performed, the interruption control for interrupting the performance appearance control may be performed. Note that the interruption control interrupts the execution of the interruption control when a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds corresponding to the cut-in 1 in the interruption control after the battle A1 in FIG. 200A) elapses, and the interruption timing By performing control so that the performance appearance control is restarted (the effect screen corresponding to the battle A2 is displayed), the alternative effect can be displayed.

In addition to this, when the variation time of 60 seconds is selected, an effect pattern may be provided on the peripheral control board 4010 side as effect data capable of displaying the alternative effect itself. In this way, by providing the effect pattern as the alternative effect from the beginning, the alternative effect can be displayed even when any of the first to fourth effect patterns is selected.

[6-5-3. Third production pattern of alternative production]
Next, as a third effect pattern of the alternative effect, an alternative effect that suggests that a specific effect is started within the display period of the alternative effect and causes the suggested specific effect to appear will be described.

FIG. 201 is a time chart for explaining the alternative effect according to the third effect pattern. In the time chart of FIG. 201, the change of the effect screen with the passage of time when the alternative effect (for example, long battle B'reach) is selected when the battle history is recorded with the battle A effect as the specific effect. It is shown.

Referring to FIG. 201, first, in the initial 8 seconds of the display period of the alternative effect, there is a period (pre-reach state) until the variation of the decorative symbol starts to form the reach state. After that, the suggestive effect appears for 30 seconds (the suggestive effect A). This suggestive effect A is an effect having a content that suggests that the display of the “specific effect (battle A effect)” in which the battle history is recorded is started, and is the degree of expectation that the specific effect is started. It may be made to appear by selecting from a plurality of different types of suggestive effects. Further, the suggestive effect A may be made to appear even during the pre-reach state.

A specific example of the effect of the suggestive effect A is shown below. For example, a predictive effect display such as “something happens” is displayed in the early stage of the suggestive effect, a notice that the “competitive effect” is performed in the middle stage, and the character A is scheduled to appear in the final stage is “character A will appear”. This suggests that the battle production (that is, the battle A production) is started.

Further, for example, by causing an enemy character to appear in the early stage of the suggestive performance A, displaying a critical situation of the ally by the enemy character in the middle stage, and asking the character A for help in the final stage, the character is displayed after the suggestive performance A. It is suggested that the battle with the enemy character by A (that is, the battle A effect) is started.

Further, for example, in the early stage of the suggestive effect A, a screen in which the battle B effect by the character B is likely to start is displayed, and in the middle stage, the character A appears before the start of the battle B effect and substitutes for the character B. By performing a conversation and displaying a screen in which the character B changes to the character A in the final stage, it is suggested that the battle effect by the character A (that is, the battle A effect) is started after the suggestion effect A.

Then, after such a suggestive effect (indicative effect A) is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), a specific effect whose start is suggested by the suggestive effect is displayed for 22 seconds. (Battle A). In the battle A, a battle effect in which the character A competes with an enemy character is displayed, and when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, it finally shows the victory of the character A and the game result of this game is a big hit. To let the player recognize. If the result of the special lottery is not a big hit (defeat), the character A is finally defeated, and the player is made aware that the game result of this game is a defeat.

It should be noted that, in the alternative effect by the third effect pattern, it is emphasized that a specific effect (battle A effect) corresponding to the record of the battle history is displayed in the battle A effect in the latter half. It is preferable to teach. Further, at the stage of the suggestive effect, such an emphasized instruction is not performed, and an expected effect such as blinking the teaching area 1900a related to the battle A is shown to indicate that a specific effect may be started. It may be performed. In this way, by clearly informing the player of the relationship between the record of the battle history and the appearance of a specific effect, the player is sure to have an effect with a high expectation for a big hit (especially a high hit). You can visually recognize that it is being issued.

When the alternative effect according to the third effect pattern as described above is performed, the specific effect (Battle A effect) is generated at the time when the suggested effect appears, even before the battle A effect is actually started. ) Can create an expected period that raises the player's expectation of appearing. Since the expectation for a big hit (especially a high hit) is high when the battle A effect appears, it takes a long time (52 seconds in the example of FIG. 201) from the suggestion effect A to the end of the battle A effect. Through this, the player's expectations and interests can be increased.

In addition, when the suggestive effect is displayed, the “start of a specific effect” may be determined without fail or with a relatively high probability, and in such a case, the player may display the suggestive effect. Since you can be confident that a specific production with high reliability will appear in the early stage of the alternative production, you can expect a future advantageous game development (big hit or high hit) with a sense of security. ..

In addition, a so-called "fake suggestive effect" may be included so that the "start of a specific effect" is not necessarily fixed even if the suggestive effect appears, and in such a case, It is possible to increase the sense of expectation over the appearance of a specific production with high reliability than usual, and to enjoy the game development with a sense of excitement until the specific production is actually displayed. it can.

Further, the suggestion effect in the third effect pattern of the alternative effect is not necessarily limited to the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and may be a mode in which it is possible to suggest that a specific effect is started in the latter half of the alternative effect. For example, other effect methods such as an effect effect of an accessory or a lighting effect of an LED lamp may be adopted, and these effect methods may be combined.

[6-5-4. Fourth production pattern of alternative production]
Next, as a fourth effect pattern of the alternative effect, in the first half of the display period of the alternative effect, a "different effect" that is difficult to recall the specific effect (not relevant to the specific effect) appears, and the alternative effect is generated. An alternative effect that causes a specific effect to appear in the latter half of the display period will be described.

FIG. 202 is a time chart for explaining an alternative effect according to the fourth effect pattern. In the time chart of FIG. 202, the change of the effect screen with the lapse of time when the alternative effect (for example, long battle B'reach) is selected when the battle history is recorded with the battle A effect as a specific effect It is shown.

Referring to FIG. 202, first, in the initial 8 seconds of the display period of the alternative effect, there is a period (pre-reach state) until the variation of the decorative pattern starts and the reach state is formed. After that, the "different effect" appears for 30 seconds (as the different effect A, for example, battle B). As described above, the "different effect" is an effect that is difficult to recall a specific effect (the battle A effect in this case), and may be an effect that is less relevant to the specific effect. Here, as the different effect A in the long battle B'reach, a battle B effect in which the character B competes with the enemy character appears, but an effect that another character competes (for example, battle C effect) or , A production other than the battle format by a character or a story unrelated to the character A (for example, the story B described in FIG. 186 and the like) may be used.

In the different effect, some kind of effect (for example, the character B loses or wins) may or may not be added as effect content, but in any case, the variation of all the decorative symbols does not stop and substitutes. The decorative design changes until the battle A effect that appears in the latter half of the effect ends.

Then, after the different effect A appears for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), a specific effect appears (battle A). In the battle A, a battle effect in which the character A competes with an enemy character is displayed, and when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, it finally shows the victory of the character A and the game result of this game is a big hit. To let the player recognize. If the result of the special lottery is not a big hit (defeat), the character A is finally defeated, and the player is made aware that the game result of this game is a defeat.

In the alternative effect according to the fourth effect pattern, it is emphasized that a specific effect (battle A effect) corresponding to the record of the battle history appears in the battle A effect in the latter half. It is preferable to teach. In this way, by clearly informing the player of the relationship between the record of the battle history and the appearance of the specific effect, the player is able to express the specific effect in the latter half of the alternative effect, It is possible to visually recognize that the expectation for a big hit (especially a high hit) is high.

Here, the connection in production between the different production and the subsequent specific production will be described in detail with a specific example. For example, when the battle B effect appears as the different effect A, the effect in which the character B, which is a ally character, competes with the character Z, which is an enemy character, is displayed. Then, as an example of the different effect A, a screen in which the character B is defeated by the character Z in the battle B effect is displayed so that the player's point of view feels that the main game is out of order. After that, the character A appears after a lapse of a certain time, and a screen in which the character A challenges the character Z for a rematch is displayed. According to such an alternative effect, a different effect A is performed in the first half of the alternative effect, and then a specific effect (battle A effect) appears in the latter half of the alternative effect, so that the character B is once defeated. After that, when the character A starts the insult game and the character A wins in the battle A production, the big hit is shown to the player. Therefore, the player once becomes aware of the deviation of the main game, and then the big hit. Expectations can be revived and interest can be expected to rise sharply.

Further, as another example of the different effect, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the different effect A is used as a part of the effect of changing the decorative design arranged in the image display area 1900d in accordance with the degree of advantage of the big hit. You can That is, a screen in which the character B wins over the character Z in the different effect A (battle B effect) in the first half is displayed, and at this time, a mode of arranging the decorative symbols showing a big hit (low hit) with a relatively low degree of advantage is temporarily. Display (in rocking state). After that, the character A suddenly appears in the final stage of the different effect A so that the promotion effect of the jackpot is started, and a specific effect (battle A effect) appears as the promotion effect. When the result of the special lottery is a big hit (high hit) with a relatively high degree of advantage, the character A wins in the battle A effect, and the arrangement pattern of the decorative symbols is changed to the high hit. .. Further, when the result of the special lottery is not a big hit (high hit) with a relatively high degree of advantage, it is displayed that the character A cannot win in the battle A effect (for example, a draw), and the arrangement mode of the decorative symbols is changed. You should not do it. According to such an alternative effect, after giving the joy that a big hit is shown by a different effect to the player and then suddenly causing a specific effect as a promotion effect to appear, the jackpot is relatively less advantageous. The player's remorse for being a big hit (low hit) is given an opportunity to be dispelled, and when converted to a jackpot with a higher degree of advantage, great pleasure can be given to the player. It has the effect of giving a multi-level satisfaction to the person.

As described above, in the alternative effect according to the fourth effect pattern, the particular effect appears after the appearance of the different effect in which it is difficult to recall the specific effect, thereby making the player have a surprise and expectation. Therefore, it is possible to expect an effect of increasing the interest of the player with respect to various effects that can be exhibited by the pachinko machine 1.

More specifically, when the alternative effect according to the fourth effect pattern is performed, a different effect unrelated to the specific effect is performed in the first half of the alternative effect. Therefore, at this stage, the player is aware of the specific effect. You can enjoy the game development by different production without. Then, by suddenly appearing a specific effect, it is possible to provide a game play with a surprise, and by further appearing the specific effect, the degree of expectation for a big hit (especially a high hit). The interests can be increased, and thus the interest can be increased.

In addition, as described above, in the alternative effect according to the fourth effect pattern, the specific effect is displayed after the different effect is displayed as long as the variation time for displaying the specific effect is secured. The timing can be changed arbitrarily. In the pachinko machine 1 in which such an alternative effect can be executed, it is not known from a player's point of view at which timing a specific effect (battle A effect) appears. For example, when SP2 type battle B reach or SP3 type long battle B reach is selected, the battle production by the character B is started, but the battle production is not displayed thereafter and the battle production is performed. finish. However, when the long battle B'reach is selected, even if the character B is unable to win due to the battle B effect, the battle A effect by the character A is revealed, and the expectation for the jackpot is again obtained. Since it can be held, the player can enjoy the development of the production while always having a sense of expectation for a particular production that may occur.

In the alternative effect of the fourth effect pattern, as described above, the different effect may be an effect that has little relevance to the specific effect, but as a further relationship, it may be a winning effect recalled from the specific effect. It is also possible to intentionally form a relationship in which there is a difference in the reliability of the big hits with respect to the winning and hitting effects recollected from the different effects.

For example, when the specific effect is the battle A effect and the different effect is the battle B effect, referring to the above-mentioned sorting tables (1A, 1B) and the like, it is recalled from the battle A effect that is the specific effect. The effect (for example, SP2 type) is the battle A reach, and the winning effect (for example, SP2 type) that is recalled from the battle B effect of the different effect A is the battle B reach. Comparing the reliability of the jackpot in the initial stage (battle history P) for each winning effect, the battle B reach has a higher reliability than the battle A reach (see FIGS. 187 and 189). When the B effect is viewed as an independent effect, the expectation for a big hit (or high hit) is higher when the battle B effect is revealed than when the battle A effect is revealed. Further, even when compared with the winning effects of the SP3 type, the reliability of the long battle B reach that is evoked from the battle B production is higher than that of the long battle B reach that is evoked from the battle A production ([6-4 −1], “6-4-2”), the expectation for a big hit is higher in the battle B effect than in the battle A effect. In this way, in the alternative production of the fourth production pattern in which the different production A (battle B production) is more reliable than the specific production (battle A production), the high production reliability is different in the first half. The appearance of the effect A can increase the player's expectation for a big hit. Then, when the big hit cannot be reached in the different effect A (defeated in the battle B effect), the player is once disappointed, but after that, a specific effect (battle A effect) appears. Once again, the player can be expected to hit the jackpot. That is, even if the jackpot is not shown in the high-reliability rendering that appears in the first half of the alternative rendering, the jackpot can be expected again due to the subsequent development (the appearance of a specific rendering). It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, for example, when the particular effect is the battle A effect, the effect having a lower reliability than the battle A effect may be used as the different effect A, and the alternative effect according to the fourth effect pattern may be performed. Strictly speaking, the phrase "reduction with lower reliability than the battle A effect" is an effect that can be associated with a winning effect having a lower reliability than the winning effect recalled by the battle A effect. At this time, even if a low-reliability different production appears in the first half of the alternative production, it may not be possible for the player to have a high expectation for a big hit, but then in the latter half of the alternative production, the high-reliability production By the appearance of a specific effect (battle A effect), the player's expectation for a big hit can be sharply increased. That is, even if an effect with a relatively low reliability appears in the first half of the alternative effect, the reliability is high as long as a specific effect (battle A effect) appears thereafter, so the reliability is low. Even if the production of "1" appears, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for a big hit or a high hit, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, when a specific effect based on the record of the battle history appears after the different effect, the expectation for the big hit (especially high hit) is increased, so that the specific effect suddenly appears. , It is possible to realize not only the enjoyment in production but also the expectation in actual benefit (acquisition of benefits).

In addition, as described in the specific example of the different effect, when the battle A effect by the character A appears after the character B is defeated in the battle B effect, the effect is a revival pattern, so one game Since it is possible to make the player feel that the winning effect is being performed multiple times (there are multiple winning opportunities) in the effect, it is expected that the player's interest will be enhanced. Furthermore, if different productions that lead to such a revival pattern are made to appear multiple times during the first half of one alternate production, it is possible to realize continuous productions with even more chances of winning or losing. The interest in can be further enhanced.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the alternative effects according to the first to fourth effect patterns are performed, so that a specific effect (battle A effect) based on the record of the battle history is originally provided. Even when the display time longer than the display time (Battle A effect is 22 seconds, and Battle A reach as a whole is 30 seconds) is selected (here, 60 seconds alternative effect), it can be displayed. Generally, the longer the display time, the more likely the player's expectation is that the game result will be a big hit or a high hit. By doing so, it is possible to expect an effect that makes the player feel the importance and high reliability of the game.

In addition, as described above in [6-4-1] to [6-4-2], the ratio of the alternative effect executed when a big hit (or a high hit) is made while the battle history is being recorded is , Higher than when the history of the battle is not recorded. Therefore, if the particular effect is displayed while the memory history and the teaching regarding the specific effect (battle A effect) are being performed, the player increases the expectation for a big hit (or a high hit). However, such a specific effect can be displayed by an alternative effect even if the winning effect has a variation time different from the original variation time (30 seconds Battle A reach) corresponding to the battle A effect. Therefore, it can be expected that a specific effect will appear regardless of the change time of the special change pattern, and the player's expectation for a plurality of types of winning/descending effects can be increased.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reliability regarding a specific effect (reliability in a winning effect in which a specific effect appears) is improved by the transition of the battle history, and therefore the specific effect is relatively set in the initial setting. Even if it is a low-reliability production in which the expectation for a big hit is low, it can be expected as a production with a high expectation in a specific production after the battle history is recorded. As a result, there is an effect of suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player due to the appearance of the low-reliability effect as seen in the conventional gaming machine.

[6-6. Supplement on decision of production pattern]
In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when using the distribution table as described above in [6-1] to [6-4], it is not always necessary to change the distribution in the low hit pattern. .. However, when changing the distribution in the low hit pattern, the change should be made so as not to exceed the amount of increase in the distribution in the high hit pattern. Specifically, in the case of the distribution tables 1A and 1B, the change amount is set so as not to exceed the amount of increase in the distribution of the specific winning/winning effect (battle A reach) in the high hit pattern. By doing so, even if the distribution for the low hit pattern is changed, by increasing the distribution amount for the high hit pattern, a specific winning effect will appear in the game after the record of the battle history is made. When you are hit, you can increase the expectation for high hits. In addition, in the case of the distribution tables 2A and 2B, the distribution is increased within the winning effect (long battle B'reach, long battle C'reach) so as not to exceed the amount of increase in the distribution of the high hit pattern. It shall be. In this way, even if the distribution for the low hit pattern is changed, by increasing the distribution amount in the high hit pattern, in the game after the record of the battle history is performed, a specific winning effect (battle A reach) A fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern in which a long battle B can be selected in a fluctuation time of 60 seconds) different from a predetermined fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern in which a battle A reach can be selected in a fluctuation time of 30 seconds) is selected. Even if it is done, it is possible to bring out the particular effect (battle A reach) by allowing the long battle B'reach to appear, and it is possible to increase the expectation for a high hit.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the “Battle A reach (strictly speaking, Battle A effect)” that can be selected when the variation time is 30 seconds has been described as the specific effect (specific winning effect). It may be a specific effect. Further, the target of the specific effect is not limited to one reach effect, and a plurality of related reach effects may be targets of the specific effect. Specifically, for example, by setting the reach effect for the character A as a specific effect, not only the battle A reach that can be selected when the fluctuation pattern has a fluctuation time of 30 seconds but also when the fluctuation pattern has a fluctuation time of 60 seconds. The long battle A reach that can be selected can also be included in the "specific effect" of the same category. If the battle history is recorded for such a "specific effect", not only when the battle A reach is revealed in the outlying manner, but also when the long battle A reach is exhibited in the outlying manner. Also, the battle history is recorded. As a result, since the result of the battle history of "the reach regarding the character A has been revealed in an outlying manner" is collectively recorded, a large number of winning effects related to the character A are presented but a big hit cannot be obtained. In such a case, the character A can be powered up, and the expectation for a big hit (and a big hit) when such a winning effect appears next time can be increased.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the probability variation big hit is referred to as “high hit” with a high degree of advantage, and the normal big hit is referred to as “low hit” with a low degree of advantage. The category of “low hit” is not particularly limited. For example, high hits and low hits may be classified based on other conditions related to the gaming state after the winning game (whether or not a time saving game is given, the number of times saving time game is given, etc.). When such a classification is made for “high hit” and “low hit”, it is advantageous based on the expected value of the privilege (for example, payout) that the player can obtain through a series of advantageous states controlled based on the big hit. It can be considered that the degree of the degree is divided.

Further, as another example of the classification of “high hit” and “low hit”, it may be classified based on a difference in opening/closing control of the special winning opening 2103 in the big hit game. Specifically, for example, it can be classified based on the number of rounds in the big hit game (whether 16R big hit or less than 16R big hit). Further, for example, the big winning opening 2103 in each round during the big hit can be classified into a big hit and a relatively short big hit. Further, for example, the classification can be made based on the difference in the number of rounds (substantial number of rounds) in which opening control is performed to easily enter the game medium during a big hit. When performing such classification for "high hits" and "low hits", the advantage level is classified based on the number of game balls that a player can obtain by a big hit (expected value for winning coins). Can be taken as

Then, the “high hit” and the “low hit” may be classified by combining the above-described classification criteria. To give an example, the standard for classifying “a certain probability big hit” and “the actual expected value of winnings due to the big hit exceeds a predetermined amount” as “high hit” is so-called It is also possible to exclude from the high hits big hits such as "latent hits" that are not expected to have substantial wins. That is, if the jackpot type shown in FIG. 173(C) is taken as an example, only "specific 2 4R probability variation big hit", "specific 4 8R probability variation big hit", and "specific 5 16R probability variation big hit" are "high hits". It is also possible to classify into "low hit" together with "non-specific 4R normal big hit" and "specific 1 4R latent probability big hit" or "specific 3 16R sudden positive big hit". In such a case, if it is possible to increase the expectation of a big hit to a "high hit" by showing a "specific effect" while recording the battle history, it is possible to get a substantial win in the sudden change big hit. Since it is possible to improve the expectation for the jackpot, which has the highest advantage, the player's expectation can be further enhanced.

Further, the classification based on the difference in the degree of advantage does not have to be two types of high and low, and three or more types may be performed. Further, “high hit” and “low hit” may be determined depending on the type of hit. By doing so, an effect can be expected in shortening the development period and shortening the development cost. Specifically, for example, in a certain model, the types A and B, which are low-profitability hits, are classified into “low hits”, and the type C, which is a high-profitness hit, are classified into “high hits”. .. Here, when developing another model, if the type A is changed to a highly advantageous type, the type A may be changed to the “high hit” category according to the change, so that it is easy. It can be changed. In other words, if "high hit" and "low hit" are decided according to the hit type, it is not necessary to change the settings for each hit included in each type, and it is expected that the development burden will be reduced. it can.

In addition, it is preferable that the “high hit” and “low hit” categories are set on the peripheral control board 4010 (other than the main control board 4100). In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the distribution of the effect pattern including the winning effect can be changed in different modes between "high hit" and "low hit". Since it is controlled by the board 4010 (particularly the peripheral control MPU 4140a), when the “high hit” and “low hit” classification settings are made on the same peripheral control board 4010, the processing load on the main control board 4100 side is reduced. In addition to this, the amount of communication between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4010 can be reduced, and further improvement in processing efficiency in the peripheral control board 4010 can be expected.

Note that, as described above, “high hit” and “low hit” are tentative names used for facilitating the explanation, and it is not necessary to use such a term in the internal design. Each of the above may be managed so that a division corresponding to “high hit” or “low hit” can be made. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, by consciously classifying the degree of advantage based on various criteria and performing the characteristic distribution setting of the winning effect, the characteristics different for each gaming machine It is possible to realize a change in the degree of expectation with respect to the appearance of a specific winning/descending effect, while reflecting the or specifications.

[7. Game method during control of time saving state]
In the game board 4 of the present example, when a game ball is hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500 (with a predetermined strength or more), the fourth unit 2140 in the attacker unit 2100 passes through the outer periphery on the right side of the center accessory 2500. To the guide passage member 2142 of the guide passage member 2142, is guided by the guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2142 to be discharged from directly above the gate portion 2105, and with a very high probability, the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105. There is. That is, it is possible to easily enter the game ball into the gate portion 2105 by performing so-called right hitting.

Further, in this example, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105 and is detected by the gate sensor 2126, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is executed because the lottery process of the ordinary symbol is executed in an extremely short time. If is "universal figure", the movable piece 2106 is retracted so that the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2102, and the game ball entering the gate portion 2105 wins in the second starting port 2102. It has become. In addition, when the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is “out of place”, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2105 is discharged to the upper side of the special winning opening 2103. Therefore, by performing a right-handed hit, it is possible to play a game in which the second starting opening 2102 and the special winning opening 2103 are directly aimed.

On the other hand, when the game ball is driven to the left side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called left-handed driving), the game ball is guided toward the front side unit 2200 and the attacker unit 2100 by a plurality of implanted nails, It is possible to win a game ball to the general winning opening 2201 of the front side unit 2200, the first starting opening 2101, the general winning opening 2104, etc. of the attacker unit 2100. Further, when the game ball enters the warp entrance 2504 guided to the warp entrance 2504 connected to the stage 2510 of the center character 2500, the game ball is supplied to the stage 2510 of the center character 2500. The game ball supplied to 2510 rolls on the stage 2510 in the left-right direction and can entertain a movement different from the movement by the obstacle nail, and the game ball enters the game area 1100 from the chance exit 2514 of the stage 2510. When released, it is possible to win the first start opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 with a high probability.

Further, in this example, in the control of the time saving state, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to 251/251, and the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is always a win, and the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbol is set. Is shortened to an extremely short predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). Then, when the result of the lottery for the ordinary symbol is a win, the second starting port 2102 is controlled in an open/close pattern in which it is closed as an open state for an extremely long predetermined time (for example, 5.5 seconds). .. That is, during the control of the time saving state, the probability of winning the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is extremely high, the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbol is constant and short, and the second starting port 21 is in the open state. It is much easier to win a game ball into the second starting opening 2102 due to the long time, and it is more efficient to aim the second starting opening 2102 more than the first starting opening 2101. Can be awarded. In the control of the non-time saving state, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to 0/251, and the result of the ordinary symbol is not always hit, and the second starting opening 2102 is aimed at. Even a game ball cannot be won in the second starting opening 2102.

As described above, during control of the non-time saving state, even if aiming at the second starting opening 2102, the game ball cannot be won in the second starting opening 2102. In order for the game ball to win, the game ball must be shot (so-called “left hit”) aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500. In the game area 1100 on the left side of the center role object 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1200 in a predetermined gauge array at appropriate positions, and the game balls hit the obstacle nails. By touching, various movements are given to the game ball and it flows down. Therefore, even if a player hits the game ball on the left side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the first starting opening 2101, it does not always win the first starting opening 2101, and wins the first starting opening 2101. The unplayed game ball is discharged to the outside through an out port 1151 provided at the lower end of the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction.

On the other hand, during the control of the time saving state, it is possible to efficiently win the game ball by aiming at the second starting port 2102 rather than the first starting port 2101. In order to win the prize, a game ball must be shot (so-called "right hit") aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500. Further, due to the structure of the game board 4, when the second starting port 2102 is opened, if a game ball is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 while aiming at the second starting port 2102, it will pass through the gate portion 2301. The game balls that have been played are designed to win the second starting opening 2102 with an extremely high probability. Therefore, during the control of the time saving state, the game ball hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500 is hardly wasted (is discharged to the outside from the out port 1151), and the control of the non-time saving state is performed. Compared with the first starting port 2101 in, the game ball comes into the second starting port 2102 with extremely high efficiency.

Further, during the control of the time saving state, in addition to the structure of the game board 4, the probability of winning the lottery result of the ordinary symbol when passing through the gate part 2301 is extremely high, and the variable display of the ordinary symbol is displayed. The time required for control is constant and short, and the opening time of the second starting opening 21 is long, so that a game ball can easily enter the second starting opening 2102, and further, the game can be played into the second starting opening 2102. When the ball wins, the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol is set to about 1 second, which is extremely short compared with the range of 10 to 120 seconds during the control in the non-time saving state, so the special time is shortened. The variable display control of the symbol (suspending the variable display control of the special symbol) can be digested. That is, when controlling to the time saving state after finishing the big hit game state, by hitting a game ball to the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second starting port 2102, the big hit is again made in a short time. You can expect to win a lot of game balls by controlling to the big hit game state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out by winning the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 is one, so that the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 is Even if prizes occur frequently, it is possible to increase the interest of the player and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

[8. Continuous destruction using induction decoration members (object detection sensor)]
In the present embodiment, a composite effect using the image effect by the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 (object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212) in the table unit 2000. As a result, the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 detect the operation of the player with respect to the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213, so that the enemy character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be defeated continuously. Running. In this continuous destruction effect, which will be described later in detail, as the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, 3 corresponding to each of the three guide decorative members 2117, 2144, and 2213. A human enemy character appears, and an instruction is given in which order the three enemy characters should be defeated (in which order the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 should be operated). In addition, after the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 are operated in the instructed order (the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 are detected in the instructed order), the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400. The player is instructed to operate once. Then, when the enemy character is defeated by operating the pressing operation unit 405, the pseudo continuous variation is continued (in the variation display of the decorative pattern, all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the outlier pattern that does not reach the reach mode). After that, control to start the variable display of the decorative pattern again is performed, and when the enemy character remains, the reach mode is formed without continuing the pseudo continuous change and the reach effect is developed. doing.

As shown in FIG. 110, the middle object detection sensor 2116 and the middle induction decoration member 2117 are both provided in the first unit 2110 of the attacker unit 2100 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the middle induction decoration member 2117 is in the middle. It is arranged so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the object detection sensor 2116. In addition, the medium object detection sensor 2116 is an optical sensor including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit, and the player can see the inside of the game area 1100 through a transparent glass unit 590 that allows the player to see the game area 1100. It is possible to detect whether or not the hand touches the middle guiding decorative member 2117.

In addition, the middle guiding decorative member 2117 is arranged below the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the first starting port 2101 and is also visible to the player at the lower peripheral edge of the game area 1100 (out port 1115). It is arranged in a position close to the inner circumference of the game area 1100). Further, the middle guiding decorative member 2117 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area 1100 in the lateral direction, and is arranged below the right guiding decorative member 2144 and the left guiding decorative member 2213, and the player is seated. In order to touch the right guide decoration member 2144 with the left hand while rotating the handle device 500 with the right hand in the state, it is not necessary to lift the arm more than the right guide decoration member 2144 and the left guide decoration member 2213, and the three guide decoration members 2117 are used. , 2144 and 2213 are easy to operate. It should be noted that the middle guide decoration member 2117 faces the front side and faces downward in a circle in correspondence with being arranged on the lower side relative to the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 when viewed from the player. It is decorated with the arrow.

Further, as shown in FIG. 110, the right object detection sensor 2143 and the right guide decoration member 2144 are both provided in the fourth unit 2140 of the attacker unit 2100 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the right guide decoration member 2144. Is arranged adjacent to the right side of the right object detection sensor 2143. Further, the right object detection sensor 2143 is an optical sensor including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit, and the player can see the inside of the game area 1100 through a transparent glass unit 590 that allows the player to see the game area 1100. It is possible to detect whether or not the hand touches the right guide decoration member 2144.

Further, the right guide decoration member 2144 is arranged on the lower right side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and on the right slightly lower peripheral edge of the game area 1100 that can be visually recognized by the player (inner circumference of the game area 1100). It is located in close proximity to). Further, the right guide decoration member 2144 is arranged on the right side in the lateral direction of the game area 1100, and while the player is seated, the right guide decoration member 2144 is touched with the left hand while rotating the handle device 500 with the right hand. Since it is farther from the left hand than the middle guiding decorative member 2117 and the left guiding decorative member 2213, it is difficult to operate among the three guiding decorative members 2117, 2144, and 2213. In addition, the right guide decoration member 2144 is arranged on the front side in a circular shape to the right in correspondence with being arranged on the relatively right side of the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 when viewed from the player. Decorated with arrows.

Further, as shown in FIG. 110, the left object detection sensor 2212 and the left guide decoration member 2213 are both provided on the front side unit 2200 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the left guide decoration member 2213 detects the left object. It is arranged adjacent to the left side of the sensor 2212. The left object detection sensor 2212 is an optical sensor including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit, and the player can see the inside of the game area 1100 through a transparent glass unit 590 that allows the player to see the game area 1100. It is possible to detect whether or not the hand touches the left guiding decorative member 2213.

Further, the left guide decoration member 2213 is arranged on the lower left side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and is slightly below the left peripheral edge of the game area 1100 (in the inner periphery of the game area 1100) visible to the player. Are located in close proximity). Further, the left guide decoration member 2213 is arranged on the left side in the lateral direction of the game area 1100, and is arranged at the same height as the right guide decoration member 2144, but the handle device 500 is held in a state where the player is seated. In order to touch the left guide decoration member 2213 with the left hand while rotating with the right hand, since the distance from the left hand is shorter than the right guide decoration member 2144, the operation cannot be performed among the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213. It's getting easier. Since the left guide decoration member 2213 is arranged on the left side relative to the player among the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213, the left guide decoration member 2213 has a leftward arrow in a circle on the front surface. The decoration is arranged.

In this example, the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 (three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212) are all arranged below the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the object detection sensor is arranged around the liquid crystal display device (for example, in the center accessory) as in the conventional art, when the player operates the object detection sensor so that the object detection sensor detects, the player's own hand is It is located in front of the liquid crystal display device, which hinders visual confirmation of the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device, and the effect contents may not be fully understood. However, the three induction decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 are all arranged below the liquid crystal display device 1900, so that the player can detect any of the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212. Even if the user operates, his or her hand is not located on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the visual effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is not hindered from being visually recognized. Also, even if the player operates so that any of the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 detects, it is not necessary to lift the arm to a height of 1900 or more of the liquid crystal display device, and three guiding decoration members 2117, It is easy to operate each of 2144 and 2213.

Further, a transparent glass unit 590 is provided on the front surface of the game area 1100 that can be visually recognized by the player, and the player can detect any of the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212. When touching, the surface of the glass unit 590 may be touched and the surface may be soiled. At this time, if the surface of the glass unit 590 on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is soiled, it will be difficult to visually recognize the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Even if the player operates so as to detect one of them, it only stains the surface of the glass unit 590 in front of the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213, and visually confirms the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Does not cause any problems.

In addition, in this example, all of the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 (three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212) are peripheral portions of the game area 1100 (game area) that can be visually recognized by the player. It is arranged at a position close to the inner circumference of 1100). That is, the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 (three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212) can roll the game ball in the game area 1100 that can be visually recognized by the player. Even if the player operates so as to be detected by any of the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212, his/her own hand is on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Not only is not located, but also in the rolling area, in particular the front area of the area around whether the game ball wins the first starting port 2101, the game ball wins the first starting port 2101 It does not prevent you from seeing whether or not. Further, if the surface of the glass unit 590 on the front surface of the rolling area is soiled, it may be difficult to visually recognize whether or not the game ball is won in the first starting opening 2101, but the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and Even if the player operates so that any of 2212 detects, it only stains the surface of the glass unit 590 on the front surface of the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213, and the game ball wins the first starting opening 2101. There is no problem in visually recognizing whether or not.

In addition, in this example, the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 are arranged so as to be adjacent to the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212, respectively, and an effect using the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 is executed. At this time, the player does not touch the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212, but guides the guidance decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 to touch (for example, the guidance decoration members 2117, 2144, 2214). The effect of performing light emission decoration only on the designated guide decoration member out of 2213 is executed. Therefore, even if the player operates so that any of the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 detects, it only stains the surface of the glass unit 590 in front of the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213. The surface of the glass unit 590 on the front surface of the detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 is not polluted. That is, if the surface of the glass unit 590 in front of the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 is soiled, it becomes difficult to detect the hand of the player touching the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213, but the object detection sensor 2116. , 2143, 2212, the surface of the glass unit 590 on the front surface of the player can be reliably detected without touching the decorative decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213.

In addition, in the present example, during the control in the non-time saving state, a game is performed in which a game ball is hit on the left side of the center accessory 2500 while aiming at the first starting opening 2101. However, it can be visually recognized by the player. In the game area 1100, on the side of the rolling area where the game ball can roll from the left side of the center accessory 2500, the three guiding decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 (three object detection sensors 2116, 2116). 2143 and 2212), the middle guiding decorative member 2117 and the left guiding decorative member 2213 (the middle object detecting sensor 2116 and the left object detecting sensor 2212) are arranged. On the other hand, during the control of the time saving state, a game in which a game ball is hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500 while aiming at the second starting opening 2102 is performed, but in the game area 1100 that can be visually recognized by the player. Of the three guiding decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213 (three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212) on the side of the rolling area where the game ball can roll from the right side of the center accessory 2500. Among them, the right guide decoration member 2144 (right object detection sensor 2143) is arranged. In this way, as the rolling area, only one of the left and right sides of the center accessory 2500 is used depending on the gaming state, and the gaming area 1100 may give a narrow impression, but there are three guiding decorative members. When the production using 2117, 2144, 2213 (object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212) is executed, the left and right sides of the center accessory 2500, that is, the entire game area 1100 is used, and a spacious game is played. It can give the impression that it is being done.

In addition, in this example, the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 are all arranged at the peripheral edge of the game area 1100 (a position close to the inner circumference of the game area 1100) that can be visually recognized by the player. During the period in which the effect using the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 (object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212) is not executed, it plays a role as a decoration part of the game area 1100 (for example, light emission decoration). .. In this way, since the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 also serve as the decoration portion of the game area 1100, the area for arranging the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 is called the decoration portion. It is not necessary to provide separately, and while the area of the game area 1100 is limited, it is possible to sufficiently secure the rolling area in which the game ball can roll.

In this example, all of the three guiding decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 (three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212) are below the liquid crystal display device 1900 and at the periphery of the game area 1100 (game). It is arranged at a position close to the inner circumference of the area 1100), but is displayed on at least the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the player operates so that any of the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 detects it. It may be any position as long as it does not hinder the visual confirmation of the rendered effect image. In addition to the liquid crystal display device 1900, a starting opening for determining whether or not a game ball wins (a region around the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 and other information related to performance (for the player, An area for displaying information that can be useful information) (for example, front right inside rendering unit 2600, front right outside rendering unit 2700, back side rendering unit 3300, back bottom rendering unit 3500, etc.) Provided at the peripheral portion of the game area. Also, even for a simple decoration area (not including a lamp), when the player operates so that any one of the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 detects, the player visually recognizes it. It is desirable that the position does not interfere with.

Next, a specific example of the continuous destruction effect using the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 (object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212) will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 and 204. In this effect example, in the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82) or the second fluctuation pattern setting process that is processed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, “pseudo continuous fluctuation” is performed before the reach effect is executed. (A variation pattern that does not become a reach mode and is set to execute a temporary stop display a predetermined number of times (for example, 1 to 3 times)) is determined (a variation pattern that does not execute pseudo continuous variation may be used. ) Then, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 4100, in the effect control process (step S602) processed by the peripheral control MPU 4101a of the peripheral control board 4010, it is determined that the continuous destruction effect is executed. Show.

As shown in FIG. 203(A), in the continuous destruction effect executed after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, an instruction of “touch the sensor to attack the enemy!” is displayed above the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition to being displayed, three enemy characters are displayed side by side in the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, one of the numbers 1 to 3 is assigned to the front of each of the three enemy characters, and an instruction is given in which order the three enemy characters should be defeated (in this example, The order of the enemy character → the left enemy character → the right enemy character is instructed). In this example, the enemy character having the earlier order among the three enemy characters is displayed so as to be larger, and it is easy to recognize in which order the three enemy characters should be defeated. ing.

Further, in the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, member displays 1900a to 1900c that imitate each of the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 are provided, and in the order from the left, the arrow pointing left corresponds to the left guide decoration member 2213. , A left member display 1900a, a middle member display 1900b with a downward arrow corresponding to the middle guiding decorative member 2117, and a right member display 1900c with a right arrow drawing corresponding to the right guiding decorative member 2144. Is displayed. These member displays 1900a to 1900c are displayed below each of the three enemy characters, and in order to defeat the three enemy characters in the specified order, the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 are displayed. It is instructed which one should be operated. That is, in this example, it is instructed to defeat the enemy characters in the order of the middle enemy character→the left enemy character→the right enemy character, and correspondingly, the middle guiding decorative member 2117→the left guiding decorative member. The player can recognize that he or she may touch in the order of 2213→right guide decorative member 2144. However, in this example, the player is requested to touch in the order of the middle guiding decorative member 2117→the left guiding decorative member 2213→the right guiding decorative member 2144, but the three guiding decorative members 2117, 2144, 2213 are touched. The player may request the touch in any order. In this way, each time the continuous destruction effect is executed, by changing the order instructed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, that is, the order of the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 to be touched by the player, the game area 1100. The locus drawn by the player's hand changes above, and the continuous defeating effect using the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 can be made an effect that does not get tired.

Further, on the screen slightly below the liquid crystal display device 1900, the remaining time of the valid time allowed to be detected by the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 is displayed. In this example, the effective time is started, and first, only the detection by the medium object detection sensor 2116 of the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 is permitted, and only the middle member display 1900b displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is predetermined. The player is instructed to touch the middle guide decoration member 2117 by lighting the middle guide decoration member 2117 corresponding to the middle member display 1900b in the same color. In this example, the effective time is set to 5 seconds, and it is required to touch the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 that are separated from each other in a short time. In this way, the remaining time of the effective time is clearly shown on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, so that the player's touch on the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213 must be completed. Can be surely recognized.

As shown in FIG. 203(B), when the player touches the middle guiding decorative member 2117 and the middle object detection sensor 2116 detects it, the number 1 assigned to the enemy character inside is erased. By displaying the character "HIT!" by attacking the enemy character inside, it is possible to surely recognize that the player's hand is detected by the medium object detection sensor 2116. Then, of the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212, only the detection by the left object detection sensor 2212 is permitted, and only the left member display 1900a displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is illuminated in a predetermined color and the left member display 1900a. The player is instructed to touch the left guide decoration member 2213 by lighting only the left guide decoration member 2213 corresponding to the same color.

As shown in FIG. 203(C), when the player touches the left guiding decorative member 2213 and the left object detection sensor 2212 detects it, the number 2 assigned to the left enemy character is erased. , By displaying the character "HIT!" by attacking the left enemy character, it is possible to reliably recognize that the player's hand has been detected by the left object detection sensor 2212. Then, of the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212, only the detection by the right object detection sensor 2143 is permitted, and only the right member display 1900c displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on in a predetermined color, and the right member display 1900c is displayed. The player is instructed to touch the right guide decoration member 2144 by lighting only the right guide decoration member 2144 corresponding to the same color.

As shown in FIG. 203(D), when the player touches the right guide decoration member 2144 and the right object detection sensor 2143 detects it, the number 3 assigned to the right enemy character is erased. , By displaying the character "HIT!" by attacking the right enemy character, it is possible to reliably recognize that the player's hand has been detected by the right object detection sensor 2143. After attacking all three enemy characters, the effective time period during which detection by the pressure detection sensor 432c is permitted is started, and the detection permission by the pressure detection sensor 432c is started. Further, as shown in FIG. 204E, the characters “Blow off!” are displayed in the approximate center of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and an image imitating the pressing operation unit 405 is displayed. The player has instructed to operate the operation unit 405.

As shown in FIG. 204(F), within the effective period of the pressure detection sensor 432c, after the player operates the pressure operation unit 405 to detect the pressure detection sensor 432c, an explosion occurs in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. If it occurs and the three enemy characters can be defeated, it is determined that the continuous defeat production has succeeded. Then, as shown in FIG. 204(G), the variable display of the decorative symbols is changed in the order of the left decorative symbol→the right decorative symbol→the middle decorative symbol, in which the combination of the decorative symbols that continues the pseudo continuous fluctuation (in this example, “ By displaying the temporary stop so that it becomes a temporary stop symbol of "7. pseudo continuous .8"), the pseudo continuous variation is continued. That is, when the three enemy characters can be defeated, it is possible to recognize that the continuous destruction effect is successful and the pseudo continuous fluctuation is continued. In this example, as the combination of the decorative patterns that continue the pseudo continuous variation, the left and right decorative patterns are outlying patterns that do not become the reach mode, and the pattern in which the middle decorative pattern is drawn as "pseudo-ream" is used. When the pseudo continuous variation is continued, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started again, and the continuous destruction effect as shown in FIGS. 203 and 204 is executed again.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 204(H), within the effective period of the pressure detection sensor 432c, after the player operates the pressure operation section 405 to detect the pressure detection sensor 432c, within the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the explosion does not occur and the three enemy characters cannot be defeated, it is determined that the continuous defeat production has failed. Then, as shown in FIG. 204(I), the variable display of the decorative design is stopped in the order of the left decorative design and the right decorative design to form a reach mode (in this example, the reach design of “7”). By displaying, the reach effect is executed thereafter. That is, when the three enemy characters cannot be defeated, it is possible to recognize that the continuous destruction effect fails and the pseudo continuous fluctuation is not continued unlike the success of the continuous destruction effect.

In this example, the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 are adjacent to the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other on the front surface of the game area 1100 which is visible to the player. When the continuous destruction effect is executed, the player can sequentially touch the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 as instructed by the liquid crystal display device 1900, so that the separated positions can be set by the player. The hand of the player has to move, and a dynamic motion can be performed in the area of the game area 1100. Further, by using the game area 1100 as an area for the player to operate, not only the game ball rolls or an image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, but a wide area of the game area 1100 is effective. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of unity with the game.

Further, in this example, three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 are provided at three positions separated from each other on the front surface of the game area 1100 that can be visually recognized by the player, and the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 are respectively provided. Is provided adjacent to. For example, the positions detected by the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 cannot be clearly recognized only by providing the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 in the game area 1100. By providing the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213, it is possible to clearly recognize where the player touches to detect the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212. Therefore, while the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 are provided at positions separated from each other on the front surface of the game area 1100, the player does not hesitate about where to touch, and the continuous destruction effect is executed. At this time, the player can quickly make a touch so that the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, and 2212 sequentially detect. Therefore, in the continuous destruction effect, the remaining time of the effective time allowed to be detected by the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 is clearly shown, but the effective time is set to be short (in this example, 5 seconds). ), the player can complete the touch on the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 within the effective time without panicking.

In addition, in the present example, not only is the player instructed which of the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 the touch panel 2900 should touch within the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, but also the specified guide decoration member 2117. , 2144, 221 are turned on, the player can quickly touch the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 221 to be touched without hesitation.

Further, in the present example, optical sensors are used as the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212, and the player can see the inside of the game area 1100 through the transparent glass unit 590, which allows the player to see the game area 1100. Detects whether or not the hand touches the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213. As for the detection range of these object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212, it is possible to detect not only the front area of the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 221 but also the area around the front area. , The player does not necessarily have to touch the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 221 through the transparent glass unit 590, and passes through a region including the front region of the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 221 (the glass unit 590 and the game). It is possible to detect even if the user's hand is slightly apart from the hand. That is, it is possible to detect the player's hand in a wider area than the area of the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 while clearly allowing the player to recognize the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213. .. Therefore, when the player quickly operates the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213, the object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 can detect even if the player operates the guide decoration members 2114, 2143, 2212 ambiguously. Therefore, in the continuous destruction effect, the remaining time of the effective time allowed to be detected by the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 is clearly shown, but the effective time is set to be short (in this example, 5 seconds). ), the player can complete the touch on the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 within the effective time without panicking.

In addition, when an operation unit such as a pressing operation unit 405 that can be directly operated by the player is provided on the game area 1100, the vibration when the player operates (presses) the game. It is transmitted to the area 1100 and may affect the rolling of the game ball on the game area 1100. There is no need for manual operation, and such problems do not occur.

Further, in this example, the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 221 are provided on the game area 1100 that is parallel to the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, whereas the pressing operation unit 405 is the game window. Of the plate unit 300 having the upper plate 301 that projects forward and stores the game balls on the lower side of 101, it is provided at the center of the upper part that is perpendicular to the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In other words, the object on the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 221 to be touched by the player is parallel to the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, whereas the player on the press operation unit 405 should operate it. The target is a plane perpendicular to the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. For example, when a plurality of pressing operation parts are provided on the dish unit 300, the player who is visually recognizing the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces downward in order to recognize the pressing operation part to be operated by the player. It is necessary to do so, and there is a risk of missing the effect contents displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. On the other hand, when the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 221 are provided on the game area 1100, the player who is visually recognizing the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 does not look down, and the player touches it. It is possible to recognize the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 221 to be performed, and never miss the effect contents displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It should be noted that the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 221 are provided closer to the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 than the pressing operation unit 405, so that the player can be more effectively rendered (displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900). You can make you feel like you are participating in the production contents).

Further, in this example, the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 221 are provided on the game area 1100, that is, in an area which can be seen by the player while visually recognizing the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. On the other hand, the pressing operation portion 405 is provided on the dish unit 300, that is, in an area where it is difficult to bring the player into the visual field while visually checking the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. As described above, the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 221 are not only on the game area 1100 but also on the game area 1100 as an area that can be brought into the player's view while visually recognizing the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is provided in an area on the game board 4 which is visible from the player side through the game window 101 formed in the door frame 5 (area other than the game area 1100 in the game board 4, etc.), or lower than the lower end of the game area 1100. If it is on the upper side, it may be provided on the side of the door frame base body 110 which is the periphery of the game area 1100.

Further, in this example, the player does not touch all of the three guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 within the effective time period in which the detection by the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 is permitted, When all of the three object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 do not detect, or the player does not touch the last designated induction decoration member of the three induction decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213, 3 When only one or two object detection sensors out of the two object detection sensors 2116, 2143, 2212 are detected, all three enemy characters are not attacked. In such a case, after the expiration of the effective time (5 seconds in this example), the player is instructed to operate the pressing operation unit 405 as shown in FIG. The same effect as after attacking all of the characters is executed.

In addition, in the present example, if the player does not operate the pressing operation unit 405 within the effective time period when the pressing detection sensor 432c is allowed to detect the operation, and the pressing detection sensor 432c does not detect the pressing operation unit 405, the pressing operation is performed. After the expiration of the detection sensor 432c within the effective period, whether or not three enemy characters can be defeated based on the fact that an explosion occurs on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, that is, whether or not the continuous defeat effect has succeeded Can be judged. In such a case, it is not possible to recognize whether or not to continue the pseudo continuous fluctuation until after the end of the validity period of the press detection sensor 432c, and the player operates the press operation unit 405 (continuous defeat effect). Will participate).

Further, the "quasi-continuous variation" in this example is similar to the "normal variation" (variation in which a stop pattern is displayed as an outlier pattern without a reach mode), and all the decorative patterns are reach mode in the variable display of the decorative pattern. It does not become a deviating pattern (However, in this example, the pattern in which the middle decoration pattern is drawn as "pseudo-ream") is a temporary stop display (for example, a state in which it does not completely stop by swaying up and down: shaking fluctuation display ) After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started again, and the temporary stop display is performed with the deviating pattern which does not become the reach mode continuously (repeatedly) a predetermined number of times (the number of times set in the variation pattern). In addition, as long as a temporary stop display is performed with a falling pattern that does not reach the reach pattern in the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started again, while when the reach mode is formed, the reach effect ( The reach effect set in the variation pattern is executed. Further, in this example, the "pseudo continuous fluctuation" is executed before the reach effect is executed, but in the "pseudo continuous fluctuation", the outlying pattern that does not become the reach mode is counted one to three times. Only the temporary stop can be displayed.

Further, in this example, in the variation pattern table referred to in the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) or the second variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern for executing the "quasi-continuous variation" is not the reach mode. A variation pattern for temporarily displaying the symbol only one to three times is set. Then, in the variation pattern table, when the "quasi-continuous variation" is executed, the larger the number of times the outlying symbols that are not in the reach mode are temporarily stopped and displayed, the higher the jackpot expectation degree (the jackpot expectation degree = the appearance rate at the time of a big hit/total appearance The determination values are assigned to the variation patterns so that the rate becomes higher. That is, when the determination result is a big hit, when the "quasi continuous variation" is executed, the number of times the temporary stop display of the outlier symbol that does not become the reach mode is performed at a higher rate than in the outlier period. For this reason, when the "quasi-continuous variation" is executed, the larger the number of times the outlying symbols that are not reach patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed, the higher the percentage of the determination result is a big hit, and the expectation for the big hit game state. Is increasing.

Further, in the present example, when the variation pattern of “quasi continuous variation” is determined in the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) or the second variation pattern setting process which is processed by the main control MPU 4100a of the control board 4100, The main control board 4100 transmits a change pattern command capable of specifying the change pattern to the peripheral control board 4010. Then, in the production control process (step S602) processed by the peripheral control MPU 4101a of the peripheral control board 4010, when the variation pattern of "pseudo continuous variation" is specified from the variation pattern command, continuous defeat production is performed based on the variation pattern. If you decide whether or not to execute, and if you decide to execute continuous destruction effect, continuous destruction effect succeeds according to the number of temporary stop display of deviating symbols that do not reach in "pseudo continuous variation" Determine how many times to do. For example, in the case of temporarily displaying the outlier symbol which does not reach the reach mode in the "pseudo continuous variation" only three times, the continuous destruction effect is succeeded only three times, like the number of times. In addition, when the "quasi-continuous variation" is executed, the larger the number of times the stop symbol that does not reach the reach mode is temporarily displayed, that is, the larger the number of times the continuous destruction effect is successful, the larger the determination result becomes. The percentage is high. Therefore, in the continuous destruction effect, the player wants the effect to succeed and the "quasi-continuous variation" to continue, and the player touches the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 or operates the pressing operation unit 405 by the player. I will come to participate in the continuous defeat production.

Further, in this example, not only when the variation pattern that executes the "quasi-continuous variation" is determined, but also when the variation pattern that does not execute the "quasi-continuous variation" is determined, the continuous destruction effect is based on the variation pattern. May be determined. At this time, even if it is decided to execute the continuous defeat production, it does not become a reach mode like "pseudo continuous variation", and does not temporarily display the deviating pattern, so that the first continuous defeat production fails. It has become.

Further, in this example, when the "pseudo continuous variation" is executed, the outlier symbol (in this example, the temporary stop symbol of "7, pseudo continuous, 8") that does not reach the reach mode is temporarily displayed, but Regardless of the number of times the outlying symbols that do not reach the reach mode in the "continuous change" are temporarily stopped and displayed, the same temporarily stopped symbol is repeatedly and temporarily stopped and displayed. In addition, the left decorative design which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the "pseudo continuous variation" is a design of the reach mode (in this example, the reach pattern of "7") formed after the execution of the "pseudo continuous variation" as it is. It is controlled to become. That is, in the effect control process (step S602) processed by the peripheral control MPU 4101a of the peripheral control board 4010, first, after determining the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the determination result notification command transmitted from the main control substrate 4100, When the variation pattern of the "quasi-continuous variation" is specified from the variation pattern command, the left decorative design that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the "quasi-continuous variation" is the first stop pattern of the determined decorative design. It is decided to be the same as the displayed left decorative design, and the right decorative design that is displayed as a temporary stop next to the left decorative design in the "pseudo continuous variation" is different from the temporary stop design of the left decorative design. The design (in this example, the design of the left decorative pattern +1) is determined to be the middle decorative design that is temporarily stopped and displayed at the end in the “pseudo continuous variation” becomes the design drawn as “pseudo-relation”. To make decisions.

Further, in this example, when the variation pattern for executing the “quasi-continuous variation” is determined, the player sequentially touches the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213, and then the player operates the pressing operation unit 405. Although the continuous destruction effect is instructed to, the continuous destruction effect using only one of them may be executed, and the guidance decoration members 2117, 2144, 2213 are played as directed in the continuous destruction effect. When the player sequentially touches or when the player operates the pressing operation unit 405, it is determined whether or not the continuous destruction effect is successful, and it is possible to recognize whether or not to continue the pseudo continuous variation. Good.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the continuous destruction effect, an effect using the pressing operation unit 405 is executed, and the pressing operation unit 405 is used at a higher rate than the effect using the guide decoration members 2117, 2144, and 2213. I am trying to perform the performance. For example, in the "normal fluctuation" (the period from the start of variable display of the decorative pattern until the stop display of the decorative pattern for forming the reach pattern) before the reach effect is executed, the liquid crystal display device A “box” is displayed on the screen 1900, and the player is instructed to operate the pressing operation unit 405. At this time, the valid time during which the detection by the pressure detection sensor 432c is permitted is started, and the permission for the detection by the pressure detection sensor 432c is started. When the player operates the pressing operation unit 405 and the pressing detection sensor 432c detects the pressing operation sensor 432c within the valid period of the pressing detection sensor 432c, the character A is displayed from the “box” displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. An effect in which any one of C to C appears is executed. In such an effect, the character to be made to appear is determined so that the big hit expectation rate (big hit expectation rate=appearance rate at the time of big hit/total appearance rate) becomes higher in the order of character A→character B→character C. Therefore, for example, when the character C appears, the determination result is a big hit rate, and the expectation for the big hit game state is increased.

[9. Effect of this embodiment]
As mainly described in [6-1] to [6-3], in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the effect pattern including the specific winning effect (specific effect) appears in an outlying manner. , The result of this game is memorized (record of battle history), and thereafter, game production is performed while teaching the record of the battle history, and at the same time, a production pattern including the winning production is selected from a plurality of production patterns. By varying, it is possible to make it easier to select the effect pattern including the particular winning/winning effect when a big hit is won in the subsequent games. Therefore, even if the specific winning effect does not result in a big hit, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is increased when the specific winning effect is next revealed in the subsequent games, so that It is possible to suppress a decrease in willingness to play.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described in [6-1-1] to [6-1-3], in the state in which the record of the battle history relating to the specific winning effect is recorded, When the effect is displayed, of the advantageous games having different degrees of advantage (low hit and high hit), the expectation for the advantageous game having a high advantage (that is, high hit) is increased. Specifically, the battle A reach is set as a specific winning effect, and the battle history is recorded and taught based on the appearance of the battle A reach in a falling state, and the allocation destination of the winning effect is changed (the battle history. (See, for example, the distribution table 1A in FIG. 186), the number of distributions of the battle A reach in the high hit pattern in the subsequent game increases, and therefore, the expectation for the high hit when the battle A reach appears. The degree (reliability) is increased.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the winning effect is displayed by using the sorting table 1A and the sorting table 1B of FIG. 186, so that the particular winning effect is generated after the transition of the battle history related to the particular winning effect. When "is displayed", it is possible to increase the player's expectation for an advantageous game (high hit) with a high degree of advantage. Then, (even if the specific winning effect is an effect in which the expectation for the big hit (or high hit) is not relatively high in the initial state), when the battle history is recorded and teaching is performed, When a winning effect is revealed, the degree of expectation for a high hit can be increased, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player with respect to the appearance of the particular winning effect.

In addition, when the player is instructed based on the record (the record of the battle history) of the deviation due to such a specific winning effect, when the specific winning effect is revealed again, the big hit (particularly high hit) is achieved. It becomes possible for the player to easily recognize that a winning effect with high expectation is being performed, and the player's interest can be more easily enhanced. Furthermore, since such a teaching suggests that there is a winning effect that is highly reliable when it is revealed, it is necessary to make the player desire the appearance of a particular winning effect to be stronger than usual. Can be expected, and new enjoyment in the game can be provided.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the expectation degree of a specific winning effect is changed according to the game situation by changing the distribution of winning effects of the hit pattern (especially the high hit pattern) as described above. Therefore, even if the reliability of the "specific winning effect" is relatively low at the time of initial setting and is a low-reliability reach effect, the expectation when the specific winning effect is reappeared is higher than before. It is also expected to be effective in increasing the player's expectations. In the first place, in the conventional gaming machine, since the low-reliability reach effect is a winning effect with a relatively high chance of occurring than the other term-reliability reach effects, by the low-reliability reach effect, Although there is a possibility that the player's willingness to play may be lowered, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment appears as a specific winning/descending effect despite the low-reliability reach effect. When it is played, it is not a low reliability but a winning effect with increased reliability, so it is possible not only to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play as described above, but also to expect a big hit (especially a high hit). It has a special effect of creating a feeling.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described mainly in [6-4-1], recording and teaching of the battle history based on the fact that the "specific effect" appears in the outlying manner. When a change pattern different from the predetermined change pattern that can bring out the “specific effect” is selected by performing the game change and the transition of the battle history regarding the distribution of the winning effect to be executed. Also, it is possible to bring out a "specific effect".

Explaining in a specific example, if the battle A reach is a "specific effect", the "predetermined variation pattern that can cause the "specific effect" to appear" is a variation time of 30 seconds that allows the battle A reach to appear. It is a special symbol variation pattern, "variation pattern different from the predetermined variation pattern" is, for example, a special symbol variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds. At this time, the battle history is recorded and taught based on the appearance of the battle A reach in the outlying manner, and the battle history of the selection destination is changed to “warfare history Q” or “warfare history R” in the sorting table 2A of FIG. 193. By changing (changing the battle history), the "alternative effect" regarding the battle A reach at the time of a big hit, that is, the distribution amount to the long battle B'reach and the long battle C'reach at the time of a big hit is increased. Then, after such a transition of the battle history is carried out, if the result of the big hit is obtained in the special lottery and the special symbol fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 60 seconds is selected, the allocation amount is increased to "the alternative effect". By increasing the proportion of the selected items and causing the "alternative effect" to appear, the effect of the battle A reach (that is, "specific effect") can be displayed during the effect.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the transition of the battle history related to a specific effect, at the time of a big hit when the special symbol fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 60 seconds is selected, the alternative effect is displayed using the distribution table 2A of FIG. 193. Since the particular effect is likely to be brought out, the player's expectation for the big hit is increased when the particular effect is presented while the memory of the battle history related to the particular effect is being performed. be able to. Such an effect can be applied even if the specific effect is a low reliability effect in which the expectation for a big hit is not relatively high in the initial setting, and thus such a low reliability effect appears. It is possible to solve the conventional problem that the player's interest may be lowered when the game is played.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the distribution table 2A of FIG. 193 is used, an alternative effect in a big hit pattern (low hit pattern and high hit pattern) is obtained in each battle history (war history Q, R) to be transferred. Although the distribution number is increased, the distribution number of the alternative effect in the shift pattern is also set to a degree smaller than the distribution number of the big hit pattern. By preparing the distribution in the shift pattern in this way, even if a specific effect (effect of the battle A reach) appears in the alternative effect, there is a possibility that it may not be connected to the big hit with a low probability. In this way, it can be expected that the player will not be bored until the final stop mode is determined. It should be noted that the allocation of the alternative effect in such a stray pattern is not always necessary, and by not intentionally performing the allocation, a specific effect appears in the alternative effect when the battle history is stored and taught. It may be a special winning effect in which the big hit is decided at the time of being hit.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described mainly in [6-4-2], recording and teaching of the battle history based on the fact that the "specific effect" appears in a deviant manner. When a change pattern different from the predetermined change pattern that can bring out the “specific effect” is selected by performing the game change and the transition of the battle history regarding the distribution of the winning effect to be executed. Also, it is possible to bring out a "specific effect".

Explaining in a specific example, if the battle A reach is a "specific effect", the "predetermined variation pattern that can cause the "specific effect" to appear" is a variation time of 30 seconds that allows the battle A reach to appear. It is a special symbol variation pattern, "variation pattern different from the predetermined variation pattern" is, for example, a special symbol variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds. At this time, the battle history is recorded and taught based on the appearance of the battle A reach in the outlying manner, and the battle history of the selection destination is set to “warfare history Q” or “warfare history R” in the distribution table 2B of FIG. 194. By changing (shifting the battle history), the "alternative effect" regarding the battle A reach at the time of high hit, that is, the distribution amount to the long battle B'reach and the long battle C'reach at the time of high hit is increased. Then, after such a transition of the battle history is performed, the result of the advantageous game (high hit) with a high degree of advantage is obtained in the special lottery, and when the special symbol variation pattern of the variation time of 60 seconds is selected, Since the proportion of the selected "alternative effect" with an increased amount increases, by displaying the "alternative effect", the effect of the battle A reach (that is, "specific effect") is displayed during the effect. Can be revealed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the transition of the battle history relating to a specific effect, at the time of a high hit when the special symbol fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 60 seconds is selected, the alternative effect is generated using the distribution table 2B of FIG. 194. Since it is easy to appear the particular effect, the big hit when the particular effect appears and the game shifts to the jackpot game while the memory of the battle history related to the particular effect is being performed. You can increase the expectation of being a high hit. That is, it is possible to make the player have an expectation for a high hit when a specific effect is displayed while the battle history is being remembered. Such an effect can be applied even if the specific effect is a low reliability effect in which the expectation for a big hit is not relatively high in the initial setting, and thus such a low reliability effect appears. It is possible to solve the conventional problem that the player's interest may be lowered when the game is played.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the distribution table 2B of FIG. 194 is used, in each battle history to be transitioned (battle history Q, R), it is low to a degree lower than the distribution number of the alternative effect in the high hit pattern. Although the distribution numbers of alternative effects in the hit pattern and the off pattern are set, the allocations of the alternative effect in the low hit pattern and the off pattern do not necessarily have to be set. For example, if the alternative effect is not distributed in the outlier pattern, it is decided that the jackpot will be a big hit when a specific effect appears in the alternative effect while the memory and teaching of the battle history are performed, Further, the big hit has a high probability of being a high hit, and a special effect can be realized. If the alternative effect is not distributed in the low hit pattern, there is no possibility of the low hit at the time when the specific effect appears in the alternative effect when the battle history is stored and taught. If you win, you can achieve a big hit. Furthermore, if the alternative effect is not distributed to both the out-of-range pattern and the low hit pattern, the high hit is generated when the specific effect is revealed in the alternative effect while the battle history is being stored and taught. It is possible to realize a special effect that determines.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the battle history is recorded in any of the distribution table 1A of FIG. 186, the distribution table 1B of FIG. 188, the distribution table 2A of FIG. 193, and the distribution table 2B of FIG. 194. The transition of the battle history is performed based on the, but after such transition of the battle history, the expectation for a big hit or a high hit when a specific performance (winning performance) appears is increased, The higher the transition, the higher the expectation. Therefore, for example, if the battle A reach is made a specific effect, the player has a disappointing feeling that the jackpot could not be won so much that the battle A reach appears in an outlying manner, while the battle history is recorded and the battle history is recorded. Since it can be expected that the transition stage of will advance, the expectation that Battle A reach will appear in subsequent games will be increased. Then, when the jackpot is obtained by the appearance of the battle A reach (or the appearance of the battle A reach by the alternative production), the player can feel a sense of accomplishment that can dispel the history of the past battle A reach. Furthermore, when the distribution tables 1A, 1B, and 2B are used, the expectation that such a big hit is a high hit is high, and thus a greater sense of achievement can be given to the player. it can.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the predetermined effect that can cause the specific effect to appear by the “alternative effect” that can be executed when the battle history regarding the specific effect is being recorded. Even if a variation pattern different from the variation pattern is selected, a specific effect based on the record of the battle history can be alternatively displayed, and such an “alternate effect” is recorded in the battle history record. It also has the feature that the expectation for big hits (or high hits) is increased each time the battle history changes. According to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment as described above, a specific effect (for example, Battle A effect) based on the record of the battle history is displayed for the original time (Battle A effect is 22 seconds. Battle A reach as a whole is 30 seconds). Even if a display time longer than () is selected (for example, 60 seconds), the specific effect can be displayed by the alternative effect. In general, the longer the display time, the more likely the player's expectation that the game result will be a big hit (or high hit) tends to increase, so that the display time longer than the original display time By making the effect appear, it is possible to expect an effect that makes the player feel the importance and high reliability of the game.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the special patterns described in [6-5-1] to [6-5-4] are selected according to each effect pattern (first to fourth effect patterns) of the alternative effect. It has various effects.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment described above as a game machine according to the present invention, the main control board 4100 (mainly the main control MPU 4100a), the game medium ejected toward the game area has passed the predetermined area. It is an example of a lottery means for drawing any one of the lottery results among a plurality of types of lottery results including at least advantageous games having different advantages and different degrees of advantage. The predetermined area corresponds to, for example, the first starting port 2101 or the second starting port 2102. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is an example of an effect display unit capable of displaying an effect based on the lottery result obtained by the lottery unit. The peripheral control board 4010 (mainly the peripheral control MPU 4140a and the peripheral control RAM 4140e) produces a specific effect when the lottery result of the advantageous game is not obtained despite the lottery performed by the lottery means. It is an example of an effect storage unit that can store that the specific effect has appeared based on the fact that it has appeared on the effect display unit. As a specific processing example, SP2 type battle A reach This is equivalent to the peripheral control MPU 4140a recording the battle history in the peripheral control RAM 4140e when the (specific effect) is executed in the outlying manner. The peripheral control board 4010 (mainly the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, and the VDP 4150c) and the liquid crystal display device 1900 are examples of an information teaching unit that teaches the information regarding the specific performance stored in the performance storage unit. The information regarding the specific effect corresponds to, for example, “image data or the like used for teaching battle history” stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b or the character ROM 4150d in the liquid crystal control unit 4150. A specific teaching example is the display in the teaching areas 1900a to 1900c shown in FIG.

Further, the peripheral control board 4010 (mainly the peripheral control MPU 4140a), when the effect storage means is being stored, the lottery result by the lottery means is an advantageous game with a high degree of advantage among the advantageous games. In this case, an example of a special effect control unit that can cause the special effect to appear in a mode including the specific effect even if a variation time that allows the special effect longer than the specific effect to appear is selected. It is a specific effect execution unit that causes the effect display unit to display the specific effect within the display period of the special effect, and between the specific effects that are displayed by the specific effect execution unit. It is an example of an interrupt effect execution means for causing the effect display means to present a related effect related to the specific effect. Here, the "special effect" corresponds to the alternative effect by the second effect pattern, and the specific effect that is displayed by the specific effect executing means is the battle A1 in FIGS. 200(A) and (B). ~ Corresponding to the battle A4, the related effect that is displayed by the interrupt effect executing means corresponds to the cut-in (or cut-in 1 to cut-in 3) in FIGS. 200(A) and 200(B). In addition, the peripheral control board 4010 (mainly the peripheral control MPU 4140a) allows the special effect control unit to cause the specific effect to appear, so that the specific effect control unit 4010a can display the specific effect when the effect effect storage unit stores the effect. It is an example of a higher reward expectation means that can increase the expectation that the transitioning advantageous game is the advantageous game having the high degree of advantage when the effect is displayed and the game shifts to the advantageous game. Specifically, when recording the battle history related to the Battle A effect, instead of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 30 seconds that can show the Battle A reach, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 60 seconds wins the high hit. In this case, since it is easy to select a special effect, that is, "alternative effect (long battle B'reach or long battle C'reach)", by the distribution according to the battle history Q or the battle history R of the sorting table 2B, When the battle A effect (specific effect) is displayed and the game shifts to the jackpot game while the battle history relating to the battle A effect is being recorded, it corresponds to a high expectation that the jackpot is a big hit. ..

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements are made as shown below without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this and is applied to a pachi-slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused. However, even in this case, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Gaming board 5 Door frame 1100 Gaming area 1150 Gaming panel 1900 Liquid crystal display 2000 Table unit 2500 Center accessory 2600 Table right middle rendering unit 2601 Support pin 2610 Table right middle movable ornament 2620A Fixed Decorative body 2623 Light-shielding member 2623a Partition 2625 Front cover (cover)
2626 Performance sheet (picture film, smoked sheet)
2626a Black part (picture film)
2626b Blue part (picture film)
2626c Red part (picture film)
2626d Uncolored part (smoked sheet)
2627 Diffusing lens sheet 2628 Holding member 2640 Table right middle decorative substrate (decorative substrate)
4000 main board 4010 peripheral control board 4100 main control board 4100a main control MPU
4140 peripheral control unit 4140a peripheral control MPU
4140b Peripheral control ROM
4140e Peripheral control RAM
4150 Liquid crystal control unit 4150a Liquid crystal control MPU
4150c VDP

Claims (1)

A winning/judging determination means for making a determination regarding a hit when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Production determination means for determining the production based on the determination by the winning determination means,
And an effect display means for displaying the effect,
A gaming machine in which one game is played by stopping the design after changing the design,
In the production,
A special effect that can be displayed on the effect display means over a plurality of the fluctuations;
There is a specific effect that raises expectations for the hit,
When the specific effect is displayed when the special effect is displayed over a plurality of the fluctuations, the hit against the hit is more than when the specific effect is displayed when the special effect is not displayed. Expectations have been raised,
The special effect includes a low special effect and a high special effect, and when the specific effect is displayed when the high special effect is displayed, the specification when the low special effect is displayed Expectation for the hit is higher than when the effect is displayed,
It is possible to change from the low special effect to the high special effect after the specific effect is displayed and the symbol aspect that does not hit the game is displayed.
The specific effect is displayed, and after the pattern mode that does not hit is displayed, it is possible to display a suggestive effect that suggests changing from the low special effect to the high special effect,
When neither of the low special effect and the high special effect are displayed, and the specific effect is displayed, and the low special effect after the non-winning symbol aspect is displayed or Enables display of the high special effect,
When the special effect is displayed, it is possible to display a supplementary effect using characters that supplement the fact that the special effect is being displayed across a plurality of the fluctuations ,
The special effect can be ended in the game for deriving the result of the hit.